MAGNETIC HEALING PRINCIPLES – COMPREHENSIVE GUIDE

Magnetism And Its Effects On The Living System ;

THE INCREASE OR REDUCTION OF THE NORMAL LIFE SPAN OF ANIMALS The life span of rodents and animals can be extended up to 50 percent. Mice and rats proved this possibility. In larger animals it has been more difficult to note this due to their normal life span reaching 18 to 25 years, as in the case of cats and dogs. However, the larger rats, as did the smaller mice, allow a good reference in themselves and in comparison to the normal life spans in other animals when they were treated with magnetic energies before active transplant of the sperm, after the transfer, and/ or during conception of the embryo. On applying the S pole fields prior to the first stages of development, on birth the animal carries the changes effected by the S pole exposure. If after birth of the rodent the applications of the S pole energies are made there is a lowering of the life span due to oversex results. It was concluded that if the animal's genetic mode is altered to one of a higher strength, the life span would be extended by the fact we have altered the genes and the resultant strength of the rodent. The main and most difficult matter to cope with is that due to the oversex resultant condition to extend life one must isolate the male animal or rodent for lengthy periods from the female or place restraints on the sex activities of the male. If not, then depletion of strength acts on the heart and organs and reduces the life span one may expect by many experimental results. The N pole rodents and animals also show an extension of life but by different approaches. The use of the N pole energies to extend life is quite different. During these N pole experiments it was discovered that the extension of the life span was the slowing down as opposed to the strengthening of the rodent's or animal's system. This presented a slowing of maturity, thus resulting in a longer life. This should open many new avenues of research as in each experiment the perception and intelligence of the rodents and animals were upgraded as a direct and positive result. The N pole exposures resulted in a weaker, smaller rodent or animal of slow development by extending its normal life span and upgrading all sensitivities, including intelligence, reflexes and environmental reaction, inferring the brain's ability to be more sensitive in recalling information and environment. The N pole animal or rodent was then more intelligent than the du 11-witted, overly strong, slow to learn, animal or rodent we have found is the result of the S pole exposure. The strength-giving results of the S pole energies and the resultant changed animal while being overly strong was in no way slow to move and respond to activity, yet there was a failure to have the quickness of mind that the controls presented or the increased mental activities of the N pole animals or rodents.

THE EFFECTS ON AND TO MICE AND RATS In the treatment of mice and rats we built suitable cages to allow treatment of the males prior to intercourse with the females. This was necessary so the sperm would carry the pole effects and the active transfer of the sperm could be timed, checked and recorded. Three groups of white lab mice were carefully selected. One group acted as controls and the other two groups were marked S and N treated mice respectively. The male mice were treated in a single cage, one to each cage, with the S pole energies. Here 2500 gauss was used for eight hours. The cage was designed to keep the subject in the S pole energy of the large 2~ x 6 inch bar or cylinder magnet. At the same time in separate cages, well away from the S pole treatment cages, the male mice were treated with the same type and strength magnet except with the N pole of the magnet described. We then placed the males and females together and normal intercourse took place. In a few weeks we again saw a shortening of the time the babies were developed and delivered by the S pole treated mice. Again, new and important findings were made. The births were easier and the babies were larger than the N pole treated mice. The controls were the same as normal delivery. The N pole treated mice babies were more difficult to deliver than the controls. The babies, as in the S pole treated mice, were larger and in some cases took longer to deliver. The S pole mothers were stronger, and less effort for delivery was noted. This was opposite to the N pole mothers, which seemed to be lower in strength, and the babies were smaller compared to the controls. Before the birth of the mice each cage was equipped with separate huts and with two openings. This allowed the mothers to protect their young and keep them warm and away from any source of danger. While this danger condition was not anticipated, the care and safety factor had to be noted and was made available to each mother. On birth, the S pole babies developed faster than the controls. The N pole babies took longer to develop, were weak, thin, and did not feed as much as the controls. The S pole babies were fed continually. They were stronger in every respect than the controls. The same experiments were conducted with white lab strain rats, which are similar to the white rabbit strains and come close to the blood system of man. The rats followed the exact behavior in development stages as the mice. It was noted that one important result of the mice and rat tests showed that the control mice kept only a fairly clean cage, nest, and hut. The S pole treated mice and rats kept their cages, nests and huts in a very dirty state; they did not seem to be concerned about sleeping in their own mire and filth.

The N pole mice and rats were very neat housekeepers and often took a great deal of time washing and keeping themselves and their cages clean, including their nests and huts. On the other hand, the S pole mice and rats were always stained, dirty and careless. The controls WP,re not extreme one way or the other, their cages, huts, nests and cleanliness ordinary for their species. The apparently high sensitive behavior to lights, sounds, motion, movement in the laboratory, by the N pole mice and rats as opposed to the boldness, strong, nonfearful behavior of the S pole mice and rats showed a remarkable difference in the psychological behavior pattern of the rodents. These differences coincided with our findings relative to the particular pole energies. The discovery of these revealing changes in the mice and rats was duplicated in the work that followed with white Australian rabbits, which have a blood type similar to man. The effects were so far-reaching in this work as to point directly to genetic changes. This was shown by the sensitivities, physical development, nervous reactions, and the trend toward cannibalistic behavior. There were also effects on the sexual behavior of the rodents.

SEX LIFE AND AGING The sex life of the mice and rats of the control groups was considered to be normal and we used their behavior as norms. The sex life of the N pole rodents was limited and less active than the controls. It was noted that experiments with the mice, rats and rabbits all resulted in the same percentage of exactness in resulting behavior. The S pole rodents, encompassing all of the above-mentioned types, reacted to a far greater sex life with frequent activity. In some instances the males killed the females by their sex activity of actual viciousness. The exposure of the rodents to the S pole energies acted to inspire strength and vigor and when applied to the sex organs encouraged their overdevelopment. This was also later discovered in cats and dogs. The amount of sperm produced and the larger percentages of resultant fertility were responsible in part for changing the rodents and animals in their inborn habits, p·ersonalities, behavior, and encouragement of sexual activity and reproduction. In treating animals after maturity that had not previously been subjected to the pole's energies, the result was increased strength and sex activity. These experiments were by exposure to the magnet for one hour a day for four days, the curve of effects varying with the size and type of animal or rodent. The exposure was to the male testicles and to the female reproductive organs-S pole 2500 gauss strength. The result, if left unchecked, of the condition of oversex stimulation was to shorten the life span of the rodent or animal. The heart was affected, shortening the life span, and death resulted. In our research of rodents and animals to arrest the oversex activities, it was found much could be done if the N pole energies were directed to the male, exposing the testicles and the ureter with N pole energies one hour a day for three days. This resulted in a noticeable downgrading of the number of sex acts that were performed in a definite period of time. Of equal interest during these experiments was the measurement of the amount of sperm produced by the male animal. In treating the sex organs with N pole energies less than normal amounts were produced. We again used a similar animal as control-one that produced the same amount in close percentage to the animal selected for the measurement experiment. Here we note that the sperm is for the better part protein; therefore, should the exposure of the S pole produce more measurable sperm after a series of exposures to the animal we can then see that this acted to encourage the production glands to effect a higher production of the protein sperm fluids. Quite the reverse was found in the treatment of animals with the N pole energies. We found a sharp lowering of the production of sperm and a lowering of the amount of protein. We can see the possibility for the same reactions taking place with man, since man and these selected animals have the same or similar organs.

The south ( S) pole is positive in respect to the north ( N) pole, which is negative.

The biological effects of the application of the poles to biological fluids in a living system also show the path of travel to be from the S pole to the N pole, and this also includes all magnets as we have presented in the drawings herein.

The primary discovery that the two poles of a magnet act to change and alter biological systems in two completely different ways was made by Dr. Albert Roy Davis in 1936. This discovery was quite by accident, and the noticeable effects on two cardboard containers of earthworms led to undertaking a serious study of this change to the biological systems. The accidental discovery was made in a small home laboratory built upon leaving grade school and prior to attending the University of Florida. A large horseshoe magnet was on a wooden work bench near work on a small electronic oscillator used in the old superhetrodyne radio circuits in early days of radio. The afternoon had been planned for fishing, and three cardboard containers of earthworms were on the workbench. The earthworms in the cardboard containers were in adequate amounts of black rich soil, with sufficient moisture, and air holes had been punched in the containers. The covers of the containers were securely fastened to prevent escape. In the process of moving equipment on the workbench the containers of worms were placed unintentionally with one container resting against each end, or pole, of the magnet, and the other was a distance from the magnet. As the day progressed

additional laboratory work cancelled the fishing plans. The earthworms and containers near the magnet were left in their positions for the remainder of that day and night until the following morning. The next morning there was an unexpected occurrence. The worms had eaten through one side of the container that was resting against the S pole of the horseshoe magnet, while the other containers were in no way changed. The remaining earthworms were placed in fresh containers, again in the same positions in front of the magnet's poles-leaving one container away from the magnet. It was anticipated that if the poles of the magnet had any significance to the worms in the one container next to the S pole eating their way to escape, the result would repeat itself in another day. This did not occur. The experiment was forgotten for other laboratory work until three days later. At that time it was discovered that the earthworms next to the S pole had again eaten their way out of their cardboard container. They were lying on the workbench, had lost their moisture, and were dead. The phylum annelida, earthworm species, opened the door for further investigation and research.

In the S pole container the earthworms were still present and alive, though they had been very busy chewing on the inside of their container. They were approximately one-third larger, longer in length and larger in diameter and were extremely active. Evidence of young worms in the soil showed a number of babies had been born.

The N pole container produced different results as many of the earthworms had died and those still alive were thin and showed little activity.

The S pole's magnetic energies had affected the sharp rise in protein amino acid development and active transfer to physical strength and developments. The N pole treated worms presented the findings that, unlike the S pole worms, the N pole worms were acted upon to reduce food intake, lessening the protein amino acid exchange, closing digestion of the lowered food intake, and this affecting a lower exchange of amino acids to physical strength and/or development.

Gauss of 100 to 300 were found to be the lowest effective energies or strengths preferable. This would enable a reproduction of the experiments with the same results time after time supporting this as a scientific discovery. The highest level of energy found to be effective was 3,500 to 4,500 gauss. Above this the effects changed and even slowed in the effects that occurred. These experiments and further research showed a curve of effective strength that will then result in the highest degree of changes to any and all living systems placed under or in these separate fields.

It should be noted also that the waste matter discharged from the bodies of the worms contained a sharp rise in oils and fats and certain proteins as a result of the S pole or positive energy being applied in the prescribed manner to the subject. When the magnetic energy was lower than 100 gauss, at levels lower than the earth's present one-half gauss of magnetic fields, very harmful effects were noted on the subject.

THE MAGNETIC EXPOSURE OF SEEDS Hundreds of experiments were conducted at our Florida laboratory located in Green Cove Springs on the magnetic exposure of seeds. The results here proved to be another outstanding series of biological discoveries. The seeds treated before planting responded as did the earthworms-larger plants as a result of the seeds' exposure to the S pole and smaller plants as a result of exposure to the N pole of a magnet. The control, untreated, seeds acted as a guide and reference as to the opposite effects that were the results of these experimental magnetic treated seeds' growth and development. The biological and analytical testing of the seeds at various stages of germination and development plus plant growth and development stages allowed even a greater understanding of such development results, such as the use of oxygen results and other results.

Quick exposure from several seconds to several minutes to one hour prompted certain improvements when the seeds were exposed to the S pole. Here we found the same reduction in strength and energy when the seeds were exposed to the N pole. Laboratory analysis revealed the following. When exposed to the S pole energies the seed plant development to the end product, vegetable, fruit, root plants such as suga.r beets, and all others The Effects of the Two Poles 31 planted, checked, replanted and harvested many times indicated that the plants produced remarkable results from the positive energies exposure of the seeds. The S pole energies tended to show rise in temperatures. Oxygen was liberated at over normal amounts. Intake of carbon dioxide was increased. Acceptance of organic matter, fertilizers, was increased and root products were greater. The length and size of roots were longer, having also a wide range in growth under the earth, and cycles where growth was speeded then slowed, unlike other untreated plants used as controls of the same types and kinds.

Sugar beets yielded more sugars. Peanuts presented outstanding increases in oils. Protein in the amino acids indicated increases as to the plant type and kind over normal amounts shown in hundreds of seed treatments, plantings and harvestings. The opposite results occurred when the N pole energies were used to treat the seeds. This presented stunted growth patterns, products less than normal in all activities in opposition to the effects of the S pole energies. Therefore, we have two types of energy-one that arrests life, growth and/or development, and one that increases life, growth and development. The S pole or positive energies effects on the seeds show there are advanced and quite noticeable cycles to the growth and development of the plants. On planting there is a rapid germination period, then a period of rest where no development is indicated. On checking the root development there is a marked rise in root production. The top or surface development of the plants slows, then speeds up in very remarkable advance stages, not at all like seeds not treated or during their alternate periods of cycles in their development. Here we find another change over the norm of plant growth and development.

The development of the S pole treated chicks-hens and roosters-presented these facts. They grew faster and stronger than the N pole chicks. They ate more and near maturity took on a trend toward being cannibalistic in nahue. Their intelligence was lower in all respects than the other two groups of chickens and roosters. The N pole treated chickens and roosters were light eaters. They developed slower than the control chicks. They were sensitive to all surrounding noises, heat, cold, wind, sun, weather. This was opposed to the boldness, dull thinking and reactions, and overly

strong S pole chickens and roosters. The S pole hens and roosters were indifferent to any surroundings when their behavior was compared to those of the N pole. The control hens and roosters were in every respect normal to the accepted behavior of hens and roosters. The great differences the birds presented was in fact outstanding. As in the experiments with the earthworms and with the seed experiments, similar findings yet different developments took place. The chicks were studied from birth to maturity to death. The S pole roosters during the last stages of maturity attacked and ate the flesh of the hens and their own kind. It was necessary to remove them and place each in a separate cage. The sizes were much larger than the control chickens. The N pole species were thin, nervous, very sensitive, very clean and ate sparingly. This group was completely different from the control group, which were active and scratched for their own food, and drank less water than either of the treated types. Their growth was larger in all respects than the N pole group and far less in growth development than the S pole group. The S pole treated group (eggs to mature hens and roosters) were the leaders in the cannibalistic attitudes. The birds accidentaly left the confines of

their cages a number of times when the helpers failed to properly latch the pens. They were found running dogs, cats, and in one case attacked a cow grazing in a nearby pasture. The attacks were all of the same nature-mounting or flying on the animal's back and laying open the back. In their own pens when this was discovered for the first time, it was believed that an animal had somehow got into the pens and killed two of the large hens. Upon careful examination and watching the attack was repeated. The S pole roosters mounted the backs of the other birds and then proceeded to peck, scratch and dig into the center of the back of the other birds, exposing the internal organs, and death then was the result of bleeding and internal organ damage.

http://www.rexresearch.com/davisrawls/MagnEffectsLivingSystem.pdf

https://archive.org/details/magnetism-and-its-effects-on-the-living-system

https://altered-states.net/barry/newsletter550/davisrawls.htm

VIDEO REFERENCE ; https://youtu.be/MXuZ1SRjpqk

UNDERSTANDING SPIN ; CLOCK WISE (CW), COUNTER CLOCK WISE (CCW)

There can be confusion as to whether a north or south pole of a magnet can be either CW or CCW –

Sometimes it seems like a given pole having either spin direction. The following notes explore this

Further.

In some cases we assign these values ;

North Mag pole = ccw spin

South Mag Pole = CW spin

But note this can change based on factors such as perspective ( detailed more below )

OPP SPINS ATTRACT

LIKE SPINS REPEL

VORTEX - SPINTRONICS

TORNADOS ROTATE CCW IN NORTHERN HEMISPHERE

CW IN SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE, BUT THE OPPOSITE

CAN ALSO OCCUR, tornado directional spin is actually determined by the coriolis force

The CLOCKWISE spin of a positive magnetic field PUSHES and the COUNTERCLOCKWISE spin of the

negative magnetic field PULLS.

North Pole energies cause mass to contract and condense, rotating in a CCW direction, while South Pole energies

cause mass to expand and dissipate, rotating in a CW direction.

Also, North Pole energies have alkaline properties while South Pole

energy is acid. North pole energies tend to collect fluids while

South Pole energies dissipate fluids. North pole energy is referred

to as negative because it reduces or attracts, while South pole

energy is referred to as positive because it expands and dissipates.

"The North pole of a magnet seeks a South pole; likewise, a South

pole seeks a North pole. The North pole of a magnet is NOT the

North-SEEKING pole, nor is the South pole the South-SEEKING pole.

In fact, the North-SEEKING pole of a magnet is ACTUALLY the South

pole! The South-SEEKING pole of a magnet is the North pole. The

rule to remember is OPPOSITES ATTRACT and SIMILARS REPEL.

RADIATING SOUTH POLE to rejoin the CONDENSING NORTH POLE.

In the next issue of the PLENUM, we will go into the research

findings of Albert Roy Davis and Walter Rawls. Here we will being

to see a potential conflict when attempting to define spin as CW or

CCW. It is entirely dependent on the PERSPECTIVE OF THE VIEWER.

Specifically, North Pole energies cause mass to contract and condense, rotating in a CCW direction, while South Pole energies cause mass to expand and dissipate, rotating in a CW direction. Also, North Pole energies have alkaline properties while South Pole energy is acid. North pole energies tend to collect fluids while South Pole energies dissipate fluids. North pole energy is referred to as negative because it reduces or attracts, while South pole energy is referred to as positive because it expands and dissipates.

north cw alkali concentrating - right spin

south ccw acid expanding - left spin

Coherence is experienced as ease, orderliness, functionality, increasing capability, and support for healthy life processes.”Clockwise” (CW, positive, right-handed or +) spin is generally found in those places in nature where coherence dominates. Here, one feels balanced, calm, and more energized.

Why is Spin Important?

Areas with moderate, steady clockwise spin have been found to support physical health, harmonious emotional states, and mental clarity. Clockwise is the “direction of evolution”, meaning that there is a constant tendency for improvement. Why? Like the sky being blue, it’s just this way that in any given spot there’s a trend towards improvement or towards disfunction. Coherence is also experienced as deeper ability to rest during sleep, easier organization of thinking, or organization of physical places and processes, creative thinking, resolution of issues rather than conflict or stagnation, innovation, and so forth. Whatever is taking place, or whoever is in the part of a building with a clockwise spin in the background vortex field, will be supported towards greater well-being and improvement. Coherence = harmony.

In contrast, areas with counterclockwise, or other than clockwise movements of the pendulum, are weakening, unharmonious, trending towards greater chaos and conflict rather than harmony, mentally confusing and dulling, emotionally flat, conflicted, agitated, anxious, or over-stimulating such that one cannot naturally relax, center, and integrate experience. Sleep is more difficult and less restorative. Even food in the negative EMF environment of most refrigerators will spoil more quickly. It’s easier to get sick and harder to heal. These are the patterns of stress. Incoherence = stress.

I’ve been testing the spin in properties for over 15 years now, and I’ve repeatedly how living in space with a clockwise spin is inherently easier, and living in a counterclockwise, chaotic, over-stimulated or weak field produces loss of a sense of well being, creativity, harmony and productivity in all areas of life. Those with more sensitive or weakened personal energy will feel the effects sooner, but even a young, robust person will feel the effects over time from cumulative influence, because it takes an expenditure of personal energy to make up for what is lacking around one. The correct background spin is important like pure water and clean air are important. One can improve a property in multiple other ways, but if the spin is not right, the quality of life is not what it could be and people, animals and plants will suffer.

Typically, most homes and other buildings have a mix of areas with correct spin, and areas without. The idea is to correct as much as possible all the areas with an inharmonious spin, but to pay special attention to the places where one spends the most time: sleeping areas are very important, chairs we sit in for hours to work or relax, the computer we sit in front of and keyboard we type on, the main entrances used, where we exercise, and even the interior of our cars when they’re in motion.

There are geopathic features in nature which can produce a counterclockwise spin, such as certain rock strata, underground water, ley lines, caverns, or man-made items such as pipes, septic tanks, or buried toxins. “Counterclockwise” (CCW, negative, left-handed or -) spin can be produced by other sources as well, most notably, electromagnetic or radio frequency fields from faulty wiring, electronic and other devices, and cellular devices. Synthetic materials also tend to have a negative polarity. Prior difficult events in an area can also leave a negative etheric imprint, which will affect the direction of energy spin. “Negative” is meant in the sense of polarity, like the negative pole of a magnet.

This field, more subtle than the electromagnetic field, has been called the Vortex Energy or Scalar Field, and it literally has spin, which can shown by testing with a pendulum. When tested, ideally, the spin will be a relaxed, steady, clockwise spin, indicating the harmonious state called “coherence”. Anything other than that kind of spinning motion indicates some kind of dissonance, also called noise or interference, which has interrupted the coherence. Variations found in the spin direction are: clockwise, counterclockwise, back and forth, changing from one direction to another, a very heightened spin, a weak spin or virtually no spin at all.

https://web.archive.org/web/20200216080324/http://www.t5t.com/articles/Why-is-Clockwise-Spin-Important

We need to clarify something regarding perspective. If you look down onto the North Pole of a magnet, the energy will appear to move to the left, moving AWAY from you in a CCW motion. If you look down into the South Pole of a magnet, the energy will appear to move to the right, moving TOWARD you in a CW motion.

If you stand on the Bloch Wall and look to the North, the energy will now move in a CW motion, spinning to the right and TOWARD you (concentrating). If you stand on the Bloch Wall and look to the South, you will see the energy now spinning in a CCW motion, moving to the left and AWAY from you (expanding).

https://web.archive.org/web/20140827190249/http://www.keelynet.com/news/082414w.html

http://www.mexistim.com/otheruses.html

http://www.goodworksonearth.org/spinning.html

When a spiral is drawn starting at the center and around counterclockwise

(CCW) toward the outside, the local aetheric energy is drawn

into the center of the spiral and shot to the outside. When a spiral is

drawn from the outside to the center, the energy is drawn from the

outside into the center and transformed into a rainbow of colors and

energizes the locality. The energy field, as seen by clairvoyants,

radiates out about 4 feet from

http://www.free-energy-info.com/Davidson.pdf

https://sites.google.com/site/crabtreescompendiumofesoterica/out-of-body-experiences-oobes-how-to-experience---definitions-videos-more/resonance-beings-of-frequency---melatonin-and-the-pineal-gland-more/tensor-fields-copper-coil-magic-more?tmpl=%2Fsystem%2Fapp%2Ftemplates%2Fprint%2F&showPrintDialog=1

In a permanent magnet, there are two vortices present at each pole. There is an element both the "north" (ccw) and the "south" (cw) in each pole. The north element has proven to be the stronger vortex with higher gauss ratings. The factor that distinguishes the north pole from the south pole is that the north pole is the one with the weakest south vortex. (26)

https://sites.google.com/site/crabtreescompendiumofesoterica/out-of-body-experiences-oobes-how-to-experience---definitions-videos-more/resonance-beings-of-frequency---melatonin-and-the-pineal-gland-more/tensor-fields-copper-coil-magic-more?tmpl=%2Fsystem%2Fapp%2Ftemplates%2Fprint%2F&showPrintDialog=1

For many, a CCW coil is more comfortable.

http://www.berkanapath.com/radionics/258/how-to-wind-toroidal-mobius-coils/

https://www.physicsforums.com/threads/does-a-coil-with-cw-and-ccw-turns-split-its-b-field.861746/

To determine the North-South direction of a magnet, tie a thread to the center of the magnet bar and the other end to a high place such as a ceiling or door frame. The suspended magnet will tend to spin and eventually position itself in the direction of geographical North and South as is determined by a compass. Permanently mark as South the side facing the South pole of the magnet with red paint or fingernail polish. With one marked magnet, it can be lined up and used to indicate the polarity of all other magnets.

Another method is to align the needle of a compass to point North. Bring one side or end of the magnet near the compass. The side of the magnet that is able to attract the North end of the compass needle is to be marked as North. All other magnets can be so marked and aligned to conform to one predetermined indicator magnet.

See also ; MAGNETIC FIELDS AND RADIO WAVES AFFECT

HUMAN BEHAVIOUR & ORGANIC LIFE

EXCERPTS FROM KEELYNET AND OTHER ONLINE RESOURCES ;

JOURNAL ;

MAIN SITE :

=========================================================================

MAGNETIC HEALING – ESSENTIAL NOTES :

Clinical observations of Dr. William Philpott
North Pole Negative Polarity (-)	South Pole Positive Polarity (+)
fights infection	accelerates microrganism growth
relieves pain	increases pain
reduces inflammation	can increase inflammation
encourages restorative sleep	stimulates wakefulness
increases cellular oxygen	decreases cellular oxygen
normalizes acid balance	encourages high acid levels
supports biological healing	inhibits biological healing
reduces fluid retention	increases edema
pulls fluids and gases	pushes fluids and gases
reduces fatty deposits	encourages fatty deposits

 1. Provides Oxygen to the Cells: Since the cells are weak magnets containing both a positive and negative charge, the cell assumes the polarity of the magn

 2. Normalizes the Acid/Alkaline Balance: North Pole Negative energy is alkalinizing yet doesn't over-alkalinize with the effect of normalizing the pH. An over-acid system produces allergies, toxic states, sore/stiff muscles, chemical hypersensitivity and many disease states. Insect bites also produce an acid state in the body which often overpowers the immune system.

 3. Encourages Deep Sleep: During sleep the polarity of the brain and central nervous system switches to negative magnetic energy. Placing the body and particularly the brain in a negative magnetic field encourages deep sleep by magnetically charging the crystals in the Pineal Gland which respond by producing Melatonin which in turn regulates sleep patterns and even brain response.

 4. Builds Immunity: All known microorganisms whether bacterial, viral or fungal and parasites whether tape worms, pin worms, heart worms, etc, are positive magnetic energy driven and therefore can be stunned or retarded by the application of North Pole Negative. They are further damaged by the oxygen now in the cells and the alkaline environment produced by the North Pole Negative energy.
One woman who was unable to work or go out into society because of extreme environmental sensitivity, found that a flexible magnet placed inside a hat on top of her head made it possible for her to go inside a mall for up to 2 hours at a time!

5. Reduces Fluid Retention: Intercellular edema (meaning inside the cells) is reduced when Negative North Pole energy is introduced to it because it helps normalize the action of the Sodium/Potassium Pump and gets the Sodium out of the cell and the Potassium in it. The excess fluid is then carried away by the blood and lymph. Extracellular edema (meaning outside the cells) exists in areas without drainage capacity like your eye, sinuses and joints is helped by putting the North Pole Negative energy to the side of the affected area so the fluid will be drawn away and toward an outlet.

 6. Relieves/Stops Pain & Other Symptoms: Since pain is usually a symptom of an imbalance in pH and/or inflammation of the area, pain often simply disappears because there is no longer a need for it.

 7. Promotes Mental Acuity & Reasonableness: The North Pole Negative energy also normalizes abnormal electrical firing in the brain and calms an electrically overcharged brain.

 8. Aids in Reducing & Dissolving Fatty Deposits: The North Pole Negative energy is alkaline and therefore neutralizes the acid in fatty tissue thereby dissolving the substance. This is done very slowly. Don't expect results overnight.

 9. Aids in Reducing Fat & Calcium in the Circulatory System: Along with the aforementioned neutralization of fatty deposits, the increased cellular activity further stimulates movement of the hemogobin in the blood vessels thus decreasing deposits in them.

Dr. R. Broeringmeyer says that 6,000 years ago the earth's magnetic field measured 3 Gauss. People lived longer and archeological evidence shows they were healthier. We believe this was because of the benefits of the earth's stronger magnetic field. Today, the average measurement of this field is less than 1 Gauss. Dr. K. Nadagawa learned from his study on Magnetic Field Deficiency Syndrome that the human body is under the influence of the earth's magnetic field and, under modern day conditions, the effect of this field has been decreasing. By applying a magnetic field on the human body to supplement this decrease and this deficiency, abnormal conditions may be corrected.

Schumman Resonators earth's magnetic Generators 120v ....240 v

A few years ago it was believed that there was basically no difference between North and South Pole energy and either side of a magnet was considered useful for any health problem you might encounter. However, research now reveals there is a definite difference between the two opposing forces.

North Pole Energy (also called Negative energy) contains electrons which spin left (counterclockwise) while South Pole Energy (also called Positive Energy) has electrons which spin right. Interestingly, for the body, negative energy's effect is positive and positive energy's effect is sometimes negative. Thus, when you go somewhere to buy a magnet, don't buy a bipole magnet which has both North and South Pole energy on the same side or a horseshoe magnet which does something very similar. Also, realize that different fields of magnetic use have different ways of labeling North or South poles.

Dr. Robert O. Becker, M.D. provided a very important fundamental observation concerning magnetic response and therapy. He showed that when an injury occurs, the injured area registers magnetically positive (south pole). After a few hours the site of the injury without any outside magnetic influence registers negative (north pole). What this shows is that north pole energy is a sign of healing while south pole energy is a signal of injury and disorder.

Since North and South Pole energy are attracted to each other, it is quite simple to determine which is which. When you wish to identify North Pole, you need a compass with its north seeking needle This works because the earth itself is a huge magnet with both a North Pole and a South Pole. The South pole of the magnet will always face North no matter how many times it spins because it is North seeking. Since like repels like, you can also use a correctly marked North Pole magnet. .

Why is it that so many different illnesses have been reportedly Treated although seemingly mysteriously with Pulsed Electro magnetic therapy( PEMF)? Professor Holger Hannemann of Switzerland states: "This is now easy to understand when you keep in mind that many illnesses are the result of the same basic dysfunction. Every illness is a bio-energetic (electrical) breakdown of the organism. It is a sign that the cells have been deprived of energy and the defense mechanism weakened. It is then the task of Pulsed Electro magnetic therapy( PEMF) to remove the blockages that get in the way of normal functioning." 1

North Pole Negative Energy's Effect On Your Body
According to the BIOMAGNETIC HANDBOOK by Dr. William H. Philpott & Sharon Taplin, North Pole Energy produces the following effects in the body:

From 1950 to 1990, Dr. William H. Philpott, M.D., practiced and specialized in psychiatry, neurology, electroencephalography, nutrition, environmental medicine and toxicology. He was a founding member of the Academy of Orthomolecular Psychiatry, and a fellow of the Orthomolecular Psychiatric Society and the Society of Environmental Medicine and Toxicology. From 1970 to 1975, Dr. Philpott conducted a research project to identify the causes of major mental illness and degenerative disease. This research resulted in the publication of two books: Brain Allergies: The Psychonutrient and Magnetic Connections and Victory Over Diabetes. In 1990, After forty years of medical practice, Dr. Philpott retired and dedicated the rest of his career to researching magnetic therapy and to helping doctors in the field of orthomolecular medicine understand its use. During this time, Dr. Philpott compiled extensive data on the use of the negative magnetic field as a therapeutic agent for virtually every pathological condition in human health. In-depth discussions and protocols can be found in a series of newsletters and manuscripts published by Dr. Philpott from 1995 to 2005. It was also during this time that Dr. Philpott published two more books Bio-Magnetic Handbook and Magnet Therapy, the latter of which, is the book that Dr. Philpott is best-known for. In 1998, Dr. Philpott was presented with The Linus Pauling Award by The Orthomolecular Health Society for his “scientific leadership and scholarship spanning the entire history of orthomolecular medicine.”

Some doctors prefer only North Pole, whereas others prefer South Pole for treatment. Dr Albert Roy Davis, U.S.A. is an ardent supporter of single pole use in his treatment. His book ‘the Anatomy of Bio-magnetism’ states: Treatment indications

Magnetic Therapy in its natural state is the dominant North Pole field of the Earth dominating over the life processes of the body. With a full magnetic field from the Earth the body goes through many actions to promote good growth, strengthen tissue and fight disease and damage from accidents or injury. However most of the Earth does not have a full magnetic field. Scientists tell us that as a normal process the Earth's poles reverse approximately every 5,000 years. This could explain the loss of a lot of dinosaur. As we move to this polarity switch, in about 2,000 years, the Earth's magnetic field is lessening. With a decreased field the body is not always able to make all the changes it should and it makes it unable to successfully protect itself. An interesting note is that there are only four places left on Earth with full magnetic fields. Two habitable and two are not. The not are the North Pole and the South Pole. The habitable are Sedona, Arizona and Lourdes, France - both known for healthy living and healing. They can be thought of as East and West Poles.

In Discovery of Magnetic Health, George J. Washnis reports that millions of people annually visit Lourdes, France where greater north pole magnetic fields prevail. As a result of bathing, drinking and dabbing the water of Lourdes on their body, "All seem to feel better as pain and stress are relieved, while over 2,000 inexplicable cures (with 65 so-called miracles) have been recognized by the authorities."

Magnetic Therapy works by affecting our blood. Normally the blood operates in a North Pole orientation, or under a North Pole effect. In this polarity the blood is oxygenated and its process of distributing nutrients and pulling wastes and toxins from injured tissue is made most efficient. When the body is ill or injured the polarity of the site is switched by the body to a South Pole orientation. This creates faster, excited movement meant to draw blood cells to the area for healing. The blood does not work well in a South Pole orientation. Its movement does not allow normal function and an acid state is developed, which micro-organisms, viruses and malignance thrive in. *The chart below shows the affect of North and South Pole applications on the body.* Once the blood has been drawn to the area, the body, with the help of the Earth's magnetic field is supposed to change the polarity of the blood back to a North Pole orientation so positive activity by the blood may take place.

Today, there are researchers such as William H. Philpott, M.D., George J. Washnis with Richard Z. Hricak, Robert O. Becker, M.D., Albert Roy Davis and Walter C. Rawls, Jr. and Kyoichi Nakagawa of Japan are learning more and more about the effects of magnets on the human body.

The problem is that with a reduced magnetic field the body can not always make this necessary conversion and the injury/illness area is left in a South Pole orientation thwarting good cell growth with its acid effect and slowing the healing process. Without blood removing wastes and toxins from injury/illness sites they are left there to fester and become unwanted bursas or arthritic tissue or bad calcification. The increase in conditions like Arthritis, Rheumatoid Arthritis, Fibromyalgia, ADD, ADHD and a multitude of cancers and other Auto-Immune system diseases have increased with the decrease of the magnetic field.
Schumman Resonators earth's magnetic Generators 120v..240 v
Other problems are slow healing in fracture sets and longer recovery periods of disability after accidents. Another sign of this is the great increase in repetitive motion injuries in every form of business and sport. The answer in many cases is Proper Polarity Magnetic Therapy

How essential is magnetism to living organisms? The Smithsonian Institute determined that sharks and insects obtain up to 90 percent of their energy from the Earth's magnetic field rather than from food. Both sharks and insects are highly resistant to viral infectious diseases, including cancer, even though insects do not have an immune system. Dr. William Philpott believes magnetic energy is our first line of defense. He describes our immune system as our second line of defense.
Discovery of Magnetic Health—George Washnis 1993,

Dr. J.H. Vandyk and Dr. M.H. Helpern did research for NASA in which they raised mice in specially prepared metal cages that shielded them from the electromagnetism of the Earth. Within a few weeks the animals lost their fur and began to die. The connective tissue in their skin and internal organs showed signs of uncontrolled growth. Additional animals raised in a normal environment during the same study remained healthy.
Magnetic Therapy—Holger Hanneman 1990

Cancer

Results of this study found that prolonged exposure to static magnetic fields for a period of 64 hours inhibited growth of three human tumor cell lines in vitro.43 This study examined the effects of a rotational magnetic field on a group of 51 breast cancer patients. Results showed a significant positive response in 27 of them.44

Results of this study indicated that exposure to a rotational magnetic field inhibited Walker's carcinoma tumor growth as much as 90 percent in some cases.45 Results of this study indicated that pulsed magnetic field stimulation increased the incorporation of antitumor agents into cells, and thus increased antitumor activity shifting the cell cycle to a proliferative from a nonproliferative phase.46

Results of this study found that 20-30 sessions of magnetotherapy administered preoperatively exhibited antitumor effects in patients suffering from lung cancer.47 This study examined the effects of microwave resonance therapy (MRT) in patients suffering from various forms of cancer. Results showed that MRT treatment prior to surgery reduced the spread of cancer-associated conditions and reduced the risk associated with surgery in 87 percent of patients. MRT applied postoperatively had beneficial effects in 68 percent.50

Results of this study proved that the combination of weak pulsed electromagnetic fields with antioxidant supplementation is beneficial in the treatment of patients suffering from tongue cancer, improving speech, pain control, and tolerance to chemotherapy.51 Results of this controlled study indicated that treatment with a constant magnetic field significantly improved long-term (3-year) survival time in patients undergoing radiation therapy for cancer of the throat. Constant magnetic field therapy consisted of the application of 300 mT for 30 minutes to tumor and metastasizing regions immediately prior to each irradiation.52

Results of this Russian study indicated that the use of whole body eddy magnetic fields, coupled with more conventional cancer therapies (including magnetotherapy) is effective in the treatment of patients suffering from a variety of different malignancies.53

This article reports on the case of a 48-year-old-woman with breast cancer who was treated successfully with magnetotherapy. Infiltration showed a marked decrease following 30 whole body exposures to an eddy magnetic field for 60 minutes. One metastatic node disappeared while the size of others was reduced following 60 such exposures. A total regression of tumor and metastases was seen following the completion of a course of 110 exposures.54

This study examined the effects of whole body magnetic fields (16.5-35 G, 50-165 Hz) on patients suffering from different forms of cancer. Treatment consisted of 15 cycles, each 1-20 minutes in duration, and was coupled with more traditional cancer therapies. Results showed that the magnetotherapy had overall beneficial effects, particularly with respect to improved immune status and postoperative recovery.55

BIOMAGNETIC HEALING
by Gary Null

By applying a structured North Pole magnetic field, using magnets or a pulsed magnetic field generator, we can convert the polarity of the blood in the injury/illness area allowing the blood to work as it should, pulling wastes and toxins away to the kidneys and other cleansing organs, clearing a path for good cell growth aided by the nutrients the blood can now deliver. Simple and totally natural. Use a Natural field to act as a catalyst to normal blood functions. The body can now heal itself naturally. Of course if there are broken bones or vertebrae out of place the magnets will not do it alone, this is time for a good chiropractor. Magnetic Therapy is only a piece of the health pie allowing us to avoid in many cases unnatural medicines and sometimes making surgical procedures unnecessary. Magnetic Therapy works great on many conditions and studies are coming up with more uses every day. Like the positive effects of drinking North Pole magnetized water for those with conditions like the Arthritis's, Fibromyalgia, Gout and ADHD to name a few. People are having great success but that's not a reason to avoid health professionals. After all without good diagnosis what do we treat? Magnetic Therapy works as well on Horses, Dogs and Cats as it does for people.

Pulsed Magnetic Fields (i.e. Magnetic Pulser)
The purpose of this treatment is to disable microbes that are not floating around in the bloodstream, but are "hiding" in root canals, the lymph system, the stomach area, etc. This is a very important part of the Bob Beck protocol for wellness

Apply a natural North Pole magnetic field. Convert the polarity of the blood to the North Pole orientated working polarity. Let the body heal itself. What is more natural than that?

Therapeutic Uses

Magnets have been used therapeutically to relieve pain and discomfort for thousands of
years, perhaps even longer than acupuncture, which is over 2000 years old. The first
reported therapeutic use of magnets involved the grinding up of a naturally occurring
material called magnetite and the application of this in poultice form to uncomfortable
areas of the body.

Magnetite makes for a relatively weak magnet by today's standards. But since the earth's
naturally occurring magnetic field was far higher in the past (2 to 3 gauss as opposed to
1/2 gauss today), magnetite crystals may have been stronger at one point in time. Still,
this is a weak field by today's standards as one can easily buy a magnet with an internal
gauss strength of 10,000 (1 tesla) or more. Such high exposures do not appear in any
way detrimental; at worst, they seem harmless and at best they appear to help a variety
of conditions.

Exposure to the earth's magnetic field plays an essential role in our health, a fact clearly
demonstrated when the first astronauts returned to earth sick. Their illness was soon
attributed to a lack of magnetism in outer space and the problem was subsequently
resolved when NASA placed magnets in their space suits and spaceships.
It has since been discovered that in the absence of a magnetic field, the energy level of
atoms diminishes. Necessary nutrients become depolarized and unusable. If this
condition is permitted to continue, the body can become imbalanced and function
improperly. By restoring balance to an organism, biomagnetic therapy can alleviate a
number of health conditions. Some of the most common applications of magnets are
described below:

General Uses

Relief from Pain and Discomfort The most common use of magnetic fields is in
the treatment of pain, with reports of successful treatment in a wide variety of
conditions, including arthritis, rheumatism, fibromyalgia, back pain, headaches, muscle
sprains and strains, joint pain, tendonitis, shoulder pain, carpal tunnel syndrome, and
torn ligaments.
A noteworthy American double-blind, placebo-controlled study on the effects of static
magnets on the treatment of arthritis was recently published in the ®MDBR¯ Journal of
Rheumatology®MDNM¯ (November 1997, p. 1200). The study confirms the
effectiveness of magnets in relieving the pain of arthritis. Another scientific study of
similar rigor is being carried out by Dr. Zimmerman, and is looking at the effects of
fixed magnets on low back pain. There is good reason to expect confirmation of what
users have been claiming for years--that magnets are an excellent aid to pain relief.
To understand how magnets work to alleviate pain, it may help to look at pain
mechanisms in the body. Pain is transmitted along nerve cells as an electric signal.
While quiescent, the nerve has a small charge of about -70 mV. A pain signal
depolarizes a cell. Magnets appear to raise the depolarization potential of the cell so that
the signal is blocked from depolarization, in effect, blocking the pain. Furthermore, the
ability of the nerve to send pain is slowed by a magnetic field. These phenomena can
aid in the relief of pain throughout the body.
Pain relief may be enhanced when a magnet's negative pole is placed over certain
acupuncture meridians. Research and clinical experience show that magnets increase
energy (qi) along these points. The combination of therapies works synergistically so
that their combined effects are greater than the sum of their effects would be if they
were used separately. In addition, acupuncturists like magnets because they are painless
and allow the treatment to continue long after a visit.
Reduction of Inflammation and Improved Circulation. Injured tissue emits a
positive charge; placing the negative pole of a magnet over the area appears to restore a
natural balance in the following way: The magnet improves circulation, allowing blood
vessels to dilate and bring a greater volume of blood flow to the injured area. This helps
to bring in natural healers and to remove the toxic byproducts of inflammation--
bradykinens, prostaglandins, and histamines--all of which contribute to inflammation
and pain. Thus, pain and inflammation are diminished and tissue healing is stimulated.
Antimicrobial Effects Magnetic therapy can help the body ward off such microbial
invaders as viruses, bacteria, and fungi. It achieves this, in part, by increasing immune
function through the oxygenation of white corpuscles, an important part of the immune
system's arsenal.
A magnetic field can also function like an antibiotic by lowering acidity, with the result
that microorganisms have a more difficult time surviving. In addition, hormonal
production is regulated, altering enzymatic activity and biochemical messengers of the
immune system. For example, the pineal gland is one large electromagnetic entity. The
net effect is to augment the body's natural ability to resist a variety of germs.
Stress Reduction The recent discovery of magnetite in the cells of the brain helps
explain the calming effect of biomagnetic therapy. A magnetic field applied to the head
calms as well as induces a hypnotic sleeping effect on the brain by stimulating the
hormone melatonin. Melatonin is known to be anti-stressful, producing a sedating effect
in insomniacs. This finding has led to the manufacture of magnetic pillows and pads
designed to provide a sound and restful sleep. A person can then awaken with more
energy and fewer aches and pains.
Correction of Central Nervous System Disorders Dr. William Philpott claims
that biomagnetic therapy can help central nervous system disorders. He states that such
symptoms as hallucinations, delusions, seizures, and panic can be alleviated through
biomagnetic therapy without disrupting the patient's mental alertness and orientation.
Also, a magnetic field may reduce the need for tranquilizers and antidepressants.
Magnets have been used as well to stop epileptic seizures.
Energy Enhancement Biomagnetic therapy is known to increase general well-being
by enhancing energy. The normal polarization of a positively charged nucleus with a
negatively charged outer membrane permits a cell to function as a healthy entity.
However, as the cell performs its daily functions, it becomes depolarized. Depolarized
cells equal a tired person. It is believed that magnetic energy has the ability to penetrate
all facets of the human body and reach every cell. That translates to greater energy and
vitality throughout the body as a whole. Consequently, supplemental biomagnetic
therapy can help the body revitalize.
One normally revitalizes biological energy during sleep. This can be enhanced by
sleeping in a magnetic field. Then, anabolic hormones, such as melatonin and DHEA,
are made. Melatonin, made by the pineal gland, is a master hormone controlling the
entire energy system.
Quicker Healing The medical community has known for years that pulsed
biomagnetic therapy promotes the healing process, particularly of bone fractures. For
over 40 years, many doctors have used pulsed biomagnetic therapy to treat fractures and
have had a high rate of success. Several magnetic instruments have already been FDAapproved
and sanctioned for both safety and therapeutic implications.
The success of this therapy is attributed, in part, to its facilitating the migration of
calcium ions and osteoblasts to heal broken bones in less than the usual time. In
addition, the migration of calcium occurs away from joints to reduce painful arthritic
joint inflammation. The end result is the noninvasive promotion of natural healing,
without the use of unnatural chemicals and drugs. Adequate magnetic energy also
softens or eliminates scar tissue formed during the healing process.
Some doctors put magnets into the dressings over fractures. In fact, one veterinarian I
know, who broke his ankle after falling from a horse, reported following this strategy on
himself.
Increased Athletic Endurance and Performance For years, magnetic therapy has
been used around the world on race horses to heal injuries and enhance performance.
Doug Hannum, owner of the Equine Therapy Center in Camden, South Carolina,
employs magnetic blankets along with other natural healing modalities on animals, and
professional riders, such as five-time Olympian Bruce Davidson and world
championship rider Dorothy Trapp, ship their steeds to Hannum for therapy.
Stunning successes with animals have prompted professional athletes to use magnets.
The Russians may have been the first in recent athletic history to have adapted magnetic
therapy to foster greater athletic strength and achievement. Today, many notable
American athletes embrace this technology as well. Denver Bronco linebacker Bill
Romanowski revitalized his aching body by sleeping on a magnetic mattress pad.
Yankee pitcher Irabu plays with dozens of magnets stuck to his body. Top golfer Jim
Colbert endorses magnets. And professional football player Steve Atwinter, a seventime
pro-bowler, says, "I am not waiting for scientists to bless it. I only know it works."
Even high schools are turning to magnetic therapy to improve athletic performance.
Although the effect of increased endurance and performance is known, the cause is not
definitively understood. It is felt that magnetic energy warms up the muscles and joints
so that performance is increased. At least as important, serious injuries are reduced. In
addition, it is known that magnetic energy increases blood flow to the muscles, thereby
increasing strength at these work sites.

Specific Uses

In addition to its general benefits, biomagnetic therapy may help a variety of specific
conditions. This is not to say that magnets will cure absolutely, irreversibly, and
indefinitely. How much good they do varies from person to person and depends upon
such factors as the depth of the problem, how long the condition has been in existence,
and how strong the magnet is.

Also, when using magnets for chronic longstanding conditions, where the tissues have
not been getting adequate blood flow, you may at first get an exacerbation of symptoms.
Some people call this a healing crisis. The discomfort usually passes in 24 to 48 hours.
In the meantime, one may wish to take some Tylenol, aspirin, or similar pain-relieving
medication to help with the discomfort until the body starts to recover its circulation.
One alternative is to decrease the length of time the magnet is worn in the beginning
and to gradually increase the time.
When using magnets for healing purposes, the strength should generally be between 100
and 500 gauss. Most treatments employ static magnets. However, when treating
fractures, either static or pulsed electromagnets can be useful. Here are some conditions
for which magnets can be helpful.
Aging Magnets activate life-promoting enzymatic activity which, in turn, encourages
normal cell division. This creates a healthier organism and may then slow down the
aging process. Several studies on animals show magnetic therapy to increase lifespan.
In order to balance the energy of the organs and glands throughout the body, it has been
suggested that one apply magnetic fields to the whole body. Sleeping on a magnetic bed
is an excellent way to accomplish this. Drinking magnetized water is another good habit
to get into. Additionally, injured or weak areas of the body can be strengthened by
applying magnets to these specific sites.
Amputations Many amputees suffer from a phenomenon called phantom pain; i.e.,
they feel pain in a limb that was removed. Many of these patients have vascular
problems. Research shows that in many, magnets can improve the flow of blood in the
stump and cause phantom pain to go away.
Appendicitis A northern or bipolar magnet can be placed over the affected area. In
advanced infections, however, you should not hesitate to call a doctor, as this is an
emergency situation.
Arthritis Magnetic therapy may be one of the most effective methods for achieving
relief from arthritis, according to a recent study published in the "Journal of
Rheumatology" (November 1997, p. 1200). Placing the north pole of a magnet over an
inflamed area on a regular basis may be a key factor in improvement, especially for
arthritis in the hands and feet. Magnetic therapy may help reduce bone and tissue
degeneration.
Asthma and Bronchitis Wearing a strong neodymium magnet over the chest to
cover the bronchial tubes and at an equal level on the back may help these conditions. In
addition, sleeping on a magnetic mattress pad can be beneficial. It may take several days
before breathing returns to normal, and magnets can be worn continuously during that
time.
Scientific evidence supports the use of magnets in bronchitis, in both adults and
children. In his clinical practice, Dr. William Pawluk reported success after a patient of
his, who suffered from chronic bronchitis after having been poisoned by mustard gas,
used magnet therapy. The use of this treatment resulted in a greater ease of breathing.
Breast Fissures Breast fissures are skin wounds that occur in women who are
breastfeeding. Placing magnets over the wounded skin can help the fissure heal more
quickly.
Burns Magnets can help speed up the healing of all but the most serious burns. They
are good to keep around the kitchen for burns received after touching a hot stove or
picking up something that is scalding. Magnets should be placed over the site of injury.
For slightly more serious burns, the use of magnets may help reduce the need for
analgesics to control pain..
Cancer Cells depolarize before becoming metastatic, and so one can speculate on how
this approach may have been successful in those clinical cases that have responded to
magnet therapy. When using magnets for cancer, remember the following rules of
thumb: The magnetic pole used must be negative. The field should be larger than the
primary lesion and the gauss greater than 25. Success rate increases if both the gauss
and duration are increased. A minimal duration of 20 hours per day for no less than
three months is required in most cases. The therapeutic effect is, in part, a result of the
negative pole producing alkaline hyperoxia (abundance of oxygen). Cancer cells form
their energy by making ATP in an acid anaerobic environment, which is termed acid
hypoxia.
Russian reports indicate that using magnetic therapy along with chemotherapy increases
success in the treatment of brain tumors. Patients given magnetic therapy were less sick
than patients who did not receive it, and they recovered more quickly. They also had
fewer problems with their adrenal glands, which chemotherapy can sometimes affect.
Since the amount of information available on magnetic therapy with cancer is so
limited, and since cancer is such a serious condition, one should never consider magnets
as a sole therapy.
Carpal Tunnel Syndrome Magnets can be applied to the front and back of the wrist
to help this hard-to-heal condition. While the symptoms can be controlled with the help
of magnets, one should not expect the condition to be automatically cured.
Cervicitis The Russians have designed magnets for intravaginal use to alleviate
chronic cervicitis. They are placed in the vagina, next to the cervix. While this method
may be useful for chronic cervicitis, it probably should not be used for acute infections,
such as yeast infections.
Circulatory Problems One can place magnetic strips along the forearm and sleep on
a magnetic pad at night.
Depression When magnets are placed over the head, they can help lift one's mood and
promote relaxation.
Dermatitis As magnets decrease swelling of any kind, they can be placed over any
area of inflamed, red, itchy skin with favorable results.
Ear Pain Magnets can be placed over the painful site. Medical advice should also be
sought, though, particularly for children.
Endometriosis This painful condition causes little blood spots inside the pelvis and
is characterized by tissue irritation, inflammation, and pain. Women with infertility
problems often suffer from this. Benefit can be realized through magnetic therapy,
although it might take several months. In one study, good results were seen when 250-
gauss magnets were placed over the lower abdomen for six to 12 hours.
Fibromyalgia One should sleep on a magnetic mattress pad and use a magnetic
pillow. Magnets can also be placed over painful areas during the day.
Foot and Leg Problems Magnetic insoles will increase circulation and help
conditions such as numbness, burning, aches, restlessness, and leg cramps. In addition,
one should sleep on a magnetic mattress pad.
Head Injuries Head injuries, even mild ones, can leave people with chronic,
debilitating problems, many of which show up years later as headaches, memory
disorders, chronic fatigue syndrome, eye problems, irritability, or other symptoms.
Magnets placed around the head and neck can correct the electrical imbalance
precipitated by the injury.
Heart Disease A neodymium magnet worn over the heart may assist the body in
healing itself, and may, in time, allow one to lessen or discontinue medications. Of
course, one should always follow a physician's advice.
Some of the effects of magnets on circulatory function are greater blood vessel dilation
and increased oxygenation of tissues. Biomagnetic therapy may also improve vascular
resistance and decrease the stickiness of blood platelets. People with a peripheral
vascular disorder and arteriosclerosis may therefore benefit from magnetic therapy.
Biomagnetic therapy may also undo blockages throughout the body, such as in the
vessels of the lower extremities, the arteries in the neck, and the blood vessels in the
hands and arms. By opening up a blockage in the heart, magnets may help prevent or
improve ischemic heart disease, angina, and heart attacks.
Muscle Spasms One of the major actions of magnets is to decrease spasms in
muscles. If you pull a back muscle or you're under a lot of stress, those muscles may
tighten up. Placing small round magnets or little block magnets over those areas can
make a significant difference.

Dr. Pawluk* reports additional relief when acupuncture meridians are stimulated with
magnets: "In some patients, myself included, I've placed a magnetic pad over the sacral
area because it hits the bladder meridian going up the back. The bladder meridian
controls the energy flowing through the muscles, all the way up and down the back,
including, to some extent, the shoulders. If you increase the energy flow along the
bladder area, it will help a muscle problem or tension up into the shoulders."
Muscle Strains and Sprains and Joint Pain Dr. Pawluk* reports success after
applying a magnet over the site of a torn muscle: "While playing with the family dog, I
tore a muscle in my calf. It was very painful. I covered the area with a large magnetic
pad, one that was probably 8 x 10 inches wide. And I wrapped an Ace bandage around
that. I wore that for three days. It made a significant improvement in the pain and
discomfort and reduced the bruising around the tissues."

Local applications are appropriate for these types of problems. Wear the magnet for
several hours, and then take a break from it. Either wear the magnet all day and take it
off during the night or vice versa. The same rule applies to joint pain. A magnet can be
taped over the joint for a set period of time. Additional benefit can be derived if
magnets are placed over corresponding acupuncture points.

Neuritis The Russians performed a study of 39 neuritis patients on medication alone,
and an equal number on medicine plus magnetic treatments. Magnets were placed along
the spine, even though the neuropathy may have been experienced in the arms. The
assumption was that some of the information processing originated in the spine.
Therefore, treating the spine would be reflected in improvement in the arms. The
experiment found a great degree of improvement in both groups, but particularly in the
group receiving medication plus magnetic treatment. Pain was reduced and nerve
reflexes improved.

Post-Polio Syndrome Recently, a study was performed examining the effect of
bipolar magnets on post-polio syndrome, a condition characterized by muscle
tenderness and pain in patients who have had polio. The condition occurs years after the
original damage from the polio virus. Application of magnets to these tender, painful
spots was shown to alleviate pain in this double-blind placebo-controlled study, the
results of which were published in the November 1997 issue of the "Archives of
Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation".

Rheumatoid Arthritis Magnets act as an anti-inflammatory, and therefore help
some chronic inflammatory conditions, such as rheumatoid arthritis.
Surgery Some studies have shown that using magnets for 24 to 48 hours before
surgery, over the site where the incision will be made, results in better post-operative
recovery. Additionally, wearing magnets over a wound after the sutures have been put
in can also speed up healing.

Length of Exposure
In many studies using magnets, patients experience favorable results with intermittent
use as opposed to continual wear. In other research and clinical experience, conditions
are alleviated when magnets are worn full-time. This raises questions for further
research: Should magnets be worn all the time or should they be worn for certain
intervals? Should the length of time they are worn vary from condition to condition or
person to person?

Dr. Pawluk* asserts that research shows that if magnets are worn all the time, the body
may adapt to the field and establish a new level of homeostasis. This can be compared,
Pawluk explains, to walking into a room that has the scent of flowers. After one is there
awhile, the smell becomes imperceptible. The body may, therefore, need a periodic
time-off from magnets.

BIOMAGNETIC HEALING
by Gary Null

The Magnetic Effect
A magnet or electromagnet produces an energy field Each pole of a magnet produces a different effect;
North-Negative
Has a counter-clockwise rotation
Inhibits Relieves pain
Reduces inflammation
Produces an alkaline effect
Reduces symptoms
Fights infections
Supports healing
Reduces fluid retention
Increases cellular oxygen
Encourages deep restorative sleep
Produces a bright mental effect
Reduces fatty deposits
Establishes healing polarity
Stimulates meletonin production
Normalizes natural alkaline PH

In 1923 Soviet biologist Alexander Gurwitsch, who initiated research with the belief that all physical and biochemical reactions all have as their essence electromagnetic energy, proclaimed, "Every living cell also produces electromagnetic currents." Another Soviet researcher, Georges Lakhovsky, was also convinced that the human body and therefore the cells in that body are equipped with biological receivers that react to every stimulus in the environment. He stated, "Every cell in a body is stimulated by the resonating interaction of the rhythmical flow of electromagnetic currents." It is clear from this research that the Earth's magnetic field is intended to provide each cell in our body with the magnetic and electrical energy that they need to survive. Since it has been established that this energy is deficient, it is necessary to supplement this if we want to live our lives to their fullest potential of health and length of life.

South-Positive
Has a clockwise rotation
Excites Increases pain
Increases inflammation
Produces an acid effect
Intensifies symptoms
Promotes microorganisms
Inhibits healing
Increases fluid retention
Decreases tissue oxygen
Stimulates wakefulness
Has an over productive effect
Encourages fatty deposits
Polarity of an injury site
Stimulates body function

In theory if you are using an alternating (AC or Bi-Polar) field, a combination of North and South poles applied at the same time, with prolonged use you will get an over stimulation of the condition being treated. Eventually the South Pole energy you are adding to the South Pole field of the injury Illness site will overcome the small amount of North Pole energy applied. At that time your body will be affected by the symptoms of the South-Positive field.

Raymond Elliott C.A.M.

Certified in Applied Magnetics
International School of Magnetic Therapy

So, are Pulsed Electro magnetic therapy( PEMF) Products necessary? It is obvious from Reading and listening to many experts that the answer is yes. Does the polarity of a magnet that you are putting on your body matter? It appears that our bodies are similar in response to any electrical device. What happens if you put the batteries in backwards? IT DOESN'T WORK! What happens if we put the batteries in backwards into a sensitive electrical device and leave them there for a long time? The device is destroyed. Take care of your body and give it the HEALING ENERGY that it deserves, with a properly designed Pulsed Electro magnetic therapy( PEMF) System.

MAGNETS
"CURING CANCER WITH MAGNETS" (all successfully)
by PROFESSOR GOESTA WOLLIN & ERIK ENBY

Reprint from Magnets In Your Future magazine.
April 1988
Reprinted with permission
mschome@jps.net

A Z Printing Company - 4000 HWY 62
Hardy, Arkansas U.S.A. 72542-9550
(870) 856-3041 FAX 856-3590 Info. 856-3164

ARTICLE
(Editor's Note: Summary of a 57 page Report presented by G. Wollin on November 20, 1987, at Chalmers University of Technology, Gothenburg, Sweden.) Excerpt taken from MAGNETS, Volume 3, Number 4, April 1988.

"Mrs. Kerstin Westelius had lung cancer of the metastasis type. After years of surgery, therapy and chemotherapy, she was told in June 1987 by her physicians that her cancer was incurable and that she had only 2 more months to live. Here in the picture, she is shown in January of 1988 with her physician, Dr., Erik Enby, who treated her by hanging a Neomax supermagnet around her neck, and with Prof. Goesta Wollen of Clyde, N.C., who invented the method of treating cancer with the employment of supermagnets. Since July of 1987 more than 50 cancer patients in Sweden and America have been treated - all successfully."

Because of the recent invention of a supermagnet with great strength and a minute size, three breast cancer patients have been cured by a method, which will revolutionize the field of cancer treatment. One of the patients had breast cancer of the metastasis type; that is, the cancer had transplanted into tissue distant from the site of the original cancer. The technique we used strongly indicates that all kinds of cancer can be cured by this method.

Portable Rife MK5

The super energy permanent magnet we use in our project has a maximum energy of up to 35,000,000 gauss-oersteds. This strength of the supermagnet is the world's record in commercial production, according to the prestigious American Journal "SCIENCE." It is made of iron, boron and neodymium, one of the rare metals. It is brand-named Neomax.

The Neomax supermagnet was recently -1983 - invented by the Sumitomo Special Metals Company of Japan. This company also commercially produces it.

The size of the Neomax supermagnet that was used in the cancer project is approximately the size of an American quarter. It is smaller than a Swedish krona. It weights 30 grams, which is approximately 1 ounce.

The supermagnets for Professor Wollin were made to his specifications. Professor Wollin received, as a generous gift, 30 Neomax supermagnets from the Sumitomo Special Metals Company of Japan. Each one of the women with breast cancer who participated in the project had a supermagnet hanging around her neck for about 4 months, with the north polarity of the magnet directed toward the body.

The results indicate that our method can cure all types of cancer. If we had positioned the magnets on the tumor, we would not have known this. But since we hung a supermagnet around the neck of each patient, it indicates the supermagnets influence the whole body.

Of importance is healthy tissue surrounding a cancer tumor is not harmed by a supermagnet because healthy cells have different electromagnetic potential than cancer cells.

Of great importance is that we can suggest a mechanism; that is, what is happening when a supermagnet is trying to eliminate a malignant tumor. The mechanism is based on Wollin's recent discovery of a universal spiral theory. Wollin discovered that spirals are found throughout nature, from the galaxies, each one consisting of hundreds of billions of stars, down to the basic shape of DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid), the bodies' ultimate genetic material. The miraculous molecule that makes a mouse a mouse or a human-being a human being. DNA exists in every chromosome in every cell of every individual.

We propose that magnetism and cancer cells are spirals on different scales. When super magnetism is applied to cancer tumors, the magnetic spirals, being larger, are dominating, and at the end, kill the smaller cancer cell spirals.

The successful result of our cancer treatment project is a consequence, of more, than 400 years of research in the fields of electromagnetotherapy and diseases.

Electromagnetotherapy needs to be clarified because in the literature the term's electrotherapy, magnetotherapy, etc., are used to describe the same process. We use only the term electromagnetotherapy because Maxwell showed that electricity and magnetism are two aspects of the same entity, electromagnetism.

In a book chapter entitled "About Magnets and Their Wonderful Ability to Help in the Cure of All sorts of Diseases" by Paracelsus, he writes, for example, that he found the use of magnets to be of great value for the cure of epilepsy. He recommends that 4 magnets be placed on the stomach and 4 on the back.

So far Nordenstrom has treated with electromagnetotherapy 80 patients with breast and lung cancer tumors. His treatment has regressed or killed the tumors in most of the 80 patients. Nordenstrom's treatment of cancer tumors consists of inserting a long needle into the center of a tumor and another needle in normal tissue. The needles are platinum electrodes. The electrode in the tumor is positive and the other negative. Wires are hooked to both electrodes and are connected to a direct electric current processor. The electric current is turned on and is increased in successions from 0 to 10 volts. The treatment has begun.

It is important that our method for curing cancer uses only one magnet. Before we started the project, described in this report, we surmised we needed two magnets - one on each side of the tumor. We succeeded in our treatment of cancer with one magnet because a human being is like a magnet. That humans are electromagnetic was suggested in 1926 by the eminent American surgeon and electromagnetotherapist George Crile in his book "A Bipolar Theory of Living Processes" and in 1983 by the eminent radiologist and cancer researcher Bjorn Nordenstrom in his book "Biological Electric Circuits: Clinical, Experimental and Theoretical Evidence for an additional Circular System".

It is very important we have developed a new method for curing cancer because cancer is increasing everywhere. For example: 1) In Japan there are more than 300,000 new cases of cancer each year; 2) In the United States the cancer mortality rate is increasing each year so that in 1986 cancer killed over 460,000 people; 3) In Sweden, during the last 20 years, there was an increase of 52% of cancer cases reported by the Swedish Socialstyrelsen on October 23, 1987.

In summary, when someone has cancer, in general there are three ways of trying to eliminate the malignant tumor from the body. Surgery is one possibility. Another possibility is to kill the cancerous cells with radiation; that is, radiotherapy, which, of course, also is electromagnetotherapy. The third option is to kill the cancerous cells with drugs; that is, chemotherapy. The drawback with these treatments is that they damage healthy cells, too.

We suggest another option: electromagnetotherapy with the employment of supermagnets. This type of treatment does not damage healthy cells because healthy cells have different electromagnetic potential than cancer cells. It is a new approach to the treatment of cancer, the first since chemotherapy began more than 40 years ago.

(The following is a report to Prof. Goesta Wollin, Clyde, N.C. from Mr. Douglas M. Redman. Mr. Redman learned that Professor Wollin and Dr. Erik Envy cured cancer patients in Sweden with the use of Neomax supermagnets. He telephoned Professor Wollin saying that his mother, Mrs. Redman, was dying of cancer. Professor Wollin sent him a Neomax supermagnet to be used for Mrs. Redman by her physician.) . . . Part .

Curing cancer with magnets
Through thousands of clinical experiments, it has been proven that magnetic therapy is safe, non-addictive, and there are no known harmful exposure levels. Clinical tests have proven that magnets reduce pain. Magnets deeply penetrate the flesh and create a magnetic field that energizes, alkalizes, and oxygenates the blood, improving the immune system performance and the body's healing abilities.

Dr. Albert Roy Davis, Ph.D., noted the positive and negative magnetic polarities have different effects upon biological systems of animals. He found that magnets could be used to arrest and kill cancer cells in animals, and could also be used in the treatment of arthritis, glaucoma, infertility, and diseases related to aging. He concluded that negative magnetic fields have a beneficial effect on living organisms, whereas positive magnetic fields have a harmful effect.

According to Wolfgang Ludwig, Sc.D., Ph.D., Director of the Institute for Biophysics in Horb, Germany, "Magnetic field therapy is a method that penetrates the whole human body and can treat every organ without chemical side effects.

"Magnetic energy has a beneficial effect on blood circulation, lymph flow, hormone production, nerves and muscles," says Dr. Ulrich Warnke, M.D., in "Magnets to Overcome Pain."

"A negative magnetic field (north or negative side) can function like an antibiotic in helping to destroy bacterial, fungal, and viral infections," says Dr. Philpott, "by promoting oxygenation and lowering the body's acidity." Both these factors are beneficial to normal bodily functions but harmful to pathogenic (disease-causing) microorganisms, which do not survive in a well oxygenated, alkaline environment. These two factors are why clinical studies have proven that magnets reduce pain.

Dr. Philpott theorizes that the biological value of oxygen is increased by the influence of a negative electromagnetic field, and that the field causes negatively charged DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid) to "pull" oxygen out of the bloodstream and into the cell. The negative electromagnetic field keeps the cellular buffer system (pH or acid-based balance) intact so that the cells remain alkaline. The low acid balance also helps maintain the presence of oxygen in the body.

Dr. Philpott states: "A negative magnetic field normalizes the disturbed metabolic functions that cause painful conditions such as cellular edema (swelling of the cells), cellular acidosis (excessive acidity of the cells), lack of oxygen to the cells, and function. A positive magnetic field, on the other hand, can increase pain due to its interference with normal metabolic function."

On my deathbed when pain got unbearable in an area of the colon, I used the north side of a 4" x 5½" x ½" approximately 1000 gauss (magnet strength measurement) magnet against the area most all the time. By the end of the first week the pain started reducing and by the end of the month the pain had disappeared totally.

Today, 4000 gauss magnets are only an inch in size and weigh about an ounce. This type of magnet was especially designed for Professor Wollen and used on cancer patients - all successfully as mentioned in the article "Curing Cancer With Magnets" in Magnet In Your Future magazine.

(The following is a reprint from Magnets In Your Future magazine. April 1988. Reprinted with permission. A Z Printing Company, 4000 HWY 62, Hardy, Arkansas, U.S.A. 72542-9550, (870) 856-3041, FAX (870) 856-3590, Info. (870) 856-3164.)

ARTICLE

(Editor's Note: Summary of a 57 page Report presented by G. Wollin on November 20, 1987, at Chalmers University of Technology, Gothenburg, Sweden.) Excerpt taken from MAGNETS, Volume 3, Number 4, April 1988.)

"Mrs. Kerstin Westelius had lung cancer of the metastasis type. After years of surgery, therapy and chemotherapy, she was told in June 1987 by her physicians that her cancer was incurable and that she had only 2 more months to live. Here in the picture, she is shown in January of 1988 with her physician, Dr., Erik Enby, who treated her by hanging a Neomax supermagnet around her neck, and with Prof. Goesta Wollen of Clyde, N.C., who invented the method of treating cancer with the employment of supermagnets. Since July of 1987 more than 50 cancer patients in Sweden and America have been treated - all successfully.

" Because of the recent invention of a supermagnet with great strength and a minute size, three breast cancer patients have been cured by a method, which will revolutionize the field of cancer treatment. One of the patients had breast cancer of the metastasis type; that is, the cancer had transplanted into tissue distant from the site of the original cancer. The technique we used strongly indicates that all kinds of cancer can be cured by this method.

" The super energy permanent magnet we use in our project has a maximum energy of up to 35,000,000 gauss-oersteds. This strength of the supermagnet is the world's record in commercial production, according to the prestigious American Journal "SCIENCE." It is made of iron, boron and neodymium, one of the rare metals. It is brand-named Neomax.

" The Neomax supermagnet was recently -1983 - invented by the Sumitomo Special Metals Company of Japan. This company also commercially produces it.

" The size of the Neomax supermagnet that was used in the cancer project is approximately the size of an American quarter. It is smaller than a Swedish krona. It weights 30 grams, which is approximately 1 ounce.

" The supermagnets for Professor Wollin were made to his specifications. Professor Wollin received, as a generous gift, 30 Neomax supermagnets from the Sumitomo Special Metals Company of Japan. Each one of the women with breast cancer who participated in the project had a supermagnet hanging around her neck for about 4 months, with the north polarity of the magnet directed toward the body.

" The results indicate that our method can cure all types of cancer. If we had positioned the magnets on the tumor, we would not have known this. But since we hung a supermagnet around the neck of each patient, it indicates the supermagnets influence the whole body.

" Of importance is healthy tissue surrounding a cancer tumor is not harmed by a supermagnet because healthy cells have different electromagnetic potential than cancer cells.

" Of great importance is that we can suggest a mechanism; that is, what is happening when a supermagnet is trying to eliminate a malignant tumor. The mechanism is based on Wollin's recent discovery of a universal spiral theory. Wollin discovered that spirals are found throughout nature, from the galaxies, each one consisting of hundreds of billions of stars, down to the basic shape of DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid), the bodies' ultimate genetic material. The miraculous molecule that makes a mouse a mouse or a human-being a human being. DNA exists in every chromosome in every cell of every individual.

" We propose that magnetism and cancer cells are spirals on different scales. When super magnetism is applied to cancer tumors, the magnetic spirals, being larger, are dominating, and at the end, kill the smaller cancer cell spirals.

" The successful result of our cancer treatment project is a consequence, of more, than 400 years of research in the fields of electromagnetotherapy and diseases.

" Electromagnetotherapy needs to be clarified because in the literature the term's electrotherapy, magnetotherapy, etc., are used to describe the same process. We use only the term electromagnetotherapy because Maxwell showed that electricity and magnetism are two aspects of the same entity, electromagnetism.

" In a book chapter entitled "About Magnets and Their Wonderful Ability to Help in the Cure of All sorts of Diseases" by Paracelsus, he writes, for example, that he found the use of magnets to be of great value for the cure of epilepsy. He recommends that 4 magnets be placed on the stomach and 4 on the back.

" So far Nordenstrom has treated with electromagnetotherapy 80 patients with breast and lung cancer tumors. His treatment has regressed or killed the tumors in most of the 80 patients. Nordenstrom's treatment of cancer tumors consists of inserting a long needle into the center of a tumor and another needle in normal tissue. The needles are platinum electrodes. The electrode in the tumor is positive and the other negative. Wires are hooked to both electrodes and are connected to a direct electric current processor. The electric current is turned on and is increased in successions from 0 to 10 volts. The treatment has begun.

" It is important that our method for curing cancer uses only one magnet. Before we started the project, described in this report, we surmised we needed two magnets - one on each side of the tumor. We succeeded in our treatment of cancer with one magnet because a human being is like a magnet. That humans are electromagnetic was suggested in 1926 by the eminent American surgeon and electromagnetotherapist George Crile in his book "A Bipolar Theory of Living Processes" and in 1983 by the eminent radiologist and cancer researcher Bjorn Nordenstrom in his book "Biological Electric Circuits: Clinical, Experimental and Theoretical Evidence for an additional Circular System".

" It is very important we have developed a new method for curing cancer because cancer is increasing everywhere. For example: 1) In Japan there are more than 300,000 new cases of cancer each year; 2) In the United States the cancer mortality rate is increasing each year so that in 1986 cancer killed over 460,000 people; 3) In Sweden, during the last 20 years, there was an increase of 52% of cancer cases reported by the Swedish Socialstyrelsen on October 23, 1987.

" In summary, when someone has cancer, in general there are three ways of trying to eliminate the malignant tumor from the body. Surgery is one possibility. Another possibility is to kill the cancerous cells with radiation; that is, radiotherapy, which, of course, also is electromagnetotherapy. The third option is to kill the cancerous cells with drugs; that is, chemotherapy. The drawback with these treatments is that they damage healthy cells, too.

" We suggest another option: electromagnetotherapy with the employment of supermagnets. This type of treatment does not damage healthy cells because healthy cells have different electromagnetic potential than cancer cells. It is a new approach to the treatment of cancer, the first since chemotherapy began more than 40 years ago."

In Discovery of Magnetic Health by George J. Washnis and Richard Z. Hricak quote Robert Barefoot, a bio-chemist who deals with nutrition and disease, as follows: “The loss of energy from natural magnetic fields means that cellular calcium is not maintained in an active ionized state and so reverts to its inert molecular state and is deposited as a solid substance on cells. The benefit of magnetotherapy is the ability of its magnetic fields to raise pH and thereby ionize the calcium, converting it into biologically active calcium ions.”

State-of-the-art equipment utilizing magnetic technology currently exists in Europe, where magnetic therapy is an established method in many hospitals and doctors' offices.

Curing cancer with magnets; a case study
Patient: Norma Redman.
Age: 65.
Diagnosis: Undifferentiated small cell (Oatcell) carcinoma - lung cancer.
Medical History: Little or no health problems until present illness.
Miscellaneous: Patient smoked two or three packs of cigarettes per day for fifty years.

In August of 1986, the patient developed a severe cough and experienced difficulty in breathing. She visited her doctor and he diagnosed her as having pneumonia and he admitted her to the hospital. After further testing - C.A.T scans and x-rays - she was diagnosed as having small cell carcinoma. A broncoscophy confirmed the diagnosis.

In September 1986, chemotherapy was begun. Chemotherapy continued until April 1987. Then she was given ten days of cobalt radiation directed at the brain. This treatment is necessary because conventional chemotherapy will not kill cancer cells of the Oatcell type in the brain. Chemotherapy was reinstated through late November and early December 1987.

In December 1987, one of her doctors told her she had about one month to live and that they had done all they could for her. At this time, she was experiencing severe back pain and the doctors determined the cancer had moved into her spine. She was given radiation (5 days) and one more round of chemotherapy. At that point she was told that any additional treatment would be of little or no value. On December 23, 1987, she was released from the hospital.

I visited the patient on December 25, 1987. Her condition was as follows:

a. Mental confusion. Could not remember things told to her longer that five minutes.
b. Patient was in severe pain.
c. Patient was on pain medication (Percoset), 2 tablets every 3 hours.
d. Patient could not stand or walk, aided or unaided.
e. Patient could not sleep through the night. Would awaken several times during the night and require assistance.
f. Patient was depressed and exhibited child-like mannerisms.

The "Neomax" was placed on the patient with the north polarity toward the body. After two days had passed, the patient was only taking one pain tablet in the morning and one at night. The mental confusion was noticeably absent and the patient stated that she had slept uninterrupted from 9:00 p.m. to 6:30 a.m. the next day.

I visited the patient on January 2, 1988. She told me she had been sleeping well every night, not awakening at all during the night. She was taking very little pain medicine. Her back was still hurting when she moved. But she stated it was more tolerable.

On January 5, 1988, the patient was moved to a skilled care nursing home. The doctors there conferred with her oncologist about her condition. On Wednesday, January 6, 1988, the patient told me she had no pain medication that day and that twice that day she had walked (aided) to the bathroom. Also, the resident doctor told her that they determined by studying x-rays, C.A.T. scans, and by other means, that she did not have any cancer in her spine. Instead, they thought her back pain was being caused by osteoporosis. Further, they told her that all tests they performed on her showed no trace of any cancer.

I talked with the patient on Friday, January 8, 1988. Her mental condition was excellent. She stated that she was taking very little pain medication and was in less pain than previous conversations. She has been wearing the super magnet, as of this writing, for fourteen days and has made remarkable progress in so short a period of time. I visited the patient on January 9, 1988. She was able to sit up in bed by herself, could sit on the side of the bed by herself, and could walk, unaided, to the bathroom by herself, although I walked along beside her just to be on the safe side. She is presently taking little or no pain medication, and no other drugs. Her appetite is not very good, but it is improving daily. I expect to visit her again at the end of January and I will be in contact with her by phone almost on a daily basis.

I will continue to monitor and report on her condition until she has fully recovered.

Douglas M. Redman

Supermagnets cure cancer. A conventional horse-shoe magnet weighs about 5 kilograms and has a strength of about 4,000 gauss. A Neomax supermagnet with a strength of about 4,000 gauss weighs only about one ounce. Professor Wollin of Clyde, N.C., formerly with Columbia University for 36 years, is the inventor of the method of treating cancer using supermagnets. The supermagnet hangs around the patient's neck. Cancer patients in Sweden and America who were told by their physicians that they had only one, or at the most two, more months to live have been treated successfully.

(End of article.)

In 1985, a conventional horseshoe magnet weighed approximately 5 kilograms (12 ½ pounds) and produced 4,000 gauss. Today, using a special combination of metals, the same 4,000 gauss strength is produced by a magnet weighing about an ounce and is approximately the size of three U.S. quarters stacked together.

These magnets are enclosed in soft leather necklace pouch because, according to Dr. Wollin, the north side of the magnet should be worn or placed securely over the sternum (the hard bone in the middle of the chest) just above the stomach cavity. To date, there have been thousands of these supermagnets sold. In Sweden, the charge is approximately $150.00 for one of these magnets.

Even though magnets raise the body's pH and oxygen level within the body, many other things help. Regardless of how beneficial the use of supermagnets may be in the treatment of cancer, a person should still consider making major life style changes, both mentally and physically, in order to correctly adjust their pH toward slightly alkaline (healthy) pH.

A person can increase the oxygen and alkaline levels by using certain types of magnets. But, a person with cancer is already extremely acidic and oxygen depleted. This situation has to be dealt with. We feel that the magnet is just an additional method in aiding the body towards the environment that is needed. These people should also drastically lower their consumption of acid-causing food and liquids and increase their consumption of alkaline promoting foods, liquids and supplements if they hope to totally win the battle against cancer or disease.

Consider reading "HEALING FOODS FROM THE BIBLE." Globe Digest, PO Box 114, Rouses Point, NY 12979-0114. Enclose $3.24, which includes postage & handling.

Cancer needs a low oxygen acidic pH environment to survive. Send for a free 12 second health test and estimate your general pH. Order this test from the Future Medical Group - 269 Tramway St. Incline Village, NV 89451 aqua@coralfmg.tahoe.nv.us (702) 831-9330.

Disease (cancer, etc.) cannot control the environment it needs to survive within, but you have a choice in changing the pH environment within your body from a low oxygen - extremely acidic cellular pH - to a rich oxygen and slightly alkaline environment that cancer can't survive in.

Almost half the people who get cancer eventually die from it. Make up your mind to learn the facts about cancer and do something about it. Start by sending for the free 12 second test that has saved thousands of lives.

Curing cancer with magnets; a case study
Patient: Norma Redman.
Age: 65.
Diagnosis: Undifferentiated small cell (Oatcell) carcinoma - lung cancer.
Medical History: Little or no health problems until present illness.
Miscellaneous: Patient smoked two or three packs of cigarettes per day for fifty years.

In August of 1986, the patient developed a severe cough and experienced difficulty in breathing. She visited her doctor and he diagnosed her as having pneumonia and he admitted her to the hospital. After further testing - C.A.T scans and x-rays - she was diagnosed as having small cell carcinoma. A broncoscophy confirmed the diagnosis.

In September 1986, chemotherapy was begun. Chemotherapy continued until April 1987. Then she was given ten days of cobalt radiation directed at the brain. This treatment is necessary because conventional chemotherapy will not kill cancer cells of the Oatcell type in the brain. Chemotherapy was reinstated through late November and early December 1987.

In December 1987, one of her doctors told her she had about one month to live and that they had done all they could for her. At this time, she was experiencing severe back pain and the doctors determined the cancer had moved into her spine. She was given radiation (5 days) and one more round of chemotherapy. At that point she was told that any additional treatment would be of little or no value. On December 23, 1987, she was released from the hospital.

I visited the patient on December 25, 1987. Her condition was as follows:

a. Mental confusion. Could not remember things told to her longer that five minutes.
b. Patient was in severe pain.
c. Patient was on pain medication (Percoset), 2 tablets every 3 hours.
d. Patient could not stand or walk, aided or unaided.
e. Patient could not sleep through the night. Would awaken several times during the night and require assistance.
f. Patient was depressed and exhibited child-like mannerisms.

The "Neomax" was placed on the patient with the north polarity toward the body. After two days had passed, the patient was only taking one pain tablet in the morning and one at night. The mental confusion was noticeably absent and the patient stated that she had slept uninterrupted from 9:00 p.m. to 6:30 a.m. the next day.

I visited the patient on January 2, 1988. She told me she had been sleeping well every night, not awakening at all during the night. She was taking very little pain medicine. Her back was still hurting when she moved. But she stated it was more tolerable.

On January 5, 1988, the patient was moved to a skilled care nursing home. The doctors there conferred with her oncologist about her condition. On Wednesday, January 6, 1988, the patient told me she had no pain medication that day and that twice that day she had walked (aided) to the bathroom. Also, the resident doctor told her that they determined by studying x-rays, C.A.T. scans, and by other means, that she did not have any cancer in her spine. Instead, they thought her back pain was being caused by osteoporosis. Further, they told her that all tests they performed on her showed no trace of any cancer.

I talked with the patient on Friday, January 8, 1988. Her mental condition was excellent. She stated that she was taking very little pain medication and was in less pain than previous conversations. She has been wearing the super magnet, as of this writing, for fourteen days and has made remarkable progress in so short a period of time. I visited the patient on January 9, 1988. She was able to sit up in bed by herself, could sit on the side of the bed by herself, and could walk, unaided, to the bathroom by herself, although I walked along beside her just to be on the safe side. She is presently taking little or no pain medication, and no other drugs. Her appetite is not very good, but it is improving daily. I expect to visit her again at the end of January and I will be in contact with her by phone almost on a daily basis.

I will continue to monitor and report on her condition until she has fully recovered.

Douglas M. Redman

Supermagnets cure cancer. A conventional horse-shoe magnet weighs about 5 kilograms and has a strength of about 4,000 gauss. A Neomax supermagnet with a strength of about 4,000 gauss weighs only about one ounce. Professor Wollin of Clyde, N.C., formerly with Columbia University for 36 years, is the inventor of the method of treating cancer using supermagnets. The supermagnet hangs around the patient's neck. Cancer patients in Sweden and America who were told by their physicians that they had only one, or at the most two, more months to live have been treated successfully.

(End of article.)

In 1985, a conventional horseshoe magnet weighed approximately 5 kilograms (12 ½ pounds) and produced 4,000 gauss. Today, using a special combination of metals, the same 4,000 gauss strength is produced by a magnet weighing about an ounce and is approximately the size of three U.S. quarters stacked together.

These magnets are enclosed in soft leather necklace pouch because, according to Dr. Wollin, the north side of the magnet should be worn or placed securely over the sternum (the hard bone in the middle of the chest) just above the stomach cavity. To date, there have been thousands of these supermagnets sold. In Sweden, the charge is approximately $150.00 for one of these magnets.

Even though magnets raise the body's pH and oxygen level within the body, many other things help. Regardless of how beneficial the use of supermagnets may be in the treatment of cancer, a person should still consider making major life style changes, both mentally and physically, in order to correctly adjust their pH toward slightly alkaline (healthy) pH.

A person can increase the oxygen and alkaline levels by using certain types of magnets. But, a person with cancer is already extremely acidic and oxygen depleted. This situation has to be dealt with. We feel that the magnet is just an additional method in aiding the body towards the environment that is needed. These people should also drastically lower their consumption of acid-causing food and liquids and increase their consumption of alkaline promoting foods, liquids and supplements if they hope to totally win the battle against cancer or disease.

Consider reading "HEALING FOODS FROM THE BIBLE." Globe Digest, PO Box 114, Rouses Point, NY 12979-0114. Enclose $3.24, which includes postage & handling.

Cancer needs a low oxygen acidic pH environment to survive. Send for a free 12 second health test and estimate your general pH. Order this test from the Future Medical Group - 269 Tramway St. Incline Village, NV 89451 aqua@coralfmg.tahoe.nv.us (702) 831-9330.

Disease (cancer, etc.) cannot control the environment it needs to survive within, but you have a choice in changing the pH environment within your body from a low oxygen - extremely acidic cellular pH - to a rich oxygen and slightly alkaline environment that cancer can't survive in.

Almost half the people who get cancer eventually die from it. Make up your mind to learn the facts about cancer and do something about it. Start by sending for the free 12 second test that has saved thousands of lives.

Biomagnetic Therapy
Dr. Michael Tierra L.AC., O.M.D.

Magnetic energy is a structuring force of the universe. As such, it is a reflection of the order that causes the infinite stars and planets throughout the galaxies to revolve and spin at incredible velocities while remaining in their respective orbits. As one of the four fundamental forces of nature along with gravity, nuclear energy and radioactivity, electromagnetism is equivalent in definition to the Traditional Chinese Medicine (TCM) concept of ‘Qi’, or the East Indian Ayurvedic definition of ‘Prana’. These concepts are what many in the West, regard as the ‘life force’.

Personally, I have had long occasion to experiment and use magnets beginning with myself and then extending to family, friends, students and patients. Two particular occasions on myself were most convincing. Both were soft tissue injuries, one to my elbow and the other, a ligament injury of my knee which I will describe further on.

The elbow pain stemmed from an unknown cause, perhaps an injury or strain. It had persisted for at least 2 weeks during that time I tried acupuncture and herbal treatments which offered only minor temporary relief. As is well known, soft tissue injuries can take some time for repair. It would be most helpful, however, if during that time, there was a simple, non-invasive method to hasten the healing and relieve the pain.

I decided to experiment using magnets to treat the problem. While I had previously heard of magnet therapy, basically that there was a difference therapeutically between the magnet’s North and South polarities, I had no previous experience or further knowledge of their use. When I taped a small 1000 Gauss acuband magnet directly on the skin over the ‘trigger’ point or center of the pain in my arm. I was amazed to find that the pain almost completely disappeared within 5 minutes. I decided to experiment further, first by removing and reapplying the magnet a few times. Each time the pain returned when the magnet was removed and all but completely disappeared again when reapplied. I then experimented by turning the magnet over to change its polarity from North, which is cooling and dispersing, to South, which is heating and building. I discovered that when the South side of the magnet was against the skin, the pain intensified and by reversing the magnet to North, it was alleviated.

Since that time, I have been intrigued with the therapeutic possibilities of bio-magnetic therapy. However, I still had no idea whether the magnet treatment to my arm was only symptomatic or could eventually promote complete healing. Further, I found that there was discrepancies both in print and from various distributors concerning the importance and definition of the North and South sides of a magnet. Despite my confusion, I tentatively began to use magnets on my patients. Because, however, I had such an unsure grasp of any basic theoretical or practical methodology, my results were inconclusive.

I say all this because there may be others who, like myself, felt or presently feel unsure about the value and results of an experience of biomagnetic therapy. Through my example they may appreciate a further corroboration by another who has become fully convinced that biomagnetic therapy may well be one of the safest and most powerful natural healing methods, especially for the relief of pain ever discovered by humankind.

My interest in magnets was rekindled a few years later when I had a crippling soft tissue injury to the medial aspect of my right knee. It was particularly debilitating because there were few positions either standing, sitting or reclining that could provide relief. Having nearly all but forgotten about my previous experience with the magnets on my elbow, I began by using acupuncture, moxabustion (heat applied to specific acupuncture points) and herbal poultices, fomentations and liniments. Everything helped but I still could barely walk or find a comfortable position to either sit or recline.

I certainly was not looking forward to having to stand and be present at a forthcoming natural products trade show that included a promised diversion to my excited young son to a nearby entertainment park. In desperation I remembered the all-but-forgotten magnets that I stored in a cupboard near my bed. I systematically applied the North magnets to the trigger points located near the site of pain around my knee. Estimating what meridians were involved, I positioned the South magnets further up the femur and hip on the Gall Bladder and Bladder Meridians. I found, however, that it was the local application of the North magnets around the knee that was most effective. Within two hours after their application, the pain was 95% gone.

Again, I decided to conduct the same experiments on my knee that I had done a few years previous on my elbow pain, by removing and reapplying them, changing the magnets to irrelevant locations and reversing their polarity. My previous findings were absolutely corroborated. I eventually discovered that I needed to wear the magnets on the trigger points around my knee nearly continuously for about two months before the problem became sufficiently stabilized and resolved.

After this second powerful experience with bio-magnetic therapy, I decided to apply magnets on all my patients along with the acupuncture, dietary and herbal therapy that was part of my normal practice. I wanted to discover for myself the range of their effectiveness for a wide variety of complaints. Since that time, I have found biomagnetic therapy to be around 90% effective for the relief of pains and conditions caused by inflammation. For examples, a woman with diagnosed symptoms of colitis, had tried many forms of conventional and non-conventional treatment over the year previous but was relieved with the application of magnets to her lower abdomen within a week. Another man with arthritis in his hands and fingers with only minimal response from acupuncture and herbal therapy used magnetic balls to relieve and eventually remedy his condition completely. Similarly, another man had encroaching stiffness in his fingers that was threatening to impair his main love, playing the guitar. He also found the results he was seeking with the use of magnetic balls. As a pianist, I can only imagine the benefit these simply magnetic balls could be to the many who have suffered injury from repetitive use or wrong playing.

Everyone, who had acute or chronic lower back, elbow or knee problems found relief and in many cases, complete recovery from the local application of magnets. Patients with asthma, found that the application of magnets to their upper back or chest would provide them the relief they desperately needed without any further external medication. The list goes on to include patients with upper respiratory allergies, gastro-intestinal and digestive complaints, migraine headaches -- all were relieved with the use of magnets -- and the list of conditions continues to expand. Now with the expanded methods of application using magnetized water, magnetized oils, magnetic mattresses and mattress pads, jewelry and so forth, I am convinced that there is no condition that bio-magnetic therapy would not be at least helpful.

Because of my experience with traditional Eastern systems of medicine, including Traditional Chinese Medical (TCM) and East Indian Ayurvedic medicine, I was able to tangibly experience the fundamental energetic basis of healing with magnets described in various traditional healing systems around the world. I could tangibly understand that the North facing side of a magnet was equivalent in energy to the definition in TCM of Yin, or in Ayurveda of Shakti energy. The South facing side was equivalent to TCM Yang, or Ayurvedic Shiva energy. I also understood that the relative strength of a magnet determined whether it was to be used as an important energetic nutrient when in low strength (under 1000 gauss), or a high powered therapeutic tool in high strength (over 3000 gauss) that should be used with due respect. Essentially, like other forms of natural healing energy, if reasonably used, magnets are very forgiving. Except for the obvious contraindications noted, it is rare that anyone would experience anything more than a minor discomfort or aggravation usually caused by using magnetics that are too strong, applying the wrong North-South polarity for a given area or generally an overexposure to a strong magnetic field. If, for instance, one misapplies them over a wrong area, uses the wrong polarity or uses magnets that are inappropriately too strong, there may be a period of minor aggravation and discomfort that is easily remedied as soon as they are appropriately changed or removed. As with herbs, acupuncture and all other systems of natural healing, trial and error is a valid approach to biomagnetic therapy.

Science recognizes a close relationship between electricity and magnetism. In 1820, Hans Oersted of Denmark discovered a direct relationship between electricity and magnetism by showing that an electric current flowing in a wire caused a nearby compass needle to be deflected. Following the discoveries of Oersted, Ampere, the 18th century physicist whose notable achievements were germinal to the harnessing of electrical energy, discovered a quantitative relationship between the strength of an electric current with the magnetic field it creates (Ampere’s theorem). Noting the close relationship between electricity and magnetism, he described magnetism as “electricity thrown into curves”.

Just as the stars and planets revolve in galactical orbits, each atom has a nucleus around which spins various positively charged protons and negatively charged electrons that in turn generate a magnetic field. To reiterate, health represents a balance of these positive and negative forces described in TCM as Yin and Yang, in Ayurvedic medicine as ‘Shiva’ and ‘Shakti’, and in Western physiology as the sympathetic and parasympathetic systems.

The current theory of ‘free radicals’ as the cause of degenerative diseases and aging, is based on the concept of a negatively charged electron spinning out of their orbit, invading another cell which in turn causes a cellular disruption that sends other subatomic particles off their respective orbits. This results in cellular chaos. Biomagnetic healing is able to passively provide a stimulus for the restoration of balance at a subatomic level and offset the devastating domino-effect of harmful free radicals.

Because every atom generates an electromagnetic (EM) field, we, along with all of nature, are imbued with the power of electromagnetism. It is also possible for us to channel our innate positive electromagnetic energy for healing both ourselves and others.

Stressing the importance of electromagnetism, Einstein said,

“we may therefore regard matter as being constituted by the regions of space in which the field is extremely intense .....There is no place in this new kind of physics both for the field and matter, for the field is the only reality.” (Our italics)

The mystic founder of Theosophy, Madame Blavatsky states similarly in different terms when she describes: “Matter is spirit at its lowest level and spirit is matter at its highest level.”

It is said that what may be described as matter, the nucleus of an atom, is so infinitesimal that if we were to gather all the nuclei of a human body, it would be no larger than a period at the end of a sentence. Thus, modern physics theorizes that what we call matter may not be particles at all, but the presence of an impenetrable electro-magnetic field.

Life, comprised of a complex chain of bio-chemical and physiological processes is activated and animated by an invisible bio-magnetic force. Apropos of this, Dr. F.K. Bellokossy of Denver Colorado, described life as an “infinitely intelligent interaction of electro-magnetic energies carried by chemical substances.”

Modern medicine has come to depend upon such high tech diagnostic procedures as the (ECG) electro-cardiogram, the (EEG) electroencephalogram, the (EMG) electromyogram to measure the electrical activity in the heart, the cerebral cortex and the skeletal muscles respectively. If there were no electrical energy in the body, such tests would not be possible.

From the perspective of bio-magnetics, health is based upon the individual cells of the body vibrating at a characteristic normal frequency. Disease, on the other hand, represents an abnormal change in cellular vibration. The therapeutic application of magnets and herbs, at the deepest level, is based on the principle of restoring normal cellular vibration.

This understanding should make magnetic therapy very accessible to those who have an energetic approach to treatment and it would include Traditional herbalism, TCM, Ayurveda and some Western ‘holistically’ oriented mind-body therapies.

MAGNETIC ENERGY: A FUNDAMENTAL EARTH NUTRIENT

The Earth’s magnetic field strength is about a half gauss.(1) While seemingly small, the magnetic field strength of gauss as a measurement is in proportion to the total mass of the magnet. With that, a half gauss in proportion to the size of the Earth becomes very significant. As a matter of fact, it is essential to life.

With the exploration of space in the 1960’s, there came increased awareness of the importance of magnetism in maintaining health, since it was found that astronauts, beyond the protective magnetic field of the Earth often returned with symptoms of psychiatric disturbances, calcium and mineral deficiencies along with other physiological disturbances. Conversely, companies who needed to conduct experiments or manufacture biological products outside of the magnetic field of the earth were, and continue to be major investors in the space program. Since that time, an integral aspect of space flight research involves studying the effects of magnetic fields on living organisms in space travel.

Part of the Earth’s magnetic field is created by the ‘ionosphere’-- a layer of air containing electrically-charged particles that extend from sixty to a hundred miles above the surface of the Earth. Extending some thousands of miles into space is the ‘magnetosphere’, sometimes called Van Allen Radiation Belt, after the scientist who discovered it. This is a huge swarm of radioactive particles that are threatening to life. If it were not for the fact that the harmful radiation particles are trapped by the Earth’s magnetic field, life on Earth would be impossible.

The half gauss strength of the Earth seems to be in a state of cyclic change so that over time, the Earth’s magnetic poles have repeatedly shifted and changed their location. Scientific research estimates that these reversals occur approximately every half to one million years. The most recent reversal occurred about 700,000 years ago. It has been documented that the Earth’s magnetic field has diminished about 50% of what it was 500-1000 years ago, with a full 5% decline recorded in the last 100 years. From this we can appreciate the vital importance of geomagnetic energy to life.

Drs. Barnwell and Brown of the Department of Biological Sciences, North Western University, USA, conducted a number of experiments exposing magnetic fields on living organisms and reported that, “There remains no reasonable doubt that all living organisms are extraordinarily sensitive to magnetic fields.” The effect of magnetic fields on living organisms continues in the USA and throughout the world but some of the most important medically is that done by the Japanese.

MAGNETIC FIELD DEFICIENCY SYNDROME
Dr. Kyoichi Nakagawa, MD, Director of Isuzu hospital, Tokyo, Japan, has described a pathological condition called Magnetic Deficiency Syndrome (MFDS) (2)that causes a variety of symptoms including stiff shoulders, back and neck, chest pains, habitual constipation and general fatigue.

He mailed questionnaires to 11,648 Japanese users of magnets 2.5 mm thick x 5 mm in diameter with external gauss strength of 590. Only the North magnetic side was in direct contact with the skin for treatment in these studies. Women represented 57% and men 43% of the total with a representative age group between 40 and 49 years.

Magnets were used for the following conditions: Stiff neck and shoulders 45.20 Lumbago 19.00% Neuralgia 13.90% Painful muscles 12.30% Rheumatism 1.30% Other 6.30% No reply 2.00%

Effects were usually noticed from the second to the fourth day. No adverse effects were reported, while over 90% of the users classified results as very efficacious, efficacious or fairly efficacious, and 105 as ineffective or not very effective.

A number of other studies were conducted with 400 subjects in 1976 by professors Akio Yamada and Shuwichi-Hirose of the Faculty of Medicine, University of Tokyo; professor Yamada, University, Juntendo, Tokyo; and Kyoshi Kurmskima, Kohnodai National hospital. Some tests were double-blind placebo using a variety of different magnetic devices. Symptoms addressed included pains in the back of the neck, shoulders, backs, arms, hands and legs. Effectiveness was in the range of 60 to 80% within a period of 7 to 14 days. No side effects were reported.

A double-blind study by Dr. Yoshio Oay treating 80 subjects with lumbar pain using strong magnetic belts containing magnets of 1,500 gauss. Fifty subjects were given the magnetic belts while 30 received placebos or less powerful belts of 200 gauss. All subjects using the full strength belts evidenced marked improvement while those using weaker magnets or placebos showed only slight or no marked improvement.

Some confuse the electro-magnetic energy generated by power lines, computer and TV monitors, electrical wiring in our homes and vehicles as equivalent. These, however, represent alternating current (AC) which is deranging to normal cellular metabolism. The earth and other metallic substances, in contrast represent a permanent magnetic field or direct current (DC) which when used appropriately can be integrative to the sub-atomic particles of cells.

Many factors, beside the natural cyclic waxing and waning of geomagnetic energy contribute to the diminishing of direct current (DC) magnetic energy to our body. Some of these are the result of interference from the AC current of man-made electromagnetic radiation which is incompatible with our bodies’ biomagnetic emanations which include television, radio, radar, household appliances, computers, electrical wiring in buildings, nearby power lines and other sources.

The effects of working and living in concrete and steel structures further cut us off from the Earth’s direct magnetic force. The automobile, train, jet plane, bus and other hi-tech modes of travel are other ways we are deprived of important natural magnetism from the Earth.

Shrinking open spaces, living high above sea level on ground covered with concrete and asphalt and the decreasing amount of ground water all contribute to lack of conductivity and Magnetic Field Deficiency Syndrome (MFDS).

The magnetic energy of our planet is responsible for the natural biorhythms of life. In Traditional Chinese Medicine these biorhythms describe how Qi or bio-magnetic energy is concentrated in certain areas of the body according to cycles of each day and season. It may also be concentrated in certain areas on the Earth that inexplicably have been able to retain their magnetic strength. These are recognized earth healing areas such as Lourdes, France and Sedona, Arizona.

Symptoms of MFDS may be similar to a variety of chronic conditions such as chronic fatigue syndrome, candida albicans and environmental allergies. MFDS typically is associated with a general malaise and low energy, frequent susceptibility to disease, tightness of the neck and shoulders, fibro-myalgic body pains, forgetfulness, headaches, digestive and circulatory problems and a general ‘foggy’ feeling.

At many healing retreats that I have both attended and conducted, we would hug a tree to experience the grounding of accumulated unnatural magnetic distortions. While this may be impossible to scientifically prove, anecdotally everyone who has ever hugged a tree will acknowledge a certain feeling of well-being afterwards, characterized by a lessening of mental and physical heaviness. Perhaps, this is another indication of an innate need for a certain type of natural energy that is lacking in our daily lives.

How do magnets work?
Magnetic energy has such all-encompassing, powerful effects that no one description of how they exert their positive therapeutic effects could adequately describe all the many complex ways it effects mind and body. However, one theory based on the concept of diseased cells losing their magnetic equilibrium, explains how topically applied magnets are able to support and encourage the normal functional relationship both within the molecular structure of each cell as well as positively influencing the relationships throughout the entire body-mind process.

Another theory is that magnets exert a powerful attraction to the iron content in the blood, penetrating the outer layers of skin, muscle and fatty tissue to the capillaries that feed directly into the bloodstream. By attracting iron and perhaps other inorganic molecules to a diseased area, circulation is increased. This is enhanced by the increase of oxygen and other vital nutrients to the affected site that assists in healing. The combined effect is regulating the pH of the cells and tissues, balancing, ionizing and oxygenating them and generally relieving congestion and pain by improving blood circulation.

Scientific research documents the following specific physiological effects of biomagnetic therapy:(3)

It effects increasing blood and oxygen circulation along with the nutrient carrying potential of the blood.
It is able to effect pH balance (acid-alkaline) which is often imbalanced in disease tissues.
It positively speeds up the migration of calcium ions to facilitate the healing of nervous tissue and bones (usually at least in half the time). Because of this it can also help remove the pathological buildup of calcium associated with arthritic joints.
It can powerfully influence the production of certain hormones from the various endocrine glands.
It stimulates and fosters enzyme activity and other related physiological processes .
If we consider that all functions of the body are essentially biomagnetic, we can understand how each body cell down to the DNA has a positive and negative biomagnetic field and that cell division, itself, is fundamentally a magnetic process that occurs throughout the various tissues and organs of the body. Physiological biochemistry that utilizes various amino acids requires biomagnetic energy to occur.

It has been found that the pineal gland, a tiny pine-cone shaped gland located directly in the center of the brain, responsible for the production of melatonin, enzymes, immune function, oxidation, carbohydrate metabolism, pigmentation by melanin and the cyclic patterns of sleep and awakening is regulated, according to Robert Becker in his book on biomagnetics called Cross Currents, “by exposure to steady magnetic fields of the same strength as the geomagnetic field”. Since the pineal gland and melatonin govern stress tolerance and the production of antioxidants that help control the harmful effects of free radicals that cause degenerative disease and aging, biomagnetics can have a very beneficial effect in helping to regulate the pineal gland to offset the natural and unnatural disruption of our exposure to natural geo-magnetic fields.

The following chart derived from Bengallineville’s book, Magnet Therapy: Theory and Practice outlines the various factors that are responsible for cellular magnetic disturbances:

Extrinsic Factors Intrinsic Factors
Natural Artificial Emotional stress
Solar flares X-rays Hormonal imbalances
Sunspot activity Cobalt-60 Infectious or pathogenic microorganisms
Eclipses Radium implants Deficiencies (iodine deficiency produces thyroid imbalances)
Moon phases
new and full moon
Nuclear plants using radioactive substances like Strontium-90 and Plutonium Deficient or imbalanced diet
Thunderstorms Radiation from color televisions and computer monitors. Ovulation
Cosmic rays Radiations from microwave ovens. Injuries (serious)
X-rays Chemical additives in food Injurious habits like excessive intake of alcohol and drugs.
Subsoil radiations
(geopathic zones)
Radioactive fallout from nuclear tests. Pregnancy
Certain planetary configurations Irradiated wheat and other foods. Menopausal period
High tension cables
Sound vibrations
Aluminum vessels used in cooking.

The safety of Biomagnetic Therapy
According to my personal experience and the experience of biomagnetic therapists and patients from around the world, magnets are corrective and regulating and therefore have little risk of either dependency or negative interaction with drugs. Magnets under 2500 gauss seem to be safe regardless of their North, South polarity (nevertheless, as a kind of energetic nutrient when used or worn daily in a mattress or shoe insole, I prefer using magnets no stronger that 1000 gauss strength). Over 3000 gauss strength, prolonged exposure to the wrong magnetic field polarity can create an minor imbalance in a small few. Therefore, exposure to high strength magnetic fields should be limited to a period of no long than 30 minutes at a time once or twice daily. This is generally not true, however, of high powered acuband magnets which can be left on the affected site for days providing the correct North-South magnetic field is in use.

I once met a women who was treating herself for a year for candida albicans and attendant symptoms, using very high strength magnets on a daily basis. She became frightened when she discovered that her hair began to fall out. This, despite the fact that most of her other symptoms were alleviated. and she even claimed to feel more energetic and vital than ever. Because the thought of losing her hair was so frightening to her, she resolved never to get near a magnet again. One day I was gratefully surprised to find a varied collection of high grade industrial strength magnets deposited in the waiting room of my clinic. I later asked her what she felt about the use of magnetic mattresses. She asserted that there was no comparison with her unfortunate experience and that their relatively low gauss strength made them virtually impossible to cause any significant harmful reaction.

Given the fact that it is impossible to predict what is otherwise known as an idiosyncratic reaction that an individual may have to practically any substance or thing, overwhelmingly the potential benefits of biomagnetic therapy makes them well worth a try for a wide variety of conditions.

A few positive experiences from my own clinical experience may serve to offset any concerns or negative impressions one may have to magnetic therapy. One was the prolonged use of high gauss magnets to completely eliminate and control the pain of a man diagnosed with incurable liver cancer. Because of the use of strong North facing magnets applied over the site of pain, he was able to spend his last days with a minimum amount of discomfort without the use of morphine or any other deadening pain medication. Two women, one with lung and another with breast cancer were able to minimize or completely eradicate any attendant pains in a similar way. Finally, A man with a diagnosed brain tumor, fastened a strong neodymium magnet on a cap which he wore for half to one hour periods twice each day. He was reexamined after a period of several months and doctors were amazed to find that his tumor had shrunk.

I must add, that all these patients were given adjunctive dietary and herbal therapy which I am sure contributed greatly to their response.

I hope that if for no other purpose than for simply the relief of pain, magnets should become either an adjunctive with other modalities or first therapeutic option.

Contraindications:
Despite the safety of magnets, there are some contraindications to be aware of. First, do not use magnets during pregnancy, on those who have a history of epilepsy, those wearing a pacemaker or other metal implants that might be dislodged by exposure to magnets. Strong magnets should be used with care on small infants and children, on the eyes, the brain or over the heart.

Healing Crisis Reaction:
Because magnets have such a positive effect on vascular circulation, some individuals may experience a temporary aggravation as a consequence of the increased discharge of toxins. Some healing crisis reactions may include symptoms such as light headedness, itching, allergic reaction, headache, sleepiness or a sensation of heat. When this occurs it is best to gradually ease into their use over a period of time.

Magnets
Materials used for magnets are those whose atoms can be permanently or semi-permanently lined up. Of all magnetic materials, an alloy comprised of one-fifth cobalt and four fifths platinum makes the most powerful magnet. Other materials used for magnets are Alnico magnets comprised of an alloy of aluminum, nickel, iron, cobalt and copper. These are about 10 times more powerful than steel magnets and 100 times more powerful than the Earth’s magnetic field. Ferrite magnets are comprised of carbonates of barium and iron. They are very powerful and significantly cheaper than alnico magnets but have the disadvantage of being very fragile.

MAGNETIC FIELDS
The magnetic field is the area where magnets exert their force. This is easily determined by holding a compass near the magnet to determine if the strength of the magnet overrides the magnetic force of the poles.

Magnetic Poles
Up until recently, scientific technical study of magnets describe the nature and effects of the two poles of a magnet as being the same. The years of research by Dr. Albert Roy Davis Ph.D., based on isolating and measuring the effects of the two poles has confirmed the different reactions they produce on living systems.

Dr. Davis was able to measure the direction of electron spin given off and transmitted from the two ends of magnet’s poles. From this, he was able to determine that the spin of the electrons were in reverse of each other. The electrons coming from the South pole of the magnet cycled and moved clockwise, to the right while those emanating from the North pole moved and cycled to the left or counterclockwise. (4)

This was confirmed from the use of complex technical magnetometers measuring the magnetic field of Earth from space. It was discovered that magnetic energy moves in an spiral forming the infinity pattern. Upon leaving either the North or South poles it travels halfway backward, clockwise or counterclockwise depending upon the exiting pole, to reenter and rephase itself inwards where it takes on the reverse spin in the opposite direction.

Dr. Davis was able to use a cathode ray vacuum to photograph in color the different North and South energies emitted from a long bar magnet. By a series of experiments first on animals and seeds and then on various fluids and foods, he was able to observe the physical effects on living systems. He confirmed the positive effects of the South pole energies in promoting rapid growth, fertility and a general metabolically heating effect as opposed to the inhibiting negative effects of the North pole that had a quieting, soothing and metabolically cooling effect.

Using untreated seeds as a comparison guide, Dr. Davis conducted a series of laboratory experiments on seeds and vegetables that were first exposed to the South pole magnet. An analysis of the end products of these plant products showed a noticeable increase in protein, sugars and oils as opposed to the control group. In contrast, those exposed to the North pole were lower in protein, sugars and oils than the control group.

He then studied the effect of South and North pole to the development and growth of Earthworms. Again, worms treated with South pole energy multiplied faster, grew more and larger than those treated with North pole energy. The protein of Earthworms is approximately 90% on the average but the effect of the South pole evidenced a marked increase of their protein content. He was also able to corroborate similar results on the growth of mice and rats.

As stated, the difference between magnetized and demagnetized material was that electrons in a magnetized object are aligned to go in a single rather than a seemingly randomized direction. The direction follows the magnetic poles of the Earth between the Southern and Northern hemispheres. (5)

Following the system described by Davis and Rawls, the bio-North (-) pole of a magnet has the same polarity as the true geographic North pole of the Earth. This bio-magnetic definition of North and South is in contradistinction to that of the National Bureau of Standards (NBS).

To determine the North-South direction of a magnet, tie a thread to the center of the magnet bar and the other end to a high place such as a ceiling or door frame. The suspended magnet will tend to spin and eventually position itself in the direction of geographical North and South as is determined by a compass. Permanently mark as South the side facing the South pole of the magnet with red paint or fingernail polish. With one marked magnet, it can be lined up and used to indicate the polarity of all other magnets.

Another method is to align the needle of a compass to point North. Bring one side or end of the magnet near the compass. The side of the magnet that is able to attract the North end of the compass needle is to be marked as North. All other magnets can be so marked and aligned to conform to one predetermined indicator magnet.

The gauss level employed is dependent upon the severity and duration of a complaint, together with the age and condition of the patient. It is always best to begin treatment with a low to medium gauss range and then increase to higher strength as necessary. On infants, young children, the frail and elderly, use only low strength magnets.

Finally, many biomagnetic therapists believe that magnets whose gauss measure less than 2500 can be used irrespective of their North or South polarity. It is my experience that the quickest and most dramatic results is when the North and South are appropriately applied according to an evaluation of the condition to be treated.

THE CARE AND HANDLING OF MAGNETS
To prevent them from losing their power or becoming totally broken and destroyed, magnets must be carefully handled. Dropping a magnet or subjecting it to a sharp blow may cause it to lose much of its strength. Furthermore, magnets subjected to temperatures in excess of 400 to 500 degrees Fahrenheit will lose all of their energy.

U-shaped magnets need to be placed on a flat bar or cylinder so that both ends of the magnet make contact with the metal. This is called a “Keeper” and prevents the dissipation of their magnetic power. For long, flat, wide surface magnets, bend a piece of iron, a tin can or a metal bar that can be fastened to both ends to provide a passage of energy between both poles and again prevent its lose into space. Try to keep different sizes and strengths of magnets away from each other to prevent them from bleeding off their charges.

All magnets can be stuck together but they should be positioned so that they are symmetrical in a single row and not balled up in any way with magnets of various sizes hanging off the ends. This is especially true of inferior quality magnets while with higher quality industrial strength magnets this is not a consideration.

Finally, magnets can be dangerous. The attractive force of even two 25 pound magnets is capable of inflicting serious injury to pinched fingers or other bodily parts that may get caught in their way. It is easier to handle strong magnets if they are wrapped in some kind of thin soft fiber such as a cotton wash towel.

Summary of Precautions in the Handling and Use of Magnets

a. Remove battery powered wristwatches and any other magnetic objects whose field can be altered by the presence of an externally applied magnet.

b. Avoid dropping, banging or heating magnets above 700 degrees Fahrenheit as this may dissipate their strength.

c. For U shaped magnets, use a “keeper” to connect the two ends when it is not in use.

d. Be careful in handling large heavy magnets as one can injure a body part if they were to suddenly slam together from a distance.

e. If possible, do not allow different sized magnets to remain together.

f. Keep magnets away from homeopathic remedies, computer hard drives, recording tape, credit cards, videos and CD’s to prevent their being damaged or erased. Magnets should also be kept away from battery operated watches, hearing aids and from individuals who have a pacemaker or any metallic parts placed in their body.

MAGNET THERAPY
Biomagnetic therapy is used for the control of pain, to stop infections, heal bones and scar tissue, rejuvenation of cells and balancing the body’s energy levels. It can also be effectively combined with most other therapeutic modalities. The strength of the magnetic field chosen is based on the magnetic strength, shape and size of the magnet selected based on the following considerations:

duration of the ailment
severity of the condition
total area to be treated
whether the diseased tissue is superficial or deep
the patient’s sensitivity
THERAPEUTIC APPLICATION OF THE South and North poles

Understanding and utilizing the unique application of the North and South poles of a magnet is fundamental to any biomagnetic therapeutic application.

The North pole of the magnet is cooling, sedating and dispersing. This corresponds to Traditional Chinese medicine definition of Yin or negative polarity.

The South polarity is heating, stimulating and accumulating. This corresponds to the TCM Yang or positive polarity.

All descriptions of positive and negative are not qualitative definitions but express the relationship between the opposite poles to each other and outer phenomena.

Indications Contraindications
SOUTH Tonifying, strengthening, building, heating, Yang in nature. Can be used for pains caused by weakness, coldness and deficiency (usually of a more chronic and ‘achy’ nature), also for hypometabolic conditions associated with low energy, weak digestion and weak immune system. Not for acute inflammatory conditions, bacterial infections, cancers and tumors, excess and stagnation conditions, excess Yang
NORTH Clearing, eliminative, detoxifying, dispersing, cooling, Yin in nature. Can be used for acute pains (sharp or burning) caused by heat, inflammation, hyper metabolic conditions, hypertensive conditions, insomnia, nervousness, infections and inflammations. Not for deficiency conditions, coldness, low metabolism, weakness
SOUTH AND NORTH COMBINED When pain, infection or another condition has gotten to a point where the body apparently lacks both the positive and negative energies to fully recover, both poles should be applied. This can be done either by alternating the application of North and South every 15 minutes or by applying a number of both North and South acu-magnets simultaneously over an area. This approach can also be used if the site of pain encompasses a large area. This is equivalent to a deficiency of both Yin and Yang. This harmonizing approach is one of the most commonly used because conditions are seldom either/or. It is especially useful when a single center of the pain or disease extends over a larger area or cannot be discerned. The disadvantage is that if the particular site can be found and appropriately treated, positive results are quicker.

Therapeutic application of North
The North magnetic pole is inhibiting and sedating. It slows down cellular metabolism. Because of this, it is cooling, soothing and retarding and useful for painful or inflammatory conditions such as:

Arthritis, spondylitis, prostatitis, lumbago, chronic and acute headaches, bruises, injuries, and sharp pains, bacterial infections, dysentery, skin ailments such as eczema, psoriasis and ringworm, tumors, mental retardation, epilepsy, cataract, glaucoma, neuralgia, nervousness, insomnia and initially on hernias.

It can be applied for the initial inflammatory response to any injury. When a condition assumes a more chronic state, however, one may need to switch to the more tonifying South pole to relieve symptoms.

North energies over 7000 gauss retard bacterial growth as well as cell and tissue regeneration. In the September 1990 “Journal of the National Medical Association”, it is clearly shown how the North magnetic pole inhibits the growth of lung carcinoma cells. In general, the North polarity tends to have a normalizing effect regardless of the length of exposure.

Therapeutic Application of the South
The South magnetic pole is heating, tonifying and augmenting and increases cellular metabolism. It can be used for the following conditions:

Paralysis, leucoderma, alopecia, hernia (later), asthma, tingling and numbness, to strengthen weak muscles and tissues, comatose conditions, after debilitating illness such as tuberculosis, gastroenteritis, scars, etc.

Because South promotes growth, it should never be directly applied on cancerous tumors, bacterial or viral infections or parasites. For regeneration of cells and tissues, magnets over 7000 gauss are extremely effective.

Applying Complete North and South Pole Magnetic Therapy

The bioelectrical force of the right side of the body is more Yin and inhibitory. If there is a lack of the Yin-inhibitory force, the left sided Yang-stimulating bioelectrical activity will appear to be in excess. This represents False Yang or Yin Deficiency. It can manifests as apparent hyperactivity with symptoms such as high blood pressure, hyperthyroidism, palpitations, hyperacidity, etc., all within the overall context of Deficiency and wasting. For these conditions, apply a Yang South magnet to the inside of the right wrist to restore equilibrium and harmony.

If the Yang left-sided energies of the body are weaker than the right-sided Yin, there will be hypoactive or apparent excess Yin symptoms. These can include low blood pressure, hypothyroidism, sluggish bowel movements, general lethargy, fluid retention and edema and hypoglycemia. These conditions are treated by applying the South pole to the inside of the left wrist.

Chronic pains, including chronic arthritic and rheumatic pains may also require bipolar treatment. Treating large organs systems such as the Liver and Kidneys also seem to respond better to the use of bipolar treatment.

To speed the mending of fractures by at least half, dual poles are used. South should be applied to the upper side of the break and North applied to the lower side.

Magnets come in many shapes and forms. Following are some of the more common ones that are used therapeutically used:

BI-POLAR MAGNETS AND THEIR THERAPEUTIC APPLICATIONS

In an attempt to utilize the combined North-South poles various bipolar magnets have been used. In 1981, a Swiss scientist Arno Latske introduced an alternating polarity magnet. He observed that when these bipolar magnets were applied over areas of pain, relief and healing occurred as a result of charged articles (i.e. electrolytes in the blood) that passed perpendicular to the magnetic field as a result of what in physics is called the Hall Effect. The North-South poles of the magnet were arranged in perpendicular strips so that the optimal response occurred with blood vessels that directly crossed the bipolar North-South magnetic strips. However, those vessels did not cross the bipolar arrangement sufficiently had the least therapeutic effect.

Next, a German scientist Horst Baermann, in an attempt to improve the Hall Effect, developed a magnet with concentric North-South strips The problem is that if the blood vessels did not cross near the center of the circle, there was little benefit from the alternating current.

In an attempt to circumvent the shortcoming of the previous two designs, an American engineer, Vincent Ardizzone, of Nu-Magnetics, Inc., NY, developed a checkerboard design that accommodate the random design of blood vessels. While the previous two designs had only two sides per pole adjacent to opposite poles, the four-sided checkerboard pattern significantly increased the possibility of a blood vessel being exposed to cross alternating poles. This design also allowed for the magnet to be cut into various shapes and sized without intervening gaps.

Acu Band Magnets
These are usually 0.16’ dia x 0.06’ thick and come with 0.8” dia Band-Aids. They are available in varying Gauss strengths and different alloys, usually in packets of 12. The most effective in my experience are acuband magnets that range from 3000 to 9000 gauss. Some are marked with a grove to indicate the North side, while others have a tiny protrusion, indicating the South.

One or more are taped directly over or near the affected site or acupuncture points, using either the North or South polarity as appropriate. Magnets with opposite polarity can be applied directly opposite or distally along a line or acupuncture meridian located nearest the affected area. North or South polarity can be used over acupuncture points and/or centers diagnostically related to the primary symptom.

For instance:

For acute colds and flu tape North facing magnets to Large Intestine 4, Large Intestine 11, Triple Warmer 5 and Governor 14.

For chronic back ache that is not inflamed, tape South facing magnets over Bladder 23 and Kidney 3. One can apply a North directly over the acute ‘trigger’ points of pain and further down the Bladder meridian over Bladder 40 (aka 54) behind the knee.

For insomnia apply a North magnet to Yin Tang point between the eyebrows and two North magnets to one of the two Anmien points behind the ear.

For fatigue and low energy apply South magnets to stomach 36, conception vessel 6 or 4 and bladder 23 on the lower back. In addition, one can also apply a North magnet to large intestine four on the hand to help clear any Heat and toxicity.

For promoting the healing of fractures apply alternating South and North magnets directly along the affected area. These can be simultaneously used with North to reduce any inflammation in the area.

These are only a few of many possibilities based on a knowledge of acupuncture meridians and points. It is a good idea to have a razor available to shave off any hair that may prevent the Band-Aid from sticking. Acu-magnets can be left on for a week, taken off briefly and reapplied if they are still needed. If there is any prolonged aggravation or discomfort, they should be removed or reverse the North-South polarity.

Large Block Magnets
These are iron ferrite magnets which can be purchased from industrial magnet manufacturers and come in various sizes and very high Gauss. Since these are made of fragile ceramic, they are not easy to handle. In general one should learn the technique of sliding them apart or together when needed and keep delicate fingers out of the way in case they inevitably snap together.

Smaller ones can be ordered in various sizes and dimensions and are available in dual color to easily distinguish between the North and South polarity. The strength of these magnets may be deceptive. They are usually available from 1000 to 3600 gauss or higher. Because they cover a larger area, even a lower strength magnet can exert a powerful therapeutic effect. Two magnets can be used to attach to clothing, North or South as needed.

The highest Gauss magnets are Neodymium (NeoMax) magnets. They are composed of iron, boron and neodymium, one of the rarest metals on Earth and their strength range from 2000 to 3600 gauss. Their use was first promoted by the International Medical Research Center based on the discovery and work of Professor Goesta Wollin’s development of a Universal Cancer Spiral Theory. Professor Wollin discovered that spirals are found throughout nature, down to the basic shape and structure of DNA. In 1987, the Swedish press widely reported Professor Wollin’s discovery of the Universal Cancer Spiral. He claimed that when supermagnets are applied to cancerous tumors, the magnetic spirals, which are larger, would superimpose themselves and destroy the smaller cancerous cell spirals.

Professor Wollin’s round neodymium magnets were specifically developed to treat cancer. Usually they are sold in pairs. The North sided magnet is intended to be placed directly over the cancer or tumor while the South is worn over the thymus located on the sternum between the breasts. This is used to help stimulate the body’s immune system. While the North magnet directly over the site of the cancer can be left on for a prolonged period, the South over the thymus should only be applied twice daily for no longer than 30 minutes.

These larger magnets are available encased in plastic and color coded so the two polarities are easily determined. The large neodymium magnets or stronger ferrite magnets are indicated in prescriptions for treating most acute and chronic conditions.

Bio-magnetic therapy also consists of systematically laying strong magnetic bars over affected areas for a duration of approximately 30 minutes to an hour two or three times daily. For many conditions the application of several acu-magnets will be more convenient and often as effective, especially for less serious conditions.

Magnetic Mattresses and Mattress Pads
Magnetic mattresses, mattress pads and pillows are designed to provide a sound and restful sleep. The result is that we awaken with more energy, alertness and fewer aches and pains. For those who are bedridden, they powerfully help to prevent bedsores. The best utilize 800 gauss which is safe for ongoing nightly use. They are firm and made with the finest quality patented rubberthane with a grid of nub-like protrusions that stimulate vital energy centers and aid in promoting better circulation and lymphatic flow while sleeping.

The pillow is firm and in addition to the magnets, has a strip of ceramic tiles that help to redistribute heat away from the head. This is because of the belief that it is best to have the head cool and the feet warm when sleeping. Many with chronic neck and shoulder aches and those who snore excessively or suffer from sleep apnea (stopped breathing while sleeping) have received significant benefit from the magnetic pillow.

Because the Japanese have had a long history of appreciation for natural health products it is estimated that one out of eight Japanese use a magnetic mattress sleep system.. This is further reflected in the lead the Japanese have taken in researching magnetic and other natural magnetic products.

A few individuals may experience temporary discomfort when first sleeping on a magnetic sleep system. This is because with greater circulation, more toxins are being flushed out at an increased rate. For these, it may take gradual periodic use over several days or weeks. The time spent acclimatizing to it is worth the investment to one’s personal health and wellness and provides a significant passive contribution long term health and wellness. In the resources section at the end of the book there is a list of distributors and suppliers of these and other magnet products.

Magnetized Water
The proclaimed healing powers of various naturally occurring baths at places such as Lourdes, France, Sedona, Arizona and Jesus Chahin’s well in Tlacote, Mexico, occurs in areas where there is reportedly higher naturally occurring magnetic energy. One way to naturally magnetize water is to run it through 30 feet of sand where it will emerge negatively poled because of the effect of minute quartz sand crystals. This water emerges saturated with oxygen that is able to kill germs, build bodily strength and support the immune system. Water so treated will show a change of temperature, surface tension, viscosity and electrical conductivity. Just as chemicals change weight after being subjected to magnetic fields, so does water. More hydroxyl (OH-) ions are generated to form calcium bicarbonate and other alkaline particles. Normal water has a pH level of around 7, while magnetized water can reach 9.2 pH after exposure to a 7000 gauss strength magnet. This has been shown to be enough to destroy cancer cells.(6)(Barefoot and Reich).

Cancer is practically unknown to the Hopi Indians of Arizona and the Hunza of Pakistan, so long as they drink from their local water supply which is rich in rubidium and potassium in the case of the Hopi water and rich in caesium and otassium for the Hunza people. The salts of these alkalinizing minerals have the effect of counteracting toxic acidity by raising body pH. Cancer cells are destroyed with an enriched oxygenated environment.

By standing a container of water on either the South or North pole of a magnet for a period of approximately 24 hours, one can imbue it with specific Yin, sedating and dispersing properties or Yang, tonifying and coalescing properties. This water can then be taken internally throughout the day. Water can also be potentized by tying or taping South and North pole magnets to opposite sides of a rectangular bottle or jug.

Herbal teas intended for tonification can be augmented by setting the cup of tea on a South Magnetized surface for an hour or so before drinking. If the tea consists of dispersing, anti-inflammatory or sedative herbs, then the North pole of the magnet should be used.

Special magnetic cups and containers for making magnetized water are available from various magnetic product suppliers and Japanese sources.

Magnetic Insoles
There are magnetic insoles that fit in the shoes. One side has small bumps to provide added foot reflexology stimulation to the feet and the other side is smooth. The bipolar magnets are not only in the bumps but throughout the entire surface.

The feet and legs are sometimes called the ‘second heart’ because return circulation from this area of the body is vital to health. Besides being highly effective for all foot problems (such as diabetic and other neuropathies) regular use of magnetic insoles increase energy and vitality throughout the day. Like the magnetic bed, wearing these insoles constitute an effective passive long term investment in one’s health.

Magnetic Balls
These are remarkable because while they have a very low gauss strength, when the balls are rapidly revolved or manipulated they shoot their electrons out for some distances.They can be rolled on the body to relieve injury and pains. They can also rolled in the palms to relieve stiffness and arthritic pains in the hands and fingers.

Electro magnets
These are used by practitioners and hospitals for chronic disease including bone and scar tissue healing, sciatica, arthritis, and sports injuries. Sports therapists were among the first to introduce the use of medical magnets. The combined use of electromagnetic machines with permanent magnets has been found to reduce by half the time required for healing injuries, sprains, tendon and muscle injuries. These machines are especially effective for treating large areas of pain.

Magnetic Jewelry
Necklaces can be used for diseases of the chest, throat, neck, shoulders, sore throat, asthma, irregular heart beat and angina. Bracelets and rings are worn for controlling blood pressure as well as hand and arm pain. They are available in many designs ranging from 1600 to 5000 gauss.

Magnetite or Lodestone
These are naturally occurring magnets associated with a type of iron ore. Generally the Gauss rating is low, from 300 to no more than 700 Gauss. Since ancient times, jewelry in the form of necklaces, bracelets and rings were worn for various therapeutic reasons. The Egyptians believed the magnet had a divine power and wore them to relieve headache, gout, dropsy and to maintain, vitality and health. Cleopatra (69-30 BC) supposedly wore a polished lodestone magnet on her forehead to maintain her beauty.

BIOMAGNETIC TREATMENT OF THE WHOLE BODY
Biomagnetics can be used to treat the body systemically as oposed to their use over specific acupuncture points or what are known as pain or ‘trigger” points.

There is a difference in the energy between the upper from the lower, the right from the left sides of the body. The area from the chest upwards tends to reflect the more positive, outgoing energy. With imbalance, this can manifest to extreme with symptoms ranging from skin eruptions, mental excitation, eye, ear, nose, throat and lung problems and hypertension. For this reason the North magnet is more frequently indicated in this area to disperse the excess. The lower area of the body, below the umbilicus, is often over extended upward and needs South or coalescing, grounding energy. The right side of the body is the more positive side and usually gets the North magnet while the left side which is more negative, receives the South magnet. Thus the following configurations have been adopted for systemic treatment:

Diseases above the navel: Place the right hand on the North magnet and the left hand on bio South for 15 to 30 minutes.

Diseases below the navel: Place the right foot on the North pole and the left foot on the South.

Diseases on the right side of the body: Right hand on the North pole and right foot on the South pole.

Diseases on the left side of the body: left hand on the North pole and left foot on the South.

Diseases of the digestive system: right hand on the North pole and left foot on the South.

Miscellaneous Use of Magnets
Negating the toxic effects of chemicals, sprays and preservatives from food and water.

Using a strong neodymium magnet, pass it over the food or water 7 times with the North or negative facing downwards.
Follow this by passing the positive South magnet 7 times to energize the food and water and make it easier to digest and absorb.
Purifying house water with 2 or 4 magnets

Fasten one or two (depending on the size of the pipe) negative, North magnets against the water pipe leading into the house. Approximately 2 inches higher, fasten one or two positive South magnets. These can be taped to the water pipes.

According to Dr. Albert Roy Davis, water treated in this way showed little appreciable difference in terms of mineral content, solids, pH or other factors. Testing for the relative amounts of hydrogen and oxygen it was found that the oxygen level was lower in the treated water as compared with the untreated. While hydrogen amounts were the same, the hydrogen ions were altered to present a much higher degree of activity. This was checked repeatedly with the same findings.

Water treated with either North or South magnetic field tended to reduce the nitrogen in the water, preventing it from going stale. This made it safer for both human consumption and for aquarium fish for a longer period.

Potentizing seeds
Dr. Davis discovered that seeds exposed to the magnetic force fields of the South pole for anywhere from 6 to 200 hours, when planted resulted in an improved germination and growth result, hardier plants with higher yield of fruit or vegetable products. Exposing seeds to the influence of the North magnetic polarity field resulted in thin, tall plants with poor yields. A simple method is to presoak seeds by placing them in a dish or cup with water on top of a South facing magnet for 24 hours or so before planting.

Fuel Economy
In addition to the above, there are various magnetic devices that can be fixed to the combustion system of automobile engines to economize fuel production. A five star resort in Kawaii, Hawaii, installed magnets on the natural gas system of their multimillion dollar units and found that they were able to save $60,000 a year because the gas burned cleaner.

Bibliography
The Anatomy of Biomagnetism by Albert Roy Davis Ph.D.

Medical Magnets, Nature’s Healing Energy by Barbara Gordon

Magnet Therapy Theory and Practice by Dr. Neville S. Bengali

Discovery of Magnetic Health by George J. Washnis and Richard Z. Hricak,

Magnet Therapy by Holger Hannemann

Getting Started in Magnetic Healing and The Body Magnetic, both books by Dr. Burl Payne.

Healing Magnetism by Heinz Schiegl

Biomagnetic Handbook by Philpott, MD and Sharon Taplin

The Art of Magnetic Healing by Santwani

Magnetic Field Therapy Handbook by R. Allen Walls

Magnetics and Cancer
It should first be made clear that ARIZONA UNIPOLE MAGNETICS and the AUTHOR of this website DO NOT MAKE ANY CLAIM THAT BIOMAGNETS HEAL. But it should also be noted that the MRI (Magnetic Resonance Imaging) device detects cancer by seeking and mapping damaging SOUTH (positive) magnetic energy within the body.

It is a fact that people are using Negative Field Magnetic Therapy to starve cancer. Research has and is showing very promising results.

*** Please Note:
All information is for educational use only and is not to be construed as medical advice.

The following information is from
Cancer The Magnetic / Oxygen Answer ed. 2003,
Written by William H. Philpott, M.D.
click here for Dr. Philpott's credentials

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Negative Magnetic Field Therapy

Below are scientifically proven and documented facts about this therapy.

Cancer can not exist in a continuously applied strong negative magnetic field.
In his book "The Magnetic / Oxygen Answer for Cancer, 2001 ed." Dr. Philpott quotes the following statements and documentation which support his theory:

"The positive magnetic field encourages cancer growth. The negative magnetic field inhibits cancer growth."
Source: "Evaluating Perspectives on the Exposure Risks from Magnetic Fields" from "Journal of the National Medical Association" 82:9 September 1990

"The biological response to a static positive magnetic field is acid-hypoxia. The biological response to a negative magnetic field in alkaline-hyperoxia. Cancer implanted on the skin dies in response to a static negative magnetic field."
Source: "The Magnetic Blueprint of Life" written by Albert Roy Davis and Walter Rawls, published by Acres USA, Kasas City, MO, 1979

In 1982, Robert O. Becker and G. Sheldon documented that a static positive magnetic field is a signal of stress and a negative magnetic field is present during healing.
Source: "The Body Electric, Electromagnetism and the Foundation of Life" published by William Morrow and Company, NY., 1986

In 1996, Raymond Raylman documented that a strong, prolonged magnetic field killed cancer.

Arthur Trappier, in 1990, documented that it is the negative magnetic field that kills cancer.

Dr. Philpott Concludes:

IT IS AN ESTABLISHED FACT THAT A PROLONGED SUSTAINED STATIC MAGNETIC FIELD PRODUCES CANCER CELL REMISSION.

Magnetic therapy of cancer replaces the acid-hypoxia-dependent transferaseenzyme catalysis (fermentation) producing ATP with alkaline-hyperoxia oxidoreductase enzyme catalysis (oxidation reduction) of producing ATP. Cancer cells are thus robbed of their ability to produce ATP by fermentation. Cancer cells die because they can not produce ATP in an alkaline-hyperoxia medium.

Acid-hypoxia is the central casual factor in degenerative diseases in general and cancer development in particular.

The initiating causes of of acid-hypoxia are many, such as, toxic reactions, physical injury, local or systemic stress, prolonged emotional stress, nutritional deficiencies and so forth.

Cancer cells die in the presence of a continuous static negative magnetic field. Both "peer reviewed" and non-peer reviewed publications confirm the death of cancer cells from a static negative magnetic field of sufficient gauss strength and sufficient prolonged duration. A static magnetic field is the breat of life for human cells and the kiss of death for invading microrganisms and cancer cells. Definative negative magnetic field therapy for the treatment of cancer is justified and recommended by both peer reviewed and non-peer reviewed evidence. .

Importance Of Polarity
Effects of Magnetic Energy on Living Metabolic Systems

The worlds leading authority Dr. William H. Philpott states in his Biomagnetic Handbook "The application of both a positive and negative magnetic field at the same time in the same area does not serve a useful purpose."

He is basically talking about bipolar magnets which account for about 95% of all magnetic therapeutics sold today.
About Dr. Philpott

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

NORTH POLE
( - ) Negative magnetic field energy:

Increases cellular oxygen
Pulls fluids & gases
Reduces fluid retention
Encourages deep restorative sleep
Fights infection
Promotes mental acuity
supports biological healing
Reduces inflammation
Normalizes acid base balance
Relieves/stops pain
Reduces/dissolves fatty deposits
Reduces dissolves calcium deposits SOUTH POLE
( + ) Positive magnetic field energy:

Decreases cellular oxygen
Pushes fluids & gases
Increases intracellular edema
Stimulates wakefulness
Accelerates micro-organism growth
Inhibits biological healing
Can increase inflammation
pH level becomes more acidic
Increases pain
Encourages fat depositing
Characteristically negative magnetic energy normalizes and calms while positive magnetic energy disorders and overstimulates the biological system. Micro-organisms and parasites (including those harboured in the human) overgrow with positive magnetic energy exposure and are inhibited by negative magnetic pole exposure

.Present Day Observations on Magnetics

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Variations in the earth's magnetic field are important to all living beings on the planet. Scientists are aware that this field is in a constant state of flux as it is influenced by the solar winds, shifts in the magnetic core, and the presence of ferromagnetic substances in the earth's crust.

Current research shows that the earth's field periodically waxes and wanes, and even reverses itself entirely. Though the reasons for this are not currently known, geological evidence indicates that the strength of the field gradually grows weaker, reaches a minimum or disappears entirely, and then builds again the opposite direction. This results in a reversal of the North and South magnetic poles. Scientists estimate that such reversals take place about every one-half to one million years. The most recent reversal took place about 700,000 years ago.

Other scientist have documented that the earth's magnetic field has degraded about 50% over the last 500 - 1,000 years, with a full 5% decline being recorded in the past 100 years. Calculations are that if this degradation continues at its present rate, there will not be a sufficient magnetic field to support life within 1500 years.

Interestingly, certain locales on Earth have inexplicably retained the strength of their magnetic fields. Among them, areas such as Sedona, Arizona and Lourdes, France, are destinations to which countless persons travel annually to experience feelings of well-being and to seek healing.

Much research and interest is now directed toward the electrical nature of life. Scientists have established beyond any doubt that all living cells are electrical in nature. The functioning of the cells and nervous system of every living being is based on direct current (DC) and pulsed DC energy. Without this energy, there is no life. Each individual cell possesses a positive electrical charge at its nucleus and a negative electrical charge on its outer membrane.

This positive-negative polarization allows each cell to function in an orderly and healthy manner. As cells perform their normal bodily functions, this electromagnetic charge wears down. The body attempts to revitalize these "tired" cells by sending pulses of electromagnetic energy from the brain through the nervous system to recharge the cells and strengthen the polarized field.

The energy can be diminished or blocked conditions found throughout today's environment, resulting in a host of modern maladies. These can range from headaches and fatigue to tumors and disruption of both circulatory and digestive systems, along with other specific and non-specific ailments.

Noted researchers, including the U.S. Surgeon General, warn of the harmful effects of the "electric smog" from televisions, radio, radar, electric blankets, waterbed heaters, household appliances, excessive exposure to computers, power lines, and other sources.

Sensitive instruments show that man's mushrooming alternating current (AC) electronic technology is creating interference with the earth's natural magnetic fields. Within the typical home or work environment, the AC radiation is sufficiently prolific enough to overpower the earth's natural magnetic field by up to 16 times. In today's buildings, the iron and steel alone can deplete the magnetic field by more than half.

The earth produces its own direct current (DC) magnetic pulses that support the natural biorhythms of all living things. However, as mentioned earlier, scientists are becoming increasingly alarmed that the present-day magnetic field of the earth has and continues to diminish significantly.

A radiation researcher at Arizona State University believes that the ordinary 60 cycle household AC electricity and higher frequencies such as those from radio broadcasts and radar can cause memory loss, headaches, changes in heart rates, blood chemistry and general malaise.

European scientists report such daily exposure is cumulative and contributes to sluggishness, headaches, and both digestive and circulatory problems. At the University of Colorado in Boulder, Dr. Nancy Wertheimer has reported increased cancer among children in "high current" dwellings.

According to Dr. William Adey, an American cancer researcher, this "electronic smog" can block the brains electromagnetic signals to the cells, thereby undermining the body's disease-fighting ability and promoting tumors.

Dr. Robert O. Becker, M.D., one of America's pioneers in the field of research on regeneration and electrical currents in living things, has achieved what have been termed "miraculous" results in healing with biomagnetic therapy. He has gone so far as to speculate that electro-pollution, in addition to causing some cancers, may be contributing to the onslaught of such maladies as Reye's syndrome, Lyme disease, Legionnaire's disease, and AIDS.

Kyoichi Nakagawa, M.D., one of the world's foremost authorities on magnetism and its therapeutic effects on the human body, claims that the continuing degrading of the earth's magnetic field, combined with mans electronic environment, is responsible for a broad range of ailments which he labels as the Magnetic Deficiency Syndrome. These ailments include stiffness of the shoulders, back pain, neck pain, uncertain low back pain, chest pains for no specific reason, habitual headache, heaviness of head, dizziness, insomnia for uncertain reasons, habitual constipation and general fatigue.

I think it is worth noting, that in Japan, one out of every five households has some Natural Magnetic Field and/or Far Infrared Field product to assist in offsetting some of the difficulties cited.

______________________________________________________________________________

| File Name : PAYNE.ASC | Online Date : 11/24/94 |

| Contributed by : | Dir Category : BIOLOGY |

| From : KeelyNet BBS | DataLine : (214) 324-3501 |

| KeelyNet * PO BOX 870716 * Mesquite, Texas * USA * 75187 |

| A FREE Alternative Sciences BBS sponsored by Vanguard Sciences |

|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|

North or South or East or West Magnetism?

By Buryl Payne, Ph. D.

What and how to apply magnetic forces to the human body or other biological

systems need not be debated. The question can usually be answered by

reasonably objective methods and some general principles.

About fifteen years ago, it was discovered that the body's muscles will

strengthen or weaken, upon the application of external or internal stimuli.

Many chiropractors developed and perfected this technique and it came to be

called "applied kiniesology", or more simply, "muscle testing".

In its simplest form, the person being tested holds one arm out in a

horizontal position and resists while a tester applies an even pressure near

the wrist to force the arm down. When various stimuli are applied to the

body, such a colored lights, topical applications, foods, vitamins, mineral

preparation, or homeopathic remedies, are held in hand or taken orally, the

arm muscle will be noticeably weaker if that substance is not good for the

body, or stronger if it is good for the body.

Walter Rawls, Jr., patented the technique of using muscle testing to determine

the activity level of glands and organs by the use of permanent magnets. This

system was further developed by Drs. Richard and Mary Broeringmeyer and used

to indicate which magnetic polarity ought to be applied to reflex points, or

at the sites of injury, as well at a particular gland or organ, to bring it

back to optimum functioning.

Years of experience by the Broeringmeyers, myself and other magnetotherapists

have validated the use of this system in determining what magnetic strength

and polarity is most effective for the body. When pulsed magnetic fields are

used, muscle testing will also indicate the optimum pulse repetition rate as

well as the optimum intensity. Usually pulse rate and gauss strength are not

sharply resonant parameter, but polarity is clearly indicated.

The technique is described in the authors's two books (see references).

The process of muscle testing is not completely objective, although when there

is a large difference it is usually unequivocal. Its use has been expanded

and refined to include the testing of substances that might be applied on to

the body, to the body, or ingested for various healing techniques, and for

psychological diagnosis.

However muscle testing can be affected by the state or intention of the tester

as well as the testee. When the difference between a "yes" or a "no" is

slight, subjective factors become more intrusive.

Muscle testing also requires the assistance of another person. Although a

couple of muscle strength techniques for self testing have been devised, they

are quite subjective.

Now, a more objective means has been developed, called the Electronic Muscle

Tester. This research instrument measures the pressure exerted between a

finger and thumb, indicating the result on a meter. In practice of

magnetotheraphy, one applies on pole of a magnet, makes a strength

determination, then applies the other pole, making a second test.

The Electronic Muscle Tester is reasonably objective, after a little practice,

and can be easily self-administered. It can also provide some indication of

relative intensity of a stimulus or treatment. With the use of this

technique, there is no need to argue about east and west and north and south

magnetic polarity, on simply asks the body.

For example, in the case of a wound to the body, the first reaction of the

body is usually inflammation. Treatment with the bionorth polarity is

indicated by muscle testing. However, after the inflammation and pain are

reduced, muscle testing will indicate that treatment with the biosouth pole

is called for. This will stimulate cell growth and healing. The alert

magnetotherapist will watch for this transition, for to continue to treat with

only bionorth would probably slow down the healing process. But in any case,

the use of muscle testing, no matter what means is used, provides the answer

in about 90% of the cases.

When muscle testing does not give clear results, yet magnetotheraphy is

clearly called for, there are four general principles which may be used as a

guideline. These are:

1. The biosouth pole stimulates and promotes healing,

growth and activity.

2. The bionorth calm, sedates, reduces inflammation and

retards growth.

3. If it feels good, keep doing it! If it doesn't help,

or makes the condition worse, wait a short time and

then apply the polarity.

4. Don't treat tumors, cancers or infections with the

biosouth pole.

The different types of action which have been found to be associated with each

pole is briefly summarized in the following table:

BioSouth Polarity

Stimulates

Tonifies

Increases Circulation

Dilates

Increase Acidity

BioNorth Polarity

Sedates

Inhibits

Cools

Soothes

Slows

Reduces Inflammation

Shrinks Tumors

Decrease Acidity

To simply expose each person to the same polarity, or to decide in advance

which polarity they should use, would be an error. Ideally each person should

be able to self test and set the parameters for his or her own benefit. The

technology now exists to do that.

Magnetism is mysterious to most people. This makes it more difficult to use

in magnetotheraphy and other applications.

References:

Broeingmeyer, R and M. Energy Training Manual, Health

Enterprises, PO Box 628, Murray Hill, Ky. 42701

Payne, Buryl - The Body Magnetic. Psychophysics Press,

Revised 1990.

Applying Magnets to the Body, Psychophysic Press, 1994.

(Books are available from Redwing Books, 44 Linden St.,

Brookline, Mass 02144)

Patent:

Davis, Albert, Method of using magnetic fields to conduct

a screening diagnostic examination. US Patent No. 4,234,395

Instrument and Magnets:

The Electronic Muscle Tester, Pulsed Magnetic Instruments,

Diagnostic Test Magnets, etc. are available from Magnetic

Health Products, Box 539, Accord, MA 02018.

****

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

(word processor parameters LM=8, RM=75, TM=2, BM=2)

Taken from KeelyNet BBS (214) 324-3501

Sponsored by Vangard Sciences

PO BOX 1031

Mesquite, TX 75150

There are ABSOLUTELY NO RESTRICTIONS

on duplicating, publishing or distributing the

files on KeelyNet except where noted!

June 27, 1992

BIOMAG1.ASC

--------------------------------------------------------------------

This file shared with KeelyNet courtesy of :

Alternet BBS 508-827-5274

presents a selection from the electronic edition of

Health Consciousness, issue 16. Health Consciousness permits

electronic duplication provided proper credit is given to Health

Consciousness and the authors.

Health Consciousness, an Holistic magazine...

and a forum for accent in credible medicine,

Roy Kupsinel, M.D., Editor/Publisher

INVITES YOU TO SUBSCRIBE RATE IS ONLY

$18.00 per year (six issues)

Complimentary Copy Available Upon Request

($2.00 Postage & Handling)

Health Consciousness

P. O. Box 550 Oviedo, FL 32765

407/365-6681 Fax 407/365-1834

--------------------------------------------------------------------

Biomagnetics: The Magnetic Answer

By William H. Philpott, M.D.

The Value of Using Negative Magnetic Energy in Diabetes Mellitus

(Contains some professional-level material.)

Central to the non-insulin dependent diabetic (Type II diabetes)

is insulin resistance. Over the past twenty years, I have tested

several thousand patients for disordered carbohydrate metabolism in

relationship to single-food test meals. Several hundred of these

were also tested for insulin response to single-food test meals

which were also correlated with the degree of carbohydrate disorder.

The primary diagnosis of these patients was a wide spectrum of

physical and mental disorders, including several hundred maturity-

onset diabetes cases and a few insulin dependent juvenile diabetics.

From these studies, solid evidence emerged that the insulin

resistance of Type II non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus is

produced by maladaptive reactions largely to foods and, to a lesser

extent, common environmental chemicals.

There is a routine clearance of insulin resistance as well as the

carbohydrate disorder by avoidance of the foods and substances

evoking the maladaptive reactions, which consist of an array of

Page 1

physical and emotional symptoms as well as higher-than-normal blood

sugar response.

The carbohydrate disorder, of brief duration, and the chronic

carbohydrate disorders justifying the diagnosis of Diabetes Mellitus

Type II behave alike. Therefore, it is concluded that Diabetes

Mellitus Type II is simply an extension of these lesser carbohydrate

disorders. Both are readily reversed by avoidance of the

maladaptive reactive substance. Thus, initial avoidance (usually

three months) and later spacing by rotation with a frequency

(usually of four days or more) the symptoms and carbohydrate

reaction, both the minor and major carbohydrate disorders and the

insulin resistance, is initially corrected and remains corrected.

Unfortunately, there is a low level of awareness of the ecologic

causes of insulin resistance carbohydrate disorder. The stress of

obesity has been highlighted for its significance since some 80% of

diabetics at the time of their onset are obese. This obesity

certainly is a significant stress that could be corrected. However,

surprisingly, the insulin resistance and the carbohydrate disorder

was corrected immediately by avoidance and spacing before there was

any time for weight reduction to have occurred.

It is a strange fact of scientific medicine that this is so

little known despite the fact that a statistical verification has

been published in the right place, that is, the Journal of Diabetes.

For years, it has been the custom to consider the presence and level

of hormones and enzymes to be the producer of biological reactions,

without any consideration of an energy source making such reactions

possible. This belief in spontaneously occurring biological

responses is no longer tenable now that we understand the role of

electromagnetics as the energy that governs biological responses.

Specifically, it is the energy of magnetism which makes

biological responses possible. For years, it was customary to

consider magnetism as one unit of energy. However, it has been

demonstrated conclusively that magnetism is two energies THAT HAVE

OPPOSITE BIOLOGICAL EFFECTS when these energies are separated. It

is the balance between these two energies that governs metabolism.

Magnetism is a push and pull system. The CLOCKWISE spin of a

positive magnetic field PUSHES and the COUNTERCLOCKWISE spin of the

negative magnetic field PULLS. This can be illustrated by the

energy of a moving object such as a car. The front end of a car

pushes while the back end of a car pulls, yet the moving car is one

unit of energy, however, with two opposite effects.

It also should be understood that negative magnetic fields and

positive magnetic fields are both magnetic energy with 180 degrees

opposite response in biological systems. Life energy is the balance

between these two systems. An example is acid-base balance. The

positive magnetic pole is acidifying and the negative magnetic pole

is alkalinizing in terms of biological response to single magnetic

fields from a unipoled magnet.

Biological life has a balance between acidity and alkalinity.

There is evidence that atheromatous plaques are the result of amino

acids crosslinking sulphur and fatty acid bonds when the pH of the

blood drops below normal. There is clinical evidence justifying the

Page 2

conclusion that a negative magnetic field keeps the pH buffer system

intact, thus preventing crosslinking and also that thecrosslinking

can be reversed by a negative magnetic field.

Another important issue is the demonstrated evidence that the

positive magnetic pole is inflammatory- evoking and the negative

magnetic pole is anti-inflammatory and inflammatory resolving.

Understanding the oppositeness of biological responses evoked by the

separate positive and negative magnetic fields is critically

important, because with this knowledge, exposure of tissues to

single magnetic poles can provide a predictable, governing

capability over the biological responses being evoked in those

tissues.

It has been my custom to routinely correlate saliva pH with

maladaptive reactions to foods and chemicals. These reactions are

routinely acid. They can be controlled by a negative magnetic

field. Inflammation and an associated acidity can be controlled by

exposure to a negative magnetic field. How can we understand the

cause of insulin resistance being caused by maladaptive reactions to

foods, chemicals and inhalants?

The formulation is on this order:

these maladaptive reactions, whether they be allergic,

addictive, toxic or otherwise unexplainable inflammatory

reactions, cause an inflammation edema of cells and whole tissue

groups to occur.

Insulins' assignment is to carry blood glucose through the cell

wall into the cell. A cell and its membrane that is swollen

cannot make proper use of insulin, thus the blood sugar remains

in the blood and is not transferred into the cell.

When these cells or tissues are placed in a negative magnetic

field, the inflammatory edema is corrected and insulin works as

it should. Therefore, not only should we use avoidance and

spacing of maladaptive reacting substances, but also tissue

exposure to negative magnetic field energy to make a correction

of the insulin resistance in maturity-onset diabetes mellitus.

Exposure to negative magnetic field energy ahead of a meal has

been conclusively demonstrated as materially reducing the

chances of a maladaptive reaction to foods.

Maladaptive reactions to most environmental substances are

essentially the same process as maladaptive reactions to foods. If

and when a reaction does occur, it can readily be corrected by

placing those reactive tissues in a negative magnetic field. The

inflammatory reactions occurring due to the diabetes mellitus

disease process reduce oxygen to tissue, encourage invasion of

microorganisms (viruses, fungi and bacteria), produce inflammation

of arteries with atheromatous plaque buildup and create many other

tissue and nerve degenerative disease processes of diabetes

mellitus.

However, the most important thing we can understand is that this

diabetes mellitus disease process exists because there is an

imbalance between the positive and negative magnetic field energies

Page 3

where positive magnetic energy has the ascendancy over the negative

magnetic energy. Direct tissue exposure to negative magnetic energy

can do much to correct this magnetic energy imbalance disorder.

DIAGNOSTIC FORMAT

Testing blood sugar one hour after meals of single foods is the

most important test. Physical or mental symptoms are also examined

at the same time. Only about a third of the foods that produce

symptoms also produce a high blood sugar. All maladaptive reactions

are considered important and serve as indicators of the need for

initial avoidance and later spacing on a four-day, diversified

rotation basis.

Before starting deliberate food testing, it is necessary to go

through five days of either fasting or preferably the infrequent

eating of foods. During this five day avoidance period, it is

important to be monitoring the saliva pH, and if the saliva pH drops

below 6.4, then it is important to take sufficient soda bicarb

frequently enough to keep the saliva pH at about, and preferably

above, 6.4.

It can also be helpful to provide during the first three days for

intravenous Vitamin C (12 .5 grams), B-6 (100mg), B-5 (200mg),

Calcium (250mg) and Magnesium (250mg).

It requires a month of four meals per day to go through the

deliberate food testing. It is well, but not always necessary, to

have the usual classical examination for inhalants. The inhalants

are not usually highly significant. It is largely the reactions to

food that is significant.

An insulin-dependent diabetic cannot be tested this way and the

foods must be tested otherwise than by deliberate food tests. It is

significant to run IgG food tests and honor the evidence of IgG

allergic reactions to foods. It should be understood, however,

that initial maturity-onset diabetics become insulin dependent only

after a long period of degeneration. Two-thirds are not insulin

dependent, even though they are taking insulin.

This can soon be discovered as a person tries the five days of

avoidance. Regular insulin can be used to cover the insulin needs

when it is demonstrated that this is necessary. It is important to

study the diabetic for nutritional disorders of vitamins, minerals,

amino acids and essential fats. Quantitative studies for these

should be done. It is also important to do functional studies for

B-6 by the Tryptophan Loading Test and the EGPT. Folic Acid needs

should be examined by the FIGLU Test and B-12 needs by the

Methylamalonic Acid spillage of the urine. It can be demonstrated

that there usually are enzyme disorders by studying assays for ESOD,

MAO and lipid peroxide.

This helps explain the persons weakness and reduced ability for

processing toxins. These tests also serve as a way to monitor

improvement during treatment. If there is any historical reason to

examine for toxins, they should be examined for, especially spillage

of lead in the urine. The infectious state should be assessed. This

especially includes viral infections, including Herpes Simplex,

Page 4

Epstein-Barr, Cytomegalo, HHV-6 and Coxsackie virus. These can be

examined for antibody levels to determine current activity.

Candida should be studied by culture from the vagina, the rectal

area, the stool, the mouth as well as antibody studies. Both the

citric acid cycle and urea cycle are disordered in diabetes

mellitus. To test for the rise in ammonia caused by the urea cycle

disorder, it well to test both arterial and venus ammonia two hours

after an 80% protein stress meal.

DIABETES COMPLICATIONS

It has been said that to understand diabetes is to understand

disease. Virtually any metabolic system or any organ can

deteriorate with diabetes. Micro-organism infections flourish in

diabetes. Atherosclerotic development is accelerated in diabetes.

Muscle waste (amyotrophia), nerve degeneration (neuropathy) and

varied inflammatory reactions develop in diabetes.

Negative magnetic energy can be quite valuable in treating many

of the complications of diabetes mellitus, especially such as

infections, pain, atherosclerosis, etc. An elderly man with gangrene

of a foot was undergoing EDTA chelation which was not adequately

handling this problem. The gangrenous foot was so severe that the

foot was scheduled to be surgically removed in one week.

The negative pole of a 4 X 6 X 1/2", 3950 guass ceramic magnet

was placed twenty-four hours a day on the sole of the infected foot.

Within one week, the improvement was so substantial that the foot

was not removed. An elderly, deteriorated diabetic man with diabetic

neuropathy had severe burning pain in his feet for which he had

found no relief. Each foot was placed on the negative poles of a 4

X 6 X 1/2", 3950 gauss ceramic magnetic. In a few minutes, the pain

left. He remained pain free for several hours. When the pain

returned, it was again relieved with the negative magnetic field.

Surprisingly, after a few days of treatment, the pain did not

return.

At seventy, a man with atherosclerotic heart disease had a

multiple by-pass operation. At seventy-two, his heart pain

returned. He was unsteady on his feet and would stumble, his speech

was thick, he would get lost in even familiar surroundings and he

was chronically depressed. At seventy-four, he started magnetic

therapy treatment by sleeping with magnets at the crown of his head

and a magnet over his heart during his waking hours. When seen a

week later, his symptoms had disappeared. At one month, he was

observed to have no pain in his heart, steady on his feet with no

shuffling or stumbling, speech was distinct, he was smiling,

socially assertive and there was no evidence of depression.

TREATMENT FORMAT

Of prime importance is the initial avoidance of foods, chemicals

and inhalants that evoke symptoms and/or disordered carbohydrate

metabolism. Minor reactive foods can be returned to the diet within

six weeks and major reactors, as noted, usually within three months.

Ninety-five percent of the foods to which a person has been

demonstrated to be reactive can be returned to the diet on a once-

Page 5

in-four-day basis rotation without the reoccurrence of symptoms

and/or hyperglycemic reactions. Interestingly enough, this also

includes free sugars. The sugars need to be separated into their

respective original sources for the purpose of rotation such as

corn, cane, beet, maple and honey, which needs to be separated

according to where it was gathered.

A person may react to a honey from their own locality but not to

a honey from a locality away from where they live. It is also

important that the honey not be heated. The digestive enzymes in

honey are observed to help prevent the maladaptive inflammatory

reaction. It is of interest to note that seldom does a maturity-

onset diabetic react to maple sugar.

It is of prime importance to keep the excess of biological

positive and the deficiency of negative magnetic energy in balance.

This is achieved by one-half hour exposure to negative magnetic

fields ahead of a meal, one hour before going to bed and exposure of

the crown of the head while asleep, and by relieving symptoms when

they occur.

The atherosclerosis that develops in diabetes can materially be

helped with negative magnetic energy. There is substantial clinical

evidence that atheromatous plaques are dissolved by prolonged (three

to six months) direct exposure to negative magnetic field energy.

Furthermore, the pain of local hypoxia due to atherosclerosis is

relieved by direct exposure of the painful area to a negative

magnetic field. The mental confusion, disorientation and depression

of cerebral atherosclerosis is remarkably reduced or even completely

relieved by sleeping at night with negative magnetic energy at the

top of the head.

Neuropathy pains in the feet can be remarkably relieved by

placing the feet on the negative pole of a 3950 gauss, 4 X 6 X 1/2"

ceramic magnet. Gangrene of the feet has also been successfully

reversed with this same magnet. Infections (fungal and bacterial)

are treated with twenty-four hour negative magnetic field exposure

until the infection has disappeared.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

MAGNETS USED

These are solid state permanent magnets. The magnets are flat-

surfaced with poles on opposite sides.

(1) 4 x 6x /2" ferrous ceramic magnets of 3950 gauss.

(2) 2 x 5x 1/2" ferrous ceramic magnets of 3950 gauss.

(3) 2 x 1-3/8 x 1" ferrous ceramic magnets, about 4000 gauss.

(4) .866 x .375" round Neodymium, about 12000 gauss.

(5) 3 x 6x 1/8" plastiform, about 2000 gauss.

(6) 2 x 24 x 1/8" plastiform, about 2000 gauss.

(7) 2 x 3 x 1/8" plastiform, about 2000 gauss.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

PRE-MEAL TREATMENT OF ONE-HALF HOUR:

Abdomen: A 4 x 6 x 1/2" magnet on mid-abdomen over umbilicus

area.

Spleen : A 4 x 6 x 1/2" on left side of back, rising the long way

from lower edge of rib cage.

Page 6

Liver : A 4 x 6 x 1/2" magnet on the right front side, rising

the long way from lower edge of rib cage.

Head : A 3 x 6 x 1/8" plastiform magnet on back of head at

junction of skull and neck. It is well to reinforce

this with a round neodymium magnet placed in the center.

Alternatives are to use cubes bi-temporally or the

plastiform and neodymium on the forehead.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

ONE HOUR IN THE EVENING BEFORE GOING TO BED:

Use placement as described above for pre-meal and add a 3 x 24 x

1/2" plastiform down the spine. A 2 x 1-3/8 x 1" cube on anterior

neck on each side of larynx can be held in place with an elastic

bandage.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

During sleep:

To initiate sleep, it is well to use a 2 x 5 x 1/2" magnet on the

sternum.

Four 4 x 6 x 1/2" magnets in a carrier holding the magnets upright

one inch apart within three inches of the top of the head.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

During the day:

Wear a 2x3x1/8" plastiform over the heart (left shirt pocket or left

bra cup). Do not use with a pacemaker.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

For Symptoms:

Use appropriate magnet over the symptom and with sufficient duration

and frequency to reduce symptom, such as pain, inflam-mation,

infection, edema, etc.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

MAGNETIC POLARITY DEFINITIONS USED IN THIS ARTICLE

This is to avoid the semantic confusion when referring to north and

south poles.

Negative magnetic polarity energy:

This is identified either as the side of a flat-surface

magnet with poles on opposite sides or as the end of a bar

magnet that registers negative (-) on a magnetometer. This

is also the same energy as the true physical north magnetic

pole of the earth.

This is opposite to the north seeking pole of a compass

needle, which was originally wrongly named north pole, when,

in fact, the north seeking pole of a bar magnet (compass

needle) is south pole, since opposites attract.

Positive magnetic polarity energy:

This is identified either as the side of a flat-surface

magnet with poles on opposite sides or as the end of a bar

magnet that registers positive (+) on a magnetometer.

Page 7

This is also the same energy as the true physical south

magnetic pole of the earth. This is the same as the north

seeking pole of a compass needle. A positive compass needle

pointing north, which was misidentified as north pole by

navigators, is in fact a south pole seeking the north pole of

the earth.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

This follows the recommendations and use of several authors,

especially those interested in the biological responses to

magnetism, electricity and ionization and provides the consistency

of parallel biological responses to the specific separate pole

and/or energy of positive and negative electricity, magnetism and

ionization.

Negative parallels are the negative pole of a DC circuit, negative

pole of a magnet and negative ionization. Biological responses to a

negative magnetic field, negative electric pole and negative

ionization are parallel.

Positive parallels are the positive pole of a DC circuit, positive

pole of a magnet and positive ionization. Biological responses to a

positive magnetic field, positive electric pole and positive

ionization are parallel.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

KUPS KOMMENT:

Dr. William Philpott has been a pioneer in orthomolecular psychiatry

and medicine. No longer in private practice, Dr. Philpott devotes

his time to raising health consciousness through his writings and

teachings as a seasoned speaker at health and medical meetings

throughout our country. He also has been appearing on various radio

talk shows. Dr. Philpott has written and sent to your editor several

articles on Biomagnetics that are going to be published regularly in

HC! I find that he writes with a great clarity and understanding of

his topics. I have been a student of Dr. Philpott since the early

1970s when I first began to hear his talks at meetings of various

alternative health organizations, especially the International

Academy of Preventive Medicine, the Orthomolecular Medical Society

and the Academy of Orthomolecular Psychiatry. Dr. P. is author of

three great booksBrain Allergies: The Psychonutrient Connection,

Victory Over Diabetes, and his latest, The Biomagnetic Handbook. I

encourage you to read each of these. The latter, as well as

magnets, are available through HC as well as through :

Enviro-Tech

17171 29th Street

Choctaw, OK 7302

405/390-3499.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

REFERENCES

Klonowski, W. and Klonowski, M.,Journal of Bioelectricity, Aging

Processes and Enzymatic Proteins. 4(1), 93-102 (1985).

Philpott, William H., Victory Over Diabetes, Keats Publishing Co.,

New Canaan, CT, 1982 (1991 paperback with new chapter on

medical magnetics).

Page 8

Potts, John, Journal of Diabetes, Avoidance Provocative Food Testing

in Assessing Diabetes Responsiveness. 26: Supplement 1,

1977.

Potts, John, Journal of Diabetes, Value of Specific Testing for

Assessing Insulin Resistance. 29: Supplement 2, 1980.

Potts, John, Journal of Diabetes, Blood Sugar-Insulin Responses to

Specific Foods Versus GTT. 30: Supplement 1, 1981.

Potts, John, Journal of Diabetes, Insulin Resistance Related to

Specific Food Sensitivity. 35: Supplement 1, 1986.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

William H. Philpott, M.D.

17171 SE 29th St.,

Choctaw, OK 73020 405/390-3009

VICTORY OVER DIABETES

a book by William H. Philpott, M.D.

Historical discovery by W.H. Philpott, M.D. of the ecologic

[allergy, addiction, intolerance] causes of insulin resistance

Insulin resistance as cause of maturity onset Diabetes Mellitus

John Potts, M.D.: scientific, published confirmation of ecologic

causes of insulin resistance How to home test for maladaptive

reactions to foods, chemicals and inhalants

Four-day diversified rotation diet for correction of

maladaptive reactions to foods

Magnetic-field reduction of maladaptive food and chemical

reactions

The most valuable self-help book on the reversibilty of maturity

onset Diabetes Mellitus Price $12.95+ $3.00 shipping

Order From:

Philpott Medical Services

17171 S.E. 29th Street

Choctaw, OK 73020

(405) 390-3009

--------------------------------------------------------------------

If you have comments or other information relating to such topics

as this paper covers, please upload to KeelyNet or send to the

Vangard Sciences address as listed on the first page.

Thank you for your consideration, interest and support.

Jerry W. Decker.........Ron Barker...........Chuck Henderson

Vangard Sciences/KeelyNet

--------------------------------------------------------------------

If we can be of service, you may contact

Jerry at (214) 324-8741 or Ron at (214) 242-9346

--------------------------------------------------------------------

Page 9

(word processor parameters LM=8, RM=75, TM=2, BM=2)

Taken from KeelyNet BBS (214) 324-3501

Sponsored by Vangard Sciences

PO BOX 1031

Mesquite, TX 75150

There are ABSOLUTELY NO RESTRICTIONS

on duplicating, publishing or distributing the

files on KeelyNet except where noted!

February 18, 1994

BIOMAG2.ASC

--------------------------------------------------------------------

The following is a very basic introduction to the incredible

researches of Albert Roy Davis and Walter Rawls. Davis is no longer

living, but Rawls currently lives in Florida around Jacksonville.

We highly recommend the purchase of the following books detailing

the researches of these two brilliant investigators.

Magnetism and its Effects on the Living System

Explains for the first time how magnetism affects your life and

the life of all living systems around you. The result of years

of investigation into the laws of magnetism, it explains the

discovery that a magnet has not one effect on the living system

but TWO EFFECTS, each supplied by the two forms of energy

transmitted from each pole. You or any other qualified person

can reproduce the projects in this book. (Illustrated)

The Magnetic Effect

In this book, Davis and Rawls present and discuss biomagnetic

experiments and research that have been successfully duplicated

by members of the orthodox scientific community. The authors

reveal the factual, natural basis of applied biomagnetic

energies and add greatly to the understanding of this new and

exciting field. The computer-exact and reproducible findings in

this work apply to the treatment of such conditions as

arthritis, cancer, glaucoma, sexual problems, and aging.

The Magnetic Blueprint of Life

Written with forcefulness and precision, this is a comprehensive

guide to the effect of magnetism upon the air we breathe, the

food we eat, the exercise we take. It is an eloquent plea to

the scientific community to reconsider the significance of basic

magnetism...."the most important energy in Nature."

--------------------------------------------------------------------

BioMagnetics

Part 1

by Jerry W. Decker

with information from "The Magnetic Effect"

by Albert Roy Davis and Walter C. Rawls

One of the most important series of experiments ever done and yet

still not widely known, were those carried out by Albert Roy Davis

in conjunction with Walter Rawls. These experiments are FUNDAMENTAL

Page 1

to an understanding of magnetic forces and are to this day not being

used widely because many have never heard of them.

They found that each pole of a magnet has SPECIFIC effects that are

quite different from those of a full magnet where both poles are

applied simultaneously. These polar effects are deemed "mono-polar"

for one pole. The poles spin in opposite directions and have

opposite properties.

Specifically, North Pole energies cause mass to contract and

condense, rotating in a CCW direction, while South Pole energies

cause mass to expand and dissipate, rotating in a CW direction.

Also, North Pole energies have alkaline properties while South Pole

energy is acid. North pole energies tend to collect fluids while

South Pole energies dissipate fluids. North pole energy is referred

to as negative because it reduces or attracts, while South pole

energy is referred to as positive because it expands and dissipates.

Since magnetic monopole magnets are not available at just any Wal-

Mart store, they chose to use the longest possible bar or cylinder

magnets they could acquire which would allow for the greatest

separation of the two opposite energies.

It was found that use of a North Pole would provide an energetic

environment which would cause cancer cells to contract and die out.

This energetic environment also has other healthy applications as

detailed in their many books.

I had the pleasure of visiting with Walter Rawls one afternoon at

his office in Jacksonville, Florida several years back. We

discussed many things including Keely, of which he had never heard.

Mr. Rawls mailing address is

Walter Rawls

ARD Research Lab

PO BOX 655

Green Cove Springs, Florida 32043

(904) 264-8564

Should you wish to carry out your own experiments with magnets as

blazed by these pioneers, here are some helpful tips.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

CORRECT POLE IDENTIFICATION

First, you need to understand how to correctly identify the polarity

of any magnet. In Davis/Rawls own words:

"The North pole of a magnet seeks a South pole; likewise, a South

pole seeks a North pole. The North pole of a magnet is NOT the

North-SEEKING pole, nor is the South pole the South-SEEKING pole.

In fact, the North-SEEKING pole of a magnet is ACTUALLY the South

pole! The South-SEEKING pole of a magnet is the North pole. The

rule to remember is OPPOSITES ATTRACT and SIMILARS REPEL.

Test a magnet for correct usage by identifying the separate poles

correctly. Using a bar or cylinder magnet, tie a thread around

the exact center of the magnet, with the thread having a loose

end.

Page 2

Tie the loose end of the thread to any stationary overhang that

allows the magnet to turn without hindrance in space. When the

magnet stops turning, the end of the magnet pointing in the

direction of the earth's North pole is the South pole of the

magnet. You may need a simple compass to determine the earth's

North pole direction.

After you have determined the South pole of the magnet, mark that

pole end with red fingernail polish or paint. Once you have one

magnet properly identified for North and South poles this magnet

can be used to IDENTIFY the North and South poles of OTHER

magnets. (They use the color RED to indicate danger and thus

avoid it for biological experiments. The reason being that since

it causes a swelling of tissue, the fluids flow more freely, it

accelerates life and growth. If you have a bacteria or disease,

it will also ACCELERATE its growth and so can be quite

dangerous.)

For example, if we bring the South pole of any magnet up to

another magnet's pole, a REPELLING force shows that the pole of

the unknown magnet is the South pole. An ATTRACTING force shows

that the unknown pole is the North pole.

You may wish to purchase a small inexpensive magnetometer. The

sensitive needle of this instrument moves in one direction or the

other depending on the separate magnetic pole in close vicinity.

The law of magnetism is a PRIMARY law of nature:

Like forces REPEL - unlike forces ATTRACT.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

ESTIMATING FIELD STRENGTH

Magnetic field strength is measured in units called gauss. Since

magnets are not sold with this value printed on them and gaussmeters

are expensive, you need a way to determine the approximate field

strength.

Magnets are generally sold by their LIFTING power. That is, a

horseshoe magnet is offered as having a lifting power, when placed

against a piece of heavy metal, of 2 pounds to 25 pounds to 50

pounds, depending on the size, type, or kind of magnet.

As a guide to the approximate gauss of commercial magnets, consider

the following:

A magnet having a lifting power of 2 pounds may vary from 500 to

600 gauss units;

a lifting power of 5 pounds may vary from 900 to 1200 gauss;

a lifting power of 25 pounds is usually around 2000 gauss;

with 50 pounds lifting power, 3500 to 4500 gauss.

For more precise measurement, an equipment aid, such as a

magnetometer, should be employed.

Care must be taken to properly determine which pole is North and

which is South, based on the above criteria.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

When I was visiting with Walter in Florida, he very kindly gave me

an assortment of magnets and books as well as an interesting meter

that is used to measure the field strength AND POLARITY of a magnet.

Page 3

This meter allows you to quickly and accurately determine what pole

is North or South. It also has instructions for helping to

determine the field strength. The meter sells for $50 and is a

quick way to VISUALLY determine the polarity of any magnet.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

CARE AND HANDLING OF MAGNETS

To prevent breakage and loss of magnetic power, you should never

drop or strike the magnet with a sharp blow. Not only can it chip

but it can also lose magnetic energy.

Magnets should never be stored in a hot location. Most magnets lose

ALL their power at temperatures from 400 to 500 degrees Fahrenheit.

The loss occurs at the CURIE point, where the magnetic domains are

no longer aligned and become chaotic.

After using a magnet, you should place both ends of the magnet

against a structure of flat metal. This will allow the magnet to

maintain its original strength. Such a structure is called a

"keeper." Magnets should be kept away from each other. If placed

where the poles of separate magnets repel, there could be a

"bleeding-off" of the energy. A loss of energy in this manner would

be rapid.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

WHY YOU SHOULD NOT USE ELECTROMAGNETS

Very effective and powerful magnets are made by passing electrical

energy through a coil of wire having a metal, iron, or steel core.

However, there is a difference between the magnetism produced in

this manner and the magnetism from a solid state bar or metal

composition magnet.

Magnetism HAS A FREQUENCY. It also has motion. The rate of

vibration depends on the size, length, width, and power of the

magnet. Solid state composition magnets, such as metal, iron and

steel, are CONSTANT in their rate of vibration DEPENDING on their

structure. An electromagnet, however, may present a number of

different types of vibrations.

Any kind of electromagnet has many turns of insulated wire. Each

turn of this wire presents so many lines of magnetism. Actually, we

have discovered that these lines of force are really CABLES of

force, as explained in our earlier publications. (See RAWLS1.ASC

and RAWLS1.GIF on KeelyNet)

However, a coil wound a certain number of turns has a different

frequency from a fixed metal or composition magnet. As the coil

heats, the resistance to the flow of current INCREASES. Here we

have a SLOW DROP in magnetic lines, or cables, of force to a RISE IN

FORCE, depending upon the wire and core materials used for

construction. Therefore, the vibrations supplied by the

electromagnet are NOT AS CONSTANT as those from the metal or

composition magnet.

Our research has revealed that size, width, and overall length of a

magnet GOVERNS FREQUENCY in electrical electron vibrations. This is

a discovery not known by the general scientific community, because

wee have not published our scientific materials on this research

finding. We are working on this discovery in the establishment of

provable laws that we will disclose when completed. We feel

confident this future disclosure will open new avenues that neither

we nor the general scientific community could properly comprehend at

this time. (printed in The Magnetic Effect in 1975)

--------------------------------------------------------------------

I asked Walter about this frequency business with magnets and at

that time, he would not disclose how the measurements were made as

it was proprietary to their company, BioMagnetics International.

There are over 36 international patents based on the Davis/Rawls

discoveries.

Also at the time I spoke with Walter, he said they had developed a

couch that could DIAGNOSE problem areas in the body with an accuracy

of 99%. It uses magnets to create a response in the body to

indicate an infected or diseased location. This response is

described in the books listed above and has to do with a contraction

of tissue when in the presence of a North pole energy.

It is interesting that the Floyd (Sparky) Sweet Vacuum Triode uses

magnets that are "tuned" to the 60 cps frequency. This allows the

device to pull in space energy at a frequency that requires no

alteration to run off the shelf devices. We also understand he has

"pulled" as much as 3000 watts of free energy directly from this

space energy source, also called the ZPE or hyperspace or virtual

flux. The magnets are put under a tremendous stress by placing like

poles against one another, then binding them together, this

effectively creates a giant magnet with spatial stress bubble. All

that is listed on KeelyNet as SWEET1 through SWEET4 and the diagrams

are listed as VTAPAK.ZIP.

The device also appears to be LOCALE DEPENDENT, meaning that it

works better in some areas than others. To our knowledge, no one

has yet publicly admitted to successfully duplicating the Sweet

device.

We are told Sweet is under a Secrecy Order by the United States

government that forbids his discussing or working further with his

own discovery. If he'd only "slip" a copy of the plans out, we'd be

very happy to distribute them across the computer networks and to

many other researchers who would make it a reality for all.

Also see the file DAVRAW.GIF.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

If you have comments or other information relating to such topics

as this paper covers, please upload to KeelyNet or send to the

Vangard Sciences address as listed on the first page.

Thank you for your consideration, interest and support.

Jerry W. Decker.........Ron Barker...........Chuck Henderson

Vangard Sciences/KeelyNet

--------------------------------------------------------------------

If we can be of service, you may contact

Jerry at (214) 324-8741 or Ron at (214) 242-9346

--------------------------------------------------------------------

Page 5

(word processor parameters LM=8, RM=75, TM=2, BM=2)

Taken from KeelyNet BBS (214) 324-3501

Sponsored by Vangard Sciences

PO BOX 1031

Mesquite, TX 75150

There are ABSOLUTELY NO RESTRICTIONS

on duplicating, publishing or distributing the

files on KeelyNet except where noted!

February 18, 1994

BIOMAG3.ASC

--------------------------------------------------------------------

From the now defunct PLENUM newsletter

Volume 1 - Number 3 / September-October 1989

--------------------------------------------------------------------

Magnetics - Part 1

The orthodox version as taught in our schools

William Gilbert, court physician of Queen Elizabeth I, was the first

to study magnets from a scientific viewpoint. Gilbert discovered

that the Earth was a giant magnet by mounting a magnetized needle so

that it could pivot freely in a vertical direction (known since as a

"dip needle") so that the north pole dipped toward the ground. The

earth was modelled by a spherical lodestone which showed that the

needle would behave exactly the same way as the earth when held over

the "northern hemisphere", which is where Gilbert was at the time of

his experiment. These researches can be checked out in his work

entitled DE MAGNETE.

Scientists have long speculated that the Earth might have a gigantic

iron magnet at its core. Modern studies have shown the central core

to be molten which discounts the magnet theory due to the phenomenon

known as the "Curie temperature". When iron is heated, it loses its

strong magnetic properties. This occurs at 760 degrees Centigrade

(for iron). The temperature at the Earth's core is CALCULATED to be

at least 1000 degrees Centigrade indicating there is NO magnetic

field at the core. However, as the metal cools, it would become

magnetic.

The "Curie temperature" was discovered by Pierre Curie in 1895.

Cobalt and nickel, also ferromagnetic (ferro = iron), lose their

magnetic properties when exposed to high temperatures. Nickel at

356 degrees Centigrade and Cobalt at 1075 degrees Centigrade. At

low temperatures, certain other metals are ferromagnetic.

Dysprosium becomes ferromagnetic at -188 degrees Centigrade.

Magnetism is a property of the atom itself. In most materials the

atomic magnets are randomly oriented, so that most of the effect is

cancelled out. Weak properties are however detectable and are

referred to as "paramagnetism." The magnetic strength is referred

to as "permeability." Vacuum has a permeability of 1.00.

Paramagnetic substances range between 1.00 and 1.01.

Nickel has a permeability of 40, cobalt of 55, while iron is in the

thousands. Magnetic "domains" are tiny areas about .001 to .1

centimeters in diameter, and are where atomic magnets line up to

Page 1

reinforce one another. This reinforcement produces strong fields

within the domains.

In unmagnetized iron, the domains are randomly oriented, thus

cancelling out one another's effect. When the domains are brought

into line by action of another magnet, the iron is considered

magnetized.

The reorientation of domains during the magnetism process produces

clicking and hissing noises which can be detected by proper

amplification. This phenomenon is termed the "Barkhausen effect"

after the German physicist, Heinrich Barkhausen.

In "anti-ferromagnetic substances", such as manganese, the domains

also line up, but in alternate directions. This cancels out most of

the magnetism. Again, above a particular temperature, substances

lose this anti-ferromagnetic effect and becomes paramagnetic

(attractive to magnetism).

Michael Faraday wound a coil of wire around a segment of an iron

ring and a second coil of wire around another segment of the ring.

When he connected the first coil to a battery, a momentary induced

current could be detected in the second coil. The galvanometer

(current meter) showed a positive increase as the magnetism rushed

in when the power was switched on. When the battery was switched

off, the collapsing lines of magnetic force again cut across the

wire of the second coil, causing a momentary surge of electricity in

the opposite direction of the first flow. This was the first

"transformer."

Physicist Walter Maurice Elsasser has proposed that the rotation of

the earth sets up slow eddies in the molten iron core, circling west

to east. These eddies have the effect of PRODUCING AN ELECTRIC

CURRENT, also circling west to east. Just as Faraday's coil of wire

produced magnetic lines of force within the coil, so does the

circling electric current in the earth's core. An internal magnet

is created with a north/south axis. This accounts for the earth's

magnetic field, oriented roughly along the axis of rotation, so that

the magnetic poles are near the north and south geographic poles.

The north magnetic pole is off the coast of northern Canada about

one thousand miles from the actual geographics North pole. The

South magnetic pole is near the Antartica shoreline west of Ross

Sea, again about one thousand miles from the geographic South Pole.

Interestingly enough, the magnetic poles are NOT DIRECTLY OPPOSITE

EACH OTHER on the globe. A LINE PASSING THROUGH THEM DOES NOT PASS

DIRECTLY THROUGH THE CENTER OF THE EARTH.

The deviation of the compass needle from the "true North", (the

direction of the geographic North Pole) varies irregularly as one

travels east or west. The compass needle shifted on Columbus' first

voyage which he hid from his crew lest it excite terror in them that

would force him to turn back.

Modern physics texts teach that North Pole energy is an inflow while

South Pole energy is an outflow. The North pole of a magnet is the

"north-seeking pole" of a bar magnet which points toward the

geographics North pole.

Page 2

In 1580, the tilt or declination of the magnetic field was measured

at 11 degrees East, 0 degrees in 1657, 25 degrees West in 1820 and

is currently DECREASING with a value of about 7 degrees West in

1972.

The North end of a magnet attracts the South end of another bar

magnet, so we say that in magnetics, LIKE POLES REPEL AND UNLIKE

POLES ATTRACT. This is caused by the interaction between the moving

and spinning orbital electrons which are bound to the nuclei. Also,

the radical differences between iron and copper are due to the

possibility of cooperation between oriented domains in the iron.

Therefore, ALL magnetic charges can ultimately be described in terms

of moving charges.

Modern efficient magnet coils use wires of a superconducting alloy

(cooled below the Curie transition temperature.) A typical

commercially available magnet uses an alloy of 75% Nb - (Niobium)

and 25% Zr - (Zirconium) cooled to 4.2 degrees Kelvin. Such a wire

of only .01 inch diameter carries 25 Amperes with absolutely no

Joule heating.

The "Right-Hand Rule" is demonstrated in the diagram on the left.

If you picture your right hand grasping the shaft with the thumb

pointing up, the positive current will be flowing in the direction

of your thumb. (SEE BIOMAG3.GIF)

The fingers of your right hand would then indicate the direction of

the magnetic lines of force which will be CCW if looking DOWN ONTO

the elliptical flux lines.

Modern magnetics teaches that the lines of magnetic flux enter from

the North Pole and exit from the South Pole. These lines bow out

into space from the RADIATING SOUTH POLE to rejoin the CONDENSING

NORTH POLE.

There are theories which posit the existence of a MAGNETIC MONOPOLE.

This would be a magnetic mass with ONLY A SOUTH POLE OR ONLY A NORTH

POLE. This postulated phenomenon has yet to be witnessed under

laboratory conditions although there have been reports in isolated

instances. (over the past few years, we received a copy of a patent

showing a configuration of magnets which form a SINGLE monopole,

either north or south depending on the orientation of the 6 magnets

which comprise the structure, they are arranged in an X,Y,Z axis

with a common pole pointing toward the center)

In the next issue of the PLENUM, we will go into the research

findings of Albert Roy Davis and Walter Rawls. Here we will being

to see a potential conflict when attempting to define spin as CW or

CCW. It is entirely dependent on the PERSPECTIVE OF THE VIEWER.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

If you have comments or other information relating to such topics

as this paper covers, please upload to KeelyNet or send to the

Vangard Sciences address as listed on the first page.

Thank you for your consideration, interest and support.

Jerry W. Decker.........Ron Barker...........Chuck Henderson

Vangard Sciences/KeelyNet

--------------------------------------------------------------------

If we can be of service, you may contact

Jerry at (214) 324-8741 or Ron at (214) 242-9346

--------------------------------------------------------------------

Page 3

(word processor parameters LM=8, RM=75, TM=2, BM=2)

Taken from KeelyNet BBS (214) 324-3501

Sponsored by Vangard Sciences

PO BOX 1031

Mesquite, TX 75150

There are ABSOLUTELY NO RESTRICTIONS

on duplicating, publishing or distributing the

files on KeelyNet!

March 7, 1991

HEALTH2.ASC

--------------------------------------------------------------------

This file courtesy of Double Helix BBS.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

Electric, Magnetic And Other Field radiation

Effects On Your Health

by

James Behr

Lately, a lot of reports have been flying around, still unconfirmed,

as the experts will tell you, about electric and magnetic fields and

perhaps other forms radiation being dangerous to your health.

The biggest exposure you get from these fields are from your T.V.

or video display terminal (VDT).

There are two types of field intensities VLF (very low frequency)

and ELF (extremely low frequency).

You could get antiradiation screens to combat this but they only

work on electric fields at the forementioned frequencies but it is

the magnetic field that seems to be the culprit for all the health

concerns.

Not to say that electric fields are by no means non-hazardous as the

current controversy over the above ground electric power lines will

contest or the sleepiness in subways that is thought to be caused by

the third rail electric field.

The type of health concern is not one of catching a cold due to

these fields but disruption on the molecular level and the

disprution of DNA reproduction causing mutations or cancer.

Let's take the brain, the brain is composed of millions, perhaps

billions, of neurons. Neurons work by electrical stimulus. As we all

know (or some of us anyway) magnetic fields cause current to flow

(among other things) and this includes electric fields which is a

form of magnetism. Imagine passing a very strong field say in the

subway and now imagine on the neuron level.

The field will have a profound affect on the stimulus of these

neurons either activating them or dulling them which brings me back

to the sleepiness a lot of people seem to suffer when they get into

the subway.

DNA may even be more at risk by the a field's influence on essential

Page 1

enzymes for DNA construction causing the DNA system to malfunction

and be diverted from the original "designer's" plan.

This is all from two types of Wavelengths on a spectrum and they

should be a great cause of concern for all. But this leads me to

think: What about the other Wavelengths?

Right at this minute, thousands of waves are passing thru the body

from radio and t.v. transmissions and thousands of others sources.

what are they doing to the body? Not that I want to cause worldwide

panic but it does make one wonder.

Of course the experts tell us that all of this can neither be denied

nor confirmed so you will have to draw your own conclusions. As for

me, I've taken no chances.

I have on my radiation suit to protect me from the other

wavelengths, I'm sitting more than 28 inches from the t.v. and VDT

with a grounded antiradiation shield and the back of the t.v. and

VDT encased in lead to absorb stray waves. This may seem a bit

excessive but like I said I'm taking no chances. Wait, isn't lead

poisonous!?

--------------------------------------------------------------------

Vangard note...

The subtle energy system of the body are known to be highly

sensitive to both electric and magnetic fields. When these

fields become resonant with particular components of living

systems, phase shifting and excess amplitudes can induce changes

not necessarily of benefit to the tissues affected.

The DNA/RNA replication cycles are especially sensitive to such

artifically applied electric and magnetic fields. The hydrogen

bonds which hold the DNA staircase together are very easily

broken. This is referred to as "denaturation" and can allow the

wrong amino acid to form in a wrong position on the staircase.

This, in turn eventually leads to mutations and a host of other

symptoms. We refer you to DNAMAST1 and DNAMAST2 for more

information regarding the DNA chains and how they operate.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

If you have comments or other information relating to such topics

as this paper covers, please upload to KeelyNet or send to the

Vangard Sciences address as listed on the first page.

Thank you for your consideration, interest and support.

Jerry W. Decker.........Ron Barker...........Chuck Henderson

Vangard Sciences/KeelyNet

--------------------------------------------------------------------

If we can be of service, you may contact

Jerry at (214) 324-8741 or Ron at (214) 242-9346

--------------------------------------------------------------------

Page 2

MAGNETISM AND ITS EFFECTS ON THE LIVING SYSTEM - REX RESEARCH

http://www.rexresearch.com › davisrawls › Magn...

http://www.rexresearch.com/davisrawls/MagnEffectsLivingSystem.pdf

(word processor parameters LM=8, RM=75, TM=2, BM=2)

Taken from KeelyNet BBS (214) 324-3501

Sponsored by Vangard Sciences

PO BOX 1031

Mesquite, TX 75150

There are ABSOLUTELY NO RESTRICTIONS

on duplicating, publishing or distributing the

files on KeelyNet except where noted!

August 2, 1992

RAWLS1.ASC

--------------------------------------------------------------------

This file is a description of the .GIF image - RAWLS1.GIF.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

Triune Force Flows

In our various studies, we always keep in mind the claims of John W.

Keely. One of these studies is into the work of Albert Roy Davis

and Walter Rawls, pioneer researchers into the effects of magnetic

fields, particularly those deemed "mono-polar".

The basic effect they discovered (and which is not credited to them

even today) is that North Pole and South Pole magnetic energy has

an exactly opposite spin as well as EFFECTS.

Specifically, North Pole energies cause mass to contract and

condense while South Pole energies cause mass to expand and

dissipate. Also, North Pole energies have alkaline properties while

South Pole energy is acid.

Since magnetic monopole magnets are not available at just any Wal-

Mart store, they chose to use the longest possible bar or cylinder

magnets which would allow for the greatest separation of the two

opposite energies.

It was found that use of a North Pole would provide an energetic

environment which would cause cancer cells to contract and die out.

This energetic environment also has other healthy applications as

detailed in their many books.

I had the pleasure of visiting with Walter Rawls one afternoon at

his office in Jacksonville, Florida several years back. We

discussed many things including Keely, of which he had never heard.

During that meeting, I made reference to the picture now listed as

RAWLS1.GIF here on KeelyNet and specifically Keely's idea that ALL

FORCE FLOWS consisted of 3 separate flows.

If you will note, the magnetic field pattern takes on the form of

ropes of force which have triune points similar to tetrahedrons.

Walter was surprised that anyone had noticed that and we went into

some detail as to Keely's claims. He was quite impressed and

indicated that there were several interesting anomalies which he and

Page 1

Davis had discovered yet which were not published. These were

considered proprietary information which he could not discuss.

Needless to say, my curiosity was peeked yet he would not budge.

Despite that, Keely says that these three forces were HARMONICALLY

related and a proper understanding of these relationships would show

how a variety of effects could be produced, ranging from levitation

to disintegration to instantaneous explosions.

(Note this was discovered and applied in Keely's lab from 1872 to

1898, long before Einstein, Quantum Physics, Dirac, QED, etc.)

The RAWLS1.GIF image is one we have wanted to place on KeelyNet for

some time now to further illuminate the many cross correlations

regarding Keely's claims and which we find from so many disparate

sources.

--------------------------------------------------------------------

If you have comments or other information relating to such topics

as this paper covers, please upload to KeelyNet or send to the

Vangard Sciences address as listed on the first page.

Thank you for your consideration, interest and support.

Jerry W. Decker.........Ron Barker...........Chuck Henderson

Vangard Sciences/KeelyNet

--------------------------------------------------------------------

If we can be of service, you may contact

Jerry at (214) 324-8741 or Ron at (214) 242-9346

--------------------------------------------------------------------

Page 2

The following is a very basic introduction to the incredible researches of Albert Roy Davis and Walter Rawls. Davis is no longer living, but Rawls currently lives in Florida around Jacksonville.

We highly recommend the purchase of the following books detailing the researches of these two brilliant investigators.
-----------------
"Magnetism and its Effects on the Living System"

Explains for the first time how magnetism affects your life and the life of all living systems around you. The result of years of investigation into the laws of magnetism, it explains the discovery that a magnet has not one effect on the living system but TWO EFFECTS, each supplied by the two forms of energy transmitted from each pole. You or any other qualified person can reproduce the projects in this book. (Illustrated)
-----------------
"The Magnetic Effect"

In this book, Davis and Rawls present and discuss biomagnetic experiments and research that have been successfully duplicated by members of the orthodox scientific community. The authors reveal the factual, natural basis of applied biomagnetic energies and add greatly to the understanding of this new and exciting field. The computer-exact and reproducible findings in this work apply to the treatment of such conditions as arthritis, cancer, glaucoma, sexual problems, and aging.
-----------------
"The Magnetic Blueprint of Life"

Written with forcefulness and precision, this is a comprehensive guide to the effect of magnetism upon the air we breathe, the food we eat, the exercise we take. It is an eloquent plea to the scientific community to reconsider the significance of basic magnetism...."the most important energy in Nature."

-----------------

BioMagnetics
Part 1 by Jerry W. Decker with information from "The Magnetic Effect" by Albert Roy Davis and Walter C. Rawls

One of the most important series of experiments ever done and yet still not widely known, were those carried out by Albert Roy Davis in conjunction with Walter Rawls. These experiments are FUNDAMENTAL to an understanding of magnetic forces and are to this day not being used widely because many have never heard of them.

They found that each pole of a magnet has SPECIFIC effects that are quite different from those of a full magnet where both poles are applied simultaneously. These polar effects are deemed "mono-polar" for one pole. The poles spin in opposite directions and have opposite properties.

Specifically, North Pole energies cause mass to contract and condense, rotating in a CCW direction, while South Pole energies cause mass to expand and dissipate, rotating in a CW direction. Also, North Pole energies have alkaline properties while South Pole energy is acid. North pole energies tend to collect fluids while South Pole energies dissipate fluids. North pole energy is referred to as negative because it reduces or attracts, while South pole energy is referred to as positive because it expands and dissipates.

Since magnetic monopole magnets are not available at just any Wal- Mart store, they chose to use the longest possible bar or cylinder magnets they could acquire which would allow for the greatest separation of the two opposite energies.

It was found that use of a North Pole would provide an energetic environment which would cause cancer cells to contract and die out. This energetic environment also has other healthy applications as detailed in their many books.

I had the pleasure of visiting with Walter Rawls one afternoon at his office in Jacksonville, Florida several years back. We discussed many things including Keely, of which he had never heard. Mr. Rawls mailing address is

Walter Rawls
ARD Research Lab
PO BOX 655
Green Cove Springs, Florida 32043
(904) 264-8564 begin_of_the_skype_highlighting
(904) 264-8564 FREE end_of_the_skype_highlighting

Should you wish to carry out your own experiments with magnets as blazed by these pioneers, here are some helpful tips.
-----------------
CORRECT POLE IDENTIFICATION

First, you need to understand how to correctly identify the polarity of any magnet. In Davis/Rawls own words:

"The North pole of a magnet seeks a South pole; likewise, a South pole seeks a North pole. The North pole of a magnet is NOT the North-SEEKING pole, nor is the South pole the South-SEEKING pole.

In fact, the North-SEEKING pole of a magnet is ACTUALLY the South pole! The South-SEEKING pole of a magnet is the North pole. The rule to remember is OPPOSITES ATTRACT and SIMILARS REPEL.

Test a magnet for correct usage by identifying the separate poles correctly. Using a bar or cylinder magnet, tie a thread around the exact center of the magnet, with the thread having a loose end.

Tie the loose end of the thread to any stationary overhang that allows the magnet to turn without hindrance in space. When the magnet stops turning, the end of the magnet pointing in the direction of the earth's North pole is the South pole of the magnet. You may need a simple compass to determine the earth's North pole direction.

After you have determined the South pole of the magnet, mark that pole end with red fingernail polish or paint. Once you have one magnet properly identified for North and South poles this magnet can be used to IDENTIFY the North and South poles of OTHER magnets. (They use the color RED to indicate danger and thus avoid it for biological experiments. The reason being that since it causes a swelling of tissue, the fluids flow more freely, it accelerates life and growth. If you have a bacteria or disease, it will also ACCELERATE its growth and so can be quite dangerous.)

For example, if we bring the South pole of any magnet up to another magnet's pole, a REPELLING force shows that the pole of the unknown magnet is the South pole. An ATTRACTING force shows that the unknown pole is the North pole.

You may wish to purchase a small inexpensive magnetometer. The sensitive needle of this instrument moves in one direction or the other depending on the separate magnetic pole in close vicinity. The law of magnetism is a PRIMARY law of nature:

Like forces REPEL - unlike forces ATTRACT.

-----------------
ESTIMATING FIELD STRENGTH

Magnetic field strength is measured in units called gauss. Since magnets are not sold with this value printed on them and gaussmeters are expensive, you need a way to determine the approximate field strength.

Magnets are generally sold by their LIFTING power. That is, a horseshoe magnet is offered as having a lifting power, when placed against a piece of heavy metal, of 2 pounds to 25 pounds to 50 pounds, depending on the size, type, or kind of magnet.

As a guide to the approximate gauss of commercial magnets, consider the following:

A magnet having a lifting power of 2 pounds may vary from 500 to 600 gauss units; a lifting power of 5 pounds may vary from 900 to 1200 gauss; a lifting power of 25 pounds is usually around 2000 gauss; with 50 pounds lifting power, 3500 to 4500 gauss.

For more precise measurement, an equipment aid, such as a magnetometer, should be employed.

Care must be taken to properly determine which pole is North and which is South, based on the above criteria.
-----------------
When I was visiting with Walter in Florida, he very kindly gave me an assortment of magnets and books as well as an interesting meter that is used to measure the field strength AND POLARITY of a magnet.

This meter allows you to quickly and accurately determine what pole is North or South. It also has instructions for helping to determine the field strength. The meter sells for $50 and is a quick way to VISUALLY determine the polarity of any magnet.
-----------------
CARE AND HANDLING OF MAGNETS

To prevent breakage and loss of magnetic power, you should never drop or strike the magnet with a sharp blow. Not only can it chip but it can also lose magnetic energy.

Magnets should never be stored in a hot location. Most magnets lose ALL their power at temperatures from 400 to 500 degrees Fahrenheit. The loss occurs at the CURIE point, where the magnetic domains are no longer aligned and become chaotic.

After using a magnet, you should place both ends of the magnet against a structure of flat metal. This will allow the magnet to maintain its original strength. Such a structure is called a "keeper." Magnets should be kept away from each other. If placed where the poles of separate magnets repel, there could be a "bleeding-off" of the energy. A loss of energy in this manner would be rapid.
-----------------
WHY YOU SHOULD NOT USE ELECTROMAGNETS

Very effective and powerful magnets are made by passing electrical energy through a coil of wire having a metal, iron, or steel core. However, there is a difference between the magnetism produced in this manner and the magnetism from a solid state bar or metal composition magnet.

Magnetism HAS A FREQUENCY. It also has motion. The rate of vibration depends on the size, length, width, and power of the magnet. Solid state composition magnets, such as metal, iron and steel, are CONSTANT in their rate of vibration DEPENDING on their structure. An electromagnet, however, may present a number of different types of vibrations.

Any kind of electromagnet has many turns of insulated wire. Each turn of this wire presents so many lines of magnetism. Actually, we have discovered that these lines of force are really CABLES of force, as explained in our earlier publications. (See RAWLS1.ASC and RAWLS1.GIF on KeelyNet)

However, a coil wound a certain number of turns has a different frequency from a fixed metal or composition magnet. As the coil heats, the resistance to the flow of current INCREASES. Here we have a SLOW DROP in magnetic lines, or cables, of force to a RISE IN FORCE, depending upon the wire and core materials used for construction. Therefore, the vibrations supplied by the electromagnet are NOT AS CONSTANT as those from the metal or composition magnet.

Our research has revealed that size, width, and overall length of a magnet GOVERNS FREQUENCY in electrical electron vibrations. This is a discovery not known by the general scientific community, because wee have not published our scientific materials on this research finding. We are working on this discovery in the establishment of provable laws that we will disclose when completed. We feel confident this future disclosure will open new avenues that neither we nor the general scientific community could properly comprehend at this time. (printed in The Magnetic Effect in 1975)
-----------------
I asked Walter about this frequency business with magnets and at that time, he would not disclose how the measurements were made as it was proprietary to their company, BioMagnetics International. There are over 36 international patents based on the Davis/Rawls discoveries.

Also at the time I spoke with Walter, he said they had developed a couch that could DIAGNOSE problem areas in the body with an accuracy of 99%. It uses magnets to create a response in the body to indicate an infected or diseased location. This response is described in the books listed above and has to do with a contraction of tissue when in the presence of a North pole energy.

It is interesting that the Floyd (Sparky) Sweet Vacuum Triode uses magnets that are "tuned" to the 60 cps frequency. This allows the device to pull in space energy at a frequency that requires no alteration to run off the shelf devices. We also understand he has "pulled" as much as 3000 watts of free energy directly from this space energy source, also called the ZPE or hyperspace or virtual flux. The magnets are put under a tremendous stress by placing like poles against one another, then binding them together, this effectively creates a giant magnet with spatial stress bubble. All that is listed on KeelyNet as SWEET1 through SWEET4 and the diagrams are listed as VTAPAK.ZIP.

The device also appears to be LOCALE DEPENDENT, meaning that it works better in some areas than others. To our knowledge, no one has yet publicly admitted to successfully duplicating the Sweet device.

We are told Sweet is under a Secrecy Order by the United States government that forbids his discussing or working further with his own discovery. If he'd only "slip" a copy of the plans out, we'd be very happy to distribute them across the computer networks and to many other researchers who would make it a reality for all.

rexresearch.com

---

Albert Roy DAVIS / Walter RAWLS
Biomagnetism

---

---

http://www.scribd.com/doc/129217271/Magnetism-and-Its-Effects-on-the-Living-System-a-roy-Davis-and-Walter-C-rawls

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

[ PDF ]

---

Does Magnetic Energy Flow?

by Walter Rawls

©2003 Biomagnetics International, Inc.

It has been said that magnetism is not energy and does not flow. The following is submitted:

Energy is a concept so basic that no terms more fundamental can describe it.

Therefore, especially in science, it has been qualified in more basic units by relating it to mass, velocity, temperature, and so on.

When Newton formulated his laws of motion, he did not mention energy. Thomas Young (1773-1829), about eighty years after Newton, took the term from a Greek word meaning "work" and applied it to what we now call the kinetic energy of a body.

Half a century later, Rankin coined the term 'potential energy'. Both of these terms concern mechanical physics and their relation to thermal energy (HEAT), but it was not realized until Joule (1818-1889) demonstrated that heat produced by the passage of an electric current through a wire was related to the square of the current and that heat was produced by mechanical work.

Lord Kelvin (1824-1907) and Carnot (1796-1832) never accepted that heat was anything other than a fluid, called calorie, possessed by hot bodies.

It was Einstein (1879-1955) who showed that every physical occurrence of whatever kind can be specified completely only if it is known when, as well as where, it occurred.

From Einstein's relativity of energy and mass also grew the idea (with "flow" overwhelmingly accepted at that time), that matter can be rearranged, but not destroyed. Mass at rest is equivalent to an amount of energy; but in motion, the effective mass (and therefore the effective energy) increases according to the velocity of the body in relation to the velocity of light.

For energy to do work and to be useable it must be able to flow to be transferred from one place to another. For example, a heat engine will only function with a useable temperature difference because only then can heat energy flow.

It has followed that units of energy have been thus specified, such as:

Calories, therms, and British Thermal Units (for heat),
Watt-hours (for electrical energy),
Foot-pounds and kilogram-metres for (mechanical energy), and
Gauss-oersteds (for the permanent magnet industry).

Energy is stored in the magnetic field of a permanent magnet because it will move a piece of iron in the vicinity, thus doing work on the iron. We pause here to remind the reader that the foregoing is accepted science. It is not unusual for a part (or parts) of accepted scientific knowledge to be misapplied or not disseminated thoroughly throughout the scientific community.

There are a number of editorials and scientific magazines, as well as comments by noteworthy publicly employed and private scientists, addressed to this difficulty. For example, the eminent scientist and mathematician, Gilbert, in the time of Elizabeth the First of Great Britain, proclaimed that the Earth was like a giant magnet.

Since Gilbert, this has been accepted science (although perhaps not emphasized or used properly for clarifications of energy and flow).

Since the industrial revolution...really since Benjamin Franklin, through Edison, Tesla, and even until the mid-1900's, the thrust has been on electrical energy in private and public use. That was until the advent of atomic energy. If a machine works...if a bomb can explode, then it is accepted. And even now, the scientific community divides between relativity and quantum mechanics in a broader sense of disciplines.

Question!

For energy to do work it must flow, so how can magnetism not flow as science accepts that it does work, and is energy? Still, we find prestigious scientific references that will say magnetism is energy and does not flow. This is a paradox of words (which are actually symbols) and not unusual as we rush ahead rapidly to improve upon and build greater devices. All the while, however, it is all too often done at the very expense of gaining more comprehension of the basics we have accepted on the path to achieving that very growth.

Here is another example of a science principle overlooked in relation to the importance of magnetism versus electricity (our two basic disciplines of useable energy in societies). In the discovery by Faraday in 1851, he realized that it is not just the actual motion of flow of the electrons that are at the center of electricity. Rather, it is the electric and magnetic (force) fields they set up as they move along.

It is well to note that in 1865, when Maxwell published his theories of electromagnetism, both electricity and magnetism were related in an exact mathematical fashion, one equal to the other and interrelated.

The rapid development of the atomic theory, with its discovery that all matter is ultimately composed of (among other particles) electrons, meant that electricity gained the more central prominence in physics. This added to the earlier important discoveries of Hertz (a light wave is merely a traveling electromagnetic wave).

Electrons exist in the atom orbiting around the nucleus. They are held there by the electromagnetic attraction existing between the negative charge carried by the electron and the positive charge of the nucleus. It is the same as the way in which the moon is held in orbit by the gravitational attraction between it and the Earth. The heavier atoms can have as many as ninety electrons swirling around the nucleus moving from one orbit to another giving us a source of energy for light, x-rays, etc.

It is the behavior of the electron clouds of the different atoms and the way the clouds link together that gives us the chemical properties of all matter.

The electron can behave like a particle or a wave (cables of spinning circular energy in frequency waves and particles, i.e. Davis and Rawls). The most important charged particle, the electron, carries a negative charge. Davis and Rawls, when pressed to state a preference between the negative and positive separate and distinct magnetic energies, will say the negative magnetic energy is more desirable for applications and effects, although a balance between the two energies is essential.

One of the themes of Davis and Rawls' book, The Magnetic Blueprint of Life, stresses the importance of negative energy in a number of scientific areas characterized in line with accepted physics, in the form of spin in the Nature of this energy. It is interesting to note here that the word "electron" also comes from the Greek word, and was first applied to magnetism, not electricity. It is, of course, still applied to magnetism, and becomes more important with the applications and effects seen by Davis and Rawls.

Davis and Rawls' discoveries have their roots in accepted science. To understand the basics as presented, it is neccessary to understand that by the scientific principle of application and effect, magnetism is as important (if not more so) as electricity.

Considering electromagnetic dictums, this is the principle. But the application and effect of magnetism has not been, in practice, equal to the use of electricity. It is believed that clarification of magnetism, at least in the discovery of the two separate and distinct energies fitting into definite scientific principles of cause and effect, will change this appreciation of magnetism's importance one day.

What does the scientific community say about magnetic flux in regard to flow? There are two general camps of belief:

1. That it flows, and

2. That it does not flow.

The only right or wrong belief about its flow is to be judged on whether the concept is useful to a particular individual. For example, it is more profitable to think of flux as merely being set up because it represents stored energy. In this case, it thusly does not flow and does not have a continuous loss of power as in the case when electric current flows in a wire.

For others, the analogue is more profitable if flux is considered to be a more precise analogue of electric current, so that a magnetic circuit can be given the properties appropriate to inductance and capacitance in an electric current.

Electricity flowing is an analogue as is magnetism flowing, depending on the use, application and effect. Prestigious scientific references are in conflict as Van Nostrand's will say no flow and the International Edition of the Science and Invention Encyclopedia will say otherwise. The analogue explanation seems more plausible for the scientific community's present position.

Here, we note the accepted practice of using a "keeper" for a magnet. Flow is considered magnetic flux from one pole to another. Each part of a magnet is a domain, a self-contained energy source, except for the Bloch wall (the center dividing portion), which cannot be measured with available instrumentation.

Magnetism will flow from pole to pole and over a period of time there is a loss of magnetism from the pole ends into infinity. Eventually, you would have a dead magnet (which could be recharged). A "keeper" is used to slow down and prevent this loss of energy flowing into infinity.

Magnetic domains are negative and positive, not just as symbols for identification, but in accordance with physics and natural laws of energy spin in relation to the distance of a magnet's poles to its center. The flow of energy is in cables of spinning circular energy, initially, from south to north. However, the constant flow is in both directions.

This is a synopsis, not a detailed explanation needing many pages, experiments, etc. Also, we are not going into radiation and wave frequency herein. However, we will say that the only thing that distinguishes one kind of radiation from another is its wavelength (or frequency) and that the study of electromagnetism is basic to the whole of science. After all, the Earth receives most of its energy from the sun by electromagnetic radiation.

In conclusion, we say that the already accepted basics of science - before Davis and Rawls - did accept magnetism as energy that flows, although not in unanimity among the scientific community. Davis and Rawls' applications and effects give more importance to these basics.

Davis and Rawls consider themselves their own worst critics, but nonetheless have to ask: If our diagnostic system, patented on the separate energies, works 100% of the time on the animal and human body - and the explanation of this working is not correct - then can someone come forth with a scientific explanation of why it works other than the way Davis and Rawls explain?

So far no one has. And we do not believe they can.

References

International Edition of Science and Inventions Encyclopedia, a large volume set, H.S. Stattmart and Company, Inc., New York (1977).

Asimov's Biographical Encyclopedia of Science and Technology, Doubleday (1982).

Van Nostrand's Scientific Encyclopedia, Fifth Edition, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co. (1976).

Basic Science Encyclopedia, Chartwell Books, Inc., Great Britain (1977).

Davis and Rawls, The Magnetic Blueprint of Life, Exposition Press, New York (1979).

---

http://www.keelynet.com
February 18, 1994

BIOMAG2.ASC

The following is a very basic introduction to the incredible  researches of Albert Roy Davis and Walter Rawls.  Davis is no longer living, but Rawls currently lives in Florida around Jacksonville.

 We highly recommend the purchase  of  the  following books detailing the researches of these two brilliant investigators.

"Magnetism and its Effects on the Living System" -- Explains for the first time how magnetism affects your life and the life of all living systems around you. The result of years of investigation into the laws  of  magnetism,  it  explains the discovery that a magnet has not one effect on the  living syste but TWO  EFFECTS,  each  supplied  by  the  two  forms of energy transmitted from each pole.  You  or  any other qualified person can reproduce the projects in this book.  (Illustrated)

"The Magnetic Effect" -- In this  book,  Davis and Rawls present and discuss  biomagnetic experiments and  research that have been successfully duplicated by members of the orthodox scientific  community.   The  author reveal the   factual,  natural  basis  of  applied   biomagnetic energies and  add  greatly  to the understanding of this new and exciting field.  The computer-exact and reproducible findings in this work  apply  to  the  treatment   of   such  conditions  as arthritis, cancer, glaucoma, sexual problems, and aging.

"The Magnetic Blueprint of Life" -- Written with forcefulness and precision, this is a comprehensive guide to the effect of magnetism upon the air  we  breathe, the food we  eat,  the  exercise we take.  It is an eloquent plea to the scientific community to reconsider the significance of basic magnetism...."the most important energy in Nature."

BioMagnetics ( Part 1 )
by Jerry W. Decker
with information from "The Magnetic Effect" by Albert Roy Davis and Walter C. Rawls

One of the most important series  of  experiments  ever done and yet still not widely known, were those carried out by Albert  Roy  Davis in conjunction with Walter Rawls.  These experiments are FUNDAMENTAL to an understanding of magnetic forces and are to this day not being used widely because many have never heard of them.

They found that  each pole of a magnet has SPECIFIC effects that are quite different from those of a full  magnet  where  both  poles are applied simultaneously.  These polar effects are deemed "mono-polar" for one pole.   The  poles  spin  in  opposite directions  and  have opposite properties.

Specifically, North Pole   energies   cause  mass  to  contract  and condense, rotating in a CCW direction,  while  South  Pole  energies cause mass to  expand  and dissipate, rotating in  a  CW  direction. Also, North Pole  energies have alkaline properties while South Pole energy is acid.  North pole energies  tend  to  collect fluids while South Pole energies dissipate fluids.  North pole energy is referred to as negative  because  it  reduces or attracts, while  South  pole energy is referred to as positive because it expands and dissipates.

Since magnetic monopole  magnets  are not available at just any Wal-Mart store, they chose to use the  longest  possible bar or cylinder magnets they could  acquire  which  would  allow  for  the  greatest separation of the two opposite energies.

It was found  that  use  of  a North Pole would provide an energetic environment which would cause cancer cells to contract and die out. This energetic environment also has other healthy applications as detailed in their many books.

I had the  pleasure of visiting with Walter Rawls one afternoon at his office in Jacksonville, Florida several years back. We discussed many things including Keely, of which he  had never heard. Mr. Rawls mailing address is

Walter Rawls
ARD Research Lab
PO BOX 655
Green Cove Springs, Florida  32043
(904) 264-8564

Should you wish  to  carry  out your own experiments with magnets as blazed by these pioneers, here are some helpful tips.

CORRECT POLE IDENTIFICATION

First, you need to understand how to correctly identify the polarity of any magnet.  In Davis/Rawls own words:

"The North pole of a magnet seeks  a South pole; likewise, a South  pole seeks a North pole.  The North pole of a magnet  is  NOT the North-SEEKING pole, nor is the South pole the South-SEEKING pole.

In fact, the North-SEEKING pole of a magnet is ACTUALLY the South pole! The South-SEEKING pole of a magnet is the North pole. The rule to remember is OPPOSITES ATTRACT and SIMILARS REPEL.

Test a magnet for correct usage by identifying the separate poles correctly.  Using  a  bar or cylinder magnet, tie a thread around the exact center of the magnet,  with  the  thread having a loose end.

Tie the  loose  end of the thread to any stationary overhang that allows the magnet to turn without  hindrance  in space.  When the magnet stops  turning,  the  end  of the magnet pointing  in  the direction of  the  earth's  North  pole  is the South pole of the magnet.  You may need a simple  compass  to determine the earth's North pole direction.

After you have determined the South pole of the magnet, mark that pole end with red fingernail polish or paint.  Once  you have one magnet properly  identified for North and South poles this magnet can be  used to IDENTIFY the  North  and  South  poles  of  OTHER magnets.  (They  use the color RED to indicate  danger  and  thus avoid it for biological experiments.  The reason being that since it causes  a  swelling of tissue, the fluids flow more freely, it accelerates life and growth.  If  you have a bacteria or disease, it will  also  ACCELERATE  its  growth  and  so   can   be  quite dangerous.)

For example,  if  we  bring  the  South  pole of any magnet up to another magnet's pole, a REPELLING  force  shows that the pole of the unknown magnet is the South pole.  An ATTRACTING  force shows that the unknown pole is the North pole.

You may  wish  to purchase a small inexpensive magnetometer.  The sensitive needle of this instrument moves in one direction or the other depending on the separate  magnetic pole in close vicinity. The law of magnetism is a PRIMARY law of nature: Like forces REPEL - unlike forces ATTRACT.

ESTIMATING FIELD STRENGTH

Magnetic field strength  is measured in units called  gauss.   Since magnets are not sold with this value printed on them and gaussmeters are expensive, you  need  a  way  to determine the approximate field strength.

Magnets are generally  sold by their  LIFTING  power.   That  is,  a horseshoe magnet is offered as having a lifting power,  when  placed against a piece  of  heavy  metal,  of  2  pounds to 25 pounds to 50 pounds, depending on the size, type, or kind of magnet.

As a guide to the approximate gauss  of commercial magnets, consider the following:

A magnet having a lifting power of 2 pounds may  vary from 500 to 600 gauss units; a lifting power of 5 pounds may vary from 900 to 1200 gauss; a lifting power of 25 pounds is usually around 2000 gauss; with 50 pounds lifting power, 3500 to 4500 gauss.

For more precise   measurement,   an   equipment   aid,  such  as  a magnetometer, should be employed.

Care must be taken to properly determine  which  pole  is  North and which is South, based on the above criteria.

When I was visiting with Walter in Florida, he very  kindly  gave me an assortment of  magnets  and books as well as an interesting meter that is used to measure the field strength AND POLARITY of a magnet.

This meter allows  you to quickly and accurately determine what pole is North or  South.   It  also  has   instructions  for  helping  to determine the field  strength.  The meter sells for  $50  and  is  a quick way to VISUALLY determine the polarity of any magnet.

CARE AND HANDLING OF MAGNETS

To prevent breakage  and  loss  of  magnetic power, you should never drop or strike the magnet with a sharp  blow.   Not only can it chip but it can also lose magnetic energy.

Magnets should never be stored in a hot location.  Most magnets lose ALL their power at temperatures from 400 to 500 degrees  Fahrenheit. The loss occurs  at  the CURIE point, where the magnetic domains are no longer aligned and become chaotic.

After using a magnet, you should  place  both  ends  of  the  magnet against a structure of flat metal.  This will allow  the  magnet  to maintain its original  strength.   Such  a  structure  is  called  a "keeper."  Magnets should be kept  away  from each other.  If placed where the poles  of  separate  magnets  repel,  there   could  be  a "bleeding-off" of the energy.  A loss of energy in this manner would be rapid.

WHY YOU SHOULD NOT USE ELECTROMAGNETS

Very effective and  powerful  magnets are made by passing electrical energy through a coil of wire having  a  metal, iron, or steel core. However, there is  a  difference between the magnetism  produced  in this manner and  the  magnetism  from  a  solid  state  bar or metal composition magnet.

Magnetism HAS A  FREQUENCY.   It  also  has  motion.   The  rate  of vibration depends on  the  size,  length, width, and  power  of  the magnet.  Solid state  composition  magnets,  such as metal, iron and steel, are CONSTANT in their rate  of  vibration  DEPENDING on their structure.  An electromagnet,  however,  may  present  a  number  of different types of vibrations.

Any kind of  electromagnet  has  many turns of insulated wire.  Each turn of this wire presents so many lines of magnetism.  Actually, we have discovered that these lines  of  force  are  really  CABLES  of force, as explained  in our earlier publications.   (See  RAWLS1.ASC and RAWLS1.GIF on KeelyNet)

However, a coil  wound  a  certain  number  of turns has a different frequency from a fixed metal or composition  magnet.   As  the  coil heats, the resistance  to  the flow of current INCREASES.   Here  we have a SLOW DROP in magnetic lines, or cables, of force to a RISE IN FORCE, depending upon   the   wire   and  core  materials  used  for construction.  Therefore, the    vibrations    supplied    by    the electromagnet are NOT  AS  CONSTANT  as  those  from  the  metal  or composition magnet.

Our research has  revealed that size, width, and overall length of a magnet GOVERNS FREQUENCY in electrical electron vibrations.  This is a discovery not known by the general  scientific  community, because we have not  published  our scientific materials on  this  research finding.  We are  working  on this discovery in the establishment of provable laws that  we  will  disclose   when  completed.   We  feel confident this future disclosure will open new avenues  that neither we nor the general scientific community could properly comprehend at this time.   (printed in The Magnetic Effect in 1975)

I asked Walter  about  this  frequency  business with magnets and at that time, he would not disclose how  the  measurements were made as it was proprietary  to  their  company, BioMagnetics  International. There are over  36  international  patents  based on the Davis/Rawls discoveries.

Also at the time I spoke with Walter,  he  said they had developed a couch that could DIAGNOSE problem areas in the body with an accuracy of 99%.  It  uses  magnets  to  create a response  in  the  body  to indicate an infected   or   diseased  location.   This  response  is described in the books listed above and has to do with a contraction of tissue when in the presence of a North pole energy.

It is interesting that the Floyd (Sparky)  Sweet  Vacuum Triode uses magnets that are "tuned" to the 60 cps frequency.   This  allows the device to pull  in  space  energy  at  a  frequency that requires no alteration to run off the shelf devices.   We also understand he has "pulled" as much  as  3000 watts of free energy directly  from  this space energy source,  also  called  the ZPE or hyperspace or virtual
flux.  The magnets are put under a tremendous stress by placing like poles against one  another,  then   binding   them   together,  this effectively creates a giant magnet with spatial stress  bubble.  All that is listed on KeelyNet as SWEET1 through SWEET4 and the diagrams are listed as VTAPAK.ZIP.

The device also  appears  to  be  LOCALE  DEPENDENT, meaning that it works better in some areas than others.   To  our  knowledge, no one has yet publicly  admitted  to  successfully duplicating  the  Sweet device.

We are told  Sweet  is  under  a  Secrecy Order by the United States government that forbids his discussing  or  working further with his own discovery.  If he'd only "slip" a copy of the plans out, we'd be very happy to distribute them across the computer  networks  and  to many other researchers who would make it a reality for all.

---

http://www.magnetage.com

The Revolutionary Discoveries of Davis and Rawls

Albert Roy Davis was the first scientist in the world to discover, in 1936, that magnetism consists of two separate and distinct energies, each having opposite effects on matter.

This revolutionary discovery forever changed the field of magnetic/electromagnetic research. Albert Roy Davis is the founder of the Science of  Biomagnetics (or Biomagnetism) in the United States, a term which means the study of the effects of a magnet's energies on the biological system. Magnetic therapy, as it is commonly referred to today, is one branch of the science called biomagnetism. Never before in recorded history could experiments be reproduced, time and time again, with precise and predictable results. If you are considering magnetic therapy, you must, for your own well-being, have an adequate understanding of the effects of the North and South pole energies. Incorrect use of a biomagnet (magnet specifically designed for magnetic therapy) can have serious undesirable consequences.

Throughout the twentieth century and up to the present, a great deal of research has been done to determine the effects of magnetic fields on living organisms. Researchers had not been able to obtain predictable results. All of the researchers throughout the world, whether the results showed magnetic energies to have an effect or not, were unaware of the fact that the polarity of the magnetic field used in their experiments would have a profound effect on the outcome. They believed, as scientists have for thousands of years, that the North and South poles of magnetism were homogeneous (the same) in their effects. You may know someone who has tried magnetic therapy and said it seemed to be helpful sometimes, but not at other times, or worse yet they may have had no improvement at all. Have you wondered why this has been the experience of many people who have used biomagnets, and as a result no longer do? There are several reasons.

In 1936, Albert Roy Davis discovered that magnetism consists of two separate and distinct energies. The North pole has the opposite effects of the South pole. To this day, most researchers still do not understand this, nor do many companies that sell magnetic therapy products. A biomagnet must be constructed in a way that separates the two poles of the magnet so that the North pole energy is on one side and the         South pole energy is on the opposite side of the magnet. They are often called unipolar magnets, as opposed to bipolar magnets, which have the North and South poles on the same side. Other companies that do sell unipolar biomagnets take some of the original work done by Davis and Rawls, which has been scientifically verified, and then wrongfully alter it. It is not uncommon for some doctors, scientists, and others to take credit for one or more of their discoveries. Using the North pole energy alone is not enough . The material the magnet is constructed of, the size,  and length of time it is used are all important considerations. If biomagnets are not used properly they will not only fail to give you the results you desire, they can be harmful.

We at Biomagnetics USA have been guided by the greatest scientists in magnetic/electromagnetic research in the world, the Albert Roy Davis Research Laboratory. When biomagnets are used correctly, as determined through decades of research by Davis and Rawls, they can offer you benefits that are nothing short of amazing!

The Figure Eight

No other scientists in history have made more fundamental discoveries about magnetism than Albert Roy Davis and Walter C. Rawls, Jr. Many years ago Davis discovered that magnetic energies spin, North pole in a counterclockwise rotation, and the South pole in a clockwise rotation. It is now common to read about the spin or vortex of magnetic energies in scientific literature, but what is never mentioned in these publications is the fact that this was first discovered by Davis. Even scientists and researchers of unorthodox science often fail to give credit to Davis and Rawls for their discoveries, yet many of them are well aware of their work.

Davis also discovered that magnetism flows in and around a magnet in the form of a figure "8". The method developed by Michael Faraday in 1852 to show the "lines of force" (Davis discovered that they are actually cables of force) around a magnet is incorrect. Faraday used a flat piece of paper, placed iron filings on it, and brought a magnet up under the paper to show the lines of force. The truth is that when each particle of steel or iron filing is placed in the field of the magnet, it becomes temporarily magnetized, in effect, becoming a magnet itself. As each particle then attracts and repels, the demonstration presents a mistaken concept.

Albert Roy Davis discovered the figure "8" after developing a special type of electron photography to photograph the magnetic field of a magnet, the same method that was used to take the photo on the right. If you examine this photo you can clearly see the spin of the cables of force. Davis and Rawls also devised a more simplified demonstration to show the lines of force (i.e. cables of force), an experiment that can be performed in any classroom (see photos below). The method requires a large, clear glass container filled with water, some barium ferrite, and a long cylinder or bar magnet attached to a non-magnetic handle. The barium ferrite is put into the water, and the magnet with the handle is used to briskly stir the water to suspend the particles. Next, the stirring ceases and the magnet is held vertically in the center of the container. The particles will then form and reveal  the figure eight of magnetic energies. This demonstration should be in all of the science textbooks that are used to educate students about magnetism... but it is not.

1. Place magnet in container
2. Stir the water so the barium ferrite is suspended
3. Observe the figure eight of magnetic energies

---

Focused magnetic directional polarities
US5197492

A method is provided for focusing magnetic fields, reducing magnetic fields and shielding animate or inanimate subjects from magnetic fields. Further a media which has been subjected to a shielded or focused magnetic field is applied to a subject, as for example, topically. The method, in part, interposes between the subjects and the source of a magnetic field, at least one second magnetic field disposed in such a manner that the polarity of the second magnetic field cancels or at least partially neutralizes the magnetic strength of the first magnetic field. The second magnetic field can also be disposed so as to permit only a portion of the first magnetic field to escape shielding and thereby focused in a predetermined direction. Devices which normally emit magnetic energy and containing the shielding of the present invention are also provided.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

(1) Field of the Invention

This invention relates generally to magnetic energies derived from a specific magnetic field. In one aspect, this invention is directed to shielding of human and inanimate subjects from magnetic fields and a method for shielding humans from electromagnetic fields such as those generated by transmission lines, magnetic resonance imaging devices and the like. The invention also is directed to the utilization of such shielding to focus electromagnetic energy and to provide devices equipped with such shielding. Another aspect of the invention is the use of the focused magnetic energies of a particular unidirectional magnetic field.

(2) Description of the Related Art

Recently there has been a rising concern by scientists and an increasing awareness on the part of the public in general, of the potential health hazards of electromagnetic fields. The scientific evidence is increasing daily which indicates that exposure to magnetic fields might conceivable cause adverse health effects in the cells of the human body. A comprehensive background paper was recently issued by the Congressional Office of Technology Assessment which was prepared by a team at Carnegie Mellon University and which indicated that the emerging evidence no longer allows one to categorically assert that there are no risks associated with electromagnetic fields radiated by cables, wires, fixtures and appliances in general.

Although scientists have generally assured the public that there was no danger to health, the uncertainty engendered by often contradictory data causes some degree of concern.

Moreover, while the electromagnetic fields radiated by fixtures and appliances found in the home or workplace may be of a relatively low level, more sophisticated equipment such as transmission lines, large electrical transformers, as well as the more recent magnetic resonance imaging devices, which radiate greater magnetic field strengths, are undoubtedly of greater concern. Magnetism and its effects have been widely discussed in the past and it is evident that magnetic energy does indeed effect the living organism such as humans and agricultural products.

A wide variety of methods have been reported in the literature which are directed to the use of magnetic energy as a diagnostic technique and also for the treatment of diseases in warm blooded animals including humans. For example, magnetic energy has been utilized quite successfully over the past several years to promote the formation of osteoblasts in conjunction with the healing of bone fractures. In many instances markedly improved results in healing times have been achieved by the application of magnetic energy to the site of bone fractures and other injuries.

The search for a biological effect due to magnetic fields has a long history dating back a hundred years. The literature on biomagnetic effects on the growth and development of various organisms has been quite extensive showing both positive and negative findings. Among the positive findings attributed to strong magnetic fields are: altered growth rate, enzyme activities, cellular metabolism, DNA synthesis and animal orientation. While the mutagenic abilities of strong magnetic fields have been controversial, a direct cytotoxic effect on mammalian cells has not been reported. As long ago as 1963, experiments were performed with a 56 kilogauss static field generated in an electromagnet at the Clarendon Laboratory at Oxford: at the time the strongest magnetic field available in the world, which showed no cytotoxicity with mammalian cells cultured in vitro for exposures up to several hours. The recent availability of powerful permanent ceramic magnets prompted the present studies which showed that to produce cytotoxicity the magnetic field needed to be varied.

Previous development of directional magnetic fields began in 1936, when A. R. Davis first discovered that the north and the south magnetic pole fields each exhibited unique properties with respect to their effects on various forms of life. This discovery was slow to be accepted because of investigations by others who confused Davis' directional polarities magnetic fields with those which are simultaneously emitted by horse shoe type magnets and by AC-powered electromagnets. The common belief over the years relating to magnets has been that the two magnetic poles, north and south, are homogeneous and that they emanate the same potential type of energy. This belief has been found to be a misconception, since the two poles of a magnet are totally different in electric potential and effect. Correspondingly, the application of the respective poles to living systems has been found to produce quite different results. More specifically, it has been shown that magnetic energy has an effect on cells such as blood cells, nerves, bacteria, et al.

It is also believed that magnetic energy has an effect on cells such as blood cells, nerve tissue cells and the like. Preliminary investigations regarding biological effects of exposure to magnetic fields have indicated a polarity dependence. Cells are deemed to be bioelectric in nature, function and behavior and studies have indicated that directional magnetic fields enhance biological activity. Moreover, due to the orientation of such cells and of the metal elements and other ions contained therein, the blood cells have been found to decrease certain biological effects when exposed to the north pole and to increase other biological effect when exposed to the magnetic south pole. This same type of reaction has been noted in connection with the other type cells of the body, it having been observed that, as a general matter, the application of north pole energies to an existing unhealthy or abnormal condition tends to have an arresting, quieting or relaxing effect, to induce an overall healing reaction akin to the body's own defense mechanism. On the other hand, the application of south pole energies tends to have a strengthening, activating effect, which has been found useful in treating some abnormal conditions, particularly those associated with a slowing or weakening in function. Cancer cells exposed to the north field show a significant decrease in the number of surviving cells after a period of incubation. Conversely, the same type of cells, when exposed to the south field, indicated an increase in the number of surviving cells compared to the unexposed controls. A more detailed description of magnetic pole energies can be found in Davis et al, Magnetism and its Effects On the Living System, Acres U.S.A., Kansas City Mo. (1974) and Davis et al, The Magnetic Effect, Acres U.S.A., Kansas City Mo. (1975).

Radiotherapy and chemotherapy are important modalities used to treat many types of human cancer. A major virtue of radiotherapy is that radiation beams can be aimed to encompass a target volume including the tumor while avoiding systemic effects. Within the target volume itself, radiation does not distinguish well between normal and malignant tissues and the small differential that does exist requires the exploitation of kinetic differences in a protracted multifraction regimen. On the other hand, some chemotherapy agents show a big differential in cytotoxicity between dividing and non-dividing cells, if not between normal and malignant cells per se, but the concomitant problem is systemic toxicity since the drug cannot be aimed. It would appear that a varying magnetic field may combine the best features of radio- and chemo- therapy; i.e. a big differential in cytotoxicity between dividing and plateau phase cells and the possibility of being aimed at a limited tumor volume,

In U.S. Pat. No. 3,337,776, which issued Aug. 22, 1967, there is disclosed an apparatus for generating magnetic fields which are indicated to be particularly useful for biomedical applications. Although the patentee is not specific as to individual applications, he does state that magnetic fields generated by the apparatus can decrease metabolism values and reacts on the spastic syndrome.

A magnetic probe is disclosed and claimed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,664,327 which issued May 23, 1972 and states that the probe can be employed in relatively inaccessible locations, such as in body cavities of animals to cause relaxation of muscle tissue.

A magnetic medical treatment device is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,921,620 which states that the effects of a magnetic field upon a living body are due to the fact that the electrolyte within the living body is dissociated by polarization and induced currents and is effective in controlling the sympathetic nervous system.

On May 3, 1977, U.S. Pat. No. 4,020,590 issued to A. R. Davis and discloses an apparatus and method for treating seeds in a unipolar magnetic field. It is indicated in the patent that this treatment enhances the germination rate of the seeds, as well as providing plants having greater sugar content, increased protein and other desirable features.

In U.S. Pat. No. 4,134,935 which issued Jan. 16, 1979 also to A. R. Davis, a method is disclosed and claimed which uses magnetic fields for clinical examination of animals to determine damaged, diseased, abnormal or malfunctioning parts of the body. Changes in tensioning and relaxation of the body extremities are an indication of body abnormalities.

A method for treating cancer is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,622,952 which issued Nov. 18, 1986 and which involves timing an electromagnetic energy to the resonant energy absorption frequencies of the intracellular structures of the selected cells and then exposing a subject to this tuned electromagnetic energy field. The field can also be tuned to the frequency which has been calculated to be closest to the resonant frequency of the cancer cells and furthest from the normal cells.

U.S. Pat. No. 4,622,953, which issued to the same patentee, disclosed the identical procedure for the treatment of atherosclerotic lesions. In this process, metabolic and activity varying substances such as ferric hydroxide and dextran were employed and by applying the proper resonant energy, the heat in the diseased cell is increased by an increment sufficient to kill the diseased cell but not sufficient to kill normal cells.

In a patent issued to Robert T. Gordon on May 5, 1987, U.S. Pat. No. 4,602,359, a process is described and claimed for the treatment of cancer in a host organism which comprises providing to the host organism minute particles capable of being inductively heated and which are of a size which can be absorbed into cancer cells. Thereafter the organism is subjected to an alternating electromagnetic field to heat the particles at that point in metabolic time when the maximum difference in magnetic susceptibility between the cancer cells and normal cells within the region occurs, and then continuing the inductive heating to increase intracellular temperature to selectively kill the cancer cells.

The north pole, which is defined as the north seeking pole, is now believed to provide a negative form of energy while the south pole, which is defined as the south seeking pole, is believed to provide a positive form of energy. It has also been found upon examination of the electron paths associated with the fields surrounding the respective poles that the south pole end of a magnet provides a right hand spin of electrons, i.e., a clockwise rotation of electron movement, as contrasted with the north pole electron spin, which provide a left hand spin or counterclockwise rotation of its electron field.

It has been further observed that the lines of magnetic energy leave the south pole to re-enter the magnet at the Bloch Wall where the 180 degree phase takes place, and leave the Bloch Wall at that point to go on as the north pole energy to re-enter the magnet at its north pole.

It is therefore evident that magnetic energies do indeed have an effect upon plants and living organisms, and which in some instances may be detrimental.

Surveys of magnetic resonance imaging devices and other types of equipment capable of producing appreciable magnetic fields were performed in order to determine the polarity and intensity of magnetic fields in areas where there are potentials of both occupational exposure and exposure to members of the general public.

Considering the potential significance of the foregoing, exposure to the South field from devices radiating such energy should be as low as is reasonably achievable.

Accordingly, one or more of the following objects will be achieved by the practice of this invention. It is an object of this invention to provide a method for shielding human and inanimate objects from magnetic fields. Another object is to provide a shielding for humans from electromagnetic fields such as those generated by transmission lines, magnetic resonance imaging devices and the like. A further object of the invention is to provide devices equipped with appropriate shielding. These and other objects will readily become apparent to those skilled in the art in the light of the teachings therein set forth.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

In its broad aspect this invention is directed to a method for shielding humans and inanimate subjects from magnetic fields. The method comprises, in part, interposing between the subjects and the source of a magnetic field, at least one second magnetic field disposed in such a manner that the polarity of the second magnetic field cancels or at least partially neutralizes the magnetic strength of the first magnetic field. The second magnetic field can also be disposed so as to permit only a portion of the first magnetic field to escape shielding and thereby focus the magnetic energy in a predetermined direction. Devices which normally emit magnetic energy and containing the shielding of the present invention are also provided.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

The objects of the invention will become more apparent when the specification is read in conjunction with the drawings wherein:

FIG. 1 is a schematic drawing looking down on the top of a mobile trailer housing a magnetic resonance imaging unit;

FIG. 2 is a magnet;

FIG. 3 is a graph of the growth curves for mouse cultures exposed to a varying magnetic field;

FIG. 4 is a graph of the survival date for exponentionally growing and plateau phase cells exposed to the varying magnetic field; and

FIG. 5 is a graph illustrating growth curves for control and parallel cultures exposed to a varying magnetic field.



DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

As indicated above, an aspect of the present invention is directed to a method of shielding magnetic energy radiating or emanating from a magnetic source. Using the shielding in accordance with the procedure of this invention can greatly reduce or even eliminate potential danger from a magnetic field, especially energy from any South field.

While it has not been established with certainty, the current views seem to tend towards the possibility that magnetic fields, especially the South magnetic field may adversely effect living organisms. It is with this in mind that the present invention was conceived in order to reduce or eliminate exposure of humans and inanimate objects to unnecessary magnetic energy. While many of the devices used in the home today emit little magnetic energy, there are other devices wherein exposure to their magnetic field may have adverse consequences.

Since there are few, if any, materials which can not be penetrated by magnetic energy, it was found that the best way to reduce or eliminate unwanted magnetic energy was to utilize a separate an opposing magnetic field to counteract the energy of the first magnetic source. Accordingly, it was found that by using one or more magnets of a lesser strength, but located and oriented in a set fashion, the undesirable effect of the first magnetic source could be counteracted.

Since the magnetic field strength weakens in proportion to the distance away from the magnetic source, it was found that a magnet of a relative low strength if properly placed could effectively eliminate unwanted radiation. As noted in Examples 1-5 which follow, a shield of a lesser strength placed at a predetermined distance from the magnetic source, was effective in completely neutralizing the magnetic energy.

It has been found that the second magnetic field which comprises the shield, can be fabricated from a wide variety of materials and in a wide variety of configurations. For example, ferrite particles or powders can be embedded in a variety of plastic or other materials which can then be made into a wide variety of shapes and sizes. When such materials are rendered magnetic, then can serve as excellent shields for use in the method of the present invention. Such materials can be obtained from the Fermag Company of Edison, N.J. in various strengths of their magnetic fields. For example, magnetic shielding can be obtained having magnetic field strengths of from about 1000 to about 1500 gauss and higher. The actual strength need will of course be determined by the strength of the magnetic source and the proximity of the shielding to the source.

As indicated, the shielding can be fabricated in a wide variety of shapes and sizes as well as thicknesses. In many instances, using the shield in the form of sheets will be sufficient and such sheets can be arranged in several layers one behind the other if necessary. In other instances, it may be necessary to have the shield configured into a cylindrical, spherical or other shape in order to provide the optimum shielding of the first magnetic source. Additionally, while the shielding can be a magnetized material, it is also possible to have the shielding be an electromagnet whose power is derived form an electrical source.

Measurement of the field strength of the first magnetic source and of the second magnetic source or shielding, can be done with a gaussmeter such as Model 5-0-5, which can be obtained from the Annis Company of Ind. Also, a magnetometer is available from the Albert Roy Davis Research Laboratory, of Green Cove Springs, Fla. To identify the poles using this device, the side or end of the magnet is brought up to the meter. If the needle moves to the right (+), it is the South pole energy that is being measured. If the needle moves to the left (-) it is the North pole of the magnet.

The distance between the magnetic source and the meter varies with the magnetic strength. For this magnetometer, 1/2 inch is about 150 Gauss; 1 inch, 200 Gauss; 1 and 1/2 inch 300 Gauss, 2 and 1/2 inches 500 Gauss; 5 inches, 1800 Gauss; 9 inches, 3500 Gauss; 12 inches 4500 Gauss; and the like. Although different gaussmeters will have different scales, the data obtained with one meter will be relative to the different field strengths for the particular magnets tested and the distance of the meter from the magnetic source.

In general, it has been observed that the energy radiating from the South pole is the energy which might have adverse effects on humans. Thus, by utilizing a shield in accordance with the teachings of this invention wherein this South pole energy is neutralized, humans can be protected from such adverse effects.

The following examples are illustrative of the present invention.

EXAMPLES 1-5

In order to demonstrate that a source of magnetic energy can be adequately shielded, a magnet having a field strength of approximately 3500 gauss was placed in a flat surface. A magnetic shield in the form of a sheet was placed about six inches from the surface of the magnet which radiated a south (+) field. The magnetic shield employed was obtained from the Fermag Company of Edison, N.J. and was comprised of magnetic ferrite embedded in a pliable substrate material. The shield was in the form of a flat sheet of no great than 0.25 inches in thickness and had a magnetic strength of 1200 gauss. The shield was placed vertically so that its flat surface was parallel to the magnet and yet perpendicular to the magnetic field radiating therefrom. The shield was oriented so that its south (+) field faced the magnet.

The strength of the magnetic field was measured using a gaussmeter (Model 5-0-5, obtained from the Annis Company of Ind. and placed about 9.5 inches from the magnet) about 3.5 inches behind the shield when the shield was in place. The measurements obtained are set forth below in Table I.

TABLE I

Gaussmeter Reading / Example Unshielded / Shielded

1 +4.00 +0.5
2 +4.50 0.0
3 +5.0 0.0
4 +5.0 +0.5
5 +5.0 +1.0

EXAMPLE 6

A survey was made at a large northeast research institution and indicated that fairly high intensities of magnetic fields could be detected in areas adjacent to various devices. This prompted a survey of an operating mobile magnetic resonance imaging unit to determine whether high levels of magnetic energy was being emitted from such unit. An examination of the console regularly occupied by the staff personnel in the room housing the MRI magnets, showed that the intensity levels were substantially higher and areas of both positive (South field) and negative (North field) were measured. This unit was a 0.3 Tesla Hybrid Resistive magnet with magnetic bricks. The field polarity is obviously determined by the configuration of the components.

Substantial levels were measured outside of the trailer 10 housing the unit12 which also was posted with a sign indicating "Magnet Hazard". In the single drawing, there is depicted a schematic top view of the trailer 10, showing the approximate location of the magnet 12, of the MRI unit and the side 14, from which actual measurements of the field strengths were made. Warning sign 16, was on the outer trailer wall at approximately the location of the MRI unit inside. The scale on the side of the drawing is in inches measured away from the side of the trailer.

It is evident from the data obtained that there is substantial magnetic radiation from the side of the MRI mobile unit and which is the less desirable positive type of radiation. Although there is no correlation yet available to connect the intensity of the magnetic field with any detrimental effects on humans, the mere fact that the mobile unit contains the "Magnet Hazard" warning sign on the trailer should be sufficient to encourage using an appropriate shielding. The particular unit for which the measurements were made, was located on a city street where pedestrians would pass through the field depicted in the drawing.

Although the invention has been illustrated by the preceding examples, it is not to be construed as being limited to the materials employed therein, but rather, the invention is directed to the generic area as herein before disclosed. Various modifications and embodiments of the invention can be made without departing from the spirit or scope thereof.

Another set of experiments were conducted wherein mammalian cells growing in culture were exposed to a varying magnetic field having a maximum intensity of 6.8 kilogauss. The cell cultures remained stationary, while two permanent ceramic magnets were rotated at 16 rev/min so that each magnet passed under the cells once during each revolution. Exponentially growing cultures of either A549 human lung carcinoma cells or C,H/lOT-1/2 mouse embryo fibroblasts were exposed to the varying field. By about 3 days, cell growth was arrested, and the fraction of cells surviving was of the order of 10-'. By contrast, no measurable cell killing was observed in confluent cultures of C,H/IOT-I/2 cells showing contact inhibition. The substantial cytotoxicity shown by this varying magnetic field and the striking differential between the level of killing observed in dividing versus plateau phase cells, suggests that this might be useful to treat rapidly growing tumors in a relatively slow growing normal tissue.

The effect of magnetic fields on exponentially growing cells compared with control cultures consists of two components. First, the total number of cells is reduced, implying that cell growth is inhibited. Second, of the cells present, a proportion have lost their clonogenicity and this proportion increases with time of exposure to the field. With the field strength and period of oscillation used, a 72 hour exposure results in 10-fold fewer cells on the treated than on the control flasks, and of these only 1/10 are clonogenic. A further increase in exposure time results in too few viable cells to assay.

The key to producing a cytotoxic effect by means of a magnetic field appears to be a combination of a sufficiently intense magnetic field and a suitable variation of that field applied for a prolonged period. A steady or constant magnetic field of similar, or even higher intensity, does not produce a cytotoxic effect over the time periods studied.

The effect on cytotoxicity of modifying the magnetic field intensity and the rate of change of magnetic field strength is currently under intense investigation; there are evidently several different parameters that can be varied and the relative importance of each is not yet clear.

The instant invention involves only cells cultured in vitro, however, the substantial cytotoxic effect of the varying magnetic field and the fact that it can be manipulated to cover various areas and volumes, and the dramatic differential in cell killing between dividing and plateau phase cells suggests that this may be a useful anti-cancer device that merits further investigation.

C3H IOTI/2 mouse embryo fibroblasts were used. These cells exhibited contact inhibition of growth and anchorage dependence under normal culture conditions. Cells were maintained in Eagle's Basal medium supplemented with 10% heat inactivated fetal bovine serum (Hyclone Laboratories, Logan, Utah) and 25 /ml gentamycin (U.S. Biochemicals, Cleveland, Ohio).

A549 human lung carcinoma cells were maintained in Eagle's Minimun Essential Medium Supplemented with 15% fetal bovine serum, 25 g/ml gentamycin, 1% glutamine and 0.1% sodium pyruvate (Grand Island Biological Supplies, Grand Island, N.Y.).

TESTING

Exponentially growing C3H IOTI/2 and A549 cells were trypsinized and related at I.times.10' cells and 5.times.10" cells respectively per 25 cm' area tissue culture flask (Corning) in 10 ml medium. Forty eight hours after plating, the caps of the flasks were closed tightly and the cultures were Fmt into a water-jacketed incubator fitted with a custom-built motor assembly for varying field magnetic treatment at 37 C. A constant 16 rpm gear-head motor was used and was placed inside the incubator. The shaft of the motor was connected to a lucite platform onto which two sets of ceramic monopolar magnets were positioned 12.5 cm apart. The maximum intensity of the magnets was 6.8 kilogauss. The lucite platform could be adjusted by raising or lowering the shaft of the motor. Culture flasks exposed to the varying fields were placed on an aluminum tray 2 mm above the rotating magnets. The position of the flasks on the holding tray were bounded by the circumference of the revolving magnetic bars. A maximum of 13 T25 cm' area flasks could be treated at any one time. Control flasks were placed on a tray at the bottom of the incubator where the magnetic field as determined by a gauss meter was minimal.

In experiments involving plateau phase cultures of C3H 10T1/2 cells, exponentially growing cells were plated at 5.times.10@5 cells per flask in 10 ml. tissue culture medium four days before initiation of treatment. Bromodeoxyuridine labeling (5.times.10@-6 M) for one cell cycle showed the cells to be in plateau phase with less than 6% cycling.

To determine the growth kinetics of cultured cells treated with the varying fields, duplicate flasks were removed from the incubator together with an equal number of control cultures. The sampling times chosen were 2 hrs. and 6 hrs., after the initiation of treatment, and at daily intervals thereafter for up to 4 to 6 days. The cultures were trypsinized, counted and the total number of cells per flask determined using a Coulter electronic counter.

To determine the surviving fractions of both exponentially and plateau-phase treated cultures of C3H 10%1/2 cells, the cultures were trypsinized, counted and replated into 100 mm diameter tissue culture dishes at a density such that 50-60 viable cells would survive and form colonies. The cultures were incubated for 10-12 days at which time they were fixed with formaldehyde, stained with Giemsa and counted for colony formation.

In FIG. 3 the growth curves for control mouse cultures exposed to a varying magnetic field (maximum value 6 kilogauss) for various periods of time are illustrated. Shown are the total number of cells/dish and the total number of viable cells per dish, i.e. the number capable of forming colonies. Each point represents pooled data from 2 experiments. Bar represents .+-. I.S.D. Data for exponential phase cultures are depicted in the left-hand panel. Control cells incubated in the same incubation as the treated cultures had a doubling time of 18 hours and was comparable to published data for normal C3H IOTI/2 cells. Six hours after the initiation of magnetic treatment, the treated cells already demonstrated signs of growth inhibition. By 72 hours after treatment, the total number of cells per treated flask was roughly 1/10 of that of the control. The number of clonogenically viable cells, based on the plating efficiencies and the surviving fractions also changed with the duration of treatment. By the end of 72 hours, the number of reproductively viable cells was only one-tenth of the cell population. Data for plateau phase cultures of C3H IOTI/2 cells are shown in the right-hand panel. Essentially no difference was observed in the total cell number between the treated vs. control cultures. Although the number of clonogenically viable cells also showed a modest decrease after treatment for 3 days the effect was less dramatic than that for exponentially phase cultures.

FIG. 4 shows the survival data for exponentially growing and plateau phase c,H/lOT-1/2 cells exposed to the varying magnetic field for various periods of time. For each time point examined, cells were removed by trypsinization from replicate flasks from control and treated groups, and aliquots of cells replated into fresh medium to assay for clonogenicity. The fraction of cells forming colonies from treated and control flasks gives the surviving fraction. Each point represents pooled data from 2-3 experiments. Bar represents + S.E. The surviving fractions of either exponential or plateau phase C3H lOTI/2 cells treated with the varying magnetic field for various periods of time are shown. A three (3) day treatment resulted in a 10% survival for actively growing cells whereas contact inhibited cells showed only a 20% killing level.

The growth inhibitory effects of a varying magnetic field on a human tumor cell line are shown in FIG. 5. Growth curves for control S549 and for parallel cultures exposed to a varying magnetic field (maximum value about 6.8 kilogauss for various periods of time are shown. The data points shown correspond to the total number of cells per dish. Each point represents pooled data from 2 experiments. Bar represents + I.S.D. The human lung carcinoma cells have a doubling time similar to that of C3H IOTI/2 cells (-18 to 20 hours). There was a significant difference in total cell numbers between the treated and control cultures at 24 hours after treatment. By 72 hours after treatment, the number of treated cells was roughly 1/IO of that for control.

In another modification of the invention, cells are indirectly subjected to the influence of a particular directional, or unipolar magnetic field, as illustrated in FIG. 2. A media is placed proximate to and preferably directly on a magnet 100, such that is is subjected to the desired field. The magnet is preferably a compound magnet, such that a first portion emits a field A and a field B. A second magnet is positioned proximate to the first magnet, such that the second magnet's magnetic field B is directed in opposition to the first magnet's field B. In this manner, the fields B of the first and second magnet are effectively canceled, as previously described and only the A fields are permitted to emanate to the surrounding regions. This serves to protect user from the detrimental effects of field B, when applicable.

The media is subjected to the desired magnetic field for a period sufficient to have the desired effect on the media. The media subjected to the magnetic field can be a cosmetic cream, lotion or the like. The media is then applied to the user's body for a period of time, such as overnight. The following morning the media is returned to its place proximate the magnetic field for reactivation. It has been found that the activation of the media degrades with time, thus necessitating the reactivation process. Because the source of the magnetic field radiates both desirable and undesirable magnetic fields, the shielding of the undesirable field can be critical to the well-being of the user. The shielding of the undesirable field and the focusing of the desired field are accomplished as heretofore described.

---

Magnetically modified microbial metabolism
US5709223
US5318045

This invention pertains to a method of modifying the reproduction rate of cells by exposing the cells to north directional unipolar magnetic fields, thereby decreasing the reproduction rate of the cells. The reproduction rate of the cells can also be modified by exposing them to south directional unipolar magnetic fields, thereby increasing the reproduction rate of the cells.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

This invention relates generally to methods for the modification of microbial metabolism using unipolar magnetic fields. In one aspect, this invention is directed to the modification of microbial metabolism, such as enhancing the microbial activity in the biodegradation of contaminated aqueous waste streams. In a further aspect, the present invention relates to methods for utilizing a unipolar magnetic field under controlled conditions to modify the metabolism of microorganisms.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The search for a biological effect due to magnetic fields has a long history dating back a hundred years. The literature on biomagnetic effects on the growth and development of various organisms has been quite extensive showing both positive and negative findings. Among the positive findings attributed to strong magnetic fields are: altered growth rate, enzyme activities, cellular metabolism, DNA synthesis and animal orientation.

A wide variety of methods have been reported in the literature which are directed to the use of magnetic energy as a diagnostic technique and also for the treatment of diseases in warm blooded animals including humans. For example, magnetic energy has been utilized quite successfully over the past several years to promote the formation of osteoblasts in conjunction with the healing of bone fractures. In many instances markedly improved results in healing times have been achieved by the application of magnetic energy to the site of bone fractures and other injuries.

In U.S. Pat. No. 3,337,776, which issued Aug. 22, 1967, there is disclosed an apparatus for generating magnetic fields which are indicated to be particularly useful for biomedical applications. Although the patentee is not specific as to individual applications, he does state that magnetic fields generated by the apparatus can decrease metabolism and reacts on the spastic syndrome.

A magnetic probe is disclosed and claimed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,664,327 which issued May 23, 1972 and states that the probe can be employed in relatively inaccessible locations, such as in body cavities of animals to cause relaxation of muscle tissue.

A magnetic medical treatment device is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,921,620 which states that the effects of a magnetic field upon a living body is dissociated by polarization and induced currents and is effective in controlling the sympathetic nervous system.

On May 3, 1977, U.S. Pat. No. 4,020,590 issued to A. R. Davis discloses an apparatus and method for treating seeds in a unipolar magnetic field. It is indicated in the patent that this treatment enhances the germination rate of the seeds, as well as providing plants having greater sugar content, increased protein and other desirable features.

In U.S. Pat. No. 4,134,935 which issued Jan. 16, 1979 also to A. R. Davis, a method is disclosed and claimed which uses magnetic fields for clinical examination of animals to determine damaged, diseased, abnormal or malfunctioning parts of the body. Changes in tensioning and relaxation of the body extremities are an indication of body abnormalities.

A method for treating cancer is disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,622,952 which issued Nov. 18, 1986 and which involves timing an electromagnetic energy to the resonant energy absorption frequencies of the intracellular structures of the selected cells. and then exposing a subject to this tuned electromagnetic energy field. The field can also be tuned to the frequency which has been calculated to be closest to the resonant frequency of the cancer cells and furthest from the normal cells.

U.S. Pat. No. 4,622,953, which issued to the same patentee, disclosed the identical procedure for the treatment of atherosclerotic lesions. In this process, metabolic and activity varying substance such as ferric hydroxide and dextran were employed and by applying the proper resonant energy, the heat in the diseased cell is increased by an increment sufficient to kill the diseased cell but not sufficient to kill normal cells.

In a patent issued to Robert T. Gordon on May 5, 1987, U.S. Pat. No. 4,602,359, a process is described and claimed for the treatment of cancer in a host organism which comprises providing to the host organism minute particles capable of being inductively heated and which are of a size which can be absorbed into cancer cells. Thereafter the organism is subjected to an alternating electromagnetic field to heat the particles at that point in metabolic time when the maximum difference in magnetic susceptibility between the cancer cells and normal cells within the region occurs, and then continuing the inductive heating to increase intracellular temperature to selectively kill the cancer cells.

Previous developments of directional magnetic fields began in 1936, when A. R. Davis first discovered that the north and the south magnetic pole fields each exhibited unique properties with respect to their effects on various forms of life. This discovery was slow to be accepted because of investigations by others who confused Davis' directional polarities magnetic fields with those which are simultaneously emitted by horse shoe type magnets and by AC-powered electromagnets. The common belief over the years relating to magnets has been that they emanate the same potential of type of energy. This belief has been found to be a misconception, since the two poles of a magnet are totally different in electric potential and effect. Correspondingly, the application of the respective poles to living systems has been found to produce quite different results. More specifically, it has been shown that magnetic energy has an effect on cells such as blood cells, nerves, bacteria, et al.

Preliminary investigations regarding biological effects of exposure to magnetic fields have indicated a polarity dependence. Cells are deemed to be bioelectric in nature, function and behavior and studies have indicated that directional magnetic fields enhance biological activity. Moreover, due to the orientation of such cells and of the metal elements and other ions contained therein, the blood cells have been found to decrease certain biological effects when exposed to the north pole and to increase other biological effects when exposed to the magnetic south pole. This same type of reaction has been noted in connection with other type cells of the body, it having been observed that, as a general matter, the application of north pole energies to an existing unhealthy or abnormal condition tends to have an arresting, quieting or relaxing effect, to induce an overall healing reaction akin to the body's own defense mechanism. On the other hand, the application of south pole energies tends to have a strengthening, activating effect, which has been found useful in treating some abnormal conditions, particularly those associated with a slowing or weakening in function. Cancer cells exposed to the north field show a significant decrease in the number of surviving cells after a period of incubation. Conversely, the same type of cells, when exposed to the south field, indicated an increase in the number of surviving cells compared to the unexposed controls. A more detailed description of magnetic pole energies can be found in Davis et al, Magnetism and its Effects on the Living System, Acres U.S.A., Kansas City, Mo. (1974) and Davis et al, The Magnetic Effect, Acres U.S.A., Kansas City, Mo. (1975).

The north pole, which is defined as the north seeking pole, is now believed to provide a negative form of energy while the south pole, which is defined as the south seeking pole, is believed to provide a positive form of energy. It has also been found upon examination of the electron paths associated with the fields surrounding the respective poles that the south pole end of a magnet provides a right hand spin of electrons, i.e., a clockwise rotation of electron movement, as contrasted with the north pole electron spin, which provides a left hand spin or counterclockwise rotation of its electron field.

It has been further observed that the lines of magnetic energy leave the south pole to re-enter the magnet at the Bloch Wall where the 180 degrees phase takes place, and leave the Bloch Wall at that point to go on as the north pole energy to re-enter the magnet at its north pole.

Magnetic enhancement or retardation of bacterial or cellular growth rates has been reported in the literature. For example, Davis and Rawls presented numerous examples of enhancement to seeds and various types of cellular growth (Davis, A. R. & Rawls, Jr., W. C., Magnetism and its Effects on the Living System, Acres, U.S.A., Kansas City, Mo., 1974). Bornstein reported magnetic inhibition of bacterial growth in burn wounds (Bornstein, L. A., in Argosy, June, 1968). Investigations sponsored by Bio-Magnetics Systems, Inc. have shown that unidirectional magnetic fields inhibited or increased the growth of cancer cells, depending on the field polarity, as disclosed by A. Trappier et al., in Evolving Perspectives On The Exposure Risks From Magnetic Fields, Journal of Nat. Med. Assoc., 82:621-624, September 1990.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

In its broad aspect, this invention is directed to a method for the modification of microbial metabolism through the use of unipolar magnetic fields. In general, the method comprises exposing microbes to a unipolar magnetic field with gauss concentrations sufficient to effect microbial metabolism.

Bioremediation processes, in which microbes are used to repair ecological damage, are under development at the Environmental Protection Agency and elsewhere to treat a range of contaminants including aromatic solvents, polychlorobiphenyls, trichloroethylene, petroleum hydrocarbons and other organic constituents. The use of unipolar magnetic fields has the potential for enhancing the applicability and cost-effectiveness of bioremediation for the treatment of contaminated groundwater and contaminated soil. Specifically, it has now been found that the application of unipolar magnetic fields enhances microbial activity and will result in increasing the efficiency and rate of bioremediation, and proportionally decreasing the time required to meet cleanup goals. Thus, the unipolar magnetic field technology can save significant remediation costs at those toxic waste sites amenable to biological degradation. In addition, this technology can provide an integrated process for remediation. Such an integrated process can be based upon pump, treat, reinjection and/or direct application of magnetic field to the vadose zone to stimulate in situ biodegradation.

The method of modifying cells by exposing the cells to directional unipolar magnetic fields is also disclosed. The reproduction rate is increased when exposed to a south magnetic field, and decreased when exposed to a north magnetic field. The modification also applies to cells which derive energy for reproduction through fermentation. The modification can be either intracellular or modification is through the cell wall and the modification is retained within the cell.

Accordingly, one or more of the following objects will be achieved by the practice of this invention. It is an object of this invention to amplify or otherwise modify microbial metabolism and thereby enhance a process which employees microbes. These and other objects will readily become apparent to those skilled in the art in the light of the teachings therein set forth.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

The objects of the invention will become more apparent when the specification is read in conjunction with the drawings wherein:

FIG. 1 is a schematic drawing of a toxic waste site showing an integrated approach for utilizing unipolar magnetic fields to modify the microbial activity in a bioremediation process.

FIG. 2 is a drawing of a recirculating flow type biomagnetic reactor.

FIG. 3 is a graph showing the effect of unipolar magnetic fields on the rate of oxygen consumption in a bioreactor system. FIG. 4 is a graph showing the effect of unipolar magnetic fields on the rate of phenol consumption in a bioreactor system.

FIG. 5 is a graph showing the effect of unipolar magnetic fields on protein concentration in a bioreactor system.

FIG. 6 is a graph showing the effect of reversing unipolar magnetic fields on the rate of oxygen consumption in a bioreactor system.

FIG. 7 is a graph which shows the effect on rate of biodegradation utilizing of different gauss strengths

FIG. 8 is a graph which shows the effect on protein concentration utilizing different gauss strengths.

FIG. 9 is a graph which shows the effect on rate of O2 consumption utilizing different gauss strengths.

FIG. 10 is a schematic illustration of a process for producing plastic in bacteria by fermenting a carbon source.



DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

In its broad aspect, the present invention is directed to the modification of microbial metabolism by the application thereto of unipolar magnetic energy, i.e., the energy, north or south, emanating from a single pole of a magnet, under specific conditions to achieve the modification. The term modification is used herein to indicate an increase or decrease in the rate and/or efficiency of metabolism.

The biochemical processes of assimilation (anabolism) and dissimilation (catabolism) describe metabolism in microorganisms. Assimilation is the process by which organisms synthesize organic compounds from simple organic chemicals, CO2, water, and other components. Dissimilation is the process by which organisms decompose organic compounds to CO2 and water, or partially decompose organics to lower molecular weight organics.

This invention modifies microbial metabolism using directional unipolar magnetic fields. Laboratory experiments have shown that south pole magnetic fields increase the rate of dissimilation in simulated bioremediation processes whereas north pole magnetic fields inhibit the rate of dissimilation (comparing to a control consisting of no magnetic fields).

Magnetically enhanced bioremediation is one area of application of the invention. Bioremediation is a process by which the use of living organisms, in conjunction with or independent from other technologies, is employed to decontaminate a polluted system. In bioremediation, contaminants are destroyed by the action of microbes such as soil bacteria.

FIG. 1 shows a schematic diagram of a toxic waste site showing an integrated approach for utilizing unipolar magnetic fields to modify the microbial activity in a bioremediation process. The unipolar magnetic field can be applied to the microbes before or after their contact with the toxic waste. Magnetically enhanced bioremediation is applicable to organic and inorganic wastes located in solid and aqueous media, including soil, slurries, sludges, and sediments. The process can use water as an intermediary to provide contact between magnetically enhanced bacteria and toxic waste substances. The presence of water in the soil as well as groundwater, itself, is compatible with magnetically enhanced bioremediation.

As shown in FIG. 1 a pretreatment reactor 10 can be provided with a magnet 12. A directional magnetic field is applied to the contaminated stream 14, in the reactor 10, by means of the magnet 12, which subjects the material in the pretreatment reactor to a south pole magnetic field. In the main reactor 18, microbes are added to the contaminated stream. A directional magnet 16 applies a south pole magnetic filed to the combined biomass in the main reactor 18. Optionally, nutrients are fed to the main reactor from a nutrient tank 11, or other source.

The oxidase and treated microbes are reinjected into the ground and is permitted to percolate into the ground. A magnetic blanket consisting of 9 inch wide, 1/4 inch thick strips of pliable magnetic material 20, are laid over at least a portion of the field, thus subjecting the field to a south pole magnetic field.

A major advantage of this invention is that it can be used with existing bioremediation processes without introducing a major process modification or perturbation. The use of this invention could, however, result in the use of smaller, less costly process hardware and shorter operation times.

This invention can also be used to enhance biochemical processes in which microorganisms assist in producing chemicals such as plastics. For example, bacteria will make polymers, such as polyester under the proper conditions, and the use of unipolar magnetic fields will modify the rate and/or efficiency of this process.

Magnetically modified microbial metabolism would provide a basis for application to other governmental and commercial uses of microorganisms. Such uses can include any process where microorganisms such as bacteria are actively involved in a biochemical reaction.

The following examples are illustrative of the present invention.

EXAMPLE 1

A recirculating flow type bioreactor was fabricated from nonmagnetic materials (plastics) and set-up as shown in FIG. 2. Solid state unipolar directional magnetic fields were applied to the reactor which contained 100 grams of alginate-immobilized, activated sludge prepared at the New Jersey Institute of Technology Biotechnology Laboratory, Newark, N.J. The bacterial culture in the sludge was immobilized in alginate matrix and activated by curing in 0.1 molar CaCl2 solution. The magnetic field strength applied was varied. Air was continuously supplied as the source of dissolved oxygen. The oxygen consumption was monitored using a Clark-type dissolved oxygen probe and a strip chart recorder. Phenol was added to a mineral salt medium as the sole carbon source. It was constantly monitored for biodegradation in the experiment by sampling the reservoir and analyzing the samples in a Varian 3300 gas chromatograph. The concentration of secreted aeration in the medium, which continuously circulated between the reservoir and the reactor, was measured daily using the standard Lowery color response test. Each experimental run was 1200 hours (50 days) in length.

Runs performed were:
1. Control: no magnet on the bioreactor.
2. South magnetic pole exposure to the bioreactor.
3. North magnetic pole exposure to the bioreactor.
4. Changing the north magnetic pole exposure to a south magnetic pole exposure and the south magnetic pole exposure to a north magnetic pole exposure in the bioreactor.

Table 1 presents the results of these experiments. When the south pole magnetic energy was applied, biological oxidation rate was increased by a factor of two compared to the control run without magnetic energy present (from 0.656 to 1.545).

TABLE 1

Directional
Directional
Control
South Pole
North Pole

Average rate of oxygen consumption (nmol/min ml)
0.656 1.545 0.365
Average secreted protein
179 2422 not
concentration (ug/ml) detectable
Average rate of phenol
3.09 4.23 0.5
biodegradation (ppm/hr)

FIG. 3 shows the effect of magnetic fields on the rate of oxygen consumption. It can be seen that the rate increased dramatically after 4 days of directional south pole magnetic field exposure as compared to north pole magnetic field exposure or control.

Results obtained from studies under the influence of north pole, south pole and during the control run are tabulated in Table 1. It can be seen that the highest average rate of phenol biodegradation and oxygen consumption is found during the run when south pole is attached to the bioreactor. When the magnetic south pole was applied, it increased the biological oxidation activity (oxygen consumption rate) by a factor of two as compared to the control run without magnetic field (from 0.7 to 1.5). FIG. 3 shows the effect of magnetic field on the rate of O2 consumption. It can be seen that the rate increases dramatically after 4 days under the influence of south pole as compared to the control and north. One of the measures of biodegradation is the increase in activity that is the rate of oxygen consumption by the microbes in presence of a substrate like phenol. An increase in oxygen consumption indicates that it is being utilized by the microorganisms to break down phenol into its metabolic products which ultimately are CO2 and water.

The phenol consumption rate is faster by nearly 30% in case of the run with the south pole as compared to the control run.

FIG. 4 indicates that the phenol concentration goes down rapidly under the influence of south pole comparison to the north pole and the control. These observations are consistent with those from the rate of oxygen consumption monitoring.

Significant amounts of protein build-up in the liquid phase verified that biological activity was enhanced when magnetic south pole was applied to the system as compared to the control as shown in FIG. 5. Microorganisms release enzymes extracellularly which in turn attack the substrate. A higher amount of proteins in the reaction medium is a positive measure of biodegradation. FIG. 5 indicates that the south pole magnetic field greatly enhanced the concentration of protein in this reactor (protein is produced from phenol degradation). In this experiment it was observed that the pH changed from 7.9 to 8.5.

FIG. 6 shows the effect of repeatedly changing the south pole magnetic field to a north pole magnetic field and a north pole magnetic field to a south pole magnetic field in the bioreactor. The south pole field was consistently activating whereas the north pole field was inhibitory.

FIG. 7 and 8 show the effect of magnetic field on the rate of biodegradation and protein concentration under 1500 and 3500 gauss magnetic south pole. The highest rate of biodegradation is 25.6 ppm/h and the highest protein concentration8s 2250 ug/ml after 11 days under 1500 gauss.

FIG. 9 shows the effect of magnetic field on the rate of O2 consumption. It indicates that the highest rate of O2 consumption is 1649 nmol/ml*hr after 10 days under the influence of 1500 gauss magnetic south pole.

TABLE 2

Effects of acclimation on the rate of biodegradation
Rate of biodegradation
Description (ppm/hr)
without magnet and unacclimated
4.25
without magnet after magnetic acclimation
8.96
with magnet (1500 gauss)
25.6
after magnetic acclimation
with magnet (3500 gauss)
14.4
after magnetic acclimation

EXAMPLE 2

The recirculation flow type bioreactor shown in FIG. 2 was used in these studies. For pre-exposure, free microorganisms were exposed to south pole magnetic fields for 3 days prior to use in the bioreactor which contained immobilized activated sludge and phenol. Oxygen, phenol concentration and pH were measured as in Example 1. Each experimental run was 1296 hours (54 days) in length.

Runs performed were:
1. Control: no magnetic on the bioreactor; bacteria not pre-exposed.
2. No magnetic field on the bioreactor; pre-exposed bacteria.
3. South magnetic pole exposure to bioreactor; pre-exposed bacteria.
4. Higher strength south magnetic pole exposure to bioreactor; pre-exposed bacteria.

Table 2 shows the results of these experimental runs. FIGS. 7 and 8 show the effect of magnetic fields on the rates of oxygen consumption which indicates that the 1500 gauss south pole magnetic field yielded the higher oxygen consumption rate of 2500 nmol/ml*hr after 15 hours into the run. FIG. 9 shows that oxygen consumption rates were higher for 1500 gauss south pole magnetic fields when compared to 3500 gauss fields.

TABLE 2

Time Time
1500 gauss
(days) 3500 gauss
(days)

Maximum rate of biodegradation
25.6 ppm/hr
11 14.4 ppm/hr
4
Maximum rate of biodegradation
1649 nmole/
10 962 nmole/
5
oxygen consumption ml*hr ml*hr
Maximum protein
2250 ug/ml
11 465 ug/ml
4
concentration

EXAMPLE 3

A polyester copolymer of hydroxybutric acid and hydroxyvaleric acid (PHBV) is produced by bacteria in a reactor by fermenting a carbon source as shown in FIG. 10. When a bacteria such as Alcaligenes eutrophus is depleted of the nitrogen it requires to multiply, growth is inhibited. The carbon source, such as glucose, can then be added to the fermenter, causing the organism to make granules of polyester with the abundant carbon instead of using it to grow. The conventional process is so slow as to be economically unfeasible. The process is repeated with the exception that a south unipolar magnetic field is applied to the organism during the glucose fermenation step. The rate of fermentation will be substantially enhanced.

The effects of unipole application is further applicable in the field of biology. The application of a south magnetic field speeds up the reproduction of cells, while the north field slows reproduction.

Fermentation, a simple, anaerobic method to generate energy in the cell, is commonly used in yeast products and to produce alcholoic beverages. Carbohydrate molecules breakdown into simpler molecules such as ethyl alcohol, lactic acid, or carbon dioxide, releasing energy in the form of adenosine triphosphate (ATP). An applied south field dramatically speeds up the fermentation process. Chemostats, with their controlled environment, are ideal rapid, mass reproduction of cells, through fermentation, in combination with a unipolar magnetic field.

Further, the magnetic fields influence the growth rate of the aerobically reproduced cells. The application of a south magnetic field increases the production of enzymes without fracturing the cells. The permeability of the cell walls is increased which allows for the influx and efflux of enzymes.

The magnetic fields affect the cells either of two ways. The first is through the cell wall and would include the production and expression of proteins, such as enzymes, insulin and other hormones, interferons and antibiotics. The second is affecting the cells intracellularly and retained the affect within the cell. The appropriate magnetic field is applied for a time period and an intensity which is based on the recepient of the field, the medium and the desired end result. Examples would be many new drugs under evaluation for their effectiveness against cancer and aids.

Although research has been done on the affects of magnetism in both fermentation and other biological processes, they have used bipolar, complex or rotating fields. The instant invention relates to the consistent use of either a north or south magnetic field to produce a desired result. Thus, the cell reproduction can be decreased or increased dependent on the requirements.

---

Albert Roy Davis Patents

Apparatus and method for exposing seeds to a magnetic field
US4020590

Apparatus for magnetically treating seeds comprises a magnet for producing a unipolar magnetic field, an enclosed generally cylindrical housing having a closable access opening therein in which said seeds are placed for treatment, drive means associated with the housing for rotating said housing and imparting rolling and tumbling motion to the seeds within the housing, the housing being disposed with respect to the magnet such that the seeds move through the magnetic field as they roll and tumble. By magnetically treating the seeds in a unipolar magnetic field while rolling and tumbling the seeds, the characteristics of plants grown therefrom are favorably altered.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

1. Field of the Invention

The present invention relates to magneto magnetic energy and, more particularly, to a method and apparatus for the application of such energy to seeds.

2. Description of the Prior Art

It is now generally accepted that when any biological living system lives in a strong magnetic environment, its physical and genetic development is to some extent altered. For example, it has long been known that the rate of seed germination and the rate of plant growth from seeds is affected by magnetism. This phenomenon is discussed in U. J. Pittman, "Biomagnetism--a Mysterious Plant Growth Factor", Canada Agriculture, Summer--1968 edition. In a more recent report, Moustafa, "Effect of Seed Exposure to Magnetic Field on Plant Physical Properties and Yield", ASAE Paper No. 73-316 (June, 1973), concluded that exposing seeds to an electromagnetic field prior to planting appeared to increase the rate of germination and the total plant leaf area, at least under growth chamber conditions.

In an effort to reduce the necessary exposure time for seeds to become adequately treated by magnetism so that the magnetically treated seeds can be commercially used, Amburn disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,675,367 an apparatus for moving seeds through a magnetic field. The Amburn apparatus consists essentially of an elongated tube having an electromagnet mounted thereon intermediate its ends to establish a magnetic flux field within the tube. A conveyor assembly, comprising an auger, conveys the seeds through the tube in such a manner that the seeds roll and tumble while within the magnetic field to expose the seeds in a multiplicity of positions with respect to the magnetic field. Amburn reports that treating seeds in this fashion increased crop yield from the treated seeds as compared with crop yield from the untreated seeds.

The magnetic field to which Amburn exposed his seeds was bipolar in that it had both a north and a south pole applying their respective energies to the seeds. Amburn points out that there were some indications that greater success was achieved in treating the seeds when the north pole was located at the inlet end of the apparatus. However, there was no suggestion or appreciation that one of the poles could or would produce different results from the other of the poles. This is, of course, because Amburn subscribed to the commmon belief extant over the years relating to magnets, which has been that the two magnetic poles, north and south, are homogeneous and that they emanate the same potential type of energy. This belief has now been found to be a misconception--the two poles of a magnet are in fact totally different in electric potential and effect--and the application of the respective poles to living systems has been found to produce quite different results.

The north pole (which is defined as the south-seeking pole) is now believed to provide a negative form of energy while the south pole (which is defined as the north-seeking pole) is believed to provide a positive form of energy. To support this discovery, it has been found that upon examination of the electron paths associated with the fields surrounding the respective poles that the south pole end of a magnet provides a right hand spin of electrons, i.e., a clockwise rotation of electron movement, as contrasted with the north pole electron spin, which presents a left hand spin or counter-clockwise rotation of its electron field. It has further been observed that the lines of magnetic energy leave the south pole to re-enter the magnet at the Bloch Wall where a 180 DEG phase change takes place, then leave the Bloch Wall at that point to then go on as the north pole energy to re-enter the magnet at its north pole. For a more detailed discussion of this phenomena, see Davis et al, Magnetism and its Effects on the Living System and The Magnetic Effect (Exposition Press, Hicksville, N.Y.).

The differing effects of the north and south poles, respectively, on seed germination rate and plant growth height was appreciated in a somewhat different context by Tsukamoto in British Patent Specification No. 1,065,864 wherein a disintegrable permanent magnet for use in the soil is disclosed. Of course, the Tsukamoto teaching does not extend to an apparatus for pretreating the seeds prior to planting or to a method for rotating and tumbling the seeds prior to planting in a unipolar magnetic field.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

It is therefore an object of the present invention to provide a method and apparatus for unipolar treatment of seeds and/or seedlings in a magnetic field prior to planting.

It is another object of the invention to provide a method and apparatus for closely controlling the exposure time of seeds in a unipolar magnetic field.

It is still another object of the invention to provide an apparatus which can accommodate, without damage, all sizes and shapes of seeds and seedlings while rolling and tumbling them in a unipolar magnetic field.

It is yet another object of this invention to provide an apparatus for simultaneously exposing seeds or seedlings in contact with a liquid or gaseous medium to a unipolar magnetic field.

Other objects and advantages will become apparent from the following description and appended claims.

Briefly stated, in accordance with the aforesaid objects, the present invention provides a housing adapted for receiving and containing seeds or seedlings which housing includes drive means for causing movement of the housing, e.g., rotating the housing about an axis, to cause the seeds and seedlings to roll and tumble therein. One pole of a magnet produces a magnetic field through which said housing rotates such that the seeds and seedlings therein are more or less continuously exposed to the unipolar magnetic field. Timer means may be operatively associated with the drive means in order to closely control the exposure time of the seeds and seedlings to the field, which exposure time has been found to be critical for achieving optimum improved results. The housing has communicating therewith inlet and outlet ports for receiving and discharging gaseous or liquid materials therethrough and which provides the capability of magnetically treating the seeds together with said fluid materials for reasons which will become more fully apparent hereinafter.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

The invention will be better understood in all its embodiments from a consideration of the following description taken together with the accompanying drawings, in which:

FIG. 1 is an elevational view of an exemplary cylindrical seed containing housing, drive means therefor and unipolar magnetic field producing means of the present invention.

FIG. 2 is an elevational view of another embodiment of the apparatus of the present invention schematically showing liquid and gas ports communicating with the interior of the housing and timer means operatively associated with the drive means.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS

The present invention is primarily concerned with the use of magneto magnetic energy, i.e., magnetic energy derived from a magnet as opposed to some other source, on seeds and seedlings. By use of the term "seeds" herein, it is intended to encompass any plant material from which further plants may by grown, e.g., seeds, seedlings, bulbs, cuttings, stalks, and the like. One particularly advantageous "seed" are sugar cane stalks (e.g., 5-7 feet long) which, after treatment in accordance with the present invention, may be planted horizontally. It has been found that after planting, shoots appear to grow from the stalk joints. Any type of magnet is suitable for use herein in which the poles are sufficiently separated that the energy of each pole can be isolated from the energy of the other pole. In this way a unipolar magnetic field can be applied to the seeds. Thus, separation of the poles is the prime requisite in selecting an appropriate magnet. Straight bar or cylindrical magnets provide maximum pole separation and are desirable. Either solid state or long-wound electromagnets, however, are equally useful.

A typical apparatus for exposing seeds to a unipolar magnetic field is shown in FIG. 1 generally at 10. The apparatus consists of a magnet 12, a housing 14 which moves through the magnetic field created by magnet 12, and drive means 16 for causing the desired movement of housing 14. In one preferred form of the invention, housing 14 comprises a cylindrical enclosure having opposite generally parallel end walls 18, 20 joined by cylindrical surface 22. However, it will be appreciated that housing 14 need not be cylindrical but can assume any configuration consistent with the herein described objectives of the invention. Moreover, the housing may be of any suitable dimensions to accommodate the seed to be treated. An access opening 24 is formed in the cylindrical surface 22 to permit access to the inside of housing 14. Seeds to be exposed to the magnetic field may be placed into and removed from the housing through opening 24. Removably closing access opening 24 is cover 26 which includes a handle 28 thereon for ease of removing from and replacing over opening 24. The cover may be held in place over access opening 24 by any conventional means.

End walls 18 and 20 include a centrally disposed aperture 29, 30 therein for receiving shaft 32 therethrough. The shaft passes longitudinally through cylindrical housing 14 and is fixedly mounted to the end walls such that rotation of the shaft rotates housing 14 (the axis of which is preferably coaxial with the shaft). One end 34 of shaft 32 includes a pulley wheel 36 on which drive belt 38 is mounted. Belt 38 is driven in the conventional manner through motor assembly 40 which includes motor 42, motor shaft 44 and motor pulley wheel 46. Shaft 32, pulley wheel 36 and motor assembly 40 comprise drive means 16. It will be appreciated that the invention is not limited to the drive means illustrated and may include any suitable drive means for imparting motion to housing 14 such that the seeds therein roll and tumble in the magnetic field, preferably for rotating housing 14 about its axis.

Drive means 16 rotates housing 14 about shaft 32 in either direction to expose the seeds within housing 14 to the unipolar magnetic field created by magnet 12, which magnet preferably extends axially along one side of housing 14. Magnet 12 may be mounted in any manner that will permit the energies of a single pole thereof to be applied to the seed contents of housing 14. As shown, the magnetic field of magnet 12 penetrates the cylindrical surface 22 of housing 14. Alternatively, magnet 12 can be disposed adjacent either or both end walls 18, 20 directing its energy through the end walls of the housing. In still other configurations magnet 12 may be attached to the inner or outer surfaces of housing 14, the only limitation being that the magnet must be so oriented that the contents of housing 14 are exposed to the energies of only one of the magnetic poles. For convenience, in a preferred form of the invention magnet 12 is a substantially flat magnetic material, generally rectangular in configuration, wherein one side 12a thereof constitutes the south pole of the magnet and the opposite side 12b thereof constitutes the north pole of the magnet. An elongated magnet support enclosure 48 having one open end is disposed adjacent one elongated side of the cylindrical surface 22. The flat magnet 12 is slidably received within enclosure 48 with one of its polar sides 12a or 12b directed toward housing 14 to expose the contents of the housing to the energies of that pole. For convenience, magnet 12 may include a knob or handle 13 projecting from one end thereof to provide a gripping portion for sliding the magnet into and out of enclosure 48. If it is desired to change the magnetic pole to which the housing contents are exposed, it is a simple matter to grasp knob 13, slide magnet 12 out of the open end of enclosure 48, flip the magnet over to direct the other pole toward the housing and then reinsert the magnet into the enclosure 48 through the open end thereof. Of course, if magnet 12 is an electromagnet, then the polarity of the magnet can be changed electrically, e.g., by reversing the current flow.

To utilize apparatus 10 for exposing seeds to one of the poles of magnet 12, cover 26 is removed from opening 24, the seeds to be treated are placed within the enclosure, and cover 26 is replaced over the opening. The desired magnetic pole is selected and magnet 12 is oriented so that the proper pole faces the seed housing, after which magnet 12 is placed into the magnet enclosure 48. Motor 42 is actuated and, via motor shaft 42, pulley wheels 46 and 36 and drive belt 38, shaft 32 is rotated, thus rotating the housing 14 thereabout. As the housing rotates, the seeds therein are moved through the magnetic field directed toward housing 14 by magnet 12. The seeds tumble and rotate end over end and side over side through and in the magnetic field such that all portions of the seeds are exposed to the field. The motion of one seed against another or against the inner surfaces of the enclosure, which may optionally be lined with a soft, rubberized material to prevent physical damage to the seeds, has a frictional effect which causes the generation of heat with the result that both the seeds and the air in the housing tend to become warm. This warmth is believed to expand the seeds to a certain extent and to make them more receptive to the influence of the applied magnetic field. Rotation of housing 14 is continued for the desired exposure time interval after which the motor is shut off and rotation ceases. If the magnet used is an electromagnet, through appropriate electrical connection of the current flow control to the magnet and to the motor, a single switch could simultaneously shut both off.

It is important that the parts of the rotating housing, the shafts, pulleys, drive means, magnet enclosure, etc. have very low magnetic retentivity in order that the seeds can remain in the housing without further exposure to a magnetic field after the desired exposure time has expired. Thus, construction materials such as plastic, aluminum, brass or like materials which will not retain magnetism are preferred for use. If a magnet other than an electromagnet is used, it is desirable to either remove it from enclosure 48 upon cessation of rotation or otherwise prevent its magnetic energies from further influencing the seeds. This latter objective can be achieved by interposing a magnetic field impermeable shield (not shown) between magnet 12 and housing 14 to prevent the magnetic field from reaching the seeds. Alternatively, of course, the seeds can be promptly removed from the housing.

Another embodiment of the invention is illustrated in FIG. 2 wherein rotation of housing 14 is achieved by a second form of drive means. Housing 14 is supported on two longitudinally extending shafts 50 and 52 with the outer cylindrical surface 22 of the housing frictionally engaging the shafts. Shaft 50 is journaled for free rotation in support means 54 at opposite ends thereof. Shaft 52 is also journaled for rotation in support means 54. However, shaft 52 is driven by motor assembly 40, which may include motor 42 directly coupled to shaft 52 as shown in FIG. 2. Alternatively, the motor assembly may also include motor pulley wheel 46 acting through a drive belt 38 and a shaft pulley wheel 36 mounted on shaft 52 (as shown in FIG. 1). The rotation of shaft 52 caused by motor assembly 40 is transmitted to and causes frictionally engaged cylindrical housing 14 to also rotate. The rotation of housing 14, which is supported on and frictionally engages shaft 50, causes shaft 50 to rotate also. In this manner, the seeds may be rotated and tumbled and exposed to the unipolar magnetic field created by magnet 12 in much the same manner as with the apparatus of FIG. 1.

During exposure to the unipolar magnetic field the seeds may be treated with or exposed to gaseous or liquid media, such as air, water, liquid fertilizers, and the like. In order that gaseous media can reach the seeds, valve controlled inlet gas port 56 and outlet gas port 58 communicate with the interior of the housing through end walls 18 and 20, respectively. These gas ports are particularly useful for venting the warm air and/or introducing cool air into the housing. Likewise, valve controlled liquid inlet line 60 and discharge liquid line 62 communicate with the interior of the housing through end walls 18 and 20, respectively. Through lines 60 and 62, liquids such as water, liquid fertilizer, and the like can be intimately admixed with the seeds and simultaneously exposed to the unipolar magnetic field. It is believed that exposure of water and other liquids to the same unipolar magnetic field as influences the seeds alters the water sufficiently to beneficially improve its characteristics as a germination initiator.

While the length of exposure time and the strength of the magnetic field to which the seeds or other housing contents are exposed will vary among seed varieties and types and are dependent to a large extent upon the desired characteristics sought in the plants resulting from the exposed seeds, the magnetic field strength is desirably maintained at the seeds in the range 600 to 3500 gauss. Most desirably, magnetic field strength at the seeds should be in the range 600 to 800 gauss. Optimum seed exposure time also varies considerably with seed varieties and types and with other exposure conditions. Nevertheless, it can fairly be stated that seed exposure times should be controlled generally to from 5 seconds to 14 hours, and more usually from 5 seconds to 60 minutes. The extended exposure periods approaching 14 hours are useful only for a few seed types, e.g., tobacco. Too little exposure, of course, will not develop the desired characteristics in the seed. On the other hand, too great an exposure time can adversely affect the characteristics of the exposed seeds. Indeed, it has been found that there is an optimum exposure time for each variety of seed and the usefulness of the apparatus can be enhanced by operating motor 42 via a timer 64 which includes an indicator lamp 68 which lights when the apparatus is operating. The face of timer 64 may include a pointer dial 70 and a plurality of indicia 72 arranged thereabout whereby each indicia represents by number keyed to a chart or by seed name, the appropriate timer setting for each seed type. Where numbers are used as indicia, a typical chart would associate each number with one or more seed types. Thus, for illustrative purposes only, to process corn, dial 70 could be moved to position -10-; cotton and/or watermelon seeds might best be treated at position -8-; and the like. Preferably, the dial 70 is spring-biased to the off position and is clockwise rotatable to point to one of the indicia 72 which indicate a predetermined time exposure for the seeds to be treated. When the dial 70 is other than in the "OFF" position, the electrical circuitry is closed and current flows to the motor which drives housing 14. The timer dial 70 rotates counter-clockwise until it reaches the "OFF" position at which point the electrical circuitry to the motor 42 (and to the magnet 12, if it is an electromagnet) is automatically opened. If desired, in addition to lamp 68, other signals may be used to indicate the end of seed exposure time, such as bells, buzzers, and the like.

As a general matter, as will be more clearly indicated in the following examples, south pole exposure of seeds produces plants having lower acidity, thicker but shallower root structures, larger leaves, greater sugar content, faster germination rate and increased protein content compared to north pole exposed seeds. North pole exposure of seeds produces plants having greater yield, taller plants and longer and deeper roots than south pole exposed plants. As a result, south pole exposed seeds produce plants having generally better individual characteristics in terms of nutritional values and north pole exposed seeds produce plants having larger size and greater yields. However, the foregoing conclusions are merely generalizations, and the particular pole to which a particular seed should be exposed varies on a seed type by seed type basis. Aside from these general trends, there is little consistency in results attained between different seed types under similar exposure conditions although for each seed type the results appear to be consistently reproducible. Thus it cannot be stated categorically that north pole exposure is better or worse than south pole exposure--it depends upon the seed type and the desired results. For example, although south pole exposure may produce a plant having higher protein and sugars content than north pole exposure under ideal growth conditions, since the south pole root structure is shallow, such a plant would do poorly in arid areas. Therefore, it might be desirable to use north pole exposure to obtain deeper root penetration notwithstanding that the protein and sugars content in the resulting plant might not be as good under ideal conditions. Under the arid conditions, north pole protein and sugars content may turn out to be better because the plant will be healthier.

The following examples illustrate how seed exposure in the apparatus of the present invention to north and south pole magnetic fields influences the chemical and physical characteristics of the plants grown therefrom.

EXAMPLE I

Commercial dry corn and food table corn seeds were divided into three groups. The first group was exposed by rotating and tumbling in a magnetic field created by a magnetic north pole for a fixed time period. The second group was similarly exposed for the same time period to the magnetic field created by a magnetic south pole. The third group was rotated and tumbled in the apparatus, but without any magnetic field, for the same time period. The magnetic field strengths for both north and south poles were 600 gauss at the seeds. The treatment time for all groups was 15 minutes. A large number of separate plantings were made for seeds from each group under identical soil and ambient conditions. The seeds developed into plants and the plants were all harvested at the same time. The following Table I tabulates the averaged results for all plantings for each group for the indicated plant characteristic measured by conventional techniques.

TABLE I

Corn Plant Untreated South Pole North Pole
Characteristic
Control Exposed Exposed
Germination time
7 days 4-5 days 6 days
Yield (% of control)
100% 114% 124-131%
Cob
Dextrose 2% 5% 3%
Glucose 2% 4% 3%
Natural sugars
1% 3% 2%
Protein 5% 7% 3%
pH 7 6.9 6.5
Kernels
Dextrose 2% 5% 3%
Glucose 1% 5% 2%
Natural sugars
3% 10% 5%
Protein 3% 10% 5%
pH 6.3 6.5 6.2

The foregoing data are noteworthy for a number of reasons. First, it appears that both north and south pole exposed seeds produced plants having improved quantities of sugars and proteins, although south pole exposed seeds produced plants which were superior in these characteristics. Second, south pole exposed seeds appeared to germinate more rapidly than north pole exposed seeds which, in turn, germinated more rapidly than the controls. Third, north pole exposed seeds produced the greatest yields, followed by south pole exposed seeds and then by the controls. In each case, yield was calculated in ears/acre. Finally, both north and south pole magnetic field exposure seemed to increase acidity in the cob compared to the control. However, in the kernels, south pole exposure decreased acidity although north pole exposure increased acidity.

EXAMPLE II

As in Example I, corn seeds in three groups were exposed to 600 gauss north and south pole fields and to no magnetic field whatever while being rotated and tumbled in the apparatus of the present invention for 15 minutes. The purpose of this example was to demonstrate the effects of exposure on various corn seed varieties.

Nine separate corn seed varieties were exposed to a south pole field and to no field at all and then a number of separate plantings of each seed variety were made. Measurements of stalk lengths in inches were made 30 days after planting. The results for each variety are set forth in Table II.

TABLE II

Stalk Length
Variety Control South Pole Exposed
1. Standard Yellow Table
9.5 11.4
2. Standard White Field
8.75 10.6
3. Bantam Standard
7.77 9.9
4. Bantam White Standard
8.2 10.8
5. Bantam Hybrid Yellow
6.4 9.9
6. Bantam Hybrid White
9.9 11.9
7. Bantam Late Season
10.5 14.6
8. Standard Early Yellow
9.6 12.7
9. Standard Early Field
11.7 15.6

It is apparent that south pole exposure resulted in increased stalk length 30 days after planting. North pole exposure resulted in still greater growth increases relative to the controls, averaging about 35% increased growth as compared with the Table II data which averaged about 31% increased growth.

The stalks were analyzed for protein content. It was found that the protein averaged 14.7% in the controls while south pole exposed seeds yielded plants averaging 22.7% as shown in Table III where the corn varieties are identified by their corresponding numbers from Table II.

TABLE III

Protein Content
Varieties Controls South Pole Exposed
1 17.6% 31.1%
2 14.5% 29.1%
3 16.4% 26.9%
4 12.5% 19.9%
5 18.3% 21.6%
6 12.4% 18.7%
7 14.3% 18.5%
8 11.5% 17.7%
9 14.6% 21.1%

Protein measurements on the whole cob with the kernels intact showed that protein in the controls averaged 27% whereas south pole exposed seeds yielded plants averaging 36.4% protein.

Stalk diameter measurements were also made at harvesting on each of the varieties. The results appear in Table IV.

TABLE IV

Stalk Diameter
Varieties Controls South Pole Exposed
1, 2, 7 1/4 inch 1/2 inch
3, 4, 5, 6 3/8 inch 3/4 inch
8, 9 1/2 inch 7/8 inch

Similar studies made on plants grown from magnetic field exposed soy beans, beans, sugar beets, peas, melons, cucumbers, oats, wheat, rye, barley and twelve other vegetable and grain plants yielded results indicating about 12 to 30% increases in plant growth and characteristics in the plants grown from north or south pole exposed seeds compared with the controls.

EXAMPLE III

Seeds from radish plants were exposed in the apparatus of the present invention to north and south pole magnetic fields of about 1200 gauss for varying time intervals. The seeds were planted in substantially identical adjacent plots and subjected to substantially identical environmental conditions. After 30 days the length of the plant leaves were measured to determine the optimum exposure time for radishes.

TABLE V

Leaf Length
North Pole South Pole
Exposure Time
Length (inches)
Length (inches)
0 (control)
21/4 21/4
5 minutes 31/4 21/4
10 minutes 21/2 21/4
15 minutes 21/2 23/4
25 minutes 21/2 3
45 minutes 21/2 31/4
60 minutes 3 23/4

It is interesting that the optimum exposure time period for north pole exposure of radish seeds as determined from 30 day leaf length is 5 minutes or 60 minutes. For south pole exposed seeds, the optimum exposure time appears to be 45 minutes or 25 minutes.

EXAMPLE IV

The procedure of Example III was practiced on a variety of corn seeds using only the north pole field at 1200 gauss. The stalk height was measured after 30 days. The results are set forth below:

TABLE VI

Stalk Height
North Pole
Exposure Time Stalk Height (in.)
0 (control) 13
5 18
10 15
15 171/2
25 151/2
45 13
60 121/2

The optimum exposure time for this variety corn seed based upon maximizing stalk height appears to be either 5 minutes or 15 minutes.

EXAMPLE V

The procedure of Example III was practiced on another variety of corn seeds using only the south pole field at 600 gauss. The stalk height measurements after 21 days appear below:

TABLE VII

Stalk Height
South Pole
Exposure Time Stalk Height (in.)
0 (control) 93/4
5 minutes 121/4
10 minutes 9
15 minutes 14
30 minutes 123/4
45 minutes 111/4
60 minutes 11

The optimum time for south pole exposure of this variety corn seed based upon maximizing stalk height appears to be 15 minutes.

EXAMPLE VI

The procedure of Example III was practiced on English pea seeds by exposing the seeds to 1200 gauss of a north pole field. Thirty days after planting, plant height was measured and appears below:

TABLE VIII

Plant Height
North Pole
Exposure Time Plant Height (in.)
0 (control) 31/2
5 minutes 31/4
10 minutes 51/2
15 minutes 21/4
25 minutes 4
45 minutes 51/2
60 minutes 31/4

Optimum north pole exposure time for maximizing plant height of this seed variety appears to be 10 or 45 minutes.

EXAMPLE VII

The procedure of Example III was practiced on English pea seeds by exposing the seeds to 1200 gauss of a south pole field. Thirty days after planting, plant height was measured and appears below:

TABLE IX

Plant Height
South Pole
Exposure Time Plant Height (in.)
0 (control) 4
10 minutes 51/2
15 minutes 33/4
25 minutes 43/4
40 minutes 4
60 minutes 41/4

The optimum time of south pole exposure for this variety pea seed based upon maximizing plant height appears to be 10 minutes.

EXAMPLE VIII

The procedure of Example III was practiced on a variety of string bean seeds using only the south pole field at 600 gauss. Plant height measurements were made 19 days after planting with the following results:

TABLE X

Plant Height
South Pole
Exposure Time Plant Height (in.)
0 (control) 5
5 minutes 41/4
10 minutes 41/2
15 minutes 7
30 minutes 6
45 minutes 31/2
60 minutes 6

The optimum south pole exposure time to maximize plant height for these string bean seeds appears to be 15 minutes.

EXAMPLE IX

The procedure of Example VIII was practiced on cantaloupe, watermelon and tomato seeds using only the south pole energies at 600 gauss. Plant height measurements were made 19 days after planting. Tabulated below are the optimum south pole exposure times for each type seed to maximize plant height:

Watermelon 5 minutes
Cantaloupe 10 minutes
Tomato 10 minutes

The foregoing examples indicate that rotating and tumbling plant seeds in the apparatus of the present invention while exposing them to the magnetic field energies of only one magnetic pole improves many of the characteristics of the resulting plant. No supportable explanation for the differing effects of the respective poles and the varying exposure times appears available. However, it is believed that each pole affects each element and organic bond in the plant structure in a different manner and because, by their nature, each seed and plant variety have differing elemental compositions and structures, the magnetic pole exposure effect differs for each plant. However, the common thread in the experimental results appears to be that exposure to a unipolar magnetic field generally improves plant characteristics over similarly treated but unexposed controls and that the exercise of control over exposure time is critical. Moreover, it has been found that unipolar magnetic field exposure in a distinct improvement over bipolar magnetic field exposure.

---

Method of making non-retentive Al-Ni-Co-Fe alloy
US4003769

A method for converting a high magnetic retentivity, high magnetic conductivity aluminum, nickel, cobalt and iron alloy to a substantially magnetically non-retentive alloy comprises heating the alloy to a temperature in the range 1400 DEG - 1500 DEG F. for about 30 minutes and quenching the heated alloy in a room temperature liquid coolant.

---

Your Support Maintains this Service --

BUY

The Rex Research Civilization Kit

... It's Your Best Bet & Investment in Sustainable Humanity on Earth ...
Ensure & Enhance Your Survival & Genome Transmission ...
Everything @ rexresearch.com on a Thumb Drive or Download !

ORDER PAGE

---

This is a comprehensive review of the history and evidence of using the north or south pole of a magnet with regard to magnetic therapy.

Click on each subject to navigate directly there…

1. Davis & Rawls Books: Their published research claims and their basic evidence

2. Contemporary Research: More recent studies claiming differences between north and south polarity. In particular we look at a 2017 paper by Valery Shalatonin Ph.D and the seven scientific articles it references to support the claim of the “fundamental differences in the biophysical effects of the magnetic field of the north and south polarity”.

3. Davis & Rawls Patents: The six patents that originated from the work of Davis & Rawls. The beauty of patents for this purpose is that there are specific claims that should have utility and provide a commercial benefit. Decades later we can see what’s become of these claims.

4. Basic Physics: The fundamental errors in basic physics made by Davis & Rawls many of which are still repeated to this day.

5. Another Book: Magnetic Healing. 1997 by Buryl Payne PhD. A well written book, by a credible author. What evidence does it provide for the difference between north and south pole.

6. Clinical Trials: Finally, we examine the three published studies that have independently investigated the claims of different biological effects of a magnet’s north and south pole.

7. Summary: This is a long and detailed article with many hours of research. Click to go straight to the summary.

* Placing magnets on acupuncture points or following the protocols of Dr Goiz biomagnetism may affect energy systems throughout the body and are outside the scope of this paper.

---

Using the north or south pole in magnetic therapy was made famous through the work of Albert Roy Davis and Walter C. Rawls throughout the 1940-70’s and their two books.

Others came later, such as William Philpot MD and doctors Mary and Richard Broeringmeyer. To the best of our knowledge, all are now deceased and with the passing of the decades and in light of newer evidence, it’s time for a systematic review of their published work so as to be better informed.

The question of using the north or south pole is redundant with regards to Quadrapolar magnets since both poles are applied equally. One reason this is necessary is because Q Magnets are a multipolar magnet and for very good reasons both poles are placed facing the body. The close interactions of the two poles introduces a more complex field and magnetic field gradients.

When quadrapolar magnets are used, an array of 2 x 2 alternating poles face the body in what is a symmetrical field, much like the yin-yang symbol. For more detail, see how Q Magnets work.

1. Davis & Rawls Books

There are two relevant books by Davis & Rawls for the purpose of this discussion.

1. Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System. 1974 Albert Roy Davis & Walter C. Rawls Jr. Acres U.S.A., Inc. Austin, Texas. Our copy was published in the year 2000 and in its thirteenth printing, so many thousands of people must have it. Available on Amazon or Download from RexResearch.

2. The Magnetic Blueprint For Life. 1979 Albert Roy Davis & Walter C. Rawls Jr. Acres U.S.A., Inc. Kansas City, Missouri. Available on Amazon or Download from Archive.org.

The main theme of Davis & Rawls work can be summarised from these two sentences…

“The discovery that magnetism has at least two separate energy fields, not one as formerly believed, is a discovery that touches upon every life of every human being in our civilisation. It is a natural law that involves industry, agriculture, medical areas, and all the natural areas.” From The Magnetic Blueprint For Life by Davis & Rawls.

First, we should define some terms, some of which are contradictory and the cause of much confusion. This confusion stems from Davis & Rawls own misunderstanding of basic physics with regard to magnetic poles.

Bipolar– all magnets are bipolar, in that they comprise two poles, the north and south pole. In magnetic therapy however, bipolar can mean that both poles are positioned against the body.
Unipolar – all magnets are understood to have two poles, the north and south. So technically speaking a unipolar magnet (monopole) does not exist. In magnetic therapy, unipolar is sometimes used when only one pole is placed against the body.
Multipolar – similar to the term bipolar in the context of magnetic therapy, that is more than one pole is positioned against the body. The term multipolar is preferable as it’s unlikely to be confused with the common description of a “bipolar magnet”.
North pole – referred to by Davis & Rawls as the positive pole, biosouth or the geological south pole and often coloured red. By convention, the north pole of a magnet will point to the geographic North Pole (the Arctic). It follows then that the Earth’s North Pole is actually the magnetic south pole. When Davis & Rawls refer to “north pole magnetic energy”, they are referring to Earth’s magnetic field at the North Pole, which is actually the magnetic south pole.
South pole – referred to by Davis & Rawls as the negative pole, bionorth or the geological north pole and often coloured green. By convention, the north pole of a magnet will point to the geographic North Pole (the Arctic). It follows then that the Earth’s North Pole is actually the magnetic south pole. When Davis & Rawls refer to “south pole magnetic energy”, they are referring to Earth’s magnetic field at the South Pole, which is actually the magnetic north pole.

NOTE: In physics, positive and negative are used in relation to electric charges, but not magnetic poles. The use of the terms positive or negative with regard to magnetic therapy is unhelpful, because it can erroneously imply benefit or harm. The confusion from these terms alone make it very difficult to know whether followers of Davis & Rawls are in fact using the north or south pole of a magnet.

The Primary Discovery

From Chapter 4 of the book “Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System”.

“The primary discovery that the two poles of a magnet act to change and alter biological systems in two completely different ways was made by Dr Albert Roy Davis in 1936.”

The chance discovery that lead to this line of thinking came through Davis in 1936. Three cardboard dishes of earthworms were inadvertently placed in three different magnetic surrounds. One each on the north and south poles of a large horse shoe magnet and the third off to the side that acted much like a control. According to Davis, by the next morning, the worms on the south pole had eaten through the carboard dish, while the other two showed no change. This one event lead to hundreds of experiments and investigations, that over the ensuing decades produced the published papers and patents that we look at below.

So what of these earthworms? By sheer coincidence, scientists have recently been investigating the effects of magnetic fields on earthworms. What Davis stumbled upon in 1936 was the phenomenon of magnetotropism. Tropisms are the growth or turning of an organism in response to an external stimulus. For example…

· Phototropism – a response to light; e.g. plants grow towards the light

· Gravitropism – a response to gravity; e.g. plant roots grow downward

· Chemotropism – a response to chemicals; e.g. plant roots growing towards nutrients

· Magnetotropism – a response to magnetic fields; e.g. starved earthworms travel down.

A recent experiment took advantage of earthworm behaviour. It’s known that hungry earthworms prefer to migrate down, but when well-fed go up. If the surrounding magnetic field is inverted, the direction of the earthworm migration is reversed. Another experiment used worms from both Britain and Australia which occupy areas on the globe with opposite magnetic polarity. Worms isolated from Australia migrated in the opposite direction of the British worms. See… Vidal-Gadea V. (2018). Temporal and spatial factors that influence magnetotaxis in C. elegans. Download HERE.

Magnetoreception

Magnetoreception is a more general response whereby organisms can detect a magnetic field and use them for various biologically relevant purposes. It’s well known for instance that animals such as birds and turtles and even bacteria will use the direction of the Earth’s magnetic field for migration. New research is showing that even humans are able to detect changes in the Earth’s magnetic field.

Many of the observations by Davis & Rawls and others that lead to the claim that a magnet’s north and south poles are two separate “energy fields” are simply examples of magnetoreception or magnetotropism. Just like the earthworm experiment, there’s a common trend with regard to almost all of their work. Predictably, it ends with a simple explanation or little or no evidence; read on and see for yourself.

Many of the observations by Davis & Rawls and others that lead to the claim that a magnet’s north and south poles are two separate energy fields are simply examples of magnetoreception or magnetotropism.

For years we’ve been reluctant to dissect the work of Davis & Rawls. After all, what’s not to like about two guys who run experiments out of their garage in order to buck the system? But if through erroneous and unsubstantiated claims, people adopt practices using magnets that are misleading, who benefits?

For instance, many people who follow the work of Davis & Rawls and/or Philpott claim that you should not use multipolar magnets on the body. But, when you consider that around 90% of the positive clinical trials using static magnets do in fact use multipolar magnets such as Quadrapolar, Bioflex and Nikken. You should realise that by following this advice, you are missing out on the best that static magnets have to offer. So when wives’ tales based on fallacy and error are influencing people’s behaviour, then it’s time pick apart the foundations of these ideas.

2. Contemporary Research

Almost all of the current research into the biological effects of static magnetic fields ignore hypothetical differences between the north and south pole. For instance, studies are showing that stronger magnetic fields can assist in making blood less viscous (thinner), which could have applications for protecting against heart disease. But none of these studies mention possible differences in the effects of the north and sole pole, but they do mention magnetic field gradients. Read our article on Blood Flow and Magnet Therapy that debunks myths.

Another area of enquiry is the use of magnets in the treatment of water. What’s widely regarded as the most comprehensive review of magnetic water treatment states that, “the gradient of the magnetic field is more important than the magnetic field strength itself”, but makes no mention of the north or south pole¹. Read our article on Magnetised Water to get the latest science in this area.

Those wedded to the north/south pole concept would simply say it’s been avoided, whereas the scientists studying in the field understand that there is almost no rationale or evidence to bother investing time to pursue the subject. This also applies to decades of research into the safety of the MRI and the World Health Organisation’s comprehensive report on the safety of static magnetic fields. The 369 page report by 18 eminent scientists is completely silent on the issue, download the report here.

Recently Published Articles

Recently published material may look credible, take for instance the following paper published in the International Journal of Pharma Medicine and Biological Sciences. ² The researchers, Shalatonin et. al say that, “It is experimentally shown that there are fundamental differences in the biophysical effects of the magnetic field of the north and south polarity. Some of studies found that each pole of a magnet has specific effects that are quite different.“

This paper references David & Rawls book and seven additional papers in the scientific literature to support its claim that “each pole of a magnet has specific effects that are quite different”. We thought, “this could be interesting” so we accessed and read every paper discussed below.

This study relates to the use of bacteria in the breakdown of industrial waste and has been cited 20 times.³ The results of this study showed that the phenol concentration decreased rapidly under the influence of the south pole in comparison with the north pole. It makes no mention of possible causes of such differences and could be explained by magnetoreception, which many bacteria respond to.

Only one of the 20 papers that cite this study (Stimulation of porphyrin production by application of an external magnetic field to a photosynthetic bacterium, mentioned north and south pole in the table of results, but it wasn’t relevant enough to mention in the summary or discussion.⁴

So it seems this line of inquiry ended here with no further research on the topic. What’s interesting is that both of Jung’s studies acknowledged Biomagnetic Systems, that is Walter C. Rawls for supporting the study.

The subject of this paper is magnetotaxis (see Topic 1), another phenomenon related to magnetoreception. Magnetotaxis is the response from bacteria to a magnetic field that involves orientation and coordinating movement.⁵

This study is looking at how reversing the direction of the Earth’s magnetic field might affect the development of a plant. It is very similar to the concept of magnetoreception as explained in Topic 1 and is not relevant to differences in north and south pole “magnetic energy”.⁶

This study published in International Agrophysics, pre-treated chilli seeds with a 62 μT (micro Tesla) field for both north pole and south pole magnetic fields and took measurements of the stem length at 4, 8, 12 & 24hours. The progress can be seen in the picture below (click for larger image).

Image a) N pole and b) south pole at 4 hrs. Image c) N pole and d) south pole at 8 hrs. Image e) N pole and f) south pole at 12 hrs. Image g) N pole and h) south pole at 24 hrs. Image i) control sample at 24hrs.

In conclusion, the present study shows that primary roots of radish seedlings curved away from stronger magnetic fields when placed under conditions of omnilateral gravity stimulation. The root curvature was found significantly enhanced when roots were exposed in a gradient magnetic field in the vicinity of the south pole of the magnet.

There may be something to this, but you can find a number of studies looking at the effects of pretreating seeds with both static and pulsed magnetic fields and many of them show a benefit. But we could not find another that looked at differences between north pole and south pole magnetism. They were mainly focused on the strength of the magnetic field and for pulsed fields the frequency and also timing and duration of exposure.

The WHO comprehensive report into Static Fields referenced a study by Yano on radish seedlings and attributed the affect to tropism.⁷ It’s worth noting that much of the research into how magnetic fields effect plant growth focuses on magnetic field gradients (inhomogeneous fields) for enhanced effects, rather than simply the north or south pole.

This paper was presented at the 94^th Annual Convention and Scientific Assembly of the National Medical Association and gives the impression of a credible paper claiming differences between north and south pole magnetism. You will often see this paper quoted in books and articles on magnetic therapy to support the supposed differences in a magnets north and south pole.⁸

The gist is “according to Davis and Rawls ‘the North Pole (negative polarity) slowed, controlled and arrested further development of an active cancer site’ and ‘the South Pole (positive polarity) caused the cancers to become more advanced and then develop, grow, and spread at an accelerated rate’”

It goes on to state that an experiment was performed where human lung carcinoma cells were exposed to a 3.5 kilogauss magnet. “The results indicated that a significant decrease in the growth of these cells occurred between 6 and 144 hours when placed in close proximity to the north field…”. It’s astounding that in a published scientific journal, the only evidence the authors provide to verify this claim is…“written Personal communication, Philip M. Lorio, February, 1988”. That’s it! It may have been observed, it may not, there’s no methodology for the experiment, no results and no discussion. There’s no way to verify the claims and as far as we can tell there’s no evidence of the it being tested in the 30 years since.

Acting on the consequences of such claims, the authors went on to record the polarity and strength of the magnetic fields at various MRI installations. Warning that where the operators are exposed to the positive south pole energy they might be exposed to hazardous risk. You would have to keep an open mind to such a serious claim, but it’s never been tested since.

The safety concerns around strong magnetic fields from magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) is mainly focused on the risks associated with patient handling and taking necessary precautions. For example, strict screening for foreign bodies such as shrapnel, implants, pacemakers and the like. The actual risks from the magnetic fields themselves outside of pregnancy, are hardly even a consideration. In all the decades of research and training for radiographers, the professionals who operate MRIs, north and south pole magnetism does not even rate a mention. It is completely irrelevant.

The basis of this paper was used to grant patent # 5,197,492. See Topic 3.

A very comprehensive paper on the biological effects of SMF’s and their medical applications, but unfortunately does not even mention or distinguish the magnetic field from the north or south pole.⁹

As for the Shalatonin paper itself? There may be something in it, it would be nice to see it replicated. But the experiment was not randomised, that is, the researchers knew which setup was the control and which were the north and south pole exposed. This may not matter for distilled water, but as a standard scientific practice, should have been followed.

Like nearly all studies on magnetic fields, the significant results come from magnetic field gradients and varying field strength, not comparing the north and south pole.

Note the following paper that demonstrates some claims of an effect from magnetic fields may be secondary to the magnetic field itself.¹⁰

In conclusion, the vaporization or drying process in the air can be significantly enhanced under a magnetic field gradient in the tesla range. As a consequence, when living organisms are placed under a magnetic field with gradient, they may feel colder due to the latent heat of vaporization, and they may experience aqueous environments with different concentration of ingredients from the intended values. These changes in environmental conditions should necessarily cause some change in the experimental results when living organisms are subjected to the magnetic field for examination. Therefore a special consideration must be taken when to judge whether the magnetic field really has an effect on living organisms.

---

3. Davis & Rawls Patents

Of their theories, Davis & Rawls stated in the Preface of their 1974 book Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System that their “efforts have been unsuccessful and at this time many researchers at all levels of scientific research refuse to acknowledge or utilize this new discovery for guidance in their work.”

Davis &Rawls were prolific in their work and published numerous books and patents. It now being 2019, 45 years later, we should be able to assess with hindsight whether any of their theories have stood the test of time. For instance, patents would have been commercialised and the benefits flow on to consumers, at the very least now that the patents would have expired and the ideas and methods freely available we should be able to see them or their derivatives in practice.

The following US patents were filed by Davis and/or Rawls or their affiliated company BioMagnetics International.

3,947,533 – Magnetic Field Expansion And Compression Method.

Filed 14 June, 1974. Inventor: Albert Roy Davis. Assignee: BioMagnetics International, Inc.

· north pole magnetism provides a negative form of energy, while south pole magnetism a positive form of energy.

· when molten metal cools while exposed to the north pole it has a finer grain and smoother surface and while exposed to the south pole has a rougher grain and is more porous.

There is no reference to what would be a valuable metallurgical process anywhere else, except the work of Davis.

5,002,068 – Shielding and Focusing of Magnetic Fields.

Filed 17 July, 1989. Inventor: Gregory J. Powell. Assignee: BioMagnetics Systems, Inc
and

5,197,492 – Focused Magnetic Directional Polarities.

Filed 26 March, 1991. Inventor: Walter C. Rawls & Gregory J. Powell. Assignee: BioMagnetics Systems, Inc

· Static magnetic fields affect living tissue

· South pole magnetic field may adversely affect living organisms

· MRIs and other equipment that generate strong magnetic fields can lead to strong occupational exposure of the south pole magnet

· The purpose of the invention is to shield a worker from the south pole magnetic field.

There isn’t even a mention of south pole magnetic field in relation to the thoroughly researched area of occupational exposure to magnetic fields. See Topic 2, reference.⁸

4,003,769 – Method Of Making Non-Retentive Al-Ni-Co-Fe Alloy.

Filed 11 Oct 1974. Inventor: Albert Roy Davis. Assignee: BioMagnetics International, Inc.

· A method to convert a high magnetic retentivity alloy to a non-retentive alloy.

Can find no evidence or references elsewhere.

4,020,590 – Apparatus and Method For Exposing Seeds To A Magnetic Field.

Filed 15 Dec, 1975. Inventor: Albert Roy Davis. Assignee: BioMagnetics, International.

· north pole magnetism provides a negative form of energy, while south pole magnetism a positive form of energy.

· An apparatus for magnetically treating seeds to alter the characteristics of plant growth.

· The apparatus allows for the exposure of only one magnetic pole

Davis conflated magnetoreception and magnetotropism with differences in biological response from the magnetic field’s of the north and south pole. See Topic 1.

5,709,223 – Magnetically Modified Microbial Metabolism.

Filed 7 June1, 1994. Inventor: Walter C. Rawls & Gregory J. Powell. Assignee: BioMagnetics Systems, Inc

· north pole magnetism provides a negative form of energy, while south pole magnetism a positive form of energy.

· North directional unipolar magnetic fields decrease the reproduction rate of microbial cells and microbial metabolism.

· South directional unipolar magnetic fields increase the reproduction rate of microbial cells and microbial metabolism.

· Increasing microbial activity can assist biodegradation of contaminated aqueous waste.

See Reference³ by Jung in Topic 2.

There is no evidence that any of these patents were put into commercial practice or had any commercial value. That is, besides attracting investors in the early stages of the product development.

---

4. Basic Physics

Davis & Rawls claim that physicists through the ages, including all current university courses make three fundamental errors (see pages 7-9 in Magnetism and its Effects on the Living System). The error that:

1. Error 1: Magnetic energy leaves one pole and travels to the opposite pole. They believed “the energy” flows both ways.

2. Error 2: Magnetic energy flows directly from one pole to the other. They believed the “magnetic energy” travels from one pole to the centre of the magnet and then to the opposite pole.

3. Error 3: The magnetic energies of both polarities are essentially the same. They believed that the two magnet fields are completely different and produce different biological effects.

All three so-called errors claimed by Davis & Rawls are not errors at all and reveal a good imagination and their lack of understanding of the physics of magnetism.

Even the terms used, such as magnetic energy shows a complete misunderstanding of the physics of electromagnetism. Like gravity, magnetism is one of the four fundamental forces. You don’t hear the term gravitational energy, except in the context of potential energy. The same with magnetic fields, fields are simply a property of space and if a material that’s attracted to a magnet comes into close proximity to this field, it will be drawn closer and reduce the magnetic potential energy.

You will often see magnetic field lines drawn around a bar magnet (see image below). But in reality, magnetic field lines don’t exist at all. They stem from the way iron filings form patterns around a magnet, but the magnetic field itself is not confined to distinct “field lines”. As each iron filing comes into close proximity to the magnet, it becomes in and of itself a single little magnetic dipole. A dipole having two poles, north and south at each end. This iron filing dipole feels the force of the large magnet, and aligns in the direction of the magnetic field. In addition, each little iron filing magnetic dipole feels a small force from other nearby iron filing dipoles, and they move to minimize their local energy. This causes them to line up in a row and appear like “field lines”.

The fact that there is a north and south pole is only a convention brought about because the “north seeking” pole in a compass orientates to face the North Pole. They might just have been called ying and yang or blue and red. The arrows drawn on the field lines pointing from north to south are also just a convention.

Iron filings and compasses around a bar magnet.

On the picture below, the two images on the left show how magnetic field lines are explained in physics text books. The two images on the right are Davis & Rawls “new” theory of magnetic field lines.

From Pg. 22 of Magnetism and its Effects on the Living System.

In addition, Davis & Rawls try to use the concept of the Bloch wall to support their erroneous theory of the two completely different magnetic fields, or as they describe as “energy”.

The Bloch wall as explained on Pg. 23 in Magnetism and its Effects on the Living System.

The Bloch wall can be easily explained by the image below. The first thing to understand is that a magnetic field is three dimensional, not two as shown. Also, as a vector quantity, magnetic fields have both magnitude (or strength) and direction. Whether the magnet is a solid static magnet or one produced by a solenoid, the field lines tell the tale. Near the middle of the magnet, the relative strength of the magnetic field is much stronger inside the magnet and very weak on the outside. See the following link for more details…

Click here to read more

Magnetic Field Lines Bar Magnet

Magnetic Field Lines From a Solenoid and a Bar Magnet.

As a further explanation, watch just a few minutes of this lecture by famous MIT physics lecturer Walter Lewin.

---

5. Another Book

The power of suggestion:

Buryl Payne PhD is a credible author and his book supports some of the theories of Davis & Rawls. But when you go digging for the scientific research, again it comes up blank.

According to chapter 4 of his book… Magnetic Healing: Advanced Techniques for the Application of Magnetic Forces.

Basic Facts

· The bio-south pole (red) stimulates and promotes healing, growth, and activity

· The bio-north pole (white, blue or green) calms, sedates, reduces inflammation, and also promotes healing

But while the author makes these claims as “basic facts”, at the same time he hedges his bets and effectively says, there’s no evidence for what I’ve said above and just do what works for you. He also writes that it was thought that people with arthritis visiting the South Pole for several months and experiencing improvements in arthritis was a result of the change in magnetic field.

Prior to around 1980, no other magnets were used besides the common bipolar magnet. That is, more complex magnets such as multipolar that applied both poles towards the body were yet to be considered. Since there were no other variables to work with, people like Davis & Rawls worked with the only variables they had; bionorth, biosouth and field strength.

The author seems to get this, but then can’t leave the old bionorth and biosouth theories behind!

Buryl Payne states that… “when it was commonly believed that there were magnetic poles and each pole had a characteristic “energy”, it was mistakenly assumed that one pole did one thing and the other pole another. Therefore it was believed that it was necessary to shield one pole from possibly affecting the body in this testing in order to obtain a pure polar effect. But since there are no magnetic poles, just magnetic directions, it is only necessary to reverse the magnetic direction to do a muscle test.”

The first part of this makes complete sense, each pole does not have its own characteristic energy. But, there is yet another misconception in Payne’s description. He gets the mistaken belief of labelling the north and south poles as having different energies.

Where’s the evidence?

Chapter 9 of Buryl Payne’s book is Research & Case Studies and this is what we were finally looking for to learn more about the research in the different biological effects of north and south pole “energies”. The major evidence he mentions to validate the different effects of bio-north and bio-south polarities is to separate a bunch of grapes and treat one with bio-north and the other with bio-south field and after just fifteen minutes, the bio-south treated grapes are so sweet you will just want to gobble them all up. A simple experiment you can try for yourself, give it a go and let us know what you find.

There was one line of research mentioned, a 1976 study by a Japanese Dr Kyoichi Nakagawa, but there’s nothing published to verify any such study or follow up. Irrespective, Nakagawa’s work was famous for his theory of magnetic field deficiency syndrome. That through a combination of the Earth’s slowly diminishing magnetic field and being surrounded with magnetic shielding materials (steel, concrete etc.), we are becoming “deficient”. Symptoms claimed by Nakagawa include stiffness, dizziness, headaches and poorer immune system.

Mesmer was the father of the term Animal Magnetism and in the late 1700’s practiced medicine using these intriguing materials that no one properly understood. He used magnets to place patients under some type of trance and was receiving glowing testimonials from socially prominent individuals. But after a while, he realised he could induce the same trance type state without using magnets. What he had in fact stumbled upon was a type of hypnotism, 60 years prior to the Scottish physician James Baird who coined the term.

The best explanation we can provide as to how people believe in the differences in the north and south pole applied to the body can be explained with The Powerband. That is, it’s purely suggestion. Read the incredible story of the claims of The Powerband at the link below and how a randomised controlled clinical trial was the final nail in the coffin. Eventually the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission stepped in and forced the company selling Powerband to refund their customers, see statement from ACCC here.

Click here to read more on Powerband

---

6. Clinical Trials

The following advice comes from William Philpot MD’s book, an often quoted source of information on medical magnets.

“It seems, however, that only the effect of north magnetic pole is beneficial and long lasting, and when both magnetic poles being administered to a patient simultaneously unpleasant effects appear.”

The research and clinical experience of many hundreds of medical practitioners informs us that the statement above is highly debatable. What does the research say? There have been three published peer reviewed clinical trials comparing the effects of either magnetic pole on the human body.

STUDY 1
Hinman’s study¹¹ was actually a response to a claim by William Philpott. “Philpott claims the heart is the most responsive tissue to the stress or anti-stress fields created by magnets. He states that a significant (10 point) decrease in Heart Rate will occur within a few minutes of exposure to a negative static magnetic field, and that a positive static magnetic field will have the opposite effect.”

So Hinman devised a study whereby he randomly assigned 75 healthy subjects to the following groups.

· 25 people to a negative magnetic field

· 26 people to a positive magnetic field

· 24 people to a sham magnetic field

Subjects laid on a 50 X 60cm magnetic underlay with 42 placebos or strong magnets each measuring 400-500 gauss (40-50mT or around 1,000 times stronger than the earth’s magnetic field). Heart Rate and Blood Pressure measurements were taken after 1, 5, 10 and 15 minutes and at 5 minutes after removal. The results of the study demonstrated no difference between the three groups in heart rate or blood pressure. This study looked at magnetic fields covering relatively large areas of the body. What about very specific points on the body, could the north or south magnetic poles induce different physiological effects?

STUDY 2
A study by Mayrovitz¹² investigated the localised effect of different magnetic poles and a sham field over the second finger. Mayrovitz exposed 12 healthy volunteers to either a sham field or a rare earth molybdenum magnet over the palmer part of the finger for 15 minutes. Mayrovitz noted that “despite the fact that physics tells us that the field strength at the magnet’s north and south poles are equal, it has been argued that the biological effects strongly depend on which pole is applied to the target tissue”.

Accurate measurements on skin microcirculation were made and showed a significant reduction in blood circulation for both sides of the magnet when compared to the sham field. Interestingly there was no significant difference between the north and south pole groups.

STUDY 3
Another application of static magnetic field therapy is Transcranial Static Magnetic Field Stimulation (tSMS). A study by Oliviero¹³ investigated the effects of placing a strong, weak and sham neodymium magnet against the skull, over the motor cortex to evaluate cortical excitability changes. They found a greater effect with the stronger magnet, but no difference between the north and south pole.

Graph showing effects of stronger v’s weaker magnets for both north and south pole. Greater effect for stronger magnet, but no difference between the poles (see bottom two lines).

The three studies quoted and our own experiments investigated the biological effects of static magnetic fields on human tissue. They found no differences to objective indicators such as blood pressure, heart rate or an inflammatory response to either positive or negative magnetic field exposure.

However, there are intuitive healers practiced in the art of biomagnetic pairing or channeling energy flow (or chi) through meridians, which may see different effects from the north or south poles, but is not within the scope of this article.

Why Quadrapolar?

Magnetic field lines are invisible and the naked eye is unable to detect the north or south pole or combination for a magnet. However, the direction of magnetic field lines and field gradients can be observed by sprinkling iron filings over a magnet.

Extensive research by a group of neurologists at Vanderbilt Medical University showed that static magnetic fields could be optimised for physiologic and therapeutic effects. The modelling has shown that the MER (maximally effective region) of the magnet coincided with regions in which the gradient (dB/dx) is predominantly perpendicular to the local field vector.¹⁴ See article for Q Magnet device selection for more information.

This can be observed in the picture above with the quadrapolar magnet showing iron filings running horizontal to the surface of the magnet where the polarity alternates. See how Q Magnets work for more information.

---

7. Summary

The short summary is…

After reviewing the evidence in its entirety, it’s reasonable to assert that any differences between the north and south pole can be attributed to magnetoreception, magnetotaxis and/or magnetotropism. There is practically no evidence that these differences might benefit or harm the human body.

Citations

1. 1.

Chibowski E, Szcześ A. Magnetic water treatment-A review of the latest approaches. Chemosphere. 2018;203:54-67. doi:10.1016/j.chemosphere.2018.03.160

2. 2.

Shalatonin V. Effect of Unipolar Magnetic Field on Macroscopic Properties of Distilled Water. IJPMBS. Published online 2017:89-93. doi:10.18178/ijpmbs.6.3.89-93

3. 3.

Jung J, Sanji B, Godbole S, Sofer S. Biodegradation of phenol: a comparative study with and without applying magnetic fields. J Chem Technol Biotechnol. 1993;56(1):73-76. doi:10.1002/jctb.280560113

4. 4.

Utsunomiya T, Yamane Y-I, Watanabe M, Sasaki K. Stimulation of porphyrin production by application of an external magnetic field to a photosynthetic bacterium, Rhodobacter sphaeroides. Journal of Bioscience and Bioengineering. Published online January 2003:401-404. doi:10.1016/s1389-1723(03)80075-0

5. 5.

Adamkiewicz V, Bassous C, Morency D, Lorrain P, Lepage J. Magnetic response in cultures of Streptococcus mutans ATCC-27607. Exp Biol. 1987;46(3):127-132. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/3582582

6. 6.

Bertea C, Narayana R, Agliassa C, Rodgers C, Maffei M. Geomagnetic Field (Gmf) and Plant Evolution: Investigating the Effects of Gmf Reversal on Arabidopsis thaliana Development and Gene Expression. J Vis Exp. 2015;(105). doi:10.3791/53286

7. 7.

Yano A, Hidaka E, Fujiwara K, Iimoto M. Induction of primary root curvature in radish seedlings in a static magnetic field. Bioelectromagnetics. 2001;22(3):194-199. doi:10.1002/bem.38

8. 8.

Trappier A, Lorio P, Johnson L. Evolving perspectives on the exposure risks from magnetic fields. J Natl Med Assoc. 1990;82(9):621-624. https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/2213910

9. 9.

Ghodbane S, Lahbib A, Sakly M, Abdelmelek H. Bioeffects of static magnetic fields: oxidative stress, genotoxic effects, and cancer studies. Biomed Res Int. 2013;2013:602987. doi:10.1155/2013/602987

10. 10.

Nakagawa J, Hirota N, Kitazawa K, Shoda M. Magnetic field enhancement of water vaporization. Journal of Applied Physics. Published online September 1999:2923-2925. doi:10.1063/1.371144

11. 11.

Hinman M. Comparative effect of positive and negative static magnetic fields on heart rate and blood pressure in healthy adults. Clin Rehabil. 2002;16(6):669-674. doi:10.1191/0269215502cr538oa

12. 12.

Mayrovitz H, Groseclose E. Effects of a static magnetic field of either polarity on skin microcirculation. Microvasc Res. 2005;69(1-2):24-27. doi:10.1016/j.mvr.2004.11.002

13. 13.

Oliviero A, Mordillo-Mateos L, Arias P, Panyavin I, Foffani G, Aguilar J. Transcranial static magnetic field stimulation of the human motor cortex. J Physiol. 2011;589(Pt 20):4949-4958. doi:10.1113/jphysiol.2011.211953

14. 14.

McLean M, Engström S, Holcomb R. Static Magnetic Fields for the Treatment of Pain. Epilepsy & Behavior. Published online June 2001:S74-S80. doi:10.1006/ebeh.2001.0211

MAGNETISM

AND ITS EFFECTS

ON THE

LIVING SYSTEM

by

ALBERT ROY DAVIS

and

WALTER €. RAWLS, Jr.

An Exposition-University Book

Exposition Press Smithtown, New York

First Printing, October, 1974

Second Printing, September, 1976

Third Printing, January, 1978

Fourth Printing, February, 1980

Fifth Printing, October, 1980

Sixth Printing, May, 1982

© 1974 by Albert Roy Davis and Walter C. Rawls, Jr.

All rights reserved, including the right of reproduction in whole

or in part, in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical,

including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage

and retrieval system. No part of this book may be reproduced

without permission in writing from the publisher. Inquiries

should be addressed to Exposition Press, Inc., 325 Rabro Drive,

Smithtown, NY 11787-0817.

Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 74-84423

ISBN 0-682-48087-8

Printed in the United States of America

CONTENTS

Preface ix

Introduction xi

Acknowledgments xv

1. Understanding Magnetism 3

Legends and Recorded History 3

The Magnetic Computer 4

Present Uses and Applications 5

2. Discoveries Made Internationally Supporting Interna¬

tional Work in Biomagnetics 11

3. Measurement of the Earth’s Magnetic Field—The Old

and the New Concepts—The Division of the Poles 21

4. The Effects of the Two Poles on the Living System—

The Discovery of the Two Effects 25

The Chemical and Biological Analysis of the Treated

Worms and the Results 28

The Magnetic Exposure of Seeds 29

Increase of Important Protein, Sugars, Oils, Found

After Plant Seed Development When Seeds Are

Exposed to the South Pole Magnetic Energies 30

5. The Two Pole Effects on Small Animals, Snakes and

Birds 33

v

vi Contents

The Growth and Development of the Treated Chicks

to Chickens and Roosters 35

The Effects on and to Mice and Rats 37

Sex Life and Aging 39

The Increase or Reduction of the Normal Life Span of

Anim als 40

6. Man the Electromagnetic Animal 47

Man’s Electromagnetic Environment 49

External Electromagnetic Forces and Man 53

7. Mistaken Concepts of Magnetism and Its Biological

Application 55

A Laboratory Demonstration to Show the Two Direc¬

tions of Flow of Polarized Hydrogen Bubbles in a

Magnetic Field 58

The Cable Effect 63

8. Why Previous Experiments Have Failed to Be Repro¬

ducible 67

Small Animal Research 68

Mutants Are Developed by the Old Concept Appli¬

cations 70

The Possibility of Diagnosing Human Illnesses with

Controlled Magnetic Fields 71

9. Cancers and Tumors and Magnetism 73

The Effects of Magnetic Fields on Cancers 81

The Control or Arrest of Cancer by Magneto Therapy 82

The Increase in the Production of Erythrocytes 82

10. The Bioelectrical Control of Nerve Pain 87

The Amino Acids and Resultant Protein Development 90

Contents vii

11. Magnetism and Gravity 91

The Broken “8” 93

Cathode Ray Tube 95

Changes in Gravitational Weight 98

Funnel Effect of Magnetic Energies 101

A New World of Science 102

Atomic Energy and Magnetism 103

Man Bombarded by Elements 104

12. The Human Biomagnetic Aura 109

The Laying on of Hands 110

The Human Aura 112

Colors and Their Effects 114

Mans Biomagnetic Mind 114

Parapsychological-Biomagnetic Investigations 116

Warning 118

Measuring the Voltages of the Living System and

Their Locations on the Body 118

Biomagnetic Biological Electronics 120

The Present and Future Research into Very High

Gauss Magnetic Energies (VHG) 126

Conclusion 126

About the Authors 129

General Research References 131

PREFACE

This book was written to aid in the understanding of the Science

of Magnetism, and its effects on mankind and all biological systems.

We shall discuss how magnetism, that natural energy we find

surrounding the earth, acts on living systems. Further, we shall

in part discuss the effects magnetism and magnetic fields have on

inorganic and organic materials, genes, cells, airs, and gases, as

well as protein structures. To this day magnetism holds many

unknowns and we shall present some of these answers to assist the

reader, whether student, professor, doctor or physicist. We have

tried to avoid complicated math and complex formulas in this

edition, yet present new research findings that will afford a better

comprehension of the effects of non-homogeneous magnetic energy.

After many years of practical laboratory and clinical research

encompassing the mechanics of practical and applied investigations

in and with magnetism and magnetic fields, this research has

developed new laws, theories, and new and practical under¬

standings in all phases of the physics of magnetism and magnetic

fields. This also includes electromagnetic fields generated by alter¬

nating voltages and currents, to direct currents and voltages, the

solid state, and the standard metal magnets with their two poles

of energy.

One of the breakthroughs discovered a number of years ago

was that the two pole energies of any magnet are not homogeneous

as to effects to any and/or all subjected materials, organic or inor¬

ganic in nature.

In the past few years your authors have continuously urged

those in influential and senior positions with the government and

scientific departments to reexamine the accepted theories and

concepts of magnetism. However, our efforts have been unsuccess¬

ful and at this time many researchers at all levels of scientific

x Preface

research refuse to acknowledge or utilize this new discovery for

guidance in their work.

The purpose of this book is to assist all of the men and women

now engaged in magnetic research. We hope they will benefit from

the research and new discoveries presented in this book, the

extension of new uses for magnetism in all of its many fields and

applications, even those not now thought possible, yet which within

our foreseeable future will be understood and used by all nations

of the world for the benefit of mankind.

April 28, 1974

Albert Roy Davis

Walter C. Rawls, Jr.

INTRODUCTION

Biomagnetism, biological use of magnetism, to aid and treat

human and/or animal ills, is far older than the ancient science of

acupuncture.

Acupuncture was brought into the open when the United States

during 1973 reestablished relations with the People’s Republic of

China. This science is now under serious investigation here in the

United States. After his rise to power in the People’s Republic of

China, Chairman Mao Tse-tung initiated the announced China

Scientific Reconstruction Program, in which the Chinese are now

making even further advancements and discoveries in this ancient

science.

Although the Science of Biomagnetics predates acupuncture

and holds many secrets man has yet to unfold and discover, we in

the United States are not proceeding as we should to further

develop this science.

Many of the writings and parchments were long ago destroyed

by those ancients who researched and used this natural science.

These parchments were destroyed, as were many others, to pre¬

vent them from falling into the hands of warlike people invading

their lands and cities.

It is recorded that Dr. Hua To, one of China’s most advanced

medical men, bom between a.d. 140 and 150, was the developer of

acupuncture. China was then under the rule of Emperor I Tsung

of die Tang Dynasty. This recorded evidence places a date that

we can use as a reference to the ancient accepted use of the

medical science of acupuncture.

To determine when magnetism or magnets were used in

medicine, we refer to the works of the Greek physician Galen. We

find that in Galen’s ninth book of his writings entitled De Sim-

XI

XU

Introductioi

plicium Medicamentorum mention is made of a magnet’s energies

being used in purgative arrest and openings. This writing can be

dated as far back as 200 b.c —far older than the recorded science

of acupuncture.

More recently, the works of Louis Pasteur tell of his research

by placing a magnet next to fermenting fluids and wines and

the marked rise in fermentation processes as a result. There are

also the important writings, reports, books, and papers of such men

as Von Reichenback and Walter Kilner and many others too

numerous to mention. Hundreds of papers, books, and manuscripts

have been written on magnetic fields and their effects on biological

systems and man’s environmental surroundings, animals and lower

forms of creatures. In the investigation into any of these papers,

there are exceptions to the rule, yet for the most part, these papers,

books, and manuscripts indicate the failure to properly reproduce

many of these experiments time after time with the same success,

and many writings totally fail to show any effects of a magnet’s

poles and its energies on any forms of life, biological systems,

serums, gases, or fluids.

Failure to properly develop the ancient science of magnetism

is partially due to improper investigation of this important science

by the scientific community. It is necessary to better understand

magnetism before understanding and entering into physical or

biochemical research and the practice of this research.

To assist the layman or student—with the forbearance of doc¬

tors, physicists, and scientists—we will present elementary data to

acquaint the reader with the fundamentals of accepted magnetic

theories, concepts, and principles which will provide a basic under¬

standing of magnetism.

This book is not intended to cause any reflection on the work

of individuals or groups who have written many books on magnetic

effects, laws, physics, or principles without the little known and

advanced concepts and discoveries that we have made during our

research. We all must accept advancements to our knowledge of,

and to all, sciences and scientific principles.

The authors give full and due credit to the years, even life¬

times, of the many men and women who have dedicated their

lives to the study of the mechanics of magnetism in all of its many

fields; also all of those whose work, papers, books, manuscripts,

Introduction

xiii

have been written to enlighten mankind by their findings, as by

this effort on their part they have aided in the interest and progres¬

sive understanding of “What is Magnetism?”

In this book we intend to show the vast and far-reaching effects

that may be obtained again and again, duplicating these tests and

experiments anywhere at any time by any person equipped with

the proper knowledge of how to proceed, making such presenta¬

tions new scientific facts and not simply theories. All new discov¬

eries, applications, and understandings presented in this book are

by Albert Roy Davis or under his guidance and supervision from the

Albert Roy Davis Scientific Laboratories in Green Cove Springs,

Florida. This book is presented as a scientific paper as well as a

book. There are excerpts in this book taken from patents that

have been filed by your authors.

It is your authors’ most sincere desire that the publication of

these new concepts that are reproducible, the discussions and

applications of these concepts, will advance the scientific knowl¬

edge of the understandings of applied magnetic fields and their

effects.

Albert Roy Davis

Walter C. Rawls, Jr.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Full credit and acknowledgment to all the dedicated men and

women who throughout the years have researched the science

of magnetic effects would require a book in itself, and then not

be complete. We present here those researchers who primarily

have assisted our work. Many of these scientists, in cooperation

with our laboratory research, have duplicated in their laboratories

our findings presented in this book. Some of these scientists were

initiated into the science of magnetics through our efforts and

then on their own made outstanding discoveries in their own right.

In general, their combined assistance in duplicating new facts,

disclosures, and experiments contributed to the establishment of

magnetics as a basic important science to all sciences.

Any new breakthrough in any field of science, the discoveries

that advance a science, must be reproducible at any time or loca¬

tion with consistent results by qualified persons. We have worked

with other scientists in this country and other countries in this

regard.

The fields of research mentioned in these acknowledgments

are descriptive and not intended to be inclusive.

Dr. B. E. Roessling, University of Berlin. Magnetic wave prop¬

agation. Dr. Roessling’s work in 1936-1937 brought about the first

full unders tandin gs of the principle later to be discovered as the

polarization of light waves—the now existing laser principle. His

work also extended into the effects of magnetic wave emissions

on and to living systems.

Dr. William Cambell, University of Cambridge. High frequency

effects on living systems, 1935-1937. Dr. Cambell’s work covered

the physical effects of magnetic fields to rodents and small animals.

Dr. Y erkes, The Yerkes Primate Biological Laboratories, Orange

Park, Florida, extension division of Yale University. Animal behavior

xv

xvi Acknowledgments

in the presence of natural environmental magnetic biosphere,

1936-1937.

Dr. Blasengame, electrical stimulations of living systems and

their effects, 1937 to 1938.

Dr. H. Bingenheimer, Germany, extension research. Applied

electromagnetic energies to living systems to stimulate physical de¬

velopment.

Dr. N. S. Hanoka, University of Israel; resident, Harlington,

Texas. Studies in natural sciences including food stimulation, pro¬

duct growth, seed treatments by magnetic fields, 1956-1971. Re¬

search into removal of toxic infections by magnetic fields. Assisted

in our uncovering the reason why many wild animals can eat

decayed and infected food with no ill effects due to the inner

development of an antitoxin fluid. Aided in research into wound

healing by magnetic field applications.

Dr. A. K. Bhattachura, West Bengal Clinic, India. 1959-1970,

researched the effects of magnetic fields on living systems in the

free clinics in India. Our joint research resulted in acknowledgment

by Prime Minister Gandhi.

Dr. Edward Stadel, Applied Sciences, 1960-1967. Extension

research, University of Oregon. The effects of magnetic fields on

sugar beet seeds that resulted in a higher yield of natural sugars,

and in tomato research the production of less acid end products,

improved flavor, and better growth patterns, when using the proper

pole of applied magnetic fields, supporting our findings of the

dual effects of a magnet’s energies.

Dr. George de la Wan, The Delawarr Laboratories, Oxford,

England, 1966-1967. Research into intermodulation of electromag¬

netic frequencies in application to the human living system for the

detection of biological effects, as a result of carrying other imposed

electromagnetic frequencies together with a magnet’s pole ener¬

gies. Human and animal reactions to natural electromagnetic ener¬

gies as found in the biosphere. Mrs. de la Warr was an active

participant in this research.

Dr. Robert J. Morgan and Mrs. Hope Morgan, Delaware

Clinic. Dr. Morgan, supported by Mrs. Morgan’s untiring efforts,

acted to reproduce research of the separate magnetic poles on

inner ear defects, drainages, nerve responses, and forms of ear and

biological infections. Further research toward the reduction and

arrest of overactive acid conditions and the arrest and control of

Acknowledgments xvii

excessive acids produced by the digestive system of the living

system. These were proved to be supporting on the results of the

proper application of only one of the two poles’ energies of a

solid state magnet.

Mr. George Meek, Research Scientist and Engineer in Ther¬

modynamics and Applied Sciences. Research into the effects of

water treated with magnetic energies. Both he and Mrs. Meek

made possible the field of researching the possible beneficial effects

of a single pole’s energies in the arrest and control of stages of

cataracts and glaucoma. Experimental research on eyes of living

systems affected with these conditions was outstanding both in

efforts and results. Mr. and Mrs. Meek have during the past few

years toured nearly all countries of the world investigating many

new concepts in natural and biological sciences.

Dr. Ralph U. Sierra, Director, Puerto Rico Scientific Research

Laboratories, Rio Piedras, Puerto Rico. Dr. Sierra has reproduced

over 100 actual experiments that afford us scientific supporting

evidence that the magnetic energy of each pole of the magnet is

completely and totally different in its effects on the living system.

Dr. Sierra’s work and international lectures have provided many

researchers with the results of our combined work into magnetic

energy effects. His work in agriculture, medicine, medical, clinical

and animal research has supported our work. He is one of the

most active researchers in biomagnetics in the world today. His

work, research, and lectures are known in many South American

nations, as well as the University of Puerto Rico. Dr. Sierra has

assisted in the duplication of our research findings now for some

five years. He has afforded us with certain major discoveries that

he has made in his laboratory in Puerto Rico in addition to his

reproduction of our research developments and experiments here in

Florida. His work has been shown in many nations of the world

and he has given freely of his time and efforts to enlighten scientists

who have visited his laboratory from these nations of the great

values that this natural science of biomagnetics offers all mankind.

Dr. W. D. Chesnetj, Janesville, Wisconsin. Dr. Chesney has

worked on development of many photosynthetic organic chemicals,

the first fluorescent light and many other firsts in the field of applied

science. He has assisted us in the research of applied biomagnetic

energies and helped call this new science to the attention of the

medical community.

xviii Acknowledgments

Dr. L. Thornton Owen, Jr., Director, The Owen Clinic. Dr.

Owen has undertaken research to duplicate our research in the

application and promising results of arresting many complaints of

the living systems. His work has been of great support and assis¬

tance in our research.

Dr. Harold H. E. Brownlee, Oshawa, Canada. Dr. and Mrs.

Brownlee at their clinic in Oshawa have aided in the duplication

of our research findings of the two effects the two poles of a

magnet’s energies have on the living system, each being totally

different in nature and effects. Untiringly they have assisted us

in proving that the two poles’ energies of the magnet can and will

effect a definite and scientific reaction when these energies are

correctly applied to the human living system suffering from a

complaint. Further assistance in nerve reactions seen or measured

with suitable electronic instruments that indicate the location of

these many complaints in diagnosing clinical investigations by the

means of applied magnetic pole energies. The discoveries that

have resulted from this research finding are now under full

investigation in colleges in Canada. Dr. Brownlee’s research into

biomagnetics has been outstanding and valuable in the greater

understandings of magnetic effects to the living system. Dr.

Brownlee’s work and untiring efforts to lecture and teach this

valuable science to the medical and associated sciences in Canada

have been received with great interest.

Dr. Ruth Wenrich Emerson. Dr. Emerson’s work in the repro¬

duction of our findings and research has been outstanding and

rewarding in every respect. She is dedicated to the study of

natural arts and sciences and performed an important part in

opening new doors of research into biomagnetics in that magnetism,

as that of a magnet’s energies, is very similar if not exactly the

same as the earth’s magnetic fields, assisting us in this science as a

natural science.

Dr. Frederick Doughty Beck. Dr. Beck’s interest in the develop¬

ment of natural sciences, directed toward the improvement and

development of a better understanding of natural methods or

means of relieving suffering, prompted him to undertake to repro¬

duce many of our experiments to establish this new science. Dr.

Beck’s work in kidney complaints and arrests has been outstanding,

his own personal work supporting the singular effects of magnetic

Acknowledgments xix

energies when applied to many complaints of the kidneys and

other ailments. Also in magnetic effects on blood pressure.

Dr. Stanley Hall, Queensland, Australia. Dr. Hall’s research

and life’s work has been dedicated to the natural arts and sciences.

Dr. Hall’s efforts in the reproduction of the effects to the living

system by the singular effects of each pole of a magnetic to the

living system have been of the upmost importance in supporting

our work.

Dr. E. W. Hidson, London, England. Dr. Hidson, dedicated to

medicine and allied sciences, has undertaken to prove a number of

our findings and is now proceeding to explore still other new

discoveries for the reason of duplication of findings to further

support our research into the values of biomagnetics.

Dr. Leslie O. Korth, London, England. Dr. Korth’s research

into biomagnetics in his own right and in exploring and duplicating

our findings has obtained some outstanding and remarkable scientific

results on the effects of the two single and separate magnetic

effects of the poles of a magnet in applying magnetic energy to

living systems. He has been responsible for releasing information

of our research work through such official journals as the British

Naturopathic and Osteopathic Journal, 1973-1974.

Dr. George Walters, Florida. Dr. Walters’ work on the effects of

biomagnetics on the living system has been outstanding and he

has undertaken to discuss and introduce this science to many

scientific-minded men and women researchers throughout the

United States. His aim is to make known this science to those

dedicated to research and investigation of natural sciences, as has

Mrs. Walters.

Mr. and Mrs. Lawrence Nelson. Mr. and Mrs. Nelson have

devoted their work to presenting educational materials and re¬

search data to all interested in the natural sciences. They have

also supplied much information and actual research findings in

many fields of this science. Their work has been untiring in the

exploring of the applied sciences including research into bio¬

magnetics.

Dr. Leonard J. Allan, Margate, Kent, England, Osteopathic

Clinic. Dr. Allan is the author of a number of books on natural

sciences and diagnostic methods and systems in health care. He

has assisted us in many ways to come to know and understand the

effects of biomagnetics in many fields of biological research.

xx Acknowledgments

Professor Bessie O’Connor, Midnapore, Alberta, Canada. Pro¬

fessor O’Connor, an outsanding educator in Canada, has devoted

her life to science, teaching, and applied research into the natural

arts and sciences of the earth. She co-authored a book entitled

Magnetically Yours, in which she presents a scientific look at the

natural laws of magnetism in the study of plants, animals, and man

in their magnetic biosphere. Professor O’Connor has assisted us in

many research investigations that have supported and duplicated

the work outlined in this book.

Dr. D. N. Khushalani, Rehmatbai Vadnagarwala General Hos¬

pital, Calcutta, India. Dr. Khushalani has researched biomagnetics

with us for a number of years and is an outstanding medical and

natural science teacher, investigator and researcher.

Dr. Earl W. Conroy, Kaita, New Zealand. Dr. Conroy’s willing¬

ness to undertake and fully investigate sciences related to aiding

health and locating new methods of combatting disease has been

both outstanding and rewarding to our work. His help in research¬

ing the two singular effects of magnetic energies has been out¬

standing in every respect.

Dr. Yoshio Seki, Tokyo, Japan. Dr. Seki undertook the study

of biomagnetics three years ago and has formed a new research

program in Japan, far exceeding any work now being undertaken

in the effects of the two singular pole energies of the solid state

magnet to biological systems in Japan. While many doctors and

scientists have visited our laboratory from Japan, Dr. Seki stands

out as having the greatest potential of presenting this new scientific

breakthrough in Japan and in other nations in Asia and Europe.

He undertook this research under the most difficult conditions and

has, as the result of his dedicated research and allied work, opened

the doors to the further exploring of this vitally important science

in Japan and now in other nations of the world. Dr. Seki has

duplicated much of our work. Dr. Seki has undertaken to establish

an international educational trade and post of scientific material

exchange in many nations of the world.

Dr. Victor Beasley, North Carolina and Guyana, South America.

Dr. Beasley is an outstanding scientist who has investigated most

of the natural arts and sciences we find existing today. In one of

his papers Dr. Beasley presents an outstanding review of scientific

work now going on in most nations of the world, including the

study of ancient beliefs, ancient medical sciences, man and his

Acknowledgments xxi

behavior, and also parapsychology investigations. Dr. Beasley has

reproduced many of the basic discoveries we have made and has

been of the greatest importance and value in this applied research.

Mr. Joseph F. Goodavage. Author of Man, the Biomagnetic An¬

imal, The Fabulous New Science of Biomagnetic Healing, and

other books and articles. Mr. Goodavage has assisted us in making

contacts, in meeting and working with a number of fine scientists,

researchers and investigators in the field of natural and applied

sciences.

Dr. R. H. Gordon. Dr. Gordon, author of Basic Studies on Mono¬

polarity a scientific discussion and review of magnetic effects on

biological systems. He has obtained some remarkable discoveries

as to magnetic effects. His work with his very talented sister

throughout the years has resulted in obtaining patents on magnetic

instruments now under research in a number of countries around

the world. Our laboratories researched with Dr. Gordon in the field

of photocolormetric investigations of visual studies of magnetic

fields and developed a means of detection for visual display of

magnetic fields in color for electron emission studies.

Mr. Clifford E. Swanson. Mr. Swanson is a publisher and one

who through his untiring efforts after retiring from the publishing

field has dedicated much time and effort to researching the effects

of magnetic fields. He has been responsible for contacting and mak¬

ing possible many meetings with those interested in furthering

their effective investigations into the science of magnetics.

Mr. McDonald Newkirk. Mr. Newkirk has over the past years

shown a great interest in this science. He is known in India and in

New York circles of research into natural sciences. He has made it

possible for us to establish many new avenues of communications

with a number of fine scientific men and women in New York and

cities in other nations of the world.

Dr. Bernard Jensen. One of the developers of the science of “Iris-

ology”; author and foremost authority in many discoveries into the

investigations of the iris. Dr. Jensen has filmed some of our work. He

hopes soon to present a film on his research into the environmental

attitudes of man. He has been the guest of rulers of many countries.

In his travels he has investigated the above-the-average life span

of the people of many nations, including the people of Hunza and

others. He has investigated the possibilities that where the earth’s

magnetic fields are the greatest, the highest, man’s life may be

yyjl Acknowledgments

affected in many ways. One effect very well could be the longer

life span that certain countries’ people show as the overall averages

of normal to extended life cycles. Hunza has long been considered

the long sought Shangri-la, as this nation which is located in the

beautiful valley in the heart of the Himalayas and its people have

shown the marked extension of man’s normal life span. Dr. Jensen’s

films and books will present for the first time little-known facts

regar din g these subjects. Dr. Jensen has assisted us and we hope

we have in part assisted his research, as we have found that life

in years can be extended 40 percent or more with increased mag¬

netic surroundings researching with many forms of blood-circulating

animals and rodents, then why not mankind?

Dr. Marcus McCausland, London, England. Dr. McCausland

has assisted in many ways in the introduction of our work and has

aided in establishing many worthy contacts for us within the scien¬

tific community of researchers in England. He is an outstanding

student of the arts and sciences and one whose help has proven

of extreme value to our work and research here in the science of

applied biomagnetics.

Mr. Chester Hurlhut. For many years Mr. Hurlbut has actively

participated in continuing this field of research. Mr. Hurlbut comes

from a long line of medical specialists and had it not been for cir¬

cumstances would have followed in their footsteps. His untiring

efforts held together for long periods of time the continuance of

this work and research. No man would ever hope to have a finer

friend. His outstanding work and research have shortened the time

it has been necessary to spend to prove the effects of the singular

yet totally different effects to biological systems of the two separate

pole energies of all magnets. Mrs. Hurlbut has been an inspiration

in his dedication and work in the many fields of research he has

entered and undertaken. As a co-worker and advisor he has more

than demonstrated the meaning of the word friendship.

Mr. and Mrs. Donald Larson and their sons, Roger, Donald and

James, and their daughter Crystal, for many years of assistance and

dedication in our research work.

Mrs. E. J. Leonard. Mrs. Leonard has provided us with tech¬

nical and editorial assistance. Her active part in preparing the con¬

tents and layout of this book, her assistance and dedication to

details, scientific projections, and presentations have been of val¬

uable assistance to our efforts.

MAGNETISM AND ITS EFFECTS

ON THE LIVING SYSTEM

Chapter One

UNDERSTANDING MAGNETISM

LEGENDS AND RECORDED HISTORY

J^-ccording to ancient legends a shepherd named Magnes

was tending his flocks. Here the legends vary greatly. It is

told that his staff made of iron was pulled by an unseen force

toward a large rock where it was held and resisted the boy’s efforts

to free it from the surface of the rock. This rock mineral became

known as The Magnes Stone. Today we call this magnetic natural

material Lodestone. From the young shepherd’s name, Magnes, we

have magnet and magnetism—an unseen, untouchable energy that

is the basis for the development of electricity as we know it today

that furnishes the power for our lights, radios and television sets.

Since that time in ancient history scientists have probed this

invisible force of nature that produced the first magnet, Lodestone.

To show the length of time this study and its legends have

been known to man let us quote the following: “a-d. 597, St. Augus¬

tine came to Britain at the insistence of Pope Gregory I and as he

viewed the magnets attracting one to the other and when they

were reversed, the magnets opposed each other, with no hand

touching either magnet, he stated out loud, *When I first saw it I

was thunderstruck.’ ” The magnetism of the shepherd Magnes has

presented a great scientific question over many past and present

centuries. To this day the true nature of magnetism is still far

from being understood. Outstanding space researchers and world-

renowned scientists are not applying the true nature and under¬

standing that this important science has for application not only

for magnetism itself but also for the application in the other sci¬

ences known to man.

Lodestone is magnetic iron ore or iron mineral ore; it is in part

3

4 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

the composition of the lava, the molten hot flowing lava of a vol¬

cano. As this hot lava flows up, then down the sides of a volcano,

it slowly cools, and as it cools the earth’s magnetism, the magnetic

fields that flow from one pole of the earth to the other pole, passes

through the lava and impresses on the lava these fields of mag¬

netism. When the molten lava is cold it has accepted, stored and

has in itself that amount of energy that existed on the earth at the

time the mineral rock was formed.

THE MAGNETIC COMPUTER

The fields of magnetism stored in the rock have been used as

a data computer that has told us a great deal about the history of

the earth and its biosphere (biological atmosphere). Scientists

utilizing their knowledge of the earth’s gravitational magnetism

during the history of the earth can more accurately date the evo¬

lution of fish and animal species. Science has pondered what effect

magnetism, existing on earth in its fields of force and energy, had

directly on evolution, the genes, size, life span, development of

these species.

It is now accepted that fields of magnetism, strengths and weak¬

nesses, have themselves not been constant but changed during the

earth’s history.

The initial important scientific work in this regard was by Dr.

Normal Prime with the U.S. Geological Department. Also, the

French physicist Dr. Bernard Brunhes in 1906 undertook to ex¬

amine volcanic materials taken from the sides of many great vol¬

canoes. He went deep into the sides, removing cores drilled from

the volcanoes. Dr. Brunhes discovered that the lines of force in

the removed cores of the magnetic rock changed directions in re¬

lation to the north and south poles of the earth’s magnetic fields,

by establishing the depth and related computed time with the lines

of force or direction existing. After considerable testing and re¬

examinations this presented the fact that the earth’s magnetic poles

had reversed a number of times over millions of years in the earth’s

history.

Here Dr. Prime and his survey party, by means of atomic carbon

dating, determined when these magnetic pole reversals took place.

Later, oceanographic scientists, in dredging samples of shell and

Understanding Magnetism 5

bone structure from the bottom of the seas and using atomic carbon

dating, were able to approximate more accurately when certain

types of fish and mammals different from those now present in the

oceans and seas existed on the earth. The same concept was used

on the earth’s surface, taking the remains of fossils, mammals and

giant animals. Computing their period remains on earth to the

levels of magnetic energy then existing on earth we can see that

magnetic energy, amounts, and the magnetic pole relationship at

that approximate time to many types of animals, fish, mammals,

from beginning to end of their existence on earth and the beginning

of new strains of animals, plants, fish, mammals. In many respects

this allows us a magnetic time computer to obtain, understand,

and gain knowledge of the earth’s history and its changes, many

in part, if not all, related to the changes of the earth’s own natural

magnetic fields.

PRESENT USES AND APPLICATIONS

It is not difficult for man to make a metal magnet of a solid

state. You may take a piece of iron or steel and place it in a winding

of insulated wire, or wind a number of turns of insulated wire

around a nail. Connect to a good storage battery for about 5

seconds, which allows the battery’s voltage to flow through the

coil and impart to the steel, iron or nail the lines of magnetic ener¬

gy that the coil produces when connected to the battery. The result

is a magnetized material, a magnet.

Commercial and industrial magnets used in biomagnetic med¬

ical and biological research vary in intensity. The measurement of

magnetism is termed a gauss. A gauss is a unit of magnetism as a

volt is the unit of measurable voltage and as an ampere is the

unit by which current is measured. The gauss is one unit of

measurement in the most elementary manner of units in the meas¬

urement of magnetic force.

In many accepted discussions of magnetism it is advised that

the earth and a magnet are alike in nature in that lines of force

transmit from the North (N) pole to the South (S) pole. Other

text references advise the lines of force transmit from the South

(S) pole to the North (N) pole. However, after many years of

research into the physics, physical and applied research, and in-

6

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

vestigation into magnetic behavior, we must correct this impression.

Practical examples and laboratory research conducted many hund¬

reds of times show that the lines of force that travel between the

poles of the earth or those of a magnet travel not in one major

direction but in both directions at the same time. This and other

findings we will present at length.

It is of the utmost importance that you understand how we

arrived at identifying the poles of a magnet, as many present-day

magnet manufacturers do not code or identify the poles correctly.

The two poles of any magnet are the N pole and the S pole. As

does the earth, a magnet also has its two poles. The simple means

of identification of the two poles is to take a long straight bar or

cylinder magnet and tie a string or thread at its center. Then tie

the thread to a support that will allow the magnet freedom to

swing freely, keeping it away from all metal objects. The magnet

will turn and slow, then stop turning. The end of the magnet that

is pointing to the N pole of the earth is “the S pole of the magnet.”

You may code it for identification with red fingernail polish or red

paint. Many references are given to the north-seeking pole of a

magnet. This would mean that, since dissimilar poles attract and

similar poles repel, the end seeking the N pole of the earth’s mag¬

netic pole is the S pole of the magnet.

The making of any magnet is the aligning of the atoms of the

material. When you place a nail, steel or iron rod or bar, or other

materials that are magnetically sensitive in a coil of current you

align the atoms so they spin. Their electron spin is all in one di¬

rection. Therefore, the strength in gauss units of magnetism a

magnet can be made to have, depends on the number of atomic

shells within that material that contains a varied number of atoms

that can then be magnetized or polarized. Now, while the electron

spin of the atoms is aligned in one direction, each resulting pole of

any magnet gives off energies that spin in opposite directions. The

S pole spin is always to the right, while the N pole electronic field

spins to the left.

Magnets today, with the advancement of magnetic material re¬

search, are made of plastic compounds mixed with certain mag¬

netically acceptable materials. There are also magnets made from

many kinds of minerals, noted and referred to as rare earth mag¬

nets. Therefore, it is now possible to make nonmetallic magnets

Understanding Magnetism •

and magnets that are flexible in the form of magnetic ribbon, tape,

etc.

The use of a flat piece of paper with iron fillings placed on its

top and the bringing up under that paper a magnet to show the

magnet’s lines of force is incorrect and should not be used in text¬

books of many types to educate students, because each fine particle

of the steel or iron fillings when placed in the field of the magnet

under the paper becomes a miniature magnet in itself; thus the

total picture is incorrect and misleading. As each miniature magnet

then attracts and repels, the picture is distorted to present a mis¬

taken concept.

Modem educational concepts and teachings of the principles

of magnetism are to a great degree incorrect. Textbooks today still

present the energies coming from a magnet as leaving the North

or the South pole of the magnet to circle the full length, or between

the poles, if the magnet is shaped like a horseshoe, and reenter

the magnet at the S pole or in some texts the opposite. Again, here

we have two errors that should be updated in all textbooks that

teach this very important science to students and new scientists.

The first of the two errors is the belief that the energies always

leave one pole of the magnet and travel to the other pole. This we

have researched with practical and scientific studies, and the find¬

ings are that the energies leave the S pole and then flow to the

N pole, the gravity and/or magnetic vortexes (circling cable-form¬

like energies) actually flow from the S pole to the N pole showing

energies, waves of gravity held motion, in that direction. However,

the vortex (circles) of magnet energies travel in both directions,

S to N and N to S. This we proved in the magnetic flux (lines of

force energies) as seen in the movement of the hydrogen bubbles

in the two poles magnetic field movements. This test consists of

a microscope slide, a few drops of diluted sulfuric acid, a medium

power microscope, placing a magnet at each end of the slide, the

diluted acid touching each magnet. Microscopic viewing after a

few minutes allows one to see the energies of the two pole effects

and the two directional movements of the sulfuric acid hydrogen

bubble movement. A similar test using whole blood shows the spin

of the red blood cells when placed in the field of a magnet. Taking

whole blood, then spinning off the fluids and plasmas, leaving the

red cells, presents a very remarkable piece of evidence as to the

8

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

effects of magnetism on life fluids. Take some of the resultant red

blood and place on a microscope slide in a good powered micro¬

scope, focus, bring up under the slide’s bottom one end of a mag¬

net. Note that the red blood cells all spin around the same direction.

This is polarization of the red blood cells. Reversing the pole of

the magnet to the blood sample reverses the spin or polarity.

We will show later how this enforces the red blood cells as

to the electrical cell effect and the' organic iron complex effects of

the blood in part.

The first error in present teachings in part, of magnetism, as we

have presented, is the failure to teach the opposite direction of

flow of these energies.

The second error that is taught is that magnetic energies flow

in a semicircle from one pole to the other pole. Again, this is in¬

correct. The simple test to support this incorrectness is to take a

three- to six-inch bar or cylinder magnet and place it on a wood

or plastic table, any base material that is not magnetic. Next, take

a straight pin and, holding it between the thumb and index finger,

place it at one end of the magnet. Moving the pin very slowly the

length of the magnet, maintaining the slight upward pull, yet keep¬

ing the pin in contact with the magnet, at the exact or almost exact

center the length of the magnet you will find one fractional place

at that center where there is NO PULL. Therefore, no measurable

amount of magnetism exists at the direct center of the magnet. This

experiment will apply to all magnets in principle. In fact, the mag¬

netic vortex (cables of circular energies) when leaving the S pole

of the magnet travels to the center of the magnet and changes its

degree of rotation by 180 degrees, then spinning in the opposite

direction, continues on to reenter the magnet at the N pole. When

the energy leaves the S pole of the magnet its vortex is spinning

to the right. On reaching the center of the magnet the energy

changes from positive to negative by a phase change of 180 de¬

grees. Then, at this point, the vortex is spinning to the left. The

left-hand spin is negative in energy to the right-hand spin which is

positive. The lines of force are then divided into two different pole

energies, north being negative in respect to the south being positive

in electrical biological and potential force effects.

This completes the two errors in the presentation of magnetic

principles as now taught in textbooks and many accredited schools

Understanding Magnetism 9

and still followed by many scientists and research persons in the

scientific world.

A further discovery from many experiments and years of re¬

search is that each pole of a magnet has a completely different

effect to all subject material to which they are applied or come

into contact. The common belief that the energies flowing between

the two poles of any magnet are homogeneous, the same, is totally

in error and is incorrect and has led for hundreds of years, if not

thousands of years, many researchers, scientists in the wrong di¬

rection as to effects they obtain when exposing living systems,

biological matter, to the fields of a magnet or magnetism. The pres¬

ent books written in Russia, Japan, and by members of colleges,

universities and government-sponsored biological researchers fail

to accept these discoveries as fact. Not until the birth of the Space

Age have government scientists been able to test, see, deep in

space, that the division of magnetic energies exist. In the Albert

Roy Davis Scientific Laboratory the correct divisions of a magnet’s

energy were first discovered in 1936. This discovery, and many of

the applications from this discovery, were brought to the attention

of scientists in the government and to a number of other well-

known and respected members of the scientific community. The

results have not been satisfactory to the advancement of this sci¬

ence. There is ample indication that government-sponsored scien¬

tific investigations as well as the scientific community in general

do not inquire in the proper manner into new developments of

magnetism. Scientists suffer with the fault of many in that they

find it difficult to leam new principles and accept changes that are

contrary to their textbook teachings and their accepted theories

in the research of magnetism and related sciences.

However, if we consider the thousands of years acupuncture has

been in use serving the people of Asia, and mainly China, then we

might see how new concepts not native to certain countries and

serious investigation into these new concepts may have a very slow

start regardless of their importance to man.

Biomagnetics is in this class of delayed action on the part of

all nations not now investigating its potentials to serve all mankind

with new and important discoveries. The Russian scientists have

since World War II made outstanding and highly progressive steps

in the new and unknown applications of magnetism in all of its

10 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

many fields and possibilities. Yet scientists in America and other

countries are slow even to consider serious research into magnetism.

We hope this situation will soon change.

There are many forms and types of magnets. There are besides

the standard metal magnet many forms of electromagnets. These

are made of soft iron cores with many windings of wire over the

core, each layer or winding insulated from the other. These electro¬

magnets are considered just that and nothing more. However,

electromagnets differ greatly from the solid state magnets, metal

magnets or composition magnets in that they have a different effect,

as has been shown in many research applications using both types

of the same power in gauss units of magnetic energy.

In this book we shall endeavor to show these differences and

explain in part the effect phase differences as well as the biological

effect differences. We plan to show in a later book the more ad¬

vanced discoveries concerning research findings from imposing

other energies on the existing magnet poles in securing greater

effects to many forms and types of living systems. Further writings

are also planned concerning the more advanced effects on chemicals

by the use of certain magnetic field forces. Here we point out that

there must be a better scientific climate toward magnetism than

now exists for these detailed discoveries to take their proper place

in science. In general, laboratory findings show that chemicals

change weight under certain magnetic field forces. The gravitational

pull is altered, therefore, the weight of material, fluids, airs, and

gases. This laboratory work also encompasses the tissues, chemicals,

and fluids of the human and animal systems. Part of these findings

are discussed in a later chapter.

There have been some noteworthy and rapid breakthroughs

recently in magnetics and biomagnetics. An example is the man¬

ufacture of electricity without generators or turbines. Other im¬

portant work has been accomplished in medicine, chemistry and

physics. The discoveries presented in this book should assist the

scientific-minded person, the student, doctors, scientists, research¬

ers, toward a new and greater understanding of how to better

develop this great and important science, and to this end we

intend to open our research files and release certain new data

that is in need for further research and development into the true

nature of magnetism and what it can offer for mankind.

Chapter Two

DISCOVERIES MADE

INTERNATIONALLY SUPPORTING

INTERNATIONAL WORK

IN RIOMAGNETICS

T oday no research of importance “should be undertaken”

in an isolated atmosphere, because, to avoid duplication of work,

contact should be maintained with the rest of the world and one’s

country as to the many fields of research and developments under¬

taken by scientists and investigators. It is for this reason we advise

you of the research work and progress that we are aware of in

magnetics and that is now being carried on in many nations of the

world today. We base these statements in part on direct visits

from many scientists from many nations who have come to our

laboratory to see and study our research into biomagnetics that we

have been conducting for many years.

Our findings as to present-day research are based on actual and

factual discussions with men and women from many nations and

their understanding and knowledge of the work being carried on

throughout the world today. We have also carefully investigated

papers, books, manuscripts, scientific publications, releases, made

by other nations through their own publications. This is also re¬

search, and it continues to take a great deal of time to check into

all of these reports. However, the results have furnished infor¬

mation that has saved much duplication of effort and research in

our work. It gives a better understanding also how far advanced

we are in certain fields of development in this science. In this re¬

gard, the results of these studies have been very rewarding.

Should you ask, “Who is leading in biomagnetic research, what

scientific group or scientist, what nation?” Based on the information

released by publications (1960-1974) reflecting the research work-

11

12 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

ing being carried on in the Soviet Union, we find that Russia and

its scientists have since World War II made remarkable progress

in this work. The United States has, through its advanced space

program, made a number of important discoveries and develop¬

ments dealing with low fields of magnetism on man’s environmental

biosphere (biological atmosphere) in space, weightlessness, and

the moon’s low gravity and magnetic fields. Still little is made known

by the U.S. on any work in the research toward aiding mankind by

the use and applications of magnetic energies to man’s biological

system.

England for a number of years has lowered the barriers to re¬

search in many fields of medical work. Research scientists in Eng¬

land have also done some work in magnetics but not as much as

one would have hoped considering the importance of this science.

In France, the research work is also lagging in keeping up even to

a small degree with the rest of the nations now investigating and

researching magnetic energies. However, Russian and French scien¬

tists have now started to exchange information and work together

in some fields we are aware of and these are in marine biology, the

physical sciences, and biological sciences in general. The Russian

and French marine and oceanographic scientists have discovered

that fish have a built-in magnetic computer allowing them to orient

themselves to the earth’s magnetic poles and the earth’s magnetic

fields. This is a navigational system of nature superior to many of

our technology achievements.

One interesting experiment the Russian-French team undertook

was to transport a number of fish from France to Kaliningrad, Rus¬

sia, a considerable distance from France. They were placed into a

path-finding aquarium system. It was shown that the fish oriented

themselves and would swim in directions to avoid the earth’s mag¬

netic meridian (0 to 180 degrees). Birds also have a magnetic

compass and use it for their navigational flight systems and di¬

rections in storms, bad weather, as well as normal flying. Birds,

crickets, bugs, beetles, it was found, when landing after flight

movements, come in for a landing from either a north-south direc¬

tion or east-west orientation, using the north-south direction of the

earth’s magnetic pole directional flow path as a guide.

Scientists from France, Germany, England and the United

States, and other countries are aware of the noticeable affects of

International Work in Biomagnetics 13

attaching a magnet, as an example, to a bird where the navigational

system refuses to work. Many papers by world scientists have been

written on close relative subjects to magnetism so we cannot give

all the credit here to the Russian or French scientists. It is regretta¬

ble that many leading French scientists have refused to adopt

magnetic effects to aid mankind since in their own country some

very excellent work has been conducted in biomagnetics and mag¬

netic sciences on biological systems, including man, that show it

can be used as a great new tool in the field of applied medicine

and the medical arts and sciences.

Japan’s scientists and investigators fail to undertake serious and

practical research into the effects to the biological system. Their

work is so divided between the varied sciences as to make it diffi¬

cult to understand what direction they are taking other than com¬

mercial developments.

We have had visitors from Japan, medical doctors and scientists,

interested in learning more about magnetic effects who consider

their own work the most important. This is natural, yet it fails to

show the proper interest for one of the greatest sciences man has

yet to uncover. In northern Japan, manufacturing and commercial

interests have designed, developed, manufactured and presented

to the world market instruments for the treatment of many of man’s

complaints. In investigating these instruments we find that little

practical knowledge, medically or scientifically, is understood. This

is not the kind of instrumental designing and offerings to the public

that should be made without proper and detailed knowledge of the

biological and medical scientific findings, as we have discovered in

our laboratories.

However, we must remember that today the understandings in

all respects as to what is, how does, acupuncture work still must

be investigated to present the answers. Why and how scientifically

does acupuncture work? The explanations are not complete. Com¬

paring with many drugs that have been used for years in the world,

no governmental agency can tell you how they actually work.

While this is far from the proper approach scientifically, these mat¬

ters now stand for all to question. How do they work? One of the

reasons this book was written was to present certain facts that are

new facts. Why and how does biomagnetics work? To aid in clear¬

ing misunderstandings, lack of basic knowledge, and further to

14 Magnetism, and Its Effects on the Living System

introduce new discoveries that may further explain. We hope to

show why biomagnetics will open the doors to new approaches in

all fields of medicine and sciences.

In Canada we find that private research is outstanding in many

fields of research. However, government is still not very interested.

They are still to understand what this science holds for all man¬

kind. At this time, through the efforts of a number of fine scientists,

two universities have undertaken to research biomagnetics and its

effects on man. We have had visitors from Canada, scientists who

have made outstanding discoveries in biomagnetics, who cannot

reach the government scientific community. This is equally true

at this time in the United States. Many of our own scientists cannot

get through the old and well-worn bureaucratic departmental road¬

blocks to show, explain, present many new sciences. This is not

a new story as history records this very clearly throughout the ages

of man’s struggles to advance the arts and sciences.

A number of Israeli scientists have communicated with us and

they show a great interest in biomagnetic research and develop¬

ment, so there is hope here that some new discoveries may be forth¬

coming soon. We would like to see other nations in Asia and near

Israel take an interest and get more involved in the investigation

of this science.

India shows promise; yet, again, independent scientists are do-

ing the greater part of the research work. The science of biomag¬

netics was introduced to India’s clinics about 15 years ago by the

Albert Roy Davis Research Laboratory and much good has resulted

from dedication to the understanding of this science in India. How¬

ever, little attention is given to this science by government agencies

or government scientists or the nation’s leaders. Again, we have

found in all cases, the governments of all nations, except Russia,

depend on their senior scientists delegated the responsibility of

investigating new sciences. Scientists need to be educated to under¬

stand and accept new concepts, leaving the old and outdated modes

behind them. This is not now the case.

With the assistance of Dr. A. K. Bhattacharya of West Bengal,

India, we undertook to introduce biomagnetics as a humane sci¬

ence. After a number of years of work we co-authored and published

a book in India entitled Magnets and Magnetic Fields, which was

directed to biological use and understandings. Since publication

15

International Work in Biomagnetics

in 1970, it has been presented in many nations of the world. How¬

ever, its contents present limited concepts that need updating and

should no longer be used as any degree of effective present-day

research.

On May 7, 1971, we received a letter from the Prime Minister

of India, Indira Gandhi, in reply to a personal letter advising her

of the magnetic materials, information, direction and assistance to

India over a number of years and with the assistance of Dr. Bhatta-

charya how we had introduced the research of biomagnetics as a

humane science into that nation with the resultant publishing of

the book Magnets and Magnetic Fields. Prime Minister Gandhi’s

reply was one of great interest and she pointed out the future was

in the hands of the scientists and politicans of the world and the

responsibilities for future generations in their hands to use wisely.

A copy of the book mentioned above was requested by the

Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C., where it is now on

display.

German scientists engaged in private research into biomagnetics

are the only ones active in this field in Germany. Germany has al¬

ways been a leader in new scientific developments; however, like

other nations, Germans have lost their eagerness to explore the

unknown. We have had visits from and active communications

with German scientists. Nevertheless, they are far behind in this

research program.

Again, we find no government interest in biomagnetics in South

America, yet more work has been done in these countries by pri¬

vate researchers than in many Asian and European countries. One

researcher in Puerto Rico has gained much attention for his ded¬

ication to this science, Dr. Ralph U. Sierra.

A number of South American scientists and an American in

South America have done outstanding research in presenting the

science of magnetic effects to their respective nations. Dr. Ralph

U. Sierra of Rio Piedras, Puerto Rico, has accomplished much work

and great interest in that country, as has Dr. Victor Beasley, the

American in South America. These men have shown outstanding

understanding of the biological effects of magnetic fields to the

living systems and have devoted much time and effort to promote

interest in this science.

There is no doubt that other work in the field of research and

16 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

development is being carried on in other small and large countries

today, yet it is for the great part unknown. We will direct our

attention to that work and research now in progress in those na¬

tions allowing some of their work and research to be published.

Electromagnetic Fields and Life written by Dr. A. S. Pressman

of Moscow, Russia, is one of 30 books written by Dr. Pressman

covering a wide range of well-conducted research reports into mag¬

netic, electromagnetic effects of magnetic waves, and encompass¬

ing many phases of electronics in medicine. His work covers and

includes microwave effects to the biological system and hygenic

evaluation of high frequency electromagnetic fields. However, no

information on the effects of the two separate poles of a solid state

magnet energy source can be found. Also, we find no reference to

the splitting of the magnetic poles at the equatorial axis of the

magnet and/or the independent pole effects. Therefore, it is our

belief that this discovery made in 1936 by Dr. Albert Roy Davis

is not known nor has it been investigated by Russia or any other

nations of the world that are investigating biomagnetics. This dis¬

covery we made and have worked with for numerous years will,

we feel strongly, promote the advancement of magnetic research

and developments in medicine, chemistry, and biological physics,

as well as applied physics of magnetism. As we have previously

stated, the accepted concepts and laws of magnetism are that both

poles of any magnet or electromagnet are homogeneous. This we

will establish in this book is in error. This basic discovery should

be introduced into the physics of magnetism as a new law, prin¬

ciple, and concept, with approaches of better applications and

understandings of magnetism and its effects on all modes, systems,

developments, and also its great value and importance in the fields

of medicine and biological sciences.

As we continue to review the work that has been done and is

now underway in the Soviet Union, let us remember that all com¬

ments made, tests, experiments disclosed, treatment of the human

system, animals, etc., are conducted with both poles of an applied

magnet, as they do not have the information we will release herein

as to the two separate pole effects. They assume, as do most scien¬

tists, that the two poles of the magnet produce a homogeneous

energy.

In certain Soviet releases references are made to very important

17

International Work in Biomagnetics

research conducted in 1948 when Red Army specialists used mag¬

nets to reduce and relieve advanced leg pains after and/or before

amputation. During World War II Russian doctors, also reported

in some of the Soviet papers, used magnets to relieve pains from

wounds suffered during engagements on the battlefields. They also

refer to the application of powerful solid state metal magnets to

speed and/or reduce the length of time for healing of wounds that

nature normally requires to make such recoveries.

Canadian doctors during the world conferences on electrosleep

and electroanesthesia held in Bulgaria, September, 1972, read their

papers on the use of magnetic energies to speed wound healing.

This then allied the prior work by the Russian scientists.

Russian scientists have heretofore established the term “mag¬

netobiology” as a new and important practical working science.

The Russian scientists have developed a form of magnet that can

be attached to the wrists of patients, again using poles equal in

strength and opposite in potential. At the Rostov Medical Institute

these magnetic wrist-connected magnets are used to assist in the

treatment of certain types of heart and nerve diseases.

The Russian scientists continue to report that when a magnet’s

fields are applied to blood there is a rise in the effects as to co¬

agulation and have also noted profound effects and changes during

blood transfusions.

At the Leningrad Military Medical Academy they have shown

effects to water when water is subjected to magnetic fields. They

further show in the application of a magnet’s poles to a human sys¬

tem the lowering of certain types of high blood pressure conditions.

In several Soviet press releases it has been stated in no uncertain

terms that aspects of their research findings are classified due to

military use. No doubt they have discovered that biomagnetics

and magnetobiology can be directed to new concepts in military

applications. The terms biomagnetics and magnetobiology mean

the same yet are described in Russian works as semi-universal terms

—words that have the same reference meanings. The Soviet scien¬

tists are at this time very interested in low magnetic field effects

as to possibly making some outstanding discoveries in the probes

now underway of Mars and Venus. It is interesting to note that

where the biological subject is in an environmental attitude of low

magnetic field for extended periods of time the results can be

18 Magnetism, and Its Effects on the Living System

deadly. There are midranges of magnetic fields of certain strengths

where the best or worst effects can be found. Above or below these

strengths there could be little or no effects in evidence to the living

system.

There is no question in anyone’s mind that the Russian research

and developments are outstanding in every respect. During 1972-

1973 the Soviets sold to American industrial manufacturers patent

rights, leases, in advance use of a magnetic magnet’s energies as a

better way to produce aluminum finished stock. Their work in the

development of hydro-magneto-dynamics (HMD) again presented

their advanced concepts and applications of the two poles of a

magnet’s energies. HMD is the passing of a super hot gas, in the

beginning the gas was seeded with cesium, through the two poles

of a magnet. After leaving the magnet’s fields it forms D.C. elec¬

tricity and is thus collected on two electrodes, one a positive col¬

lector and the other a negative collector. We then have the gen¬

eration of electricity without boilers, turbines, or generators. At

this time American transformer manufacturers are building the lar¬

gest electromagnet ever made for a giant HMD generator which

will surpass several large city power generator systems. This is but

another development in the many new discoveries in magnetism.

Our laboratory has a number of new developments that offer great

promise in a number of fields. Magnetism is acting to slowly change

man’s concepts for designing power systems and also new concepts

in all fields of industrial, chemical, and biological uses and appli¬

cations all revolutionary to accepted scientific understandings.

It would require several volumes to properly cover the research

work and developments of all the known discoveries of the past 10

years. Russian scientists have and are making great strides in the

research and development of magnetics.

At this time certain Japanese firms are manufacturing a mag¬

netic dual pole, magnet bracelet, and making claims we cannot,

nor can the U.S. government investigative agencies accept, as little

or no practical medical evidence is offered that would technically

support such claims. However, we do know that when magnetic

energies are correctly applied to any part of the body there is a

reaction and this reaction may be used, if properly applied, for

the aid and/or relief of many animals and possibly human disorders.

The work in our laboratory has been confined to all types and kinds

19

International Work in Biomagnetics

of large and small animals and bacteria strains. As a result we can

refer to reactions of blood-circulating animals, those that are sim¬

ilar to the human system, and make direct comparisons as to pos¬

sible effects that may result when applied to man. Many of our

findings as a result of animal research have been duplicated by

doctors and scientists in other countries with outstanding and re¬

warding results.

We have had lengthy conferences with a number of Canadian

scientists and doctors engaged in new work in biomagnetics. One

is Dr. Harold Brownlee located near Toronto, who has researched

with us and in the development of a system for the detection of

human and animal ills and diseases. This is founded on the reaction

of the affected organ or segment of the body to the field of an

applied magnet unit. The fields that are designed and applied then

act to cause a physical body response to indicate the area where

the condition exists. Its possibilities as an analytical tool are very

promising. We understand several universities in Canada are soon

to test Dr. Brownlee’s and our development on human subjects.

Canadians engaged in biomagnetic research are increasing each

month and year. Another dedicated researcher is Dr. Bessie O’

Connor, who is undertaking to study magnetic effects on and to

agriculture and biological tracings by magnetic fields as to genetic

effects.

Many doctors and scientists connected with colleges and uni¬

versities in Canada are working to improve seed germination by

exposing seeds to magnetic fields. The results indicate a 10 percent

or better plant yield of its products on harvesting. Seeds when ex¬

posed to a magnet’s energies can and do show remarkable effects

of this energy. We will in forthcoming chapters describe from our

research and findings how and why this stimulation takes place,

how it can be more effectively used and how improved results may

be obtained in applying our discovery of the singular use of each

pole of a magnet rather than the use of both poles at the same

time as is now the procedure used in these types of experiments.

The living system, regardless of type, land, size, or nature, is

subject to the added life stimulation seeds are, and comparisons

will be made later in this book. There is a limiting and controlling

energy application also.

We have only briefly presented work now underway in the bio-

20 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

magnetic sciences in many nations of the world. We will discuss

some of the countries we have not covered in later chapters. We

will present our research, compare it to work being done by other

countries, and show where advancements can be made by the use

of what we have researched and discovered in the same fields.

While we have not named all the doctors, scientists or countries

engaged in this work, we stand ready to acknowledge any and all

persons, their work and their country’s efforts in this field of scien¬

tific research.

Chapter Three

MEASUREMENT OF THE EARTH’S

MAGNETIC FIELD—THE OLD AND

THE NEW CONCEPTS—THE

DIVISION OF THE POLES

O n page 22 we present a grapliic series of drawings to

show what is found in textbooks for instruction of students in the

accepted theory of magnetic energies as they surround the earth

and also a magnet. This is the popular belief concerning the move¬

ment of magnetic energy around the earth and also a magnet.

On page 22 we present the updated concepts from our findings,

initially made in 1936 as to the division of the two poles’ energies,

each separated one from the other and each having a different po¬

tential, value, in electronic magnetic currents. The south (S) pole

is positive in respect to the north (N) pole, which is negative.

Referring to page 22 you will see that in the use of a straight

bar or long cylinder magnet, the two poles can be used each sepa¬

rated one from the other, and only the pole you wish to work with

is then applied for exposure of any system you may wish to apply

it to.

The conventional horseshoe magnet is not suitable for use in

the application of only the one pole’s energies as the poles of the

horseshoe magnet are too close together to allow isolation to the

degree we can have, by the use of the straight type of magnet.

The strength of the earth’s magnetism in gauss is now only

approximately one-half of one gauss, a very low magnetic field

when we compare what the earth’s magnetic strength was many

millions of years ago in relation to the core drilling results from the

sides of the great volcanoes and the atomic dating employed. The

earth’s magnetism has been many hundred times higher than its

present strength.

21

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

Earth’s Magnetic Field

•THE OLD CONCEPTS-

-THE NEW CONCEPTS-

IV ✓

•THE NEW-

The Old Concepts of the

Laws of Magnetism

The New Concepts of the

23

Measurement of the Earth’s Magnetic Field

The direction of flow of the field of magnetism that surrounds

the earth is shown on the drawing of the world, page 22, as traveling

from the S pole to the N pole; see arrows indicating direction of

flow. Many textbooks refer to the direction of flow from the two

poles as from the N pole to the S pole. However, this is incorrect,

and this new discovery can be supported by laboratory and space

findings in the last few years.

The drawing shows a bar magnet having the conventional two poles. In the direct

center of the magnet is the Bloch Wall, or the point of division of the circling

vortex (spin) of electronic magnetic energies. The small arrows shown on the bar

magnet indicate the direction of the spin of each pole’s energies. The center of the

magnet shows the phase change of the spins.

Point of Zero Magnetism The Positive Energy Pole

Known as the Bloch Wall South Pole Magnetism

The north pole or negative spin is counterclockwise, or to the left. The south pole

or positive spin is clockwise, or to the right. With the use of a straight bar or

cylinder magnet we may then have access to the two separate forms of energy for

our application of just that energy form and/or type. The illustration and discussion

on this page is an outline of our initial 1936 discovery.

The biological effects of the application of the poles to bio¬

logical fluids in a living system also show the path of travel to be

from the S pole to the N pole, and this also includes all magnets

as we have presented in the drawings herein. We have super¬

imposed a magnet over the drawing of the earth on page 22 to

show this flow. For the correct division of the poles refer to the

drawing on page 22.

As mentioned earlier, the energies leaving each pole of a mag¬

net form a line of almost straight energies that appear to travel

great distances from the end of the magnet and appear then not

to return to the magnet. This we believe accounts for the loss of

24

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

energy of any magnet that does not have a keeper. A keeper is a

simple shorting bar of steel or iron placed across the poles of the

magnet to keep the magnet’s energies circling within the structure

of the magnet and avoid the loss that would happen should we

not apply the keeper bar. The lines of force described as straight

lines of force that leave the end of the magnet and do not return

to the magnet end in no way alter the circling force field that re¬

mains the main attracting and repelling forces as presented in the

drawings on page 22.

We are closing Chapter Three with the discussion and drawings

presented only to better explain magnetism, the rate of flow di¬

rection, the two poles, the division of the two poles, and the po¬

tential force as to the electronic charge potential of each pole. This

allows a reference to scientists who may not have continued into

the physics of electrodynamics. Students and instructors should at¬

tempt to upgrade and correct any older text materials that diff er

from today’s concepts and understandings of the basic science of

magnetism as presented herein.

Chapter Four

THE EFFECTS! OF THE TWO POLES

ON THE LIVING SYSTEM—THE

DISCOVERY OF THE TWO EFFECTS

TT lie primary discovery that the two poles of a magnet act

to change and alter biological systems in two completely different

ways was made by Dr. Albert Roy Davis in 1936. This discovery

was quite by accident, and the noticeable effects on two cardboard

containers of earthworms led to undertaking a serious study of this

change to the biological systems.

The accidental discovery was made in a small home laboratory

built upon leaving grade school and prior to attending the Uni¬

versity of Florida. A large horseshoe magnet was on a wooden

work bench near work on a small electronic oscillator used in the

old superhetrodyne radio circuits in early days of radio. The after¬

noon had been planned for fishing, and three cardboard containers

of earthworms were on the workbench. The earthworms in the

cardboard containers were in adequate amounts of black rich soil,

with sufficient moisture, and air holes had been punched in the

containers. The covers of the containers were securely fastened to

prevent escape. In the process of moving equipment on the work¬

bench the containers of worms were placed unintentionally with

one container resting against each end, or pole, of the magnet, and

the otlier was a distance from the magnet. As the day progressed

additional laboratory work cancelled the fishing plans. The earth¬

worms and containers near the magnet were left in their positions

for the remainder of that day and night until the following morn¬

ing. The next morning there was an unexpected occurrence. The

worms had eaten through one side of the container that was rest¬

ing against the S pole of the horseshoe magnet, while the other

containers were in no way changed.

25

26

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

The remaining earthworms were placed in fresh containers,

again in the same positions in front of the magnet’s poles—leaving

one container away from the magnet. It was anticipated that if the

poles of the magnet had any significance to the worms in the one

container next to the S pole eating their way to escape, the result

would repeat itself in another day. This did not occur. The experi¬

ment was forgotten for other laboratory work until three days later.

At that time it was discovered that the earthworms next to the S

pole had again eaten their way out of their cardboard container.

They were lying on the workbench, had lost their moisture, and

were dead. The phylum annelida, earthworm species, opened the

door for further investigation and research.

Prior to this time there had been research in the laboratory to

determine if electromagnetic energies had any effects on small

animals, with no promising results until the earthworm incident.

In reproducing this experiment today it is noted that con¬

tainers for earthworms are of heavy wax construction or other

sturdier material than available in 1936. Experiments with the usual

wax container on today’s market take seven to ten days for the

earthworms to chew their way to escape from the S pole energy

field of a large horseshoe magnet.

By further experiments of trial and error it was discovered that

the size and strength of the magnet and the temperature of the

room surroundings contributed to the length of time for the escape

of the earthworms.

For subsequent experiments the project of the magnetic worms

received containers marked N for north pole, S for south pole and

C for control. The control container was always placed out of reach

of the magnetic fields of a magnet. Fresh soil and a few drops of

water for moisture were added in each experiment and also a few

dried leaves for food in each container.

Using heavier cardboard containers to prevent the earthworms

escaping, the following results were after a twelve-day period of

exposure to the magnets.

In the S pole container the earthworms were still present and

alive, though they had been very busy chewing on the inside of

their container. They were approximately one-third larger, longer

in length and larger in diameter and were extremely active. Evi¬

dence of young worms in the soil showed a number of babies had

been bom.

27

The Effects of the Two Poles

The N pole container produced different results as many of the

earthworms had died and those still alive were thin and showed

little activity.

The control container showed no difference one way or the

other.

The room temperature of this experiment was approximately

65 to 70 degrees Fahrenheit, as the earlier first incident occurred

in a room temperature of 80 to 85 degrees Fahrenheit.

The magnetic worm project was continued and many experi¬

ments conducted for accuracy in results, always with the unde¬

niable conclusion that the separate poles of a magnet had a different

yet deciding effect on the subject. Investigations were broadened

into other living systems, and laboratory records are available al¬

though too extensive for this accounting on the different effects on

other living systems. The discoveries enlarged since the year 1936

are in many instances classified, and other developments are in

further research before their publication. The classified material and

continuing research show much optimism for great advancements

in all fields of scientific investigation into the better understanding

of the behavior and nature of animals and man and the world in

which they live.

Our principal laboratory in Florida and our associated labora¬

tories with other scientists under our direction have continued to

release new discoveries in magnetism for the scientific community.

Many of our discoveries considered nonsense years ago are now

in use throughout science, yet there still remains in the scientific

community a lack of appreciation as well as a lack of understanding

of the true nature of magnetism and its application in our present

world, both in health and industry.

As the magnetic worm project continued there was no doubt

as to the totally different results obtained by placing the worms in

the different pole fields of a magnet. Each test became more techni¬

cal and time was lengthened or shortened. The strength of the first

magnet used was 3000 gauss. The close relationship of each pole in

a horseshoe magnet was not conducive to more accurate results in

distinguishing the different effects by the S or N pole energies.

Regardless of this, the experiments were significant.

In later research long, straight bar or cylinder magnets were

used and this allowed a far greater separation of the poles and far

more effective results. This type of magnet is now used in all tests

28 Magnetism, and Its Effects on the Living System

and experiments in our laboratory research. Chapter One of this

book describes the energy separation of the poles in various shaped

magnets and presents certain graphic differences.

During the past few years scientific publications have announced

a number of findings related to magnetic fields made by U.S. scien¬

tists. One such article in part disclosed that Drs. A. A. Boe and

D. K. Salunkhe, two horticulturists from Utah State University,

placed green tomatoes inside a magnetic field and discovered that

they ripened four to six times faster when exposed to the S pole

of a magnet or the open end of a horseshoe magnet. No mention

was given to the effects or work done when applying the tomatoes

to the N pole of the magnet since present accepted concepts of

magnetic fields still rely on homogeneous, the same, which is in¬

correct.

THE CHEMICAL AND BIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS OF

THE TREATED WORMS AND THE RESULTS

The study of the biological effects to the earthworms of the

two pole magnetic fields was supported by the fact that the protein

that makes up about 90 percent of the earthworm’s system contains

many types of amino acids. This indicated a sharp rise in the

amounts available and also a reaction that caused unavailable pro¬

teins to become more available to tire earthworm’s system. The

total results of the above indicated that acceptance of almost

a total protein exchange was taking place in the subject’s system.

These protein amino acids were an indicator of a form of life

exchange encouragement to the worm’s system, body, and physical

development.

The S pole’s magnetic energies had affected the sharp rise in

protein amino acid development and active transfer to physical

strength and developments. The N pole treated worms presented

the findings that, unlike the S pole worms, the N pole worms were

acted upon to reduce food intake, lessening the protein amino acid

exchange, closing digestion of the lowered food intake, and this

affecting a lower exchange of amino acids to physical strength

and/or development.

The control worms, untreated, presented the same normal pro¬

tein amounts much higher than the N pole’s reduction effect and

29

The Effects of the Two Poles

much lower than the S pole’s treated worms. This index curve

continued to present itself with the power energy curve of the

limits of high to low gauss strength of the applied magnets and

their pole energies. Where the low effects were sought, slow, longer

time of treatment was necessary. Gauss of 100 to 300 were found

to be the lowest effective energies or strengths preferable. This

would enable a reproduction of the experiments with the same

results time after time supporting this as a scientific discovery.

The highest level of energy found to be effective was 3,500 to

4,500 gauss. Above this the effects changed and even slowed in the

effects that occurred. These experiments and further research

showed a curve of effective strength that will then result in the

highest degree of changes to any and all living systems placed

under or in these separate fields.

It should be noted also that the waste matter discharged from

the bodies of the worms contained a sharp rise in oils and fats and

certain proteins as a result of the S pole or positive energy being

applied in the prescribed manner to the subject.

When the magnetic energy was lower than 100 gauss, at levels

lower than the earth’s present one-half gauss of magnetic fields, very

harmful effects were noted on the subject.

THE MAGNETIC EXPOSURE OF SEEDS

Hundreds of experiments were conducted at our Florida labo¬

ratory located in Green Cove Springs on the magnetic exposure of

seeds. The results here proved to be another outstanding series of

biological discoveries. The seeds treated before planting responded

as did the earthworms—larger plants as a result of the seeds’ ex¬

posure to the S pole and smaller plants as a result of exposure to

the N pole of a magnet. The control, untreated, seeds acted as a

guide and reference as to the opposite effects that were the results

of these experimental magnetic treated seeds’ growth and develop¬

ment.

The biological and analytical testing of the seeds at various

stages of germination and development plus plant growth and de¬

velopment stages allowed even a greater understanding of such

development results, such as the use of oxygen results and other

results.

30

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

Exposing the seeds to the magnetic fields of the S pole and the

N pole from eight to ten hours, to 80 to 100 to 280 hours, gave a

great range of effects. Shorter periods of exposure from one to four

hours did not effect the changes as much as the longer time periods.

Quick exposure from several seconds to several minutes to one hour

prompted certain improvements when the seeds were exposed to

the S pole. Here we found the same reduction in strength and en-

ergy when the seeds were exposed to the N pole. The overall curve

of graphed effects does not differ too greatly when the same time

and strength are used to expose the seeds to either pole’s energies.

The effects in each and every case follow the same resultant pat¬

tern.

In these experiments the seeds were placed in small envelopes,

the exact size of the pole's diameter, with the seeds lying flat in

the envelope. The envelope was taped on the end of that pole of

the magnet, marked and so identified. The control envelopes were

kept in another room, far removed from any possible effects of

the magnet’s energies.

There was found to be marked differences when one group of

seeds was treated for seven hours and another of the same kind

of seeds for eight hours. Length of exposure is of the utmost

importance in treating each type and kind of seeds. Radish seeds

were selected for the first group of experiments, round, red types,

as radishes germinate and produce a product quicker than other

types of seeds that produce plant and vegetable products.

At various stages of germination, growth and development,

laboratory conditions as to atmospheric and other environmental

controls were carefully watched to insure an accurate result that

could be reproducible subject to certain planned and controlled

experiments.

INCREASE OF IMPORTANT PROTEIN, SUGARS,

OILS, FOUND AFTER PLANT SEED DEVELOPMENT

WHEN SEEDS ARE EXPOSED TO THE SOUTH

POLE MAGNETIC ENERGIES

Laboratory analysis revealed the following. When exposed to

the S pole energies the seed plant development to the end product,

vegetable, fruit, root plants such as sugar beets, and all others

31

The Effects of the Two Poles

planted, checked, replanted and harvested many times indicated

that the plants produced remarkable results from the positive

energies exposure of the seeds. The S pole energies tended to

show rise in temperatures. Oxygen was liberated at over normal

amounts. Intake of carbon dioxide was increased. Acceptance of

organic matter, fertilizers, was increased and root products were

greater. The length and size of roots were longer, having also

a wide range in growth under the earth, and cycles where growth

was speeded then slowed, unlike other untreated plants used as

controls of the same types and kinds.

Sugar beets yielded more sugars. Peanuts presented outstanding

increases in oils. Protein in the amino acids indicated increases as

to the plant type and kind over normal amounts shown in hundreds

of seed treatments, plantings and harvestings.

The opposite results occurred when the N pole energies were

used to treat the seeds. This presented stunted growth patterns,

products less than normal in all activities in opposition to the

effects of the S pole energies.

Therefore, we have two types of energy—one that arrests life,

growth and/or development, and one that increases life, growth

and development.

The S pole or positive energies effects on the seeds show there

are advanced and quite noticeable cycles to the growth and

development of the plants. On planting there is a rapid germination

period, then a period of rest where no development is indicated.

On checking the root development there is a marked rise in root

production. The top or surface development of the plants slows,

then speeds up in very remarkable advance stages, not at all like

seeds not treated or during their alternate periods of cycles in

their development. Here we find another change over the norm

of plant growth and development.

Again we find a similar effect from the two pole effects as

seeds radiated within the two pole’s energies. The product yield

depends on the time and environmental surroundings of the plants

during growth and development. The outstanding fact in research

of tomatoes indicates that we could produce a tomato with less

acid which as a result could be eaten by the many people who

cannot eat usual tomatoes due to their high acid content. This

lower acid effect is not due to the lowering of the other vital

32 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

chemical contents of the tomatoes but is a result of a genetic

change of the biochemical development of the tomatoes them¬

selves. The experiments mentioned above were again obtained

with the use of the S pole positive electronic energies only.

The S pole magnetic energies when used to radiate the tomato

seeds produced tomatoes with even higher acid content than the

untreated or control tomatoes. The use of the N pole to the

tomato seeds prior to planting results in a less acid tomato. The

resultant effects of the seeds in a number of cases reverse the

effects one may expect as a result after radiation of either energies

as to plant content, the biochemical constants.

Chapter Five

THE TWO POLE EFFECTS ON

SMALL ANIMALS, SNAKES AND BIRDS

In the introduction of this chapter we would like to present

an outline of one very important experiment where a magnet

became a mother to a group of baby chicks.

We believe this to be an outstanding discovery that deals with

the inborn intelligence of small animals, birds, and in this case

newborn chicks still wet from the egg. The highly inborn sensitivi¬

ties and the psychological reactions proved to be very unexpected

and accidental, yet important and very rewarding series of research

findings.

Moving from earthworms to seeds, laboratory research was

focused upon altering any aspect in the development of small

animals, as this would be further proof of what the two pole

discovery had to offer mankind. Eggs of the normal white leghorn

chicken were chosen. Taking two dozen fertile eggs they were

treated in groups of eight to each group. One group was treated

with the N pole energies, a second group with the S pole

energies, and the untreated group was kept away from the magnetic

fields. All were kept under laboratory environmental controls.

The untreated group were the controls.

For the S pole energies each egg in a group of eight was

placed in front of the S pole of a 2500 gauss magnet, using a

separate magnet for each egg and placing it in front against the

S pole. The eggs were turned every three hours. The same proce¬

dure with the N pole energies was used with the second group of

eight eggs, and the third group of eight eggs was placed well away

from either pole’s energies. Magnets used were straight cylinder

magnets. Temperature dining treatment was steady at 80 degrees

F. Three small electronically controlled incubators were used, one

33

34 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

for each group, to facilitate treatment at the same time under

exactly the same conditions except for exposure or nonexposure to

the pole’s energies.

The incubation period was two or three days sooner than the

normal time with the S pole treated eggs. The N pole treated eggs

were slower to hatch, from one to two days. The greater importance

of this experiment was yet to come; on the removal of the chicks

exposed to the magnetic energies and placing them in suitable

cages, each group in separate cages under the same environmental

conditions, a horseshoe magnet of about 5x6 inches with a pole

distance of 2 'A inches was placed in each cage. Also, a dummy mag¬

net made of wood of the exact same size and painted wtih the same

paint as the real magnet was placed in the cages. The wet chicks

just leaving the eggs were immediately transferred to the cages

containing the magnets. Each cage had water, baby feed, and floors

covered with soft white paper. The chicks in the cage marked S

pole treated, as soon as they were half dry from leaving the eggs,

took turns and one at a time entered between the poles of the real

magnet only. Each chick would remain between the poles of the

real magnet about two minutes, then leave and retire as far as pos¬

sible from the real magnet. Then another chick would enter and

reenact the same process. This continued until each of the chicks

had entered and lain down within the two poles of the real magnet,

rested for two minutes, then left the magnet. Not one went near the

wooden dummy magnet. This was a lesson and a discovery as to the

inborn instinctive intelligence of the baby chicks. This experiment

was repeated many times using eggs of other breeds of chickens.

The reenactment was exactly the same in each case. Their inborn

intelligence acted to attract them to the magnet as a chick would

seek out its natural mother for heat and comfort. This psychological

intelligence did not come from experience or prior training. It was

quite clear that the chick’s natural instinctive reactions sought

out and directed it to a source of strength and comfort. However,

giving strict attention to the time each chick remained in the fields

of the magnet allows us to see that the chick was aware of the

intensity, power, energy of the magnet, and its inborn sense

reacted to time the exposure to the magnet, then leave that energy

source and travel to the farthest point possible within the confines

of the cage. This timed the amount of energy that the chick’s inborn

35

Effects on Small Animals

system told it was enough. These series of experiments were

termed The Magnetic Mother. It was clear the chicks identified the

real magnet’s energies as a comforting, strengthening source much

the way they would seek out and stay within the protection, warmth,

and energy provided by their natural mother. The N pole treated

chicks stayed in the field slightly longer, for periods up to three

minutes as they were reflecting the arresting, limiting, reactions

of being treated by the N pole fields prior to incubation. The

control chicks waited until they were dry of their shell’s wetness

before entering the magnetic energies. Time was longer than the

S pole treated chicks. The chicks from the control group seemed

to need more energy. They remained between the poles of the

magnet from two and one-half to three and one-half minutes before

leaving the magnet for a remote area of the cage.

The experiments with the chicks were important laboratory

findings in the use of small newborn animals to detect changes

in the normal attitudes, behavior, intelligence, psychological be¬

havior, mental activities, and developments. At this time, and as

a result of many subsequent experiments, laboratory findings in¬

dicate it is now possible to program degrees of intelligence in

not only animals but also man by the proper controlled use of

regulated magnetic fields of energy. Some of our laboratory findings

in this regard will be discussed later in this book.

THE GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT OF THE

TREATED CHICKS TO CHICKENS AND ROOSTERS

Watching and recording with great care the development of

the chicks into hens and roosters brought many new and impor¬

tant developments and discoveries. The development of the S

pole treated chicks—hens and roosters—presented these facts. They

grew faster and stronger than the N pole chicks. They ate more

and near maturity took on a trend toward being cannibalistic

in nature. Their intelligence was lower in all respects than the other

two groups of chickens and roosters.

The N pole treated chickens and roosters were light eaters.

They developed slower than the control chicks. They were sensitive

to all surrounding noises, heat, cold, wind, sun, weather. This was

opposed to the boldness, dull thinking and reactions, and overly

36 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

strong S pole chickens and roosters. The S pole hens and roosters

were indifferent to any surroundings when their behavior was

compared to those of the N pole. The control hens and roosters

were in every respect normal to the accepted behavior of hens

and roosters. The great differences the birds presented was in

fact outstanding. As in the experiments with the earthworms and

with the seed experiments, similar findings yet different develop¬

ments took place. The chicks were studied from birth to maturity

to death. The S pole roosters during the last stages of maturity

attacked and ate the flesh of the hens and their own kind. It

was necessary to remove them and place each in a separate cage.

The sizes were much larger than the control chickens. The N

pole species were thin, nervous, very sensitive, very clean and ate

sparingly. This group was completely different from the control

group, which were active and scratched for their own food, and

drank less water than either of the treated types. Their growth

was larger in all respects than the N pole group and far less in

growth development than the S pole group. The S pole treated

group (eggs to mature hens and roosters) were the leaders in the

cannibalistic attitudes. The birds accidentaly left the confines of

their cages a number of times when the helpers failed to properly

latch the pens. They were found running dogs, cats, and in one

case attacked a cow grazing in a nearby pasture. The attacks were

all of the same nature—mounting or flying on the animal’s back

and laying open the back. In their own pens when this was dis¬

covered for the first time, it was believed that an animal had

somehow got into the pens and killed two of the large hens. Upon

careful examination and watching the attack was repeated. The

S pole roosters mounted the backs of the other birds and then

proceeded to peck, scratch and dig into the center of the back of

the other birds, exposing the internal organs, and death then was

the result of bleeding and internal organ damage.

During the last stages of development the N pole treated birds

lowered their water intake and increased their food intake. This

made no difference to the weight, showing here the control effect

of development of the birds so treated at conception and prior to

conception. The effects then followed through the stages of

development from the embryo. These experiments were reproduced

many times. It was very clear that certain genetic changes affecting

37

Effects on Small Animals

the growth, development, attitudes, physical development, mental

attitudes, and psychological attitudes had been altered or changed

by the magnetic separate pole radiation of the eggs.

Now we move to a new series of tests encompassing the use of

mice and rats with generally the same effects, although these

experiments presented new facts in the development of abnormal

sex encouragement.

THE EFFECTS ON AND TO MICE AND RATS

In the treatment of mice and rats we built suitable cages to

allow treatment of the males prior to intercourse with the females.

This was necessary so the sperm would carry the pole effects and

the active transfer of the sperm could be timed, checked and

recorded.

Three groups of white lab mice were carefully selected. One

group acted as controls and the other two groups were marked S

and N treated mice respectively.

The male mice were treated in a single cage, one to each cage,

with the S pole energies. Here 2500 gauss was used for eight

hours. The cage was designed to keep the subject in the S pole

energy of the large 2% x 6 inch bar or cylinder magnet. At the

same time in separate cages, well away from the S pole treatment

cages, the male mice were treated with the same type and

strength magnet except with the N pole of the magnet described.

We then placed the males and females together and normal

intercourse took place. In a few weeks we again saw a shortening

of the time the babies were developed and delivered by the S

pole treated mice. Again, new and important findings were made.

The births were easier and the babies were larger than the

N pole treated mice. The controls were the same as normal delivery.

The N pole treated mice babies were more difficult to deliver than

the controls. The babies, as in the S pole treated mice, were larger

and in some cases took longer to deliver.

The S pole mothers were stronger, and less effort for delivery

was noted. This was opposite to the N pole mothers, which seemed

to be lower in strength, and the babies were smaller compared

to the controls.

Before the birth of the mice each cage was equipped with

38

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

separate huts and with two openings. This allowed the mothers

to protect their young and keep them warm and away from any

source of danger. While this danger condition was not anticipated,

the care and safety factor had to be noted and was made available

to each mother.

On birth, the S pole babies developed faster than the controls.

The N pole babies took longer to develop, were weak, thin, and

did not feed as much as the controls. The S pole babies were

fed continually. They were stronger in every respect than the

controls.

The same experiments were conducted with white lab strain

rats, which are similar to the white rabbit strains and come close

to the blood system of man.

The rats followed the exact behavior in development stages

as the mice. It was noted that one important result of the mice

and rat tests showed that the control mice kept only a fairly clean

cage, nest, and hut. The S pole treated mice and rats kept their

cages, nests and huts in a very dirty state; they did not seem to

be concerned about sleeping in their own mire and filth.

The N pole mice and rats were very neat housekeepers and

often took a great deal of time washing and keeping themselves and

their cages clean, including their nests and huts. On the other

hand, the S pole mice and rats were always stained, dirty and

careless. The controls were not extreme one way or the other,

their cages, huts, nests and cleanliness ordinary for their species.

The apparently high sensitive behavior to lights, sounds, motion,

movement in the laboratory, by the N pole mice and rats as

opposed to the boldness, strong, nonfearful behavior of the S

pole mice and rats showed a remarkable difference in the psycho¬

logical behavior pattern of the rodents. These differences coincided

with our findings relative to the particular pole energies.

The discovery of these revealing changes in the mice and rats

was duplicated in the work that followed with white Australian

rabbits, which have a blood type similar to man. The effects were

so far-reaching in this work as to point directly to genetic changes.

This was shown by the sensitivities, physical development, nervous

reactions, and the trend toward cannibalistic behavior. There

were also effects on the sexual behavior of the rodents.

Effects on Small Animals

39

SEX LIFE AND AGING

The sex life of the mice and rats of the control groups was

considered to be normal and we used their behavior as norms.

The sex life of the N pole rodents was limited and less active

than the controls. It was noted that experiments with the mice,

rats and rabbits all resulted in the same percentage of exactness

in resulting behavior. The S pole rodents, encompassing all of

the above-mentioned types, reacted to a far greater sex life with

frequent activity. In some instances the males killed the females

by their sex activity of actual viciousness.

The exposure of the rodents to the S pole energies acted to

inspire strength and vigor and when applied to the sex organs

encouraged their overdevelopment. This was also later discovered

in cats and dogs. The amount of sperm produced and the larger

percentages of resultant fertility were responsible in part for

changing the rodents and animals in their inborn habits, per¬

sonalities, behavior, and encouragement of sexual activity and

reproduction.

In treating animals after maturity that had not previously

been subjected to the pole’s energies, the result was increased

strength and sex activity. These experiments were by exposure

to the magnet for one hour a day for four days, the curve of

effects varying with the size and type of animal or rodent. The

exposure was to the male testicles and to the female reproductive

organs—S pole 2500 gauss strength.

The result, if left unchecked, of the condition of oversex

stimulation was to shorten the life span of the rodent or animal.

The heart was affected, shortening the life span, and death resulted.

In our research of rodents and animals to arrest the oversex

activities, it was found much could be done if the N pole energies

were directed to the male, exposing the testicles and the ureter

with N pole energies one hour a day for three days. This resulted

in a noticeable downgrading of the number of sex acts that were

performed in a definite period of time.

Of equal interest during these experiments was the measure¬

ment of the amount of sperm produced by the male anim al i n

treating the sex organs with N pole energies less than normal

40

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

amounts were produced. We again used a similar animal as

control—one that produced the same amount in close percentage

to the animal selected for the measurement experiment. Here we

note that the sperm is for the better part protein; therefore, should

the exposure of the S pole produce more measurable sperm after

a series of exposures to the animal we can then see that this

acted to encourage the production glands to effect a higher pro¬

duction of the protein sperm fluids.

Quite the reverse was found in the treatment of animals with

the N pole energies. We found a sharp lowering of the production

of sperm and a lowering of the amount of protein.

We can see the possibility for the same reactions taking place

with man, since man and these selected animals have the same

or similar organs.

THE INCREASE OR REDUCTION OF THE NORMAL

LIFE SPAN OF ANIMALS

The life span of rodents and animals can be extended up to

50 percent. Mice and rats proved this possibility. In larger animals

it has been more difficult to note this due to their normal life

span reaching 18 to 25 years, as in the case of cats and dogs.

However, the larger rats, as did the smaller mice, allow a good

reference in themselves and in comparison to the normal life spans

in other animals when they were treated with magnetic energies

before active transplant of the sperm, after the transfer, and/or

during conception of the embryo. On applying the S pole fields

prior to the first stages of development, on birth the animal carries

the changes effected by the S pole exposure. If after birth of

the rodent the applications of the S pole energies are made there

is a lowering of the life span due to oversex results.

It was concluded that if the animal’s genetic mode is altered

to one of a higher strength, the life span would be extended by

the fact we have altered the genes and the resultant strength of

the rodent. The main and most difficult matter to cope with is

that due to the oversex resultant condition to extend life one must

isolate the male animal or rodent for lengthy periods from the

female or place restraints on the sex activities of the male. If

41

Effects on Small Animals

not, then depletion of strength acts on the heart and organs and

reduces the life span one may expect by many experimental

results.

The N pole rodents and animals also show an extension of life

but by different approaches. The use of the N pole energies to

extend life is quite different. During these N pole experiments it

was discovered that the extension of the life span was the slowing

down as opposed to the strengthening of the rodent’s or animal’s

system. This presented a slowing of maturity, thus resulting in a

longer life. This should open many new avenues of research as

in each experiment the perception and intelligence of the rodents

and animals were upgraded as a direct and positive result. The

N pole exposures resulted in a weaker, smaller rodent or animal

of slow development by extending its normal life span and upgrad¬

ing all sensitivities, including intelligence, reflexes and environ¬

mental reaction, inferring the brain’s ability to be more sensitive

in recalling information and environment.

The N pole animal or rodent was then more intelligent than

the dull-witted, overly strong, slow to leam, animal or rodent we

have found is the result of the S pole exposure. The strength-giving

results of the S pole energies and the resultant changed animal while

being overly strong was in no way slow to move and respond to

activity, yet there was a failure to have the quickness of mind

that the controls presented or the increased mental activities of

the N pole animals or rodents.

These were the results in each of over 300 experiments con¬

ducted within an eight-year period in our laboratories. From these

experiments and their results, a reasonable possibility exists to

program certain and very advanced degrees of intelligence to

rodents and animals and, therefore, within the possibility to con¬

sider the same for man.

There is a similarity with these experiments and the proverb

“the wiser, the weaker.” Concerning the changes and effects in

the rodents and animals this was the result of the application of

the N pole energies.

The extension of life systems to live beyond their normal life

span has received much discussion in scientific reviews. Men and

women advance in their development to become outstanding

42 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

authorities on important subjects and then die. If they had lived

longer more information from their efforts would be available to

aid mankind.

The laboratory work with rodents and animals indicates that

the life span of man can be extended. Yet, who will decide who

is to receive and who is not to receive such treatment, if perfected?

What effect on society by the have and the havenots would there

be? The restrictions upon these men and women that were pro¬

grammed for extended life could be impractical.

Laboratory results indicate that the proper magnetic fields

applied could aid man as they did the rodents and animals. The

results also indicate the opposite effect with improper or opposing

magnetic fields. Many diseases suffered by man, simulated in

laboratory experiments with rodents and animals, were contained

by applying magnetic forces. The possibility of strengthening the

heart and mind of man and arresting illness and disease exists with

the proper use of magnetic energies. In the many years of working

with magnetic energies on animals, our laboratory has arrested

illnesses and diseases in more than several hundred subjects. Many

of these ailments are common to man, and a number have not

responded to modem medical treatment.

In scientific research we try at all times to avoid duplication of

work. Our studies have shown for some time that vast improve¬

ment in the animal’s circulation of blood can be obtained by the

proper application of magnetic energies. The scientists in Russia

have also found this reaction to the application of a magnet’s

energies. However, the scientists in the Soviet Union are working

with both poles of the magnet at the same time, and they consid¬

er that the two pole energies are homogeneous. We have dis¬

covered that the use of each pole when properly applied has

presented us with a go or no-go, in computer language, method

and/or system to work with, using the two different electron spin

potentials for better results. The approach of using the two poles

at the same time should not be discounted as they are a very

valuable tool in that form of energy presentation, but this approach

is not as accurate as the two separate pole system which can be

computed and programmed for desired effects.

As a result of our discovery we can attack the cause of poor

blood circulation and relieve the condition, if we know what caused

43

Effects on Small Animals

the condition to exist. In any case of abnormalities to the system,

knowing what caused it to exist and why it is happening is one

of the utmost importance. Having an analysis of the condition,

the energy that will effect an arrest, control or relief can be

properly applied and a certain degree of results may be expected

and generally occur as expected.

Much can be done to relieve many heart disorders. This and

the possibility of relieving certain types of kidney disease can now

be accomplished in blood-circulating animals. Because of the

similarity of the blood and organs of animals to those of man, we

can clearly see the possibility of our research in relieving man of

these certain ailments and diseases.

The possibility of aid and relief of many liver complaints has

also been indicated as showing positive results. These findings

show in part the aid to the extension of the life span of man, as

death is caused to a large degree by the above-mentioned illnesses

and diseases.

While heart failure may be considered as the main reason of

death in man, this is due to the life system becoming overworked

with worry, nerve reactions, loss of strength, and the aging process

of man. When the total system slows down, life slowly comes to

an end.

Laboratory findings indicate we can, to a certain degree, arrest

this weakening condition by the use of the energies we now have

to work with—those that have shown that animals can live longer.

Even mature rodents can be acted on to extend their life when

these energies are used to reinforce to a degree their strength and

protein exchange of the foods eaten. All this acts to assist the

heart’s actions and improve circulation, thereby removing a good

degree of the cause. This and other measures may be taken to

aid the living system by retarding the aging process.

The physical appearance of a rodent exposed to the S pole

or the N pole energies while very young or during or before con¬

ception presents the picture of extended prime life even at the

end of the period that the rodent's life span may be considered at

an end. The appearances are outstanding in every respect. The

fur is that of a middle-aged to younger rodent or animal. Aging

has been retarded. There is no doubt in our minds that this is

the result of exposures to the magnetic fields. Too many repro-

44 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

ductions of these research experiments have been duplicated to

conclude otherwise.

In man, as in rodents and animals, as age progresses many

systems indicate loss of certain mental activities, sensitivities and

interests. In our laboratory experiments we have seen these actions

delayed, arrested, and much activity restored—all important findings.

Would extending man’s life span overburden the earth too much

to allow life as we now know it? The reason health matters are

growing worse is that too many people are in crowded conditions.

The cities are overpopulated. The world has millions and millions

of acres of unexplored and undeveloped land and has the potential

to properly feed all the world. Still, thousands die each year in

poverty and starvation. Should we consider means of extending the

life span of man it would require an international planning board

to open new lands and new housing developments. It would de¬

mand increased national development of many nations of the

world that today cannot provide sufficient food for their people

or proper housing.

In the U.S. alone there are millions of acres of undeveloped

land. We see the possibilities of great new government and

industrial areas of new and promising developments. This also

applies to many nations that are not in the development stages of

America and other well-developed countries. The world is now

undergoing drastic changes, and there will have to be better plan¬

ning, more properly educated men and women in government

positions to effect these developments. Wars as we have known

them must stop, and sensible approaches must be applied to end

world conflicts—man against man, nation against nation.

Today, and this includes all nations, countries, states, and also

the U.S., it is doubtful if the men and women in political leader¬

ship are suited to handle the vast new concepts and developments

the world needs for proper, sensible government and sensible

development of their resources. Extending the life of man is a

possibility if properly planned and committed to action.

As scientific advancements are made, the people of the world

also change in their daily lives, eating habits, housing, activities

and comforts, yet we see little improvement in government pro¬

cedures directed in keeping up with the changes all nations face

today, other than reacting to crisis after crisis. The present trend

45

Effects on Small Animals

to social controls has never worked as people must have the right

to think and act for themselves, and this is fast coming to an end

in all countries of the world. The same is necessary in research and

development.

The world today is uneducated in keeping current with scientific

developments that are made to aid the people of the world. The

political leaders are not informed on scientific breakthroughs or,

if they are, for unexplainable reasons, they do not properly follow

and aid these breakthroughs for the betterment of mankind. Passing

more laws and placing greater regulations on their people by all

nations is not going to be the answer or in any way provide us

with the answers we need now more than at any other time in

history. We need a fresh, new approach to science and its uses for

mankind.

Chapter Six

MAN THE ELECTROMAGNETIC ANIMAL

W e will investigate in this chapter the facts surrounding

man and his biological electrical energies. Man is composed, as

are animals, rodents, seeds, plants, and all biological systems, of

the basic atom which in part is a small magnet. As atoms collect

to produce molecules and molecules form to make materials, sub¬

stances, matter, all are allied and are, in fact, the fundamental

basis for man’s existence. They make up man’s body, system, and

are his very life itself.

The electrical system of man and all biological systems is a

complex electrical carrier, some still unknown to man. As research

continues we are becoming aware how these electrical currents

govern man’s life and the lives of plants, animals, rodents, and

other living systems.

Of all the complexes of man’s electrical biomagnetic system

the brain and mind stand out as the master computer. The brain

and mind are an electrochemical master control and exchange sys¬

tem acting to govern a good part, although not totally, of the elec¬

tromagnetic complex found to exist in living systems.

The use and application of a magnet’s energies, magneto mag¬

netic, biomagnetic energies, to the living system can and will

effect certain changes. When we know how these affect man they

can then be directed and programmed to assist in the correction

of many complaints existing in the electrochemical system of man’s

organs, blood, nerves, heart and all parts and divisions of man’s

biological living system. This will be a tremendous step in the

control of illnesses or human restrictions toward living a more

normal life when afflicted by illness, disfigurement, loss of lim bs,

or other limiting factors.

It would require a number of books to elaborate in detail all

47

48 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

of our experiments and findings in the bioelectrical activities within

the body of man. At a later time we may present another book

with more of our research findings on the magnetic effects to the

living system.

In all scientific investigations when a discovery is made it is

of the utmost importance to understand why it happened, not

simply apply it for the results it can afford. Making a true dis¬

covery in science is good, but to properly understand what your

discovery does should be of the utmost importance. We mentioned

earlier that the Japanese are making magnetic bracelets and pre¬

scribing them for all sorts of human ailments. While the bands

have made what appears to be certain improvements in a number

of cases when applied to the human body, the Japanese manu¬

facturers and scientists lack the knowledge of why this has taken

place. This is evident based on papers they have offered on medical

findings. These medical findings lack the proper scientific inves¬

tigations into the technical reasons why these improvements have

been experienced.

Actually, you can take a child’s magnet and place it at points

on the human body and obtain reactions, certain amounts of

effects to certain disorders. However, unless you understand why

this takes place, then nothing has been done to advance the

position or understanding the laws behind this effect. We hope

to cover this in part in this book.

While our research has included many fields of investigation

over many years, we have primarily restricted our major work to

animals and biological systems. When we apply our findings to

the work being done by many other dedicated scientists in this

and related fields, we see there is a direct relationship between our

work and the work being conducted by other scientists. The re¬

search results we present in part should provide a valuable tool

as to experiences, experiments, and results obtained for more

thorough understanding of new basic laws we have developed

from the effects of use and application of magnetic fields and

energies. Only now are we beginning to grasp a more complex

understanding for the application of these fields and energies to

obtain desired and planned results.

Man the Electromagnetic Animal

49

MAN’S ELECTROMAGNETIC ENVIRONMENT

Man is affected by incoming electromagnetic energies as those

coming from outer space, the moon, the sun, and the other major

planets. These energies combine in various ways to affect man and

every living biological system on the earth. Those creatures that

live beneath the earth, in the seas, lakes, rivers, are all affected

by these unseen and normally undetectable energies that con¬

tinually bombard the earth.

The moon affects the rise and fall of the tides, as does the

sun; and when the moon and the sun’s energies are combined,

when they are in alignment, they act to exert their maximum pull

on the earth, producing abnormally high tides. Not only are all

biological forms of life, including man, affected by the geophysical

properties, but segments of the earth also undergo many forms of

pull, strain and stress.

Man, like all living biological systems, experiences changes in

these pulls, strains and stresses that are a result of these bodies from

outer space and their surrounding electromagnetic fields and

gravitational forces.

Man is an electromagnetic animal and is subject to those forces

that affect all forms of life existing on earth. Man’s electromagnetic

system is contained within his biophysical makeup and affects

the total behavior of not only the body but also in many cases

the changes in mental activities and the electrical biochemical

operation of his system.

We are aware of the numerous defensive shields surrounding

the earth’s atmosphere which protect man from the deadly rays

of radioactivity from the sun’s radiation. These shields are electro¬

magnetic and have an energy that adds to man’s environmental

electromagnetic environment, adding also to the effects on his

biological system.

In the past few years, gravity, as known on earth, has been

discovered to travel in energy waves. Gravity is a form of electro¬

magnetic and physical magnetic results. Without gravity our blood

would not circulate the same as it now does. Therefore, each of

the forces exerted on mankind,on earth plays an important part

50 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

in man’s electromagnetic biological health, atmosphere and environ¬

ment. When we add all of these external electromagnetic energies

to man’s internal electromagnetic energies, since man is himself

an electromagnetic animal, we find man and his surroundings are

subject to tremendous magnetic pressures, strains and stresses. If

we can understand, even in a small way, how to harness some of

these natural forces and apply them to aid mankind we have at

least started to advance our understanding of these natural forces

that affect the entire biophysical and biological atmosphere of

man.

Nature presents some remarkable evidence of the effects the

moon’s and sun’s energies have on living systems. Take for example

the oyster. The following experiment has been conducted by a

number of researchers who are exploring biomagnetic fields and

their energies. Taking a number of oysters and placing them in

tanks far inland and underground where they could not possibly

sense outside happenings, the oyster still opened and closed their

shells in perfect rhythm with the rise and fall of the ocean’s tides.

This occurred although the oysters were moved miles from the

ocean. The energy force from the moon, the magnetic and electro¬

magnetic energy of the moon’s gravitational force fields acted to

provide the oysters with the information, stress and strain, that

caused them to react as though they were in or close to the ocean.

Consider that a magnet’s energies cause a more rapid germina¬

tion of seeds when exposed to the fields of a magnet and when

planted present these facts repeatedly. Consider also that the

seeds are organic in nature and have enzyme systems. Life, even

in a suspended form, before the forming of the embryo, is influenced

by electromagnetic environment. Any electromagnetic energy di¬

rected to a life system affects the protein, amino acids, and en¬

zymes. Further, we see genetic changes as a direct result of

magnetic exposures to the living system that are laboratory repro¬

ducible. An improper application of magnetic force to that system

will produce mutant, defective genetic results, while the proper

application will produce genetic changes for a better end result.

Research is now underway in several leading hospitals to show

that man’s brain is subject to severe changes when exposed to

external minor voltages and currents. It has been found that the

front of the skull is negative in electrical potential and the back

51

Man the Electromagnetic Animal

of the skull is positive in nature. When small electrodes are

attached to the front and back of the head and small voltages and

currents are applied—positive to the back, negative to the front—

there is a feeling of well-being. However, should we reverse the

voltage and currents quickly, unconsciousness will result immed¬

iately.

Electrosleep is the result of applying different frequencies of

alternating energy to the brain by small electrodes. This produces

sleep until the currents of frequency application are removed.

Electrosleep can be used to assist man or animal to sleep while

undergoing minor operations. It also has its use in psychological

treatment and other research applications. The Russians have pur¬

sued this type of research for years, and now the United States and

other nations are finally researching its uses and applications.

The above types of energies and other forms of applied voltages,

currents, alternating frequencies, magnetic, and electromagnetic

energies are now being researched in laboratories throughout the

world. Much has been discovered about the effects these applied

energies produce on plant, animal, and man.

Magnetic fields that are lower than the earth’s one-half a gauss

are found in space after leaving the earth’s magnetic fields. This

energy assisted mice taken into space to grow faster, but the

second generation of mice were found to have low vitality and

strength and died young. Their organs were found to be affected

when they were contained in a weaker magnetic field during their

youth. Tests indicated clearly that their organs were poorly devel¬

oped, their livers and kidneys malformed, and many developed

malignant tumors in various parts of their tissues.

Here we see a clue to malignant developments that result in

many types and kinds of cancers and tumors. In the study of

cancers and tumors there is more than sufficient evidence to

indicate that when a cell membrane that retains the cell’s shape

and form weakens it can be the first cancer cell. We will discuss

this in more detail later.

A number of years ago scientists in the U.S.S.R. started to

investigate the effects of sunspots and magnetic storms on human

behavior, studying patients in hospitals suffering from blood and

heart complaints. Their discoveries acted to create interest in the

external electromagnetic effects on man. Interest is now beginning

52 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

in the U.S. and other countries that realize there is a direct rela¬

tion between sunspots and magnetic storms on the health of man.

The Soviet scientists designed shielded rooms and changed

medication to the heart cases, those suffering nerve conditions and

blood ailments. This procedure was used to protect the patients

against electromagnetic harmful effects found to occur in cases

from the effects of sunspots and magnetic storms.

It has been discovered that pulsing waves or fields of electro¬

magnetic energy in factories and plants can cause great harm to

the living system and also to the mind. Large transformers, pulse

coils, autotransformers, A.C. generators, all show dangers to the

workers. The pulsating generators may be considered to be the

most dangerous of all, producing effects on the workers which result

in harmful complaints. In 1969 reports were made public by Dr.

Karel H. Marha, Institute of Industrial Hygiene and Occupational

Diseases, Praha, Srobarova, Czechoslovakia showing effects to the

workers. The complaints reported included decrease in sexual

potency, headaches, memory and hearing losses, and changes in

menstrual cycles. Additional human disorders have been noted and

identified since that time, as well as several years prior to that

time. The dangers of microwaves, such as radar, microwave ovens,

and other similar devices, can also cause great harm depending on

the energy leaking, the frequency and power generated, as well

as the time of exposure.

The proper harnessing of these mentioned forms of electro¬

magnetic energies can result in outstanding discoveries to help

mankind. Our laboratory findings substantiate this objective.

It is possible to design from a harmful pulse generator a device

to dissolve unwanted tissue. Tumors may be dissolved as well as

other growths within or without the body. Our laboratory has made

a number of research instruments that have acted to dissolve

unwanted mass in animal bodies. From these research findings

have come information and knowledge of how pulsing electro¬

magnetic energies can be new and important tools for medical

work, surgical procedures, and of equal importance to avoid surgical

procedures.

As mentioned earlier a number of firms in Japan are building

alternating current equipped chairs, mattresses, pillows, and hand¬

held devices that are placed against the body to afford a host of

reliefs and cures, according to the literature they send with these

53

Man the Electromagnetic Animal

instruments. These do-it-yourself, home cure instruments supply

a 60 pulse per second magnetic, alternating magnetic energy, and

can affect the system in many harmful ways. They have obtained

many good results, meaning certain amounts of relief to a number

of disorders, yet they do not properly understand that their instru¬

ments can have harmful as well as good results. This is indicated

in discussing with them their papers and reports they offer in

evidence of the instrument’s value to health.

Our laboratory findings give proper understandings concerning

these devices built by the Japanese manufacturers. An adaptation

of these devices in line with our discoveries would not only benefit

but would offer new and greater approaches in proper medical

testing and results for new scientific instruments that could be

accepted by many nations.

The research work on instrument development in England,

France, and Germany is evident by a number of groups attempting

to design, build, and sell magnetic instruments to relieve human

complaints. Again, these instruments are based on the pulsing

frequency type generators, generating electromagnetic energies

and applying them to certain parts of the body for relief of cer¬

tain disorders. A number of these instruments have obtained

positive results, yet these manufacturers fail to understand the

nature of the energies they are working with or how to program

for expected results. This book is directed to professional men and

women and students who wish to further their research of applied

magnetic forces, fields and energies in an intelligent and under¬

standable manner. Such persons must be willing to leave behind

them the outmoded, incorrect theories and concepts of magnetism.

Our laboratory findings and discoveries of new laws and concepts

of applied magnetic forces can now be used to advance new

developments and still more discoveries in advancing the sciences.

The future holds many great and new discoveries in all sciences

from our new understanding of magnetic energies and their pro¬

grammed effects.

EXTERNAL ELECTROMAGNETIC FORCES AND MAN

In our continued study of the electromagnetic forces that are

directed on mankind from outer space, we find one of the greatest

effective generators of harmful, as well as useful and healthful.

54 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

energies are the rays of the sun. The sun’s rays are electromagnetic

in nature and effects.

The sun’s rays, on direct exposure to the skin of animals and

man, can cause skin cancer if the exposure is prolonged. Sunlight

and direct exposure to ultraviolet rays can also cause certain

types of skin cancers. Why the sun’s direct rays or the direct rays

of ultraviolet light cause certain types of skin cancer is not too

well known or understood. We point out that ultraviolet rays or

light are also electromagnetic energies. The frequency of the sun’s

light rays, white light, and that of ultraviolet rays differ. The white

light that comes from the sun contains all of the frequencies within

the light spectrum and many that go beyond this range, and other

frequencies that start before the sun’s white light frequencies

start. There is a difference in the number of cycles per second in

each wavelength and micron. The difference is the number or the

frequency of the cycles per second of energy that goes to produce,

make, and/or present these many different types of electromagnetic

energy.

We believe others will agree with this finding at least in part

and that it is the sun’s reactions and also ultraviolet rays’ reaction

on the skin of man and/or animals that cause “oxidized cholesterol”

of the skin. We know there are many biological effects of cholesterol

oxidation. One result is cholesterol alphaoxide. This is known to

be a cancer-causing chemical, so when exposed to certain natural

forms of energies coming from outer space, as in the case of

sunlight, we can see there is a direct possibility that when too

much of this energy form is absorbed by the skin the result is skin

cancer or deterioration of the skin.

Man is continually bombarded with visible and invisible elec¬

tromagnetic energies that have a direct bearing on his life, mental

attitudes, health and welfare. Man is, in fact, an electromagnetic

animal in every respect, living in and surrounded by an electro¬

magnetic environment over which he has little control.

Chapter Seven

MISTAKEN CONCEPTS OF MAGNETISM

AND ITS BIOLOGICAL APPLICATION

W e now present some of the theories of the magnetic

fields that surround the earth and a magnet. We give a drawing

of the earth. Diagram A, that shows a bar magnet superimposed

on the earth, and in turn shows how the magnet and the earth’s

magnetism are similar in poles and flow direction of the magnetic

energy. This theory is incorrect as we shall explain, yet it is

still taught today in this incorrect form.

DIAGRAM A

MAGNETIC

POLE

GEOGRAPHIC

NORTH POLE

GEOGRAPHIC

SOUTH POLE

MAGNETIC

POLE

DIAGRAM B

This mistaken concept is used today in most biological research

dealing with the science of magnetomagnetic effects to biological

systems. Diagram B shows the mistaken concept of the magnetic

field of a magnet by the paper and iron filling test. This consists

of taking a piece of paper, placing a magnet under the paper,

sprinkling some powdered iron on top of the paper, and the

55

56 Magnetism, and Its Effects on the Living System

resulting arrangement is supposed to show how magnetic energy

flows from pole to pole. Since each filing particle becomes a

magnet, as explained earlier in this book, this method and deduc¬

tion are in error.

We now present the updated theory of magnetism surrounding

the earth and also a bar magnet. We refer to the measurements

made of the earth’s magnetic fields as recorded by the research

conducted in space by the National Space Administration’s research

of magnetic measurements. This compares with our findings that

the earth, like a bar magnet or any magnet, has a magnetic equator

and it is at that point where the spins of electrons change their

phase relationship and present us two fields of energies and two

different potentials of magnetic energy. This offers a totally differ¬

ent picture than is now used in present textbooks and is used

as law and theory in all related research. Our laboratory findings

also show where the magnet’s energies should be applied in and

to biological systems to study the effects of magnetic forces on

living systems. For the study of the new concepts as to phase

spin change and relationships refer to Chapter Three.

The two drawings shown on page 57 are marked Item C and

Item D. Drawing C presents what now has been measured and

recorded by the space recordings and probes. We see how the

magnetic energy leaves the earth’s S pole, spinning to the right,

then dips to the surface of the earth, and changes its spin by

180 degrees, then again leaves this mid-magnetic equator of the

earth and travels with a left spin to reenter the earth at the N

pole.

The drawing marked Item E is an outline projection of the

Van Allen radiation magnetosphere. This envelope-shaped field

contains radio active fields and many other atomic radiations.

Do not confuse this field with the existing magnetic fields we dis¬

cuss. Item D shows the same magnetic equator that is present

and is shown in Item C. The bar magnet has this division of

energies as does the earth. All magnets have this magnetic equator

where the energies are divided and changed as to their magnetic

spin effect, which then presents us with two values of magnetic

energy—south, or positive, and north, or negative, energy. It is

the popular belief that magnetism flows only in one direction.

However, we have presented evidence to support that a magnet’s

Mistaken Concepts of Magnetism

57

ITEM C ITEM D

EARTH

energy has two flow directions. A magnet’s magnetism flows in two

directions, not one. This follows the concepts of electricity that

voltage and current flow in opposite directions. Here we again see

an almost identical behavior of magnetism and electricity. In fact,

we cannot have one without the other.

As we continue this book we will show how the two energies,

voltage and current, that we have in a single pole energy, either

the N pole or the S pole, can be made to perform with different

yet almost computerized exactness in obtaining the results desired

in treating biological systems.

By application of the N pole’s magnetic energies we can

arrest certain bacteria while strengthening the normal body cells

surrounding the invading and attacking bacteria. Yet both are

living systems. Where E is the voltage effect and I is the current

effect we then have E and I in a single pole energy that applies

equally to the N pole, negative, and the S pole, positive, energies.

Refer to the detailed outlines and drawings used to support the

fact that the flow of magnetic magneto energy from the poles of

58 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

any magnet has a dual nature, flow, and type of energy, again

E and I.

It is of extreme importance that this simple interaction of a

two-directional flow taking place be understood. It has two general

effects to each biological application, each having great importance

to our understanding of magnetic effects.

A LABORATORY DEMONSTRATION TO SHOW

THE TWO DIRECTIONS OF FLOW OF POLARIZED

HYDROGEN BUBBLES IN A MAGNETIC FIELD

Note: The two directions of

movements of the hydrogen bubbles take

place at the same time.

Cylinder Magnet

Img

A Cylinder

Magnet

F.M.D.

Fluid Hydrogen

Bubble, Movement

MG

A Cylinder Magnet

f I

(s poles

. Ix/V

(Diluted Sulfuric Acid)

SAS Fluid

F.'M.DT _

Fluid Hydrogen Bubble, Movement

(X) Acid Solution must

contact each magnet.

Dots shown in solution above represent

the hydrogen bubbles, arrows direction.

The general movement of a magnet’s fields is expressed in

most test materials as “the magnetic energy leaves the S pole and

travels to the N pole of the magnet or the earth’s magnetic fields,

as an example.” However, in the above research findings, we have

taken a diluted solution of sulfuric acid and distilled water, mak¬

ing a solution having a specific gravity of 1175 degrees for use

in a fluid liquid channel between the two poles of two magnets,

placed as indicated in the foregoing drawing. Use a magnitude

from 500 to 1000 X scope lens power. After a period of four to

six minutes, the longer the better, the hydrogen gas bubble activity

will start to flow. One to two bubbles can be seen flowing from

59

Mistaken Concepts of Magnetism

the S pole to the N pole of the two magnets. A few minutes later,

a reverse bubble flow will be seen. These hydrogen bubbles flow

from the N pole to the S pole of the two magnets. The two

directions of bubble movement can be seen clearly. We use the

electrical identification formula to best describe the dual direc¬

tional flow of energies, I for current and E for voltage.

The flow direction and first movement of the hydrogen bubbles

described above indicate the similar behavior of voltage in elec¬

trical systems. As voltage leads the first action to a flow of elec¬

tricity, then current lagging behind the voltage starts to flow to

support the amount of current that is demanded of that circuit’s

load. The lagging time of current to fill the demand of the resis¬

tance of the load applied is only a fraction of a second’s time.

However, in the experiment described there is an extension of

time necessary to see this flow demand take place, the magneto

magnetic current.

The direct and similar law of “The Ohms Law” seems again to

be supported in the energy supplied by a magnet. This should

also be considered possible in the earth’s magneto magnetic flow

between the two poles. It is our objective to present new and

more acceptable theories of how we may better use the magneto

magnetic energies of magnetism. As we point out what appear to

be major errors in modern textbooks, we hope these outlines and

our discoveries that are a direct result of our laboratory research

will result in new laws and concepts and theories that will lead

to even further discoveries in and of magneto magnetic energies,

a magnet’s energies and other electromagnetic forms of energies.

To aid in the understanding of the discovery that a magnet’s

magnetic field is similar, if not exactly like, to the electrical voltage

and current flow laws, we present in part the fundamental Ohms

Law to show the principles of magneto magnetic vs. electrical

laws:

simple mathematical relationship between the e. m. f. applied

to a conducting circuit having a certain resistance, and the cur¬

rent which would flow in the circuit. This relationship is now

known as Ohms Law. The law is stated thus: The intensity of

current in any circuit is equal to the electromotive force divided

hy the resistance of the circuit.

60

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

Expressed in the common electrical abbreviation this law be¬

comes:

E

I=- (1)

R

where I=current in amperes.

E=e. m. f. in volts.

R=resistance in ohms

Equation (1) enables us to calculate the current (I) which

will flow when an e. m. f. (E) is applied to a circuit having a re¬

sistance (R).

Example: What current will flow through the filament of a

vacuum tube having a resistance of 20 ohms, when

an e. m. f. of 5 volts is applied?

Solution: The current in a circuit may be calculated by Ohm’s

E

Law using the equation 1=—. By substituting 5 for E

R

5 1

and 20 for R we obtain 1=—■=•—=0.25 Amp. Ans.

20 4

To find how much pressure or e. m. f. must be applied to a

circuit to make a given current flow through a conductor having

a known resistance, equation (1) can be put in more convenient

form by simple mathematical transformation.

E

Thus since 1=—, then E=IXR (2)

R

Example: The resistance of the filament of a vacuum tube

is 20 ohms, and it requires 0.25 ampers for proper

operation. What e. m. f. should be applied to obtain

current?

Solution: E=IXR. Since 1=0.25 amp, and R=20 ohms, the

E=0.25X20=5 volts. Ans.

When the e. m. f. (E) and the current (I) are known, the

resistance R of the circuit may be calculated very easily by plac¬

ing equation (1) in more convenient form

E E

Thus since 1=—, then R=—

R I

( 3 )

Mistaken Concepts of Magnetism 61

Example: An e. m. f. of 5 volts applied to the filament of a

vacuum tube sends a current of 0.25 amperes through

it Calculate the resistance of the filament

E 5

Solution: R=——=20 ohms. Ans.

I 0.25

E

(4) From Ohm's Law (equation (1) we have 1=—

R

Substituting this value of I, for I in the power equation (4),

we obtain:

E E a

W=EXI=EX—=— (5)

R R

This gives an expression for the electrical power in terms of

the voltage and resistance.

From equation (2) we have E=IXR-

Substituting this value of E, for E in the power equation (4),

we obtain:

W=EXI=IXRXI=I 2 R (6)

In comparing a simple one-cell battery and its electrical energy

and polarities to a magnet, the first difference is that if we short-

circuit a battery all the energy is consumed. If we short-circut a

magnet by placing a keeper bar or iron or steel across its poles we

only arrest its loss or use of energy. If we do not place a keeper bar

across the poles of a magnet it will lose its strength. We are now

discussing only a common magnet and not the more advanced rare

earth magnets. A magnet’s energy consists of polarized atoms of

the molecules of the material of which it is made all spinning in

the same direction, forming atomic energy in part. However, we

must keep in mind that the center of each and every magnet

contains a magnetic equator and it is at this point that the atomic

electron spin changes its phase relationship and spin to the

opposite direction forming the two potentials—one positive (S

pole) and the other negative (N pole).

A magnet can lose this polarization energy (magnetism) by

allowing the energy to flow into space, losing its energy by atmo¬

spheric space absorption, such as the straight line emission of

energy that leaves the ends of the poles.

62

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

When we apply a magnet to perform a specific function its

energies may be drained, such as pulling reeds (metal plates)

in the activation of a relay or to lift metals. Each time a magnet’s

energy is applied a portion of the energy is lost in the metal to

which it is applied. Physical contact results in certain transfer

of the polarized energy to and into the metal the magnet is

applied to. Here we are discussing standard permanent magnets.

Their use is in motors and other more sophisticated devices which

also act to consume the magnet’s energies.

On page 58 we show a test that can be reproduced to show

the dual and opposite directional flow of energy that takes place

in a magnetic magnet circuit.

To show how to short out a magnet, remove its energies, with¬

out A.C. currents being applied to the magnet, the conventional

method to remove magnetism from a magnetized metal is to lower

the magnet into a glass beaker of sulfuric acid. The magnetic

fields will be absorbed in part in the acid. The acid would then

act to short out the magnetic energy by speeding up the loss of

the magnetic energy by acidic absorption. This test is worthy of

reproducing as it shows a curve of gauss loss to the magnet’s

normal gauss strength prior to placing tie magnet in the acid bath.

The time curve is hours to days to lower this energy that would

normally take years to do under normal magnetic operational

uses.

Indications from these tests in our laboratory are that the mag¬

netic energies are transmitted from the ends of the magnet in

straight or linear lines, as magnets have a frequency and/or wave

formation similar to that of a wave length. Our research has also

shown that magnetic energy can be mode-modulated by applica¬

tion of other frequencies. This provides an intermediate frequency

result, an I. F. frequency. Again, we see a new approach to the

use of magnetic energies including those from a magnet that were

previously unknown. This discovery should lead to new dis¬

coveries and developments to serve electronics, biochemistry,

biophysics, physics, and all fields of applied sciences.

On page 64 we show a chart indicating the many frequencies

of energy as the overall frequency spectrum. The frequency

spectrum chart is presented for better understanding of the laws

of physics for our further discussion. Each form of energy is

Mistaken Concepts of Magnetism 63

motion. This motion is in cycles per second of generated energies,

energies that combine as to the frequency, the number of cycles

of energy that is present, to make possible the division between

energies and their types and forms.

In discussing any new scientific concept we have found, in

writing or lecturing on the subject, it is better to start at the very

basics of that science, which provides a firm foothold for a better

understanding of the subject, the improvements to the concept,

theory or practical mechanics of the discovery or development

in the presentation.

At this point we present another misconception of magnetism.

It is today presented in textbooks and the general understanding

of a magnet’s magnetism that the energy transmitted by a magnet

is composed of “Lines of Force.”

Our laboratory findings show that energy radiated from the

magnet is in fact not lines of force but small cables of force.

THE CABLE EFFECT

Due to the importance of properly knowing and understanding

the makeup of magnetic energy coming from a magnet, we con¬

tinue here to present the findings of our laboratory over many years

of development. Another finding is actually seeing in part that

energy that is transmitted from the poles of a magnet. It is possible

to obtain photographic pictorial outlines that allow us to see the

magnet’s energies as they in turn affect the scanned 400 apx lines

of electron sweep appearing on the internal face of a color dot

cathode ray tube. Bringing one end of a magnet to and against

the exterior glass surface acts to cause the energies from the

magnet to displace the horizontal scan and vertical scan lines on

the tube’s surface. This activates the color dots in an outline of

the applied energy from the magnet’s poles. This resultant dis¬

placement display can then be photographed in color by the use

of color film with a F 1.8 lens on a good, well-mounted camera

with a time exposure of 11 seconds or less in a totally dark room.

The results are not lines of force being emitted from the poles

of a magnet but are miniature-size cables. These cables are several

thousandths of an inch in diameter at the very end of the magnet

pole. As they travel to 1/16 of an inch to many inches, these

LIMITS OF HUMAN EAR SENSITIVITY

64

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

Outline Representing in Part the

Frequencies, Number of Cycles per Second Found

in the Audio and Electromagnetic Spectrum

Mistaken Concepts of Magnetism 65

miniature cables enlarge and allow a view into the interior of

these cables. The spin effect is also noticeable by a pull, an

electronic vortex twist, that appears on the screen at the outside

edge of each cable and/or the roster. The horizontal scanning lines

that appear on the color dot cathode ray screen are pulled in the

direction of the magnet’s energy electron spin. The N pole acts

to present a left-hand spin in relation to the pole position and

that of its directed position to the screen’s surface. The S pole then

acts on applications to the surface of the tube to present a right-

hand spin. The cables also take on and present this electron spin

effect. The center of each cable contains an energy that is opposite

to the outside electron potential form. There is much more to this

cable effect and we hope at a later date to make available a book

on the discovery of the twin energies of the cable effect on

magnetic magnet energy.

Many theories and concepts persist in new methods to protect

men in space from harmful radiations of magnetic fields. One par¬

ticular concept is illustrated in the accompanying drawing.

MAGNETIC

"Plasma shielding,” an alternate plan, puts positive electric charge on craft to repel

protons—and usos superconductive magnet’s field to prevent approach of electrons

that would destroy charge.

In the presentation the use of super conductive tape wound

magnets is suggested. The tape is wound to make electromagnets

having no resistance to the flow of electricity by supercooling. The

belief was expressed that a very high magnetic charge would shield

persons inside the container against space radiations.

66

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

Although this concept was and is still novel and instructive, it

would not protect persons in the space container from the effects

of the magnetic fields due to the construction.

Our laboratory findings are definite on the biological effects

magnetic fields have on living systems. The high magnetic field

environment created in the suggested design have dangerous side

effects on the humans in the container.

From our research findings we offer the suggestion that man

in space can be better protected from space radiation in an

environment suitable to earth’s environment, and man would not

face a magnetic field lower in space than on earth. It is known

from space technology that leaving the earth’s magnetic environ¬

ment to a lower magnetic environment can result in serious dis¬

comfort or death from combined exposure to the lower magnetic

energy.

Our solution, based on our research findings, is to design

suitable magnetically treated clothing or a wall-to-wall internal

magnetic environment of the ship’s inner surface that will provide

the space travelers with protection against lower than normal

magnetic environments. Also, the outer skin of the ship may be

provided with an electromagnetic charge that would assist in offer¬

ing protection against many types of space radiation. This can be

done so there would be no effect to radio communications or equip¬

ment operations. The electromagnetic charge can be applied within

the ship or located outside the ship.

The effects of lower than earth’s magnetic field to living systems

are well known to NASA’s space medical directors; they are deadly

and most harmful. As we write this we believe that from the

developments we have made there may come a partial answer to

many of the problems facing future space research undertakings.

These developments show the direct possibility also that magnetic¬

ally treated clothing can be used to upgrade strength. Special

treatment of the clothing can also aid in the recovery from atomic

fallout exposure accidents that result from handling, using, or

accidental exposure to atomic energy and/or X-ray radiations.

Our discoveries show that when certain magnet magnetic

energies are used in adaptable clothing, arrest and recovery are

practicable in a great number of cases from the harmful radiations

as described.

Chapter Eight

WHY PREVIOUS EXPERIMENTS

HAVE FAILED TO RE REPRODUCIRLE

Since the late 1800s research has been carried on in many

countries of the world on the effects of a magnet’s energies. While

a great deal of important research data and resultant papers that

were written are still presented on the biological effects of mag¬

netic fields, much of the early work as well as the recent work

is not reproducible to obtain definite results.

In this chapter we will present some facts as to why these ex¬

periments, many of them of great importance had they been re¬

producible, could not be reproduced time after time with the same

results.

Figure A shows a laboratory horn-type magnet; its poles are

indicated by N for north and S for'south. A microscope slide is

shown between the two poles. Note that the subject matter B on

the slide is nearer the N pole than the S pole. By physical place¬

ment nearer the N pole a greater distance exists between the sub¬

ject matter and the S pole of this magnet.

Figure A Figure B Figure C

N is North Pole. S is South Pole. Slide marked S, and Specimen B.

The culture or biological specimen then would not be properly

aligned to receive both pole effects. It would, in fact, be receiving

67

68

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

more of the negative pole energy than the south pole, which is

positive energy, and part of the specimen would be in the center

of the Bloch Wall effect separation. This separation is where the S

pole energies as they travel toward the N pole would be in the

center of the 180 degree phase relation change that takes place be¬

tween the poles of each and every magnet.

Therefore, when this experiment was duplicated there could be

a change in the physical positioning of the slide and its specimen

to the pole effects. The results then could never be exactly re¬

produced, and should it be that it was possible to get this direct

exactness in positioning, the effects would be in three parts, not

one. To explain this refer to figure B. We see the exact center of

this horn-type magnet’s poles indicated by a straight line. This

is the center of the 180 degree phase change. This line indicated

by the letter O further indicates that we have no magnetic lines

of force that carry either the negative or positive pole effect at

this position. Instead, we have a division or zero point of energy

radiation. The same exact occurrence would take place if we used

a horseshoe magnet—see figure C. The line of separation is again

marked with the letter O.

Should we place a test tube of fluid upright between the two

poles of a magnet, we would, if its positioning was exact, obtain

the dual effect energies and the zero magnetic potential effect as

indicated by the phase change point O. We can see we have in

fact a three-stage potential radiated effect to the specimen, what¬

ever the nature of the specimen might be.

SMALL ANIMAL RESEARCH

We show here a small animal placed between the poles of a

large magnet. Many researchers use electromagnets—magnets hav¬

ing exact windings and connected to D.C. power sources. There

is a difference between the effects one can obtain from a solid state

metal or composition magnet and those of an electromagnet. We

discussed this earlier as to magnetic wave frequencies. In the poles

shown, N is north pole and S is south pole.

The popular positioning of small animals or rodents between

the poles of magnets is to place the animal in a confining cage

made of aluminum wire mesh, positioning the animal lengthwise

Why Previous Experiments Have Failed to Be Reproducible 69

between the poles. In this manner half of the animal’s body re¬

ceives the S pole energies and the other half the N pole energies.

We show in these drawings an animal lying sideways. This

was done to show that each end of the animal is receiving only

that particular pole’s energies, and the middle of the animal is

receiving the O Bloch wall magnetic field separation of the zero

magnetic field, the energy result of the center of the 180 degree

phase change of the magnetic spin effect.

In scientific books written by authorities today and those by

researchers who conducted similar research many years ago, we

find the ironclad theory that both poles present a “homogeneous

70 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

field.” While they refuse to change their thinking toward the facts

we have attempted time and again to present to some of these

scientists, their work will continue to be based only on misguided

and mistaken applications of magnetic fields in their research of

biological and biochemical systems. The two pole fields are not

homogeneous or the same.

Each pole has a separate and totally different effect to any and

all specimens to which it is applied. This encompasses all living

matter—airs, gases, solids, chemical reactions. This should open

new doors to advanced physics using this newly discovered law as

a foundation. While we say new, your senior author discovered

this law in 1936; however, scientists and researchers have refused

to accept this law in the past. Now is the time to update their

research and allow a better approach to advance this vital science

since it is a science important to all the known sciences of man

today.

MUTANTS ARE DEVELOPED BY THE

OLD CONCEPT APPLICATIONS

Let us now take the case of the growth and development of

mutants. One species that has been widely used in biomagnetic

research is the Drosophila melanogaster , commonly known as the

housefly. The continued use of equipment to hold the young fly or

the larva or the eggs prior to hatching has resulted in and after

exposure to the magnetic fields of a magnet in producing, as growth

and development proceed, mutants. These experiments have pro¬

duced specimens having one large eye, one withered wing, two

long legs, one short leg and one long leg, and so on. This is magnetic

mutation of the living system by controlled radiation of the fly

and can apply to insects, animals, or living systems by selected

magnetic fields.

The side of the insect placed next to the S pole will grow at a

faster rate since the S pole energies are the production of the

positive right-hand electron spin which causes an advanced growth

and development of any and all biological systems exposed to it

in the early stages of development before maturity has been attained

or by treating the larva before birth.

The reverse takes place when half of the animal, insect or

Why Previous Experiments Have Failed to Be Reproducible 71

other living system is exposed to the N pole for suitable periods.

The strength of the magnet used depends again on the technical

researcher as to the subject of his research. We have found that

from 1,000 to 4,500 gauss is the best curve or range from low to

high gauss that effects the best overall results of alternation to the

living system.

It is possible to program the changes of the genetic attitudes of

animals, plants, insects. We can change the normal genetic growth

and development to abnormal products of living systems so planned

and computed by advance knowledge and planning.

Total exposure would then result in the living system being

placed in either the S pole for advancement of the genetic pro¬

gramming or the N pole for arrest or development of the genetic

size and health of the system.

We emphasize to the student or professional researcher that

even greater changes can be found by even further and equal dis¬

coveries of the effects from a magnet’s energies using other forms

of concept discoveries. This is a vast field in itself and should

properly be presented in later releases.

The genetic changes we have programmed in our laboratory

experiments and findings were important in other research work

on cancers and cancer tumors of many types and stages of develop¬

ment.

THE POSSIBILITY OF DIAGNOSING

HUMAN ILLNESSES

WITH CONTROLLED MAGNETIC FIELDS

From the work and research we have conducted with animals

having a blood type and circulation system similar to man, we

foresee in the near future the release of a system for the detection

of nearly all human illnesses by application of the fields generated

and transmitted from a magnet—solid state or electromagnet.

The disclosure is based on the fact that it is now possible to

screen many complaints in animals by the physical reactions pre¬

sented by the animal’s nervous system when select and controlled

magnetic energies are applied to affected parts of that system. This

discovery was made while working with the nonhomogeneous mag¬

netic fields on animals and measuring their physical responses

under the separate and applied fields.

Chapter Nine

CANCERS AND TUMORS

AND MAGNETISM

In order for this book to be read and understood by the lay¬

man, student and professional researcher, we are refraining from

the use of highly technical material or language and the display of

mathematical computations. These materials are, however, avail¬

able for proper usage.

Over 300 active cancer biopsy transplants to laboratory strain

white rats, mice and rabbits, each having a similar blood type to

that of man, 89.6 percent, were programmed as to growth, develop¬

ment and/or arrest of the cancer. This was accomplished through

the proper application of the arresting energy of a magnet’s poles.

This was the N pole or negative electron spin effect of that pole’s

energies. Years of research found that one effect of cancer develop¬

ment is a genetic transfer from one generation to another, not nec¬

essarily in that order. A genetic carryover from one generation may

not be found to become active until the third or fourth generation.

Yet, positive information as a result of some 18 years of these studies

is convincing in our findings in this area of study. During the 18-

year period, two years were completely devoted to these studies.

Cell genetics can carry the active cancer seed for future generations

and development once the cancer seed is active in a living system.

This does not apply to all cancers. There are types that are local

and can be arrested and do not carry over as genetic transfer.

We will not entail a detailed discussion on what causes cancers

since there are as many causes of cancers as there are types and

kinds.

In our earlier discussions on the electromagnetic effects to man¬

kind we discussed the outer space electromagnetic effects on man

and his biosphere (biological atmosphere). Several causes for can¬

cer were presented in that discussion.

73

74

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

At this time in our history there are over 100 types and kinds

of cancers. What may arrest one type will not necessarily have an

affect in arresting other types. Clearly we can see from such facts

that no one agent will arrest all cancers. There has been no agent,

process, drug, or development to combat all cancers effectively as

there is no known single cause for the development of cancers.

Accepting these scientific facts as we know them to be, should

we find a single form of combating agent that would arrest all

cancers this would be a remarkable and outstanding discovery.

There are various forms of treatment that will arrest cancer

development of many kinds and types if they are caught in their

early stages of development.

We are interested in the early stages of development and equally

in the advanced stages. In each phase we find that when magnetic

energy of the negative N pole is applied to the cancer site, a re¬

markable reduction in the condition and also a marked arrest in

further development of the cancer condition takes place.

Our laboratory has not at this time been able to secure biopsies

of active cancers of all of the more than one hundred types known

to exist. We have, however, obtained through medical doctors and

professional people engaged in cancer research many different sam¬

ples of active cancer tissues for transplant and development. It is

well known that you cannot transplant any form of cancer and

have it take unless there is a state of infection at the transplant site.

Cancers will not take when transplanted to healthy tissue. In our

laboratory we have infected that area planned for active transplant

of cancer tissue cells prior to making the transplant. The infection

has failed to take in some cases and had to be repeated, but it will

infect eventually unless there are adverse conditions to this taking

or acceptance action on the part of the research animal. Prior

magnetic exposure has prevented an active take of infection even

after several attempts have been made to graft an active cancer

transplant. A form of antiserum, or defense mechanism, seems to

have developed in a number of cases to prevent the cancers from

taking and developing after such exposures.

Prior to the active cancer cell tissue transplants the animals

were radiated, exposed, to the negative energy of the N pole ener¬

gies for several hours. This acted to resist our attempts for a suc¬

cessful cancer graft to result or take. Take is used here to mean the

Cancers and Tumors

75

infected tissue accepts the active cancer transplant and develops

into a state of multiplying cancer cells.

The encouraging fact is that when tissue is exposed to negative

magnetic energies prior to the transplant of the cancer-infected tis¬

sue, there is a noticeable resistance to its successful development

even to previous infected and prepared sites.

Here we see “What is now needed is a new approach as to the

unification of energy.” This statement is not original. In fact, a

number of outstanding researchers have made this statement within

the past few years. It is becoming more apparent that unification

of the findings in the many fields of applied cancer research is

needed to obtain a fresh, new, theory or concept for use of all the

sciences that have shown good results in arresting the development

of cancers.

Should we start at the very beginning of the structure and basic

energy of all biological living systems which makes it possible for

them to live and multiply, we would find the atom and its electrical

system, which is a great teacher for new approaches and better

understanding of what we are working with and our purposes.

In making in-depth examinations of the applications of electrical

and radiological energies which have proven to be partially success¬

ful in arresting all stages of cancers, we should study the laws of

the atom—the electrical building block of all matter, including all

biological life forms. From this study of the atom we can see it

is possible to arrest any form in the living system, including bac¬

teria, malfunctions, and mutations of cells, tissues, organs and

glands. Each of the aforementioned segments are the result of

molecules being built from single groupings of atoms.

When this primary and most elementary law of physics is ap¬

plied to living cells, we see a well-balanced electrical system, and

any changes will upset the well-regulated bioelectrical system of

the cell, causing it to deform, mutate, or break down. Since it is

now possible to measure and record the voltage existing on the

outer surface of the blood cell’s membrane, the first recordable

signals tell us there are difficulties arising in the structure of the

membrane supporting walls of the cells; as in the case of the red

blood cell we find a rise in the negative voltage. The rise in neg¬

ative ion charges on the outside of the membrane wall is then

compared with what happens to the atom. When there is a rise in

76 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

the negative electrons on the outer vortex of the atom, the atom is

no longer the simple type of atom that makes up a substance; it is

then altered to make the molecules form a more complex structure

of the element or substance. We might then compare the simple

hydrogen atom and the second type of the same hydrogen complex

that is slightly more complex, yet, nevertheless, remains a hydrogen

atomic complex.

The blood cells’ bioelectrical ion charges, which result from the

charges taken on in the form of sodium and potassium ions, their

charges, and level of charges, depend on the selectivity of the walls

of the membrane.

Anything that changes the selectivity or the charges of the cells

and their membrane supporting structure will affect the health and

welfare of the cell proper. Other direct research findings that link

the membrane variations and the transformation of normal cells

into malignant cells present a linear curve as to the voltage meas¬

ured across the normal cell, and the rise above normal negative

voltage found to exist on the cross axis measurement of the malig¬

nant cells. In further investigations, we find in all cases of human

or animal biological stages of internal repair we have a rise in the

negative potential on the outer surface of the affected section. This

also follows a resultant linear curve as to the amount of negative

voltage potential as to the degree of damage compared to the rate

of natural healing of the affected part to the living system.

However, here we depart from the normal. The cells that de¬

velop into malignant cells at first show a rise in negative potential

voltage across the cell’s structure, a slow change takes place, and

we find when the cells are fully developed as malignant cancer cells

the negative voltage across the cells drops to a lower than normal

negative voltage potential.

The first effect is the rise in negative voltage which we find

happens in all damaged segments of the living system. The re¬

sultant drop in below normal negative voltage across the affected

segment tells us that repairs have not been made and that part,

segment or cell is a mutant no longer under the repair control of

the living systems’ defense mechanism. This is noted by the neg¬

ative voltage being lower than normal. We note here that normal

means the normal potential found to exist on the same segments,

Cancers and Tumors 77

and cells that are present when there is no difficulty experienced

in or by that segment or cell’s normal operating potential.

In further study of this effect we find nondividing cells have a

high normal potential negative voltage opposed to a very low or

lower than normal voltage existing on the cross section of dividing

cells. Dividing cells means cells that are affected and are malignant,

including rapidly proliferating tumor cells.

As a direct result of these galvanic potential related energies,

we find whenever we have damage to any part, segment or cell of

the living system we have a higher than normal rise in the negative

voltage potential. When normal healing and recovery results the

negative returns to normal. If we then find a lower than normal

negative to continue we have a section that has failed to recover

and return to a normal state of health.

On page 78, Item A shows a normal red blood cell. Item

B represents a form of malignant cell—note the deformed mem¬

brane outlines in Item B. Item C is an electron microscope photo¬

graph reproduction of a healthy red blood cell. Item D is a red

blood cell that has decomposed, showing the breakdown and re¬

sultant misshaped cell when affected by the presence of a distorted

potential of biological voltages. Migration by active electrolytic

transfer from one cell to the next results in any number of asso¬

ciated blood decomposure forms of diseases. In every case of ad¬

vanced malignancy there is found to exist a lower than normal

voltage across the cell’s membrane and an increase in the plasma

and/or fluid amounts and flow between each and every cell. To

present this rise in fluid flow and the distortion of the cells mem¬

branes, we show on page 79 several low microscopic magnification

photographs ranging from 60 to 100 X power of blood cell patterns.

These are a result of drawing a few drops of whole blood from a

fingertip, placing on a microscope slide, and allowing to dry, and

then examining them under the low power magnification. Using

this most elementary method of screening the blood, a number of

very interesting facts are brought to light.

No. 1 on page 79 shows a microscopic enlargement taken by a

1800 power microscope of a few normal blood cells. We use this

as an example.

No. 2 shows the increase of plasma, fluid, that can clearly be

78

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

ITEM A

ITEM B

ITEM C ITEM D

seen between the dried blood cell clustering. This sample was

taken from a male, 44 years of age, suffering from cancer of the

supermaxillary with metastasis. Study here shows profound distur¬

bance of the clot retraction pattern.

No. 3 shows a blood sample of normal blood after drying and

using the low power 60 to 100 power microscope lens for this

screening study.

No. 4 shows a dried blood sample of a male, 70 years of age,

suffering from advanced leukemia. Note the almost identical pat-

termto that of one of the many and foremost types of cancer.

No. 5 shows a pattern of dried blood of a 12-year-old female,

symptomless. Note normal blood clotting pattern.

No. 6 shows a dried blood sample of a female, 34 years of age,

four months pregnant with no cancer development. Note the sim¬

ilar pattern of the disturbances of the blood and the increase of

plasma, fluids, separating the blood cells and blood cell clusters.

Cancers and Tumors

79

No. 3. Male; 55 years; symptomless;

normal clot retraction pattern.

No. 2. Male; 44 years; cancer of the

supermaxillary with metastasis; pro¬

found disturbance of the clot retraction

pattern.

No. 4. Male; 70 years; leukemia; dis¬

turbance of the clot retraction pattern

almost identical with cancer.

No. 5. Female; 12 years; symptomless;

normal clot retraction pattern.

No. 6. Female; 34 years; but four months

pregnant; advanced disturbance of the

clot retraction pattern.

80

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

These microphotographs show us in this simple form of screen¬

ing the changes in the amount of fluids, plasmas, that flow between

blood cells clusters when there is an abnormal condition existing

in the system. Abnormal meaning not as we would find blood serum

flowing under normal conditions. These photographs also show

how pregnancy alters the amount of fluid serum flow between the

cells and that which happens when cancer is present.

Photograph No. 6 presents the clue that when the body is

under stress as in the condition of pregnancy there is a weakening

of the normals as the embryo in forming is calling on the human

system for blood and all the basics needed to support this additional

life developing in the body and the system devoted to new human

development. This is an overall demand which acts to upset the

serum balances of the cells while not the cells themselves.

The cells in the case of changes in the blood serums and/or

fluids are not affected as they are in stages of cancer developments.

In cancer developments we have a destructive mutation of the cells’

membranes.

In the case of cancer, the increase in the separation of blood

cells and the clustering separated by the serum amounts, as an

increase in the amount of blood fluids, plasma, this fluid then acts

to be a carrier for the escaping electrolyte that flows from the

malignant cell and it now appears to act to upset the electrolyte

fluids of other cells. We then see the possibility that this effected

electrolyte can and may be the carrier or active transport for fluids

escaping from the decomposed cell walls of effected cancer cells.

There are two major theories which are foremost today in re¬

search into the causes and arrest of cancer. One theory is that a

virus may be responsible for the start of the condition. The second

theory is that food intake, chemicals in foods, or for a number of

reasons, a condition develops causing a disturbance in the blood

cells’ balance as to the biological chemistry of the cells, therefore,

the tissues.

Today researchers know more about cancer development than

at any other time in history. However, the mystery of why cancer

develops in the human or living system remains. We have dis¬

covered in part that tumor cells develop and multiply rapidly with¬

out any apparent control responses. Further, they have the ability

Cancers and Tumors 81

to spread rapidly throughout the living system. It has also been

discovered that natural sunlight can cause cancer of the skin, as

can other energy radiations. Chemicals and gases, such as cigarette

smoke, can trigger cancer of the lungs. Certain viruses when trans¬

planted into laboratory animals can also cause cancers. On eating

the flesh of livestock that have been fed certain feeds containing a

number of chemical growth stimulants^ cancer again has been pro¬

moted. There are a number of viruses that when injected into rats,

mice or rabbits develop into cancers and are transmitted by inject¬

ing the blood from one to another. If we study these transferable

reactions that act to trigger the cancer cell development, we see

there is a good chance cancer is caused by a delayed to prompt

response of the virus.

THE EFFECTS OF MAGNETIC FIELDS ON CANCERS

Of the several hundred research transplants of cancer to rats,

rabbits, mice, and other animals, it has been proven that the N

pole, the magnetic negative energy of the two poles and their

separate energies, has slowed, controlled and arrested further de¬

velopment of the active cancer site. Better than 90 percent of the

cases so treated have shown a control and arrest of the cancerous

condition, depending on the state of advancement of the cancer

and the age and physical condition of the animal in question.

To further support this finding, when the S pole of a magnet,

this being the positive energy of a magnet, is applied to cancers

they become more advanced and then develop, grow and spread at

an accelerated rate. Therefore, the two effects prove that the ener¬

gies generated by a magnet’s two poles can and will prove in the

future to be a new application of a very old science toward the

arrest and/or containment of cancer development.

As pointed out earlier, when any disorder, break, certain in¬

fections, or physically damaged parts of the living system are

placed in a strong negative energy field there is almost at once an

arrest of further damaging developments. We also discussed earlier

that nature itself directs a negative electrical field to a broken bone

or other damaged segment of the living system under attack. We

feel this shows in part the effects of controlled negative energy

82

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

effects of the north magnetic pole to aid in the arrest and more

rapid he alin g of many, if not all, forms of disorders to the living

system.

THE CONTROL OR ARREST OF

CANCERS BY MAGNETO THERAPY

Leaving the effects of magnetic fields on cancers and tumors,

let us review the findings of the work in our laboratory to date and

the results we have obtained by the use of this energy on actual

cancer transplants, which have shown that we have a new and

vital tool to combat, control or arrest many, if not all, types of

cancerous conditions.

If the cancer is deep beneath the skin’s surface, care must be

taken to insure that the cancer site will receive negative (N pole)

magneto magnetic energies having gauss strength from 2,500 to

4,500 and that this amount of energy is not merely applied to the

outer flesh. To assure proper dosage to the cancer site, calculations

must be made by measuring in inches the distance from the N pole

of the magnet to the depth the researcher wishes the treatment

exposure to reach, then selecting the proper magnet or electro¬

magnetic power having those certain gauss energies at that distance

from the pole end. This can be done by taking a magnetometer

reading at X number of inches from the N pole of the magnet

selected. Naturally, should the cancer be within the body, this

means we would have a higher than 2,500 to 4,500 gauss strength

on the body’s surface.

THE INCREASE IN THE PRODUCTION

OF ERYTHROCYTES

Using the results of over 300 cancer research test cases of an¬

imals having a blood type similar to man, the findings of this work

show:

An increase in the production of erythrocytes in peripheral

blood while proliferation of leukocytes is inhibited as a result of

exposure of the cancer site to the negative N pole energy. These

findings are documented by transplants of cancer, A through C

classifications, to large and small rodents and to other animals.

Cancers and Tumors

83

These transplants having developed into first to third degree types,

exposure thereof to the negative N pole energies resulted in an

average of 88 percent arrest of further development and 87.5 per¬

cent recovery. The number of cases tested was 290 to 325. Success

of this project was, in part, due to careful handling and exact and

proper exposure over several months. Again, the fact remains that

any exposure of the cancer to the positive S pole energies immedi¬

ately caused an advancement of the condition. The S pole energies

are positive and are similar in part to the effects of certain radio¬

logical energies being used today in an attempt to arrest cancers.

Additionally, we have discovered that the negative energies of the

N pole of the magnet also strengthens the unaffected surrounding

cells, generating what appears to be an increase of the natural

defense mechanism of those unaffected cells to combat spreading

of the cancer.

In reviewing our research work with electromagnetic energies,

we find we are working with an energy closely related to the one

provided by the living system to the cells and tissues of the body

which acts as a natural barrier to any form of cell or tissue break¬

down. The results of our research work have shown that appli¬

cation of this natural energy may open doors for additional research

and development not only for the control of cancer conditions but

for a new approach to control, arrest and prevention of many of

the diseases medical sicence now finds difficult to cope with.

In studying the two immunological defenders produced by the

living system, these being B lymphocytes, which are manufactured

by the bone marrow, and T lymphocytes, which are produced by

the thymus located at the base of the throat, these two important

fluids, which are antibodies, present the body with a natural de¬

fense mechanism to arrest, attack and control the numerous in¬

vading viruses,bacteria, infections, etc., that the body must defend

itself against.

Although many drugs have been developed today, nearly all

of these drugs result in poisoning of the cancer site or total or

partial poisoning of the living system. Many researchers believe

these drugs are the answer to arrrest of further spreading of the

cancers. However, poisoning of the system with alkaloid phar¬

maceuticals is only partially effective and is extremely harmful to

the body. Yet, if the body can accept this toxic matter, some im-

84 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

provements will be shown but at the expense of the overall health

of the patient. Therefore, we are convinced that attention should

be directed toward the use of negative N pole energies and its

applications for the arrest of cancer in either its primary or ad¬

vanced stages, thereby giving the patient an advanced method of

relief or the actual arrest of the cancerous condition.

From our years of laboratory research into the causes and arrest

or relief of cancers by the use of magneto magnetic negative ener¬

gies, we fully believe cancers are a direct result of an internal virus

existing in the body or are actively transmitted to the body by ex¬

ternal biological and/or chemical atmospheres, or a combination

of these factors. Although not apparent during the life span of most

men and women, we feel a cancer virus exists in all living systems

and under ideal conditions may be triggered into a cancerous state.

Evidence supporting this theory has been reported by other re¬

searchers. With the research now being conducted throughout the

world, we believe an announcement of an anticancer vaccine could

be imminent.

However, until an anticancer serum which will provide resist¬

ance to this disease is discovered and developed, the development

and application of negative magneto magnetic energies could save

millions of lives annually, worldwide.

The use of X rays, cobalt and radioactive energies are all of

value. Again, we find that in each case of their use there is resultant

poisoning of the living system. Within the composite electromag¬

netic formula of vibrations of atomic energy that these energy forms

have and transmit to the living system, there are positive ions’

reflective energies which in nearly all, if not all, cases act to ad¬

vance the body’s acceptance of these positive energies, which pro¬

motes many phases of the cancer condition. The entire projection

of desired results is in the fact that these forms of energies will

sometimes arrest certain types of cancers. If we were to agree with

this accepted method of cancer control, we would need to see a

considerably higher percentage of arrest than is now indicated.

Here, as in the pharmaceutical drug usage, we find the cells ad¬

joining those infected with cancer are adversely affected, lowering

their defense against the continued outer wall membrane break¬

down that is a result of cancer and is also a result of radiological

exposure treatments.

Cancers and Tumors

85

Our investigations show that by the use of negative magneto

magnetic energies we arrest the breakdown of adjoining cells and

also arrest further progression of the cancer condition. We also

strengthen the adjoining cells to act as a natural defense against

further cancer development.

Further, we have found nerve pains and physical pressure re¬

sulting in nerve pain can be greatly arrested by the application

outlined above used to arrest and control many forms of cancer

development.

Chapter Ten

THE BIOELECTRICAL CONTROL

OF NERVE PAIN

A s in the accepted theories and findings of nerve bioelec¬

trical activities, we find the nerve’s bioelectrical systems entertain

exactly reverse galvanic energies to the measurements and findings

of those existing in the blood and tissue cells of the living system.

Blood and tissue cells have a negatively charged sodium exterior

membrane and a positively charged potassium interior. The outer

fiber covering of the nerves has a positive charged sodium ion con¬

dition and a negative interior potassium charge, which is the exact

reverse of the galvanic potentials found wi thin the blood and tissue

cells.

When nerve endings are affected by abnormal pressure, in¬

fection, disease, or a severed condition, they exert a potential energy

that automatically informs the brain of danger, damage or pressure

—internal or external. When we apply magnetic negative energies

to this affected nerve state, there is a lowering of the positive ex¬

ternal potential of the outer nerve fiber coating, resulting in a se¬

dated action. This is caused by the lowering of the sensitivity of

the nerve since its highly effective and sensitive positive ion po¬

tential has been reduced. The inversion of the positive ion charge

existing on the nerve’s surface is directed to the N pole magnetic

energy field, which lowers the nerve’s sensitivity and its positive

ion sodium charge, resulting in less galvanic transfer of pain infor¬

mation reaching the brain for translation.

Shown on page 88 are drawings of the nerves and a brief re¬

view of their working order. These drawings are included for better

understanding of the effects of negative energies of the magneto

magnetic emissions on the nerves. Drawing B illustrates the power

plant of the nerves, and Drawing A shows how this energy is trans¬

mitted to the muscles.

87

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

DRAWING A

SENSORY

NERVE .

ENDINGS

/T*

NERVE FIBER' g

CELL

BODY

:fr: K]

Z

&

<#g

DRAWING B

SENSORY

NERVE ENDING

TERMINALS

MOTOR

NERVE

ENDING

INTERNEURON

$<: -\

it MOTOR NEURON

* 9

/*: ^ 4 *

. 3 .

iv - -/• *

*. -5** * V* o *

ft* vV „

6 fo'. .§< *

uu * •<<

» * »

*» m «

% iS* “

POTASSIUM Cr—-0

ION * ** •

NODE

DIRECTION

OF IMPULSE

MUSCLE FIBERS

Above is the route of the simple result

reflex from signal to actual movement

of the muscle.

SODIUM ION

Above is the energy plant of the

nerves. The nerve fiber carries the

bioelectrical voltages, as the fiber is

insulated from the other complexes.

The fiber is surrounded by positive

sodium ions and has potassium nega¬

tively charged ions in its center.

89

Control of Nerve Pain

The effects of applying N pole magnetic energy to the nerves

act to lower their sensitivity. This lowering of sensitivity allows us

a certain control of a pain condition. When we transmit S pole

energies to the nerves they respond with a greater sensitivity to

pain. We then have the reactions to the two separate pole energies

of the magnet’s negative and positive resultant effects.

Referring to Drawing B, the generation of energy within the

nerve itself results when a sensory nerve ending is stimulated. The

sodium ions are quickly admitted into the nerve at the node, this

being a break in the insulation. The following reaction sets off a

chain of pulse charges that extend from one node to the next and

is carried to the center of the nervous system.

Referring to Drawing A, the energy from a nerve reflex, these

being impulses, presents a stimulus that ends in the contraction of

the motive muscle. This energy transfer is made possible by the

neuron as it triggers this energy which flows along the nerve fiber

through the cell body to an end in the terminals in the spinal

cord. At this point the interneuron acts to transmit these impulses

to the motor neuron where these impulses act to motor the muscle.

It is equally important we consider the fact that when there is

no disease present, the use and application of the S pole energies

can then be used for strengthening the nerves and their resultant

responses. This offers still another possible new tool for medical

researchers in restoring the nerves to normal or near normal activ¬

ities in cases where such encouragement is needed.

Not only the nerves but the muscles also may be stimulated,

if and when needed. The offerings that the S pole energies can

deliver when applied to nerves and muscles also applies to all

organs, glands, and segments of the living system.

The speed of the heart can be controlled, as well as its duties.

Considering these values we find ourselves with a new and im¬

portant tool to aid mankind find the long sought answers to many

complaints which for generations have caused great concern. This

also encompasses rodents, mammals, and all forms of life.

Since it has been found possible to stimulate, as well as control

and regulate, glands, cells, and tissues, we then consider that these

discoveries may encompass aid to patients suffering from many

types of mental illness. Help to these persons could be considered

since all food taken into the system acts in many ways to affect

mental attitudes and the resulting reactions. Take as an example

90 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

the amino acids. Typtophan is one of the some 20 amino acids that

are the building blocks of proteins which in turn manufacture

serotonin. Serotonin, in part, is responsible for the means by which

neurons carry messages to parts of the brain—it is an active means

of information relay transfer. The loss of serotonin can activate an

oversexual interest. A normal to excessive amount of this serum

acts to encourage mental processes directed to the normal human

behavior patterns, providing no other condition affecting mental

behavior exists.

THE AMINO ACIDS AND RESULTANT

PROTEIN DEVELOPMENT

Taking a sample of any of the many types of amino acids—the

basic building block of the protein structure—and exposing them to

the S pole energies of a biomagnet, can and will inspire a higher

degree of energy and development resulting in a higher valued

substance. These facts were discovered in the research toward the

arrest of cancers by dual and separate magnetic pole field effects.

Everything that can be done with the positive S pole energies

of a magnet to inspire strength and biological developments can,

to a large degree, be reversed with the negative N pole energies.

This was discovered after hundreds of exposures of these energies

to the living systems’ glands, organs, or segments, as each responded

in the same manner.

The facts, as they now present themselves, are that when we

use the N pole negative energies we do not stop the production or

development of life systems, instead we simply arrest their actions

or developments without the use of toxins or poisons to obtain this

effect. This provides us with a far better approach to disease arrest,

as in the case of cancer treatment. The methods presently used

cause a radiological poisoning of the system, in addition to the

effects to the cancer or tumor site. We know within the scientific

community this may be subject to some arguments. However, the

facts speak for themselves, and the overall improvements the sci¬

ence of biomagnetics offers will outweigh the objections of the few

who may oppose its use. We feel if these objections should occur

they would be based on the fact that those who make them do not

have the practical work and, therefore, have as yet not obtained

the full impact of this science and valuable approach to this work.

Chapter Eleven

MAGNETISM AND GRAVITY

Earlier we discussed the reactions magnetism, electromag¬

netic energies, and atmospheric energies have on man and the bio¬

logical system. This also includes plants, which are living systems.

While we have up to this point discussed these energies and

their effects on living systems, we will now show how magnetism

and gravity are combined and react together, as we cannot have

one without the other, and how these two energies affect all living

systems.

We have shown that a magnet is composed of two forms of

energy that are similar yet different in their energy charges and

potential. If we take two long straight or cylinder magnets, then

place the south pole of one magnet in contact with the north pole

of the other magnet, they are no longer two magnets but have com¬

bined to become one magnet. There is only one north pole at one

end of the magnet and one south pole at the other end of the

magnet. Where they came together we find the Bloch Wall, the

point of no recordable magnetism.

We may continue to add more and more magnets. When we do

this the magnetic energy combines to form still only one magnet.

At the direct physical center of all the magnets, regardless of how

many may be used, we find the Bloch Wall has come into existence.

The Bloch Wall, as we have shown earlier, is the mid or center of

each and every singular magnet. It is the point where the magnets

energies alter their spin, and each pole then spins in an opposite

direction as to its electron movement.

The next interesting fact is that should you in any way break

a magnet in two parts, each part then becomes a two pole magnet,

regardless of the size or shape of the two pieces. Each part forms

its own two poles—the north and the south pole.

91

92

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

Can a magnet’s two potential energy forces provide us with

clues to its relationship with the force field we know as gravity?

Is a magnet’s energy a form of atomic energy?

If chemicals and other materials can be magnetically polarized,

will their weight change?

The answers to these questions now appear to be a very definite

yes.

In answering these questions our explanations are based on

actual laboratory experiments that resulted in additional new in¬

formation relating to how magnetism affects all matter, fluids, airs

and/or gases.

For our introduction to our answer we present a drawing on

this page. This drawing was prepared to show that the magnet’s

electron spins will not combine or merge. Therefore, they are not

the same in nature nor are they homogeneous in energy form.

The Point of No Measurable Amount

_0— of Magnetism —0—

—E. Negative, — ® +E. Positive, +

—E—Represents Voltage, or ^ -f-E—Represents Positive Voltage,

for—E—Negative Energy E— ff +E or Positive Energy.

Note that in the drawing the north pole’s energy spin is to the

left, while the south pole’s energy spin is to the right. These two

energies cannot combine to form a unit of energy as we are led

to believe in modem text materials. We have expressed voltage

Magnetism, and Gravity 93

above as a possible first effect energy transfer. We have discussed

earlier that the cables, or lines of force, travel in two directions

not one. Voltage is shown by the letter E and the letter I for cur¬

rent. There has yet to be presented a suitable word for this dual

force that acts as voltage and current does in electrical systems.

The use of the term current, as expressed by I, is not the proper

word, yet it will serve to identify the differences in part.

Continuing in our introductory material to the questions asked,

study the drawing that is shown at the bottom of the page as the

reason why the two poles of the magnet, their electron electrical

energy spinning in opposite directions, fails to unify where they

meet in the center of any magnet. That drawing indicates that at

the center of each magnet there is a 180 degree phase change, a

directional spin reversal. It is then at this point where the point

of no measurable amount of magnetism can be recorded or meas¬

ured. This point has been named the Bloch Wall.

However, should we study a drawing that has been published

in a number of highly technical journals and books that attempt

to explain this phenomenon of such a rapid, quick, unification of

both reversal spin energies, we can see that while this is possible,

it lacks the inversion of one energy to the other in the manner that

energies unite under other similar unification of transmitted pro¬

pagations as is shown in the drawing on this page.

THE BROKEN “8”

In the study of the unification of opposing potentials, we find

on examining the energy there is the presence of the figure “8”.

We see this by making a visual study of the effects of the magnet's

BLOCH WALL “O” BLOCH WALL

Q The South Pole %

The North Pole ’A

94

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

energies on the screen of a large cathode ray oscilloscope. We will

discuss this on page 97. At the left of the drawing are shown the

left-hand spin and circulating lines of force that are present in the

north pole half of a magnet, marked N. Next, see the point midway,

O, at the center of these lines of force. This is the point of no

measurable amount of magnetism, the Bloch Wall. Note that the

figure 8 appears as a broken figure 8. The upper part of this broken

8 shows a negative magnetic force, while the bottom is shown to

have a positive charge and also reverses the direction of the spin.

From this point on to the right, we find we have a right directional

spin, or the start of the south poles positive energy.

Referring again to page 93, the drawing and the figure 8, we

are aware that when energies are found in a natural state there is

a division between each potential or charge. This division is equal.

We believe the long studies of visual evidences we have made

offer a totally new concept of how the energies of the magnet

combine to afford a unification of the two energies, yet at the

same time act to keep them separated. This we can see by the

broken figure 8 in the drawing on page 93. The upper half of the

figure 8 being negative in respect to the bottom half, which is

positive. Next, the N pole energies act to affect a negative potential,

and the S pole energies then affect a positive potential. Consider

that this dividing line, as in the center of the figure “8” shown, is

thinner than a human hair in width. When this is considered com¬

pressed, encompassing the entire spins of force, each spin each

circle of energy, it taxes one’s thoughts on the mathematical per¬

fection, unity and compression we must envision to present this

graphical picture to our mind.

Consider other electromagnetic visual projective investigations,

such as in the study of modulated radio frequencies and the char¬

acteristics of wave propagations. Again, by the use of a suitable

cathode ray oscilloscope, injecting these complex signals into the

cathode ray scope, and the visual display on a screen, we can

make some valuable visual comparison studies on the complex

wave systems and their displays. Coupled with the possibility of

magnetic displacement of known wave propagation display, we

can gain a greater understanding of the energies of the magnet,

their form, shape, energies and spin direction, as well as the overall

projection of these magnetic energies from the magnet poles.

The cathode ray oscilloscope gives a visual representation of

signals at both audio and radio frequencies and can therefore be

used for many types of measurements that are not possible with

instruments of the types discussed earlier. In radio work, one

of the principal uses of the scope is for displaying an amplitude-

modulated signal so a phone transmitter can be adjusted for proper

modulation and continuously monitored to keep the modulation

96

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

percentage within proper limits. For this purpose a veiy simple

circuit will suffice.

The versatility of the scope can be greatly increased by adding

amplifiers and linear deflection circuits, but the design and ad¬

justment of such circuits tends to be complicated if optimum per¬

formance is to be secured. Special components are generally re¬

quired. Oscilloscope kits for home assembly are available from a

number of suppliers, and since their cost compares very favorably

with that of a home-built instrument of comparable design, they

are recommended for serious consideration by those who have need

for or are interested in the wide range of measurements that is pos¬

sible with a fully equipped scope.

The heart of the oscilloscope is the cathode ray tube, a vacuum

tube in which the electrons emitted from a hot cathode are first

accelerated to give them considerable velocity, then formed into a

beam, and finally allowed to strike a special translucent screen

which fluoresces, or gives off fight at the point where the beam

strikes. A beam of moving electrons can be moved laterally, or

deflected, by electric or magnetic fields, and since its weight and

inertia are negligibly small, it can be made to follow instantly the

variations in periodically changing fields at both audio and radio

frequencies.

The electrode arrangement that forms the electrons into a beam

is called the electron gun.

To allow a certain amount of technical understanding of what

a cathode ray visual viewer system is, see the drawing, which pro¬

vides a very primary basic design of this tube. The cathode ray

tube was the first invention for display of electromagnetic energy

and is the forerunner of the present-day large television tubes. The

short description of this tube will allow a fundamental understand¬

ing of this visual means of examining electromagnetic energies that

otherwise could not be seen by the human eye.

As shown in the drawing, to the left end of the internal parts

within the tube proper, the section marked “Control Electrode

(Grid No. 1),” is where the signals or their effects are introduced

into the tube for visual display on the fluorescent screen located

at the far right end of the tube. This is the viewing screen.

It is a fact that externally applied magnetic fields will affect

the cathode ray beam generated by the electron gun as it strikes

The Energy of a Magnet in Cables of Force

This picture represents the color dot displacement of the cathode ray

scan that is displaced by the external applied energies of a magnet.

Note the geometrical perfection of the mathematically correct cables

of force shown in this two-dimensional magnetic displacement photo¬

graph. The red center of each cable is considered to be the positive

potential, as opposed to the surrounding color, which is considered

to be negative potential. View each circle in the cables of force as

though looking at the end of a cable that has been cut. Of further in¬

terest, note that the greater the distance the cables are from the

magnet the greater the size of the cables.

Magnetism and Gravity 97

the screen. This is done by placing one end of a cylinder magnet

or straight bar magnet directly in contact and against the outer

front surface of this tube. However, before doing this, supply the

internal grid control with a horizontal bar test pattern from a tele¬

vision bar signal generator. We will see the horizontal and vertical

bars appear on the screen. Then, bringing up the end of the mag¬

net to the screen where the bars, both vertical and horizontal, are

displaced they form an outline of the magnetic energy that is now

passing through the glass screen and deflecting the pattern dis¬

played on the screen. While this allows us to see with our eyes

the spin of each pole, it also presents many new theories and con¬

cepts about the core of the magnet and its energies that are focused

to extreme fine lines of force we have designated cables of force.

The discovery of the figure “8” was made by refinements to the

above simple method in seeing the energy effects on the tube’s

screen. This geometric display prompted us to go deeper into the

fact that at the Bloch Wall there existed a balance as well as the

change in the unity of the pole spin direction. There is a neutral

state at the Bloch Wall, as can be seen by the presence of two

half segments of two energies. This then cancels out either energy,

forming the Bloch Wall effect. During the instant cancellation

there is also the point where one energy ends and the other begins.

In our developments with still further advanced systems that

use the cathode ray electron gun principle, we have discovered

that each end of a straight bar or cylinder magnet produces a cone

shape of emitted energies. While very similar to an ice cream cone,

its energies are not quite so pointed at the small end. The small

end emits from the magnet’s pole to grow in size, yet keeps a geo¬

metric perfect circle as it extends outward. We have measured this

cone effect for many feet from a conventional magnet. It shows no

point of return to the magnet. The straight line projection from

the core center of a magnet is again a factor of great importance

since this is also not traceable in a return to the magnet. This is a

different cone effect than we first mentioned. Further, in discussing

laws of the magnet, should we take a bar or cylinder magnet—long

or medium long—that has been made with a hole running through

its entire length, we would find in using the cathode ray contact

to the screen, methods previously described, a compression of elec¬

tron energy within the core of this magnet that would surpass any

98

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

artist’s dream of perfection. There also is a point where energy is

focused down to an almost microscopically small dimension of con¬

stant energy. This is still to be explored further. The technical name

for the figure “8” is the Lissajous electronic display projection figure.

Geometric and mathematical laws show us that a 360 degree

phase shift is possible with open-ended circles, as we have discov¬

ered with the figure “8”, in complete separation of the two energies.

This may also be computed to give us a fractional minus error, yet

is very close in exact calculations.

There should not be any question in the readers mind by now

that both poles are different in potential and spin direction, which

identifies the energy potential differences and the effects each can

have on living biological systems. All of these experiments, outlines

and development discoveries are reproducible by anyone, at any

time, at any location, if these persons are so equipped to carry out

the experiments properly.

CHANGES IN GRAVITATIONAL WEIGHT

On page 99 we show a number of drawings to better outline and

describe the effects of gravity and magnetism on the physical

weight of chemicals, fluids and solutions.

At the top of page 99 we show a large commercial electromagnet

connected to its power supply which converts A.C. voltage and

current to D.C. voltage and current. This supplies the large electro¬

magnet with D.C. current that makes the electromagnet a D.C.

electromagnet. The effects of an electromagnet are not the same

in many respects as the energies of a solid state metal or composi¬

tion magnet. This we have found in other experiments which we

may describe in detail in a further publication. Another D.C. elec¬

tromagnet with, power supply in table console is shown on page 99.

We now show a test tube three-fourths full of water or chemical

solution or any solution of a fluid nature. It need not be a fluid

but we chose a fluid for discussion.

The exposure of and treatment to fluids, liquids and proteins

by this method has provided us with a great deal of vital research

information that is far-reaching.

You will note on the study of the position of the test tube that

the Bloch Wall again appears and we have two forms of energies,

Magnetism and Gravity

99

Power Supply

Power Supp

South Pole of Magnet

North Pole of Magnet

Line of Zero Measurable Magnetism

LARGE TWO POLE ELECTROMAGNET

ELECTROMAGNETS

POWER SUPPLY

FRAME TO

100

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System.

each energy then treating or exposing the contents of the test tube

with that particular potential of energy.

Next, you will note that the test tube is positioned vertical to

the poles. As the pole piece electron spins affect a vortex of energy

the force of this energy, the electrons spinning opposite each other,

reacts to provide a pressure and a relieving of pressures in the ver¬

tical plane of effects on and to the contents of the test tube.

This acts to alter the physical weight when sufficient power of

magnetic energy is applied to the sample between the two poles.

This change in weight is in fact a change in the gravity. Many

chemicals, fluids, proteins, not only alter and change their physical

weight, their gravitational weight, but after a short time within

the gap of the poles, act to alter the availability of the enzyme

percentages, not in amount, but in digestive qualities. There is an

increase in digestive results. Too short or too long an exposure de¬

stroys tlie effect. This may well account for the reason many of

these experiments in the past have failed to be reproducible or

failed in this respect from the beginning.

The S pole effects in part are to exert a pressure, while the N

pole effects on the test tube contents are to draw away. Should we

use a test tube of a size such as 8mm we would then find that at

the exact internal center of the test tube a highly focused sub¬

miniature point of that pole’s energies existing. There are many

little-known effects that exist within the vortex of each pole. We

have discussed only a few. When each effect is removed from the

other, they act as forces that may be separated and used for a

direct reason for desired results.

There are many chemicals that show a remarkable weight

change when placed between the poles of the magnet. This is due

in part to their active contents of ferric iron and other magnetic

acceptable materials. However, inert fluids, chemicals and other

materials also show this gravitational change in the overall physical

weight results.

As an example, the NASA space probes provided us with

similar reactions. When the space capsule left the earth’s atmo¬

sphere, the sun’s ray striking the sides of the capsule acted to

supply a force, a pressure, that altered the course through space

on the computed directional path of the space capsule. It was

Magnetism, and Gravitij 101

then necessary to correct for this photo-electromagnetic pressure

effect.

Our findings show that each pole, therefore, applies to what¬

ever it is facing a form of pressure, a spin pressure, that affects

the gravity weight of the sample.

FUNNEL EFFECT OF MAGNETIC ENERGIES

In the most elementary application of primary physics, one

might then compare the field of a pole of a magnet as an inversion

of a tornado, differing only in the fact that in the development of

a tornado, the narrow end almost touches the earth in its downward

movements and the larger vortex is above the earth. The magnets

vortex starts small at the end of the pole and enlarges as it

travels through space. The diameter of the vortex is equal to the

distance from its pole end to the widest part of its extended vortex.

Within the wide diameter vortex of a magnet's pole is a

similar attracting vortex spin. The magnet’s spinning tornado-like

vortex contains two expressions of power and energy. The electron

spin acts as a force of spin direction, and the inner or reverse

vortex located within the center of the electron fields acts to form an

uptake of energy or a downward thrust of energy. The reversal

of the spin effect results in the reversal of the inner vortex reaction.

Like the tornado, the magnetic fields attract any atomic molecular

substances that are within the acceptable range of elements that

would be attracted. This differs from the physical atmosphere

action when we refer the overall reaction to the magnet's vortex

energy to the similar form reaction of the tornado.

One elementary question that is often asked by students is

“Why does a magnet attract and draw to its pole or poles such

things as a straight metal pin?” This in itself may not seem on

the surface to be a very important question, yet it is a forthright

question and would require a modem physicist quite some time

to give the correct answer. We repeat—a correct answer. The

fact that the atoms within a pin or similar material matter are

in part set into motion is not the answer for the attraction; here

we describe the magnetic pull to ferric or other magnetic materials

by either or both poles.

The approaches we have used, and in part explained on page

102 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

97, show us that the fields of either pole have within or without

their formulations of vortex energies the indraft action effect that

is close on inspection to the vortex of a tornado. In the case of

a magnet’s poles, the fact that there are two directional spin

energy vortexes, we believe, opens new doors to a greater under¬

standing of the atomic resultant molecular attraction of these

compositive molecule arrangements in such attractable substances

or matter. In simple language, it is the “funnel effect” of the two

magnetic energies within the combined magnetic field that attracts

materials having an atomic molecular attractive formulation, such

as a simple pin.

A NEW WORLD OF SCIENCE

We could have filled these pages with mathematical formulas

based on the textbook materials presented as the last word on the

laws and principles of magnetism. This would have resulted in a

book very valuable to a few, but the greater part of the scientific

community and students would have been lost in a complex

mathematical and geometric presentation. There have been more

books written on magnetism than possibly any other subject in

existence today. None offers the desired answers to the natural

laws that are offered by actual physical and biological studies

of the effects of magnetism on matter or on the living system itself.

We have found that what can be experienced to aid mankind

in the biological effects of applied voltages and currents can be

affected in a like manner with the properly applied magnetic

pole energies of a magnet or magnets. In bone regrowth, fracture

strengthening and knitting, by the inserting of needles into the

bone, above and below the break and applying a low voltage

D.C. and currents, the break is repaired in less time and is stronger

than natural healing could have accomplished in many cases.

Then by the proper application of the poles of a magnet or magnets

above and below these fractures, a far better healing reaction

can take place and quicker results. The control of pain and an

overall faster better experience of desired results may be seen.

Here, as we have stated before, the science of “Biomagnetics”

needs no internal probing into the living system as does the

UNNATURAL science of Acupuncture. Bone regrowth is also

Magnetism and Gravity 103

possible by the proper application of magnetic fields; this is

opposed to the administering of needles attached to batteries to

afford the same or, in fact, less desired reactions.

The science of biomagnetics offers modem science a totally new

tool to advance all sciences today, unlike the science professor

who told his class there is nothing left to invent so be satisfied

with what we have to work with today. Research means to search

and research those knowns against unknowns, and this science of

biomagnetics is the very basis of all existing sciences known to

man today. Its very fundamentals are based on the laws of the

atom, and the atom is in itself a small magnet. The atom is

the building block of molecules, and the molecules in turn are

the building blocks of all matter—airs, gases, fluids, solids or

intermediate materials. When you enter into the research and

investigation of biomagnetics or magneto magnetic energies you

are entering a new world of science, one that affords a greater

understanding of all natural laws governing energy, its applications

in and to all fields of science.

Should you be presently engaged in magnetic research, we

believe that the new developments and advancements to the knowl¬

edge of magnetics contained in this book will assist you in your

continued efforts, regardless of your interests in the scientific

applications you direct these findings.

ATOMIC ENERGY AND MAGNETISM

We have discussed many aspects of magnetism and the atom

and would now like to offer in evidence these supporting facts.

First, when we apply a strong electrical D.C. voltage and current

to a coil of wire and insert a piece of ferric or magnetically

acceptable material into the core of this coil, we have polarized

the atoms within the steel or magnetic material to align all in

one direction. According to the textbooks we have made a magnet.

However, if by doing this we have in fact aligned all the atoms

within the shells of material that are subjected to this polarization

of the atoms within the material, have we not also by doing this

developed a form of atomic energy? It would appear we have.

Second, it is not necessary to form atomic energy at the high

frequencies in the angstrom spectrum that we normally consider

104 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

and think of as the high to superhigh number of angstroms, as

past X rays and alpha, beta and gamma radiations. Atomic energy

need not be the kind or nature we generally think of as having

to be in these extremely high frequency spectrums. Atomic energy,

as it is defined, is a source of energy that is the result of obtaining

radiations from atoms in an excited state. Magnetism—the magnet’s

two poles, each has a frequency. We have discovered this and

have been researching and studying the spectrum that these

energies fall into for further clues of the effects of these fre¬

quencies in relation to the length, form and size of a magnet.

While there is still much to be learned from these initial dis¬

coveries, we feel that we are nearer to the laws that govern mag¬

netic and magneto energies, basically a form of atomic energy,

yet at this time not considered in this regard. However, there

is no doubt now that magnetic magnet magneto energies are

closely related and are similar in many ways to the higher forms of

atomic energy.

We believe we have established the relationship between mag¬

netism, electricity, gravitation and atomic energy structures, there¬

by demonstrating a basis for the unification of these energies.

MAN BOMBARDED BY ELEMENTS

In the chapters we have presented so far, we have discussed

many effects of magnetism on the living biological systems, and

this encompasses mankind. All living systems are affected by the

earth’s magnetic fields. Earlier we mentioned that man is bom¬

barded by the elements. The importance of this matter deserves a

separate subtitle and further discussion.

All life forms are affected by the outer radiations of energy

of the planets in space. Those nearer to us, like the sun and the

moon, exert great pressures and electromagnetic effects on these

living life forms, as do the resultant gravitational pulls and pres¬

sures that these outer space forms of energy apply to earth and

all material matter. This includes waters, airs, gases, solids and

semisolids. Nothing escapes these unseen forces. Man’s environ¬

mental attitudes are affected as well as his or her physical feelings

of welfare, even to his or her general health patterns.

As an example, in the Soviet Union they have built special

Magnetism and Gravity 105

shielded rooms that resist the effects to a high degree of outer

magnetic influences. They have discovered that, as an example,

persons suffering from nervous and other complaints, including

forms of heart disease and those suffering from mental ailments,

all react adversely to the effects of sunspot storms and changes

in the gravitational effects of the moon. The Soviet scientists then

change the medications because of the effects these outer electro¬

magnetic and gravitational energies have on the sick and the

weak. We should look into this. It is an important matter and

one tliat has been overlooked in many countries far too long.

To better show the ionosphere man lives in and how by its

changes these changes affect the health and well-being of all

living systems, including plants and even microscopic organisms,

we present a number of simple drawings on page 106.

Drawing A shows by the shaded areas the ionosphere. This

is one of a number of such layers that surround the earth at

varied distances from the surface of the earth. They act in part

to filter out harmful rays from space.

As they then fulfill this duty they also act to keep certain ener¬

gies within this protective shield as well as down on the surface of

the earth proper.

These natural ionized layers vary in height, and this varying of

height then acts to influence radio waves and TV signals that on

leaving the earth by the transmitting of these electromagnetic

energies we call radio frequency waves. From the station antennas

they go upward, and when they reach the first ion barrier they are

reflected back to earth. This is, in part, how radio waves, radio

signals and programs are able to reach so many locations within

the scope of the power of the station and the frequencies used.

This is broadcasting electromagnetic wave propagation to the

listeners and viewers who have suitable receiving sets or equip¬

ment.

In the science of probing space, the transmitters are designed

to penetrate these ion shields, the ionosphere and its many layers,

to go out into space for this type of radionic exploring. These

very high frequencies are also returned through the ionosphere

back to large radio telescopes for detection and computerized data

results.

Refer to drawing A on page 106 (top); the shaded area entitled

106

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

rp Direct Wave R

Actual

Magnetism and Gravity 107

“ionized layer” presents a graphic example of the many such ion

shields that surround the earth. Dotted line C is to show that at

extremely high frequencies, space-type exploring transmitters may

penetrate the ionosphere. Dotted line A shows how the conven¬

tional medium frequency range broadcasting stations signals are

reflected and bounced back to earth. The points of the reflection

and return path to earth are shown by the dotted lines. In between

these bouncing and reflecting signal paths are the zones of

reception, in part. This is the wave phenomenon propagation that

explains the radio signal’s ability to reach so many viewers or

listeners.

Further, we note that in drawing A we show the “skip zone.”

This lies between the reflected waves. Reception can be very

poor and signals difficult to receive that are in this zone or skip

area. Yet it has its advantages also, as by the ability to skip, the

range, for example, of a medium short wave (medium high fre¬

quency) radio or TV station can be greatly extended. And stations

that normally cannot be received can then be received when the

ionosphere layers above the earth rises or lowers. These ion

shields act in part like electromagnetic mirrors, reflecting back

to earth signals that otherwise would go into deep space and per¬

haps never return to earth.

Next refer to drawing dotted line D in the same drawing A.

This represents ions energies. They can and do penetrate the

ionosphere shields that protect mankind and all living systems

from the harmful energies of the sun. They deflect energies from

the moon and other planets in outer space. Some energies do get

through to the earth as shown by the dotted fine D.

Drawing B is presented only to show the geometric wave propa¬

gations. Drawing C on page 106 is a simple extension of drawing

A to show the reflective abilities of the ion layer effects.

We can now see that the ionosphere then acts to protect all

living systems from the deadly rays and energies that would

destroy life as we know it if the ionosphere was not acting as a

protective shield around the earth.

Within the earth’s ionosphere, the lower atmospheric ionic

atomosphere, is the density of positive energies, such as the

massive positive charges of positive ions that are present in clouds.

And when storms result, when the clouds become supercharged,

108 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

the positive ions act to make their presence known to man and

living systems by the increased density of positive ions in the

atmosphere. Man’s health and that of animals and also plants are

governed by these atmospheric charges. Mental depressions are

one result of too much positive ion concentration. While in a

negatively charged environment man’s welfare, outlook on life,

mental abilities are upgraded. The negatively charged ions a per¬

son finds so pleasant then act on the living system when diseases,

complaints and weaknesses are affecting his or her health. A better

recovery of many illnesses can be obtained in a negatively charged

environment. The positively charged environment acts to slow

recovery, affects the lowering of mental activities, making it more

difficult to think and function. These two forms of atmospheric

environmental charges or energies reflect the same effects as the

north and south poles of magnetic energies. We have proven this

time and time again in animal and rodent research, including

large animals that have similar blood types to man, the same organs

and life functions. The environment man and all living systems find

themselves in from day to day, hour to hour, is in constant

change. Man is in effect a “Biomagnetic Animal in every respect.”

Chapter Twelve

THE HUMAN BIOMAGNETIC AURA

M an, animals, plants or bacteria all have a separate and

different biomagnetic aura. This was taught long ago by the ancients

and is today subject to scientific proof. Each living thing has the

ability to transmit from its body certain electromagnetic energies.

The ancients believed that persons who were sensitive to these

colormetric energies could see a flow emitting from the body. By

such means they could then identify illnesses from the change in

colors presented by locating diseased or infected nonoperative

organs and parts of the body. This art is still practiced all over the

world.

The scientific community has generally refused to investigate

this phenomenon, placing it in the background as more of a

belief in the supernatural rather than having scientific supportable

fact. However, this may now change as we have scientifically

proven that the living system, regardless of its nature, emits an

electromagnetic energy.

In determining these energies we have used modem electronic

detection and recording methods to measure and record these

emissions from the body of the living system. By the research into

electromagnetic energies and their effects to the living system, we

have also researched those electromagnetic energies that living

systems emit. This should change the old concepts that this pos¬

sibility exceeded the power and laws of nature as the words super¬

stition or supernatural imply.

Our work that follows was placed on display at the Westfield

Conference in London a few months ago and was received with

great interest by the scientific research community, including

medical and applied science researchers. We shall now present

our proof that the human and/or living system can and does emit

electromagnetic energies of many different frequencies.

109

110

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

THE LAYING ON OF HANDS

Many scientific men and women in research today have dis¬

credited the possibilities of any scientific proof, overall effect or

reaction of the ancient and recorded healing approach, “The Lay¬

ing on of Hands.”

It is our opinion, based on scientific findings, that this science

will prove to be a valuable contribution to mankind.

Within the text materials to follow we shall show the recorded

electromagnetic energies on the area of the body of man. These

recordings also apply to the body of woman. We will also show

the potential power and force that is present in the palms of both

hands and fingers. The human body is a vast complex of energies

and frequencies. We can compare the palms of the hands in their

application that affords an exchange of natural body energies from

one person to another. We will show by charts in this chapter

the different potential force in each hand should that hand rest

on the body of a person suffering from a pain, fever or complaint.

There would be a proper reaction and a transfer of energies.

Should we wish to become more technical we would say there

is an inter-exchange, a modulation, of both body energies.

It has been shown that when a living system is weakened by

the effects of sickness that the body is weak also in the average

electrical energies at the location of the difficulty that the person

is then experiencing. Should a healthy person apply his correct

palm to that ill person there is an exchange of normal energy to

the lowered energy, and a feeling of well-being is experienced by

the person who is ill. We do not say cure. We do, however, make

this positive statement as to recordable facts. There is a feeling,

a sense of comfort, of well-being, or of relief.

The human study of a mother’s care and attention of her baby

or the child presents to us that inborn inner instinct of caring for

and offering love, devotion, strength and providing the baby or

young child with every possible help with or without the mother’s

knowledge of the “Laying on of Hands.”

It has been of great help in our research to study the care of

the baby or child by the mothers. One of the observations made

was that when the child is sick, ill, or suffering from an ailment,

Ill

The Human Biomagnetic Aura

such as having a slight fever, the mother will rest the back of the

right hand on the child’s forehead. Now, what is happening, and

probably unknown to the mother, is that she is applying the

negative energy, the negative microvoltage that exists on the back

of her right hand, to the fevered forehead. In our years of research

into the human behavior of man and animals, we note this hap¬

pening takes place and the results of this laying on of hands is

one that oilers the baby or child a high degree of comfort. This

has been observed hundreds of times. It has resulted in the same

effect, a calming, soothing reaction to the subject.

Many mothers will apply the palm of their left hand to the

subject’s forehead. There is also at that point a full negative elec¬

trical, or electromagnetic, energy present as the palm of the left

hand is negative opposed to the palm of the right hand that con¬

tains a positive energy potential.

In the presentation of the charts of the outlines of the human

body and its extended members we shall present in this chapter,

the recordable voltages also encompass electromagnetic energies

and a modulation of varied changing frequencies.

Further studies have shown that on recording the human vol¬

tages the back of the head has an external measurable positive

voltage. The mother has shown us that when the baby is weak

she places her right palm under the back of the baby’s head.

This is applying a positive electromagnetic energy to the upper

spine nerve column and the back of the baby’s head which has

a natural positive energy potential or charge.

Here we see that while the mother is not an advanced student

of science she has inborn natural talents and knowledge that rest

in the subconscious mind. These inner and all natural instinctive

reactions will provide the exact and proper energies that flow be¬

tween the mother to the child as the need may be.

Here, for a point of reference, we note that the palm of the

right hand offers a positive energy opposed to the palm of the

left hand that offers a negative energy. Reversing the energy, we

see that the back of the right hand is negative opposed to the

back of the left hand which affords a positive energy. It is of the

utmost importance in furthering the understanding of this natural

and applied energy that we be fully aware of the subject’s own

natural energies. For example, when a bone is broken, wherever

112 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

it may be located, the body’s own natural electrical system then

affords to that exact point of the break a much higher than

normal negative electrical energy. This returns to a normal energy

level only after the bone has reknit and healed. Thus the body

supplies the correct energy as to positive or negative according to

its demand to offer help and assistance to its own part or segment

that is experiencing trouble.

In our research as to the effects of magnetism and its two

separate pole energies to the living system to afford help and

assistance, we discussed the north pole of a magnet supplying a

negative electromagnetic form of energy. This is opposed to the

south pole of a magnet that offers and supplies a positive form

of electromagnetic energy. Again we see that a magnet’s energies

are an all-natural energy form similar to that existing in and

from the human system.

During the association with Dr. Yerkes of the Yerkes Experi¬

mental Research Laboratories, then a division of Yale University,

your senior author noticed the same applications of the hands of

the monkeys, apes, and species of animals in that category, were

applied to their young when sick, weak or ill. This points to the

fact that even these species of animals react similar to the human

mother. Each has a natural built-in instinct of what to do to help

and care for their young.

THE HUMAN AURA

Here we examine the existence of an energy form that surrounds

the human body and exteriors of all living systems.

Research studies released some years ago by the Eastman Kodak

Company are helpful in our presentation. These studies dealt with

the dark red light of special lamps, infrared frequencies, as applied

to the naked body of man.

When the body’s outer exterior was radiated with this almost

invisible frequency photographs were taken in a few minutes with

infrared film in a camera. In the photographs, appearing as black

and gray lines, were the arteries at the surface of the body and

large exterior and interior veins. The further distance from the

heart and lungs that the blood circulated more oxides were formed

113

The Human Biomagnetic Aura

in the blood. This oxide increase was due by the use of the

oxygen taken from the blood by the body’s functions.

Where the body had a poor circulation, the pictures presented

that part as dark gray or black in color. This was due to the

lowering of the body’s temperature at that part of the body. Due

to the lack of heat at that part the infrared film picked up this

difference in temperature on the body’s surface and it was recorded

on the film as dark to black. This weakness in the body system,

shown and analyzed by infrared photography, is evidenced by the

same lack of color, black, sensed by those who see the Human

Aura, as a weakness in the human system.

Certain people have far more sight sensitivities than other

people. The authors do not pretend to understand all of the

factors that assist the extraordinary ability to see the Human Aura.

The same is true about the ability to practice the “Laying on of

Hands” effectively. However, these abilities do exist and it is a

fact supported by scientific experiments and findings.

To further support there is surrounding all living systems forms

of energies that can be recorded as fact and not as theory or

superstition, we submit from our laboratory research the following

findings. We have measured from a fraction of an inch to greater

distances from the surfaces of the body energies that are in a

sense a radiation of electromagnetic energies. This statement is

made in this broad manner as these energies are composed of many

different forms, frequencies, microvoltages and currents. This does

not change the fact that they are present, projected from the

surface of the body at all points. Following the curvature of the

physical body proper, again we see the similar form which those

who state they can see this energy form describe as emitting from

the body. A number of these gifted persons tell us it is possible

to see these energies surrounding the human body, and even see

the energies surrounding any form of living system such as animals

and plants. This they advise can only be done in subdued light.

However, the outline of the energy they describe follows our

basic scientific research measurements and resultant findings that

can be reproduced at any time anywhere under those certain

light subdued conditions and environmental surroundings by the

proper trained person.

114

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

COLORS AND THEIR EFFECTS

Colors are composed of frequencies of energy. Each color as

we see these energies with our eyes differs only by the number of

cycles or vibrations per second each color has or contains.

The Color Red, in actual agriculture research experiments,

acts to promote health, life and energy. This was confirmed in

experiments where small growing potted plants were placed under

these color lights. Red gave life, energy, and a higher degree of

growth and development. Some of these similar experiments were

conducted at the universities in California a short time ago.

The Color Green is the life-controlling color, the reducer, the

arrester. Plants placed under this color acted to present positive

scientific laboratory resultant facts by controlled experiments.

The other colors are moderators of the two colors, Red and

Green. Comparing the colors Red and Green to the forms of

energies as presented by the two separate and different poles of

a magnet, we find that Red is like the S pole energies and Green

is like the N pole energies of the magnet. Positive energy in

whatever form acts to promote life or it can overpromote life

to a point of depression. Green, as the N pole of the magnet, acts

to arrest life in the control of life forms. Here again we see that

all life on this earth of ours responds to the two forms of dissimilar

energy.

In the latter pages of this book we will show where the

positive and negative energies of man are located. We note again

that we can no longer consider or abide with the old, yet current

thinking, that the ancient sciences hold nothing more than super¬

stitions. Far from this line of thinking is the need for further and

extensive additional investigations into the ancient sciences.

MAN’S BIOMAGNETIC MIND

The brain and the mind of man differ in that the brain is a

physical part of the body, this opposed to the mind which is

the active working, thinking, feeling, results of the brain’s functions.

Considering this it is in part the mind that acts as the com¬

puter and the brain the mechanics of that mind or computer.

115

The Human Biomagnetic Aura

Both the mind and the brain are electromagnetic in nature. They

are electrochemically operated. The brain is like a small radio

transmitter, and the mind is the voice that is modulated on the

carrier of the transmitter. Therefore, when we examine both we

can see the results, a thought-controlled small biochemical activated

energy supplied transmitter of conscious thought patterns with

the back-up transmission of the subconscious mind.

We have measured the brain’s output of electromagnetic waves

of energy. The brain has a number of very low frequencies that

are generated within the brain. These low frequencies act to carry

the mind’s thoughts and reactions to the varied parts of the body

of man and animal. The same is true in lower creatures. We find

the frequency number 7 (7 cycles per second) as a good basic

fundamental frequency the brain affords the body that can be

measured and recorded on the surface of the head of man.

Man’s mind can act as a receiver as well as a transmitter of

thought information. The study of thought transfer is under serious

research in a number of countries today. This was prompted in

part by the space age research efforts. In Russia serious research

has been going on for some time concerning the possibility of men

on earth and in space being able to transmit key signals from

one to the other. Both Russian and American space research has

now found this is possible. Therefore, the brain is, in fact, a

transmitter and also a receiver.

The subconscious mind has long been a mystery to man and

to scientists alike. The study of animals and their natural reactions

to dangers, the sense of dangers present yet quite unknown to

man from the lowly mouse to the large species, the results of

the subconscious mind’s ability to override the conscious mind and

so to speak ring an alarm bell within the conscious mind, is very

real in every respect. We find that the subconscious is a higher

frequency mind, one that is not burdened by the work load that is

placed on the mind by the thinking mechanics of man’s brain or

the animal’s brain. This higher mind, this higher analyzing mind,

can sense and feel environmental happenings and be free to analyze

matters, conditions, not only those happening at that time but also

to foresee in time what might happen as a result of the actions

of the personality and reasoning of that person. We base these

projections on what we have observed over many years in the

116

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

study of lower animals to the super reasoning anthropological

species. Man is somewhat less developed in the natural effective

sensitivities the animals show as man’s environmental surroundings

have taken away the inborn development of man’s “Early Warning

Radar” scanning network, so to speak. The animals, however, like

man, are not always in the state of alert. Yet there are certain

animals that operate a 24-hour-a-day early warning system. The

fewer defenses the animal has against its environmental dangers,

generally the greater its ability to sense dangers.

As is the conscious mind, the subconscious mind mind is just as

important to live and survive. To have only a conscious mind

would remove any sense of dangers or detection. There could be

no instinct for the future and probably no inspiration. Certainly, the

subconscious mind plays an all-important part during the life span

of animals and mankind.

PARAPSYCHOLOGICAL-BIOMAGNETIC

INVESTIGATIONS

What part does magnetism, electromagnetics, play in the field

of ESP (extrasensory perception) or the science of parapsychology?

If we examined the term extrasensory perception we will or should

find it incorrect as to its meaning, as all living systems have a

sensory perception. This we have discussed in the last few pages.

The “extra” term then would properly mean the development of

the senses or sensory perceptions that are an inborn quality the

living system possesses.

Can external magnetic energies when applied to the animal or

man act to encourage or depress the mental sensitivities of the

mind and the functions of die brain proper?

Earlier in our book we have shown the effects of the two pole

energies of a magnet on the embryo, the newborn creature, and

during its stages of physical development. Indeed, our findings

indicate that externally applied energies can and will affect the

development of the mental processes of the mind and the brain of

all living systems.

It is with deep regret that we read reports from outstanding

scientific investigators in their books, papers and reports that deal

117

The Human Biomagnetic Aura

with this subject. They discuss the only effect they see from the

placement of a magnet against the head of man or animal is a

sharp flash of light, seen at the edge of the eye on placing and

removing of a magnet’s energies. This report of effects is also

to be found in current space agency research reports. This can

be a very dangerous as well as incorrect conclusion.

In research experiments with small and advanced animals and

man, in the case of willing subjects, we have found that the

magnet’s NORTH POLE ONLY, when applied to the brain, can

and will upgrade the senses of perception.

Perception here is meant as the overall normal inborn senses

of animals and man alike. We find that the north pole, which is

the negative energy as its effects to all biological systems, can and

does possess the ability to pass through the head, the skull of

man and animal, and act on the inner constants of the brain. This

acts to cause a stimulus to the hemisphere of the brain, the

reasoning mind itself. In our studies of this interaction we have

discovered that when this form of energy passes unhindered into

the innermost part of the brain it acts to arrest certain pressures

on the brain by a reduction of inner and outer electromagnetic

reactions to the brain. This relieves biological biochemical pressures

as such from the thinking and reasoning mind. This then as a

result has shown the ability of the man to think, reason more

clearly and has aided in the learning and capacity of the mind

and the storing of that learning in the mechanical segments of the

brain. This statement may appear as being unsupported by other

scientific findings. However, our investigations have been exten¬

sive in exploring the brain’s and the mind’s reaction to magnetic

fields. There should be prompt serious investigations as to what

can be done in this field in the future. Many governmental agencies

of a number of countries, including the United States, have been

for some time upgrading their research and investigations into

ESP and parapsychology as a means of interspace communica¬

tions and also into other phases of use in fields of mental telepathic

data transfer.

When we consider that the mind, the brain as such, does send

and receive intelligences by electromagnetic energy waves, we can

see how important this science of magnetics is to man. Your authors

118

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

predict that the future use of magnetic energy applications will

result in a new and better understanding of “parapsychology” in

science.

WARNING

There is within this science certain dangers that must be

considered. In the use of S pole positive energies in brain research

we have discovered that these energies can overstimulate the brain

and the mind. Also, there may be hidden defects resting in the

physical or mental aspects of the brain and mind, such as growths

or types of abnormal behavior, which the S pole energies will

encourage in unnatural development. The S pole energies in brain

research should only be used by properly trained persons learned

in this new science of magnetism.

At this time we also emphasize the dangers existing on improper

use of either the S pole or N pole energies. Without the proper

understanding and training necessary, the use of either energy on

a living system can be dangerous and ultimately fatal. Students,

physicists, medical men, scientists, should exercise caution in their

work and the same warning here, and more so, is given to laymen

who read this book.

Your authors have taken years deciding whether or not to

release the findings in this book. The decision to release these

findings was not an easy decision. Science can only progress by

its development and application of new discoveries. Men may use

or misuse science. The nature of man still resides in his behavior

to his environment. For all the danger in this new science of

magnetism your authors must look to all the good the science holds

for humanity. Your authors five with their decision as humanity

must live—or die—by its decisions.

MEASURING THE VOLTAGES OF THE LIVING

SYSTEM AND THEIR LOCATIONS ON THE BODY

On page 119 we present an outline of the human body. For

our purposes this outline and subsequent outlines in this chapter

will also be a reference to the female body and to animal bodies.

Our laboratory experiments and findings have shown that the

The Human Biomagnetic Aura

RIGHT SIDE

of BODY

P = POSITIVE

N = NEGATIVE

+ = POSITIVE

- = NEGATIVE

LEFT SIDE

of BODY

The right palm

is positive.

Kb

The left palm

is negative.

These electrometer

measurements show

measuring from one

side of the body to

the other. Example,

from the right hand

to the left hand; the

other readings were

made in the exact

same way.

120

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

surface voltages indicated give interesting research information

in determining where to place magnetic energies near the human

body. Other uses of these recorded voltages in research may be

apparent, though we confine our discussion here to our expressed

subject.

As we have stated earlier you do not just put a magnet to the

body and expect the desired results. If magnets are used for

desired results they need to be of special construction, shape and

size. The strength of the energies varies for particular results. As

important as the strength in gauss units is also the length of time

necessary for the specific application.

Studying the charts in this chapter the sign + or P means

we have a positive voltage at that location on the body. The sign

— or N means the negative voltage at that location on the body.

For example, we show the electrical potential in the palm of the

right hand as positive while the electrical potential in the palm

of the left hand is negative. We measured the voltage of each

by attaching two electrodes, one to each hand. The positive and

negative polarity is then registered on the dials of our sensitive

electrometer instrument developed for this research.

BIOMAGNETIC BIOLOGICAL ELECTRONICS

Referring to the chart presented, our findings indicate that the

extended members of the right side of the body are positive

electrically. This applies to the hands, arms, legs and feet.

In looking at die head, the front of the head is negative and

the back of the head is positive.

It is of importance that you notice that the right hand and arm,

although positive, in respect to the left hand and arm is negative,

carry still another charge at various locations in the bone structure

of the members.

This first chart shows lines crossing the body in a straight

direction with an arrow at each end, for example, from hand to

hand. This is to show the measurement of voltage was taken

from hand to hand, from the one to the other in relation to each.

In the second drawing of this chapter, on page 121, the right

hand, arm and side are indicated by the large letter R and the

left hand, arm and side by the large letter L. This drawing shows

The Human Biomagnetic Aura

122

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

Back of the Body

BASE OF HEAD IS A STRONG

POSITIVE - ENERGY POINT.

r

LEFT SIDE L

. -

Front of left shoulder is .H

negative while the back of

the left shoulder is positive,

The left kidney is negative

in respect to the right

kidney.

:ero rwyC’olfs

■K RIGHT SIDE.

N T\1 ^The front of tire

right shoulder is

positive and the

back of the shoulder

is negative.

Right kidney is

positive in re¬

spect to the left

kidney.

BASE OF SPINE IS A STRONG

POSITIVE ENERGY POINT.

The spinal column is com¬

posed and does contain

fluids which are alkaline in

nature. We see that the

spinal column is negative in

respect to the back base of

the head and the very base

ending of the spine itself.

In chemistry, alkalines arc

negative substances and

acids are positive electrical

substances. This then con¬

forms with the laws of

chemistry and biochemistry.

Attaching the positive

electrode to base of spine,

the above microvolts were

read up the spine from the

base of the spine. Two

zero or no voltage points

were discovered; see

these marked ZERO. The

spine is all negative with

respect to the very base

of the spine and the base

of the head, which are posi¬

tive electrically In nature.

123

The Human Biomagnetic Aura

the average voltages taken at various locations of the body. In

the male figure as shown measurements are given from the crotch

of the body a little below the end of the urethral tube ending,

and the readings are also shown for the male testicles. In the

female body a negative reading is slightly above the urethral

opening. On the chart as shown for the male the testicles are

positive, the urethral tube is negative, thus the negative plate of

the electrometer was placed at this lowest point.

As we go upward on the chart we see the various voltages

that were recorded, the highest frontal voltage measured at the

point near the heart, shown as 70 positive microvolts on the

diagram.

These voltages can change from one person to another. This

is very important when considering the many applications from

these discoveries. What we show are average voltages from testing

a number of subjects.

On the charts we see that the spine is negative and that the

exact center of the front of the body is positive energy. The

frontal crotch is negative with the back base of the spine, which

is positive.

Looking at other relations we see that the frontal central

length of the body is positive with respect to the frontal lower

crotch. The forehead or front of the head is negative with respect

to the back of the head, which is positive electrically. The readings

are all direct contact surface voltages, checked time and time again

for polarities at specific locations.

Of interest are two locations where no noticeable voltage read¬

ings were found. One is shown above the rectum near the base

of the spine, and the other location is shown at the connecting

link between the skull and the backbone proper, the beginning of

the full-length spinal column.

These two zero points on the human body are the electrical

equators of the body’s electrical and electromagnetic divisions.

At these points is where the polarity of the voltages change from

one form to another form. For example, we have a positive

voltage, then a lessening of the voltage to a no noticeable recorded

voltage before a swing over to negative voltage. Notice the

similarity to the straight bar magnet and the presentation of the

broken “8” discussed earlier. This recording of the two areas with

124 Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

no noticeable voltage, polarity, or energy is also similar to the

magnetic equator of the earth as explained earlier in this book.

For example, the S pole magnetic energy of the earth goes into a

Bloch Wall effect at the near center of the earth, where it changes

to a negative or N pole energy that continues on to enter the

N pole of the earth. Similarly, there is a two-way highway system

with the N pole magnetic energy traveling to a magnetic equator,

where it changes to a S pole energy and continues on the highway

to the S pole.

Notice from the charts that two or more polarities can exist on

one part of the body, such as the leg, hand and arm. The inside

surface palm can be positive while the outer side of the hand

is negative. Also, the fingertips’ inside surfaces can be positive

while the side that support the fingernails is negative. This system

also applies to the arm, as both right and left arms and hands

can be negative while the inside surface of hands and arms are

positive.

The drawing on page 125 shows the location on the frontal

human system where no noticeable voltage was registered. As

stated earlier there are also two similar locations on the back view

of the human system, one near the base of the spine and the

other between the skull and backbone.

You will notice that these are separate voltage systems in each

hand, arm, leg, even into the surface bone of the leg proper. This

separate voltage system continues throughout the body system.

For example, the more alkaline, such as the bones of the spinal

column, a negative potential; while the more acid, such as the

flesh, a positive potential.

We can generally summarize by saying the front of the body

is negative and the back of the body is positive. These two natural

and living electrical potentials, positive and negative, enter into

magnetic equators at two locations on the front and back parts

of the body, continuing out of these magnetic equators in their

changed potential, a repeat process over and over throughout

the human system. In this brief outline of the bioelectrical poten¬

tials found to exist in man there is evidence of human electrical

and electromagnetic aura. The entire body of man is a field of

continuing flowing electromagnetic energy, and the space emis¬

sions of this form of energy have been recorded.

126

Magnetism and Its Effects on the Living System

THE PRESENT AND FUTURE RESEARCH INTO

VERY HIGH GAUSS MAGNETIC ENERGIES (VHG)

While past and present research has shown little positive effects

of VHG (Very High Gauss) energies to many biological systems,

we should remember that the old concepts rule the science and

its applications. We define old concepts to encompass the research

understanding that both fields of a magnet are the same or

homogeneous.

While it has been necessary for us to research the effects of

the two pole effects using low to medium ranges of applied magnetic

energies, we believe that with the basic understanding presented

for the first time in this book concerning the two pole effects, with

a greater understanding to overall effects, further significant dis¬

coveries will be made in the use of VHG (Very High Gauss).

Magnetic energy “Magneto Magnetic Energies” in the range

of from 20,000 gauss to 100,000 gauss to much higher levels will

effect total arrests of many diseases, such as all forms of cancers

and other difficult complaints. We base this statement on new

findings. These findings we believe will soon be released as fact

within scientific releases coming from American and Puerto Rican

researchers. Also, in this field of research will be releases of great

international attention made by the Soviet Union’s scientific re¬

search community. In this book we have stressed the importances

of low to medium energies for the use of establishing the new con¬

cepts and laws of applied magneto magnetic physics necessary to

understand this new and valuable science.

CONCLUSION

Man and all life forms are subject to a changing magnetic

environment, and man should be educated to this fact at an early

age. At the present this is not in the realm of primary instruction.

Efforts should be forthcoming by responsible educators in the

foreseeable future to bring about this better understanding of

man and his environment. Nature plays the all-important role in

man’s existence on earth, yet we choose to manufacture artificial

effects that override the balanced plans of nature.

127

The Human Biomagnetic Aura

Magnetism is a natural science. It is also a natural energy.

This energy is generated by the nature of things, basically the

atom itself. The earth is in fact a giant magnet. The energies

provided affect all living systems on the face of the earth.

When we act to harness this form of natural energy, in making

magnets that are artificial in that sense, we are duplicating nature’s

work by developing nature’s natural energies. Then we discover

that the basic and far-reaching approach in many fields, if not all

fields of science, including the science of the medical arts, can

be improved remarkably, by turning away from chemical reactions

to a more normal and far more efficient use of controlled and

proper directed magneto magnetic energies. Therefore, we hope

this book will challenge the youth and the physicists of today,

the scientific community as exploring scientists, to explore this

new and exciting scientific probe, with a new outlook and new

approach for a better world, the world of tomorrow.

ABOUT THE AUTHORS

ALBERT ROY DAVIS

Scientist, bom in Halifax, Nova Scotia, Canada, June 18, 1915;

parents, William Albert and Annie Agnes (Robinson), England.

Came to United States, 1936; naturalized American citizen, 1936;

attended University of Florida, 1936. Owner and manager, Albert

Roy Davis Research Laboratory, Green Cove Springs, Florida,

1938—;writer technical papers radiological fallout, AEC, 1945-

1946. Associate professor, biomagnetic sciences, Naihati (West

Bengal, India) Research Center, 1964-1968; consultant to the

board, 1965—; recipient of a number of honorary doctor degrees

in science; Director of the Albert Roy Davis Aerial Phenomena

Research Association and the United Science Federation, Green

Cove Springs, Florida. Served under contract Air Transport Com¬

mand, USAAF, Port Security division USCG, 1942-1943. Acknowl¬

edgment for work introducing biomagnetic sciences to scientists

and doctors in India by Prime Minister, 1971; acknowledgment by

industrialists in Japan on work to serve humanity through science

of biomagnetics; author of many technical and scientific manu¬

scripts on applied sciences, also over 370 general science courses

used and adapted for grade schools, high schools and colleges in

the United States and many nations of the world. Inventor.

Developed methods of stimulation in milk products by application

of magnetic fields and energies, 1965; methods in ecology studies

to control nitrogen in water by biomagnetic molecular magnetic

stimulation, 1969. Address: 520 Magnolia Avenue, Green Cove

Springs, Florida 32043.

WALTER C. RAWLS, JR.

Scientist, lawyer, business executive, bom in Richmond, Vir¬

ginia, September 13, 1928; parents, Walter Cecil and Ella Town-

129

130

About the Authors

send (Freeman). University of Missouri, degree in arts and sciences,

1951; Juris Doctor degree, Washington University, St. Louis, Mis¬

souri, 1958; appointed by the Chancellor to permanent advisory

committee, Washington University Law School, 1970—; Member

of the Jacksonville, Florida, and American Bar Associations, Inter¬

national Bar Association, International Platform Association, Arbi¬

trator for American Arbitration Association; Community Leader

of America award, 1968; Trial Attorney, 1958-1969; Director,

Georgia-Florida Oil & Refining Company, Inc., F.I.D. International,

BioMagnetics International, Inc., Funds, Inc., Canvi-Andor, Inter¬

national Film Corporation, British West Indies Capital Reserves

Ltd.; author of manuscripts in history and applied sciences. Award¬

ed Honorary degree, doctor of science, 1973; acknowledged in na¬

tional and international directories; married, Sheila (Kirsch), Don¬

caster, Yorkshire, England; sons, Richard Wayne and James David.

Address: 6962 Almours Drive, Jacksonville, Florida 32217.

GENERAL RESEARCH REFERENCES

H. S. Alexander, Amer. J. Med. Electr., 1 (1962), 181

M. F. Bamothy, ed., Biological Effects of Magnetic Fields (2

vols.; New York: Plenum Press, 1964 and 1969)

G. M. Baule and R. McFee, Am. Heart J., 55 (1963), 95

D. Cohen, Science, 175 (1972), 664

D. Cohen, E. A. Edelsack and J. Zimmerman, Appl. Phys.

Letters, 16 (1970), 278

R. Damadian, Science, 171 (1971), 1151

A. d’Arsonval, C. R. Soc. Biol., 48 (1896), 450

L. D. Davis, K. Pappajohn and I. Plavnieks, “Bibliography of

the Biological Effects of Magnetic Fields,” Fed. Proc., 21, Sup. 12,

Part II (Sept. 1962), 1-38

J. W. Devine and J. W. Devine, Jr., Surgery, 33 (1963), 4

J. Driller, W. Casarella, T. Asch and S. K. Hilal, Med. 6- Biol.

Eng., 8 (1970), 15

M. Eibschutz, et al.. Nature, 216 (1967), 1138

M. Equen, Magnetic Removal of Foreign Bodies (Springfield,

Ill.: Charles C. Thomas, 1957)

M. W. Freeman, A. Arrot and J. H. L. Watson, “Magnetism in

Medicine,” /. Appl. Phys., 31S (1960), 404

E. H. Frei, et al., J. Appl. Phys. 39 (1968), 999

D. B. Geselowitz, Biophys. J., 7 (1967), 1

W. Gilbert, “De Magnete Magneticisque Corporibus et de

Mango Tellure,” Physiol. Nova (London: 1960)

W. Haberditzl, Nature, 213 (1967), 72

S. K. Hilal, W. J. Michelsen and J. Driller, /. Appl. Phys. 40

(1969), 1046

G. C. Kimball, J. Bad. (1938), 109

A. Kolin, “Evolution of Electromagnetic Blood Flowmeter,”

UCLA Forum Med. Sci. (1970)

131

132 General Research References

A. Kolin, Physics Today, 21 (Nov. 1968), 39

M. M. Labes, Nature, 211 (1966), 968

F. T. Luborsky, B. J. Drummond and A. Q. Penta, Amer. J.

Roentgen, 92 (1964), 1021

S. Maeshima, “Magnetic Healing Apparatus,” U.S. Patent No.

1,421,516 (July 1922)

J. Magrou and P. Manigualt, C. R. Acad. Sci., 233 (1946), 8

R. McFee and G. M. Baule, Proc. IEEE 60 (1972), 290

P. H. Meyers, F. Cronic and C. M. Nice, Jr., Amer. J. Roentgen,

90 (1963), 1068

T. Nakamura, et al., J. Appl. Phys. 42 (1971), 1320

P. W. Neurath, Biological Effects of Magnetic Fields (New

York: Plenum Press, 1969)

L. A. Pirusian, et al., UN. Akad. Science SSSR Biol., S4 (1970),

535

A. S. Presman, Electromagnetic Fields and Life (New York:

Plenum Press, 1970)

A. Rosen, G. T. Inouye and A. L. Morse, J. Appl. Phys-, 42

(1971), 3682

Symposium on Application of Magnetism in Bioengineering,

IEEE Trans. Magnetics, MAG-6 (1970), 307-375

J. A. Taren and T. O. Babrielsen, Science, 168 (1970), 138